Telecommunication Systems Division

Strata® CIX™
Programming Manual
Volume 1
(Software Release 5.2
Title Page for Network eManager®)

November 2011
Publication Information
Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc., Telecommunication Systems Division, reserves the right,
without prior notice, to revise this information publication for any reason, including, but not limited to,
utilization of new advances in the state of technical arts or to simply change the design of this document.
Further, Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc., Telecommunication Systems Division, also reserves
the right, without prior notice, to make such changes in equipment design or components as engineering or
manufacturing methods may warrant.
CIX-MA -PRGM1-VK-E

Version K5, November, 2011

Our mission to publish accurate, complete and user accessible documentation. At the time of printing the
information in this document was as accurate and current as was reasonably possible. However, in the
time required to print and distribute this manual additions, corrections or other changes may have been
made. To view the latest version of this or other documents please refer to the Toshiba FYI web site.
Toshiba America Information Systems shall not be liable for any commercial losses, loss of revenues or
profits, loss of goodwill, inconvenience, or exemplary, special, incidental, indirect or consequential
damages whatsoever, or claims of third parties, regardless of the form of any claim that may result from the
use of this document.
THE SPECIFICATIONS AND INFORMATION PROVIDED HEREIN ARE FOR INFORMATIONAL
PURPOSES ONLY AND ARE NOT A WARRANTY OF ACTUAL PERFORMANCE, WHETHER
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED. THE SPECIFICATIONS AND INFORMATION ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE
WITHOUT NOTICE. ACTUAL PERFORMANCE MAY VARY BASED ON INDIVIDUAL
CONFIGURATIONS, USE OF COLLATERAL EQUIPMENT, OR OTHER FACTORS.
© Copyright 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011
This document is copyrighted by Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc. with all rights reserved. Under
the copyright laws, this document cannot be reproduced in any form or by any means—graphic, electronic,
or mechanical, including recording, taping, photocopying, without prior written permission of Toshiba. No
patent liability is assumed, however, with respect to the use of the information contained herein.
Trademarks
Toshiba, Strata, SmartMedia, SD (Secure Digital) and CIX are trademarks of Toshiba Corporation.
Stratagy, SoftIPT, eManager, My Phone Manager are trademarks of Toshiba America Information Systems,
Inc.
Windows, Windows XP, Windows Vista, .NET, and Microsoft are registered trademarks of Microsoft.
Trend Micro and PC-cillin are registered trademarks of Trend Micro Inc.
BeyondVoice and SIPconnect are registered trademarks of CBeyond.
IPtimize VoIP Connect is a service mark of IPtimize Inc.
Norton Anti-Virus is a registered trademark of Symantec Corp.
McAfee and Virusscan are registered trademarks of McAfee, Inc.
DESI is a registered trademark of DESI Telephone Labels, Inc.
Adobe and Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe corporation.
Trademarks, registered trademarks, and service marks are the property of their respective owners.
Strata CIX40, CIX100, CIX200, CIX670 and CIX1200 General End User
Information
The Strata CIX 40, CIX100, CIX200, CIX670 or CIX1200 Digital Business Telephone System is registered
in accordance with the provisions of Part 68 of the Federal Communications Commission’s Rules and
Regulations.
FCC Requirements
Means of Connection: The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) has established rules which
permit the Strata CIX system to be connected directly to the telephone network. Connection points are
provided by the telephone company—connections for this type of customer-provided equipment will not be
provided on coin lines. Connections to party lines are subject to state tariffs.
Incidence of Harm: If the system is malfunctioning, it may also be disrupting the telephone network. The
system should be disconnected until the problem can be determined and repaired. If this is not done, the
telephone company may temporarily disconnect service. If possible, they will notify you in advance, but, if
advance notice is not practical, you will be notified as soon as possible. You will be informed of your right to
file a complaint with the FCC.
Service or Repair: For service or repair, contact your local Toshiba telecommunications distributor. To
obtain the nearest Toshiba telecommunications distributor in your area, log onto www.toshiba.com/taistsd/
pages/support_dealerlocator.html or call (800) 222-5805 and ask for a Toshiba Telecom Dealer.
Telephone Network Compatibility: The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment,
operations, and procedures. If such changes affect the compatibility or use of the Strata CIX40, CIX100,
CIX200, CIX670 or CIX1200 system, the telephone company will notify you in advance to give you an
opportunity to maintain uninterrupted service.
Notification of Telephone Company: Before connecting a Strata CIX system to the telephone network, the
telephone company may request the following:
1.Your telephone number.
2.FCC and ACTA registration
• Strata CIX 40, CIX100, CIX200, CIX670 or CIX1200 may be configured as a Key, Hybrid or PBX
telephone system. The appropriate configuration for your system is dependent upon your operation of
the system.
• If the operation of your system is only manual selection of outgoing lines, it may be registered as a Key
telephone system.
• If your operation requires automatic selection of outgoing lines, such as dial access, Least Cost
Routing, Pooled Line Buttons, etc., the system must be registered as a Hybrid telephone system. In
addition to the above, certain features (tie Lines, Off-premises Stations, etc.) may also require Hybrid
telephone system registration in some areas.
• If you are unsure of your type of operation and/or the appropriate FCC registration number, contact
your local Toshiba telecommunications distributor for assistance.

FCC Registration Numbers

PBX Hybrid KEY
SYSTEM
Fully-protected PBXs Fully-protected multifunction systems Fully-protected telephone key systems
CIX40 N/A CJ6MF03BDTCHS403 N/A
CIX100 CJ6MUL-35931-PF-E CJ6MUL-35930-MF-E CJ6MUL-35929-KF-E
CIX200 CJ6PF03BDTCHS192 CJ6MF03BDTCHS192 CJ6KD03BDTCHS192
CIX670 CJ6MUL-35931-PF-E CJ6MUL-35930-MF-E CJ6MUL-35929-KF-E
CIX1200 CJ6MUL-35931-PF-E CJ6MUL-35930-MF-E CJ6MUL-35929-KF-E
 • Ringer equivalence number: 0.3B. The ringer equivalence number (REN) is useful to determine the
quantity of devices which you may connect to your telephone line and still have all of those devices
ring when your number is called. In most areas, but not all, the sum of the RENs of all devices
connected to one line should not exceed five (5.0B). To be certain of the number of devices you may
connect to your line, as determined by the REN, you should contact your local telephone company to
ascertain the maximum REN for your calling area.
3.Network connection information USOC jack required: RJ11/14C,
RJ21/2E/2F/2G/2HX/RJ49C (see Network Requirements in this document). Items 2, 3 and 4 are also
indicated on the equipment label.
4.Authorized Network Parts: 02LS2/GS2, 02RV2-T/O, OL13C/B, T11/12/31/32M, 04DU9-BN/DN/1SN,
02IS5, 04DU9-BN/DN/1SN1ZN
Radio Frequency Interference
Warning: This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and
used in accordance with the manufacturer’s instruction manual, may cause interference to radio
communications. It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device
pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection
against such interference when operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a
residential area is likely to cause interference, in which case, the user, at his/her own expense, will be
required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference.
Underwriters Laboratory
This system is listed with Underwriters Laboratory (UL). Secondary protection is required on any wiring
from any telephone that exits the building or is subject to lightning or other electrical surges, and on DID,
OPS, and Tie lines. (Additional information is provided in this manual.)

Important Notice — Music-On-Hold

In accordance with U.S. Copyright Law, a license may be required from the American Society of
Composers, Authors and Publishers, or other similar organization, if radio or TV broadcasts are
transmitted through the music-on-hold feature of this telecommunication system. Toshiba America
Information Systems, Inc., strongly recommends not using radio or television broadcasts and hereby
disclaims any liability arising out of the failure to obtain such a license.
CP01, Issue 8, Part I Section 14.1
Notice: The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that the
equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective, operational and safety requirements as
prescribed in the appropriate Terminal Equipment Technical Requirements document(s). The Department
does not guarantee the Equipment will operate to the user’s satisfaction.
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities
of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable
method of connection. The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not
prevent degradation of service in some situations.
Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by the supplier. Any
repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the
telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment.
Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility,
telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution
may be particularly important in rural areas.

CAUTION! Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should
contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate.

CP01, Issue 8, Part I Section 14.2

Ringer Equivalence Notice: The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device
provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone
interface. The terminal on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the
requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the Devices does not exceed 5.
Hearing Aid Compatibility Notice: The FCC has established rules that require all installed business
telephones be hearing aid compatible. This rule applies to all telephones regardless of the date of
manufacture or installation. There are severe financial penalties which may be levied on the end-user for
non-compliance.
 TOSHIBA AMERICA INFORMATION SYSTEMS, INC. (“TAIS”)
Telecommunication Systems Division License Agreement
IMPORTANT: THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT (“AGREEMENT”) IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU (“YOU”) AND TAIS. CAREFULLY READ THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT. USE OF ANY
SOFTWARE OR ANY RELATED INFORMATION (COLLECTIVELY, “SOFTWARE”) INSTALLED ON OR SHIPPED WITH A TAIS DIGITAL SOLUTIONS PRODUCT OR OTHERWISE MADE AVAILABLE TO
YOU BY TAIS IN WHATEVER FORM OR MEDIA, WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THESE TERMS, UNLESS SEPARATE TERMS ARE PROVIDED BY THE SOFTWARE SUPPLIER. IF
YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT, DO NOT INSTALL, COPY OR USE THE SOFTWARE AND PROMPTLY RETURN IT TO THE LOCATION FROM WHICH YOU
OBTAINED IT IN ACCORDANCE WITH APPLICABLE RETURN POLICIES. EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE AUTHORIZED IN WRITING BY TAIS, THIS SOFTWARE IS LICENSED FOR DISTRIBUTION
THROUGH TAIS AUTHORIZED CHANNELS ONLY TO END-USERS PURSUANT TO THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT.

1. License Grant. The Software is not sold; it is licensed upon payment of applicable charges. TAIS grants to you a personal, non-transferable and non-exclusive right to use the copy of the Software
provided under this License Agreement. You agree you will not copy the Software except as necessary to use it on one TAIS system at a time at one location. Modifying, translating, renting, copying,
distributing, printing, sublicensing, transferring or assigning all or part of the Software, or any rights granted hereunder, to any other persons and removing any proprietary notices, labels or marks from the
Software is strictly prohibited except as permitted by applicable law; you agree violation of such restrictions will cause irreparable harm to TAIS and provide grounds for injunctive relief, without notice,
against you or any other person in possession of the Software. You and any other person whose possession of the software violates this License Agreement shall promptly surrender possession of the
Software to TAIS, upon demand. Furthermore, you hereby agree not to create derivative works based on the Software. TAIS reserves the right to terminate this license and to immediately repossess the
software in the event that you or any other person violates this License Agreement. Execution of the Software for any additional capabilities require a valid run-time license.

2. Intellectual Property. You acknowledge that no title to the intellectual property in the Software is transferred to you. You further acknowledge that title and full ownership rights to the Software will remain
the exclusive property of TAIS and/or its suppliers, and you will not acquire any rights to the Software, except the license expressly set forth above. You will not remove or change any proprietary notices
contained in or on the Software. The Software is protected under US patent, copyright, trade secret, and/or other proprietary laws, as well as international treaties. Any transfer, use, or copying of the
software in violation of the License Agreement constitutes copyright infringement. You are hereby on notice that any transfer, use, or copying of the Software in violation of this License Agreement constitutes
a willful infringement of copyright.

3. No Reverse Engineering. You agree that you will not attempt, and if you employ employees or engage contractors, you will use your best efforts to prevent your employees and contractors from
attempting to reverse compile, reverse engineer, modify, translate or disassemble the Software in whole or in part. Any failure to comply with the above or any other terms and conditions contained herein
will result in the automatic termination of this license and the reversion of the rights granted hereunder back to TAIS.

4. Limited Warranty. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, TAIS AND ITS SUPPLIERS
DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THE SOFTWARE, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE WARRANTY OF NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD
PARTY RIGHTS, THE WARRANTY OF YEAR 2000 COMPLIANCE, AND THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS
TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE IS WITH YOU. NEITHER TAIS NOR ITS SUPPLIERS WARRANT THAT THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET
YOUR REQUIREMENTS OR THAT THE OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE. HOWEVER, TAIS WARRANTS THAT ANY MEDIA ON WHICH THE
SOFTWARE IS FURNISHED IS FREE FROM DEFECTS IN MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP UNDER NORMAL USE FOR A PERIOD OF NINETY (90) DAYS FROM THE DATE OF DELIVERY TO
YOU.

5. Limitation Of Liability. TAIS’ ENTIRE LIABILITY AND YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY UNDER THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT SHALL BE AT TAIS’ OPTION REPLACEMENT OF THE MEDIA OR
REFUND OF THE PRICE PAID. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL TAIS OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL,
SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES FOR PERSONAL INJURY, LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION/DATA, OR ANY
OTHER PECUNIARY LOSS OF ANY KIND ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF TAIS OR ITS SUPPLIER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGES. IN NO EVENT SHALL TAIS OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM BY A THIRD PARTY.

6. State/Jurisdiction Laws. SOME STATES/JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY MAY LAST, OR
THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO SUCH LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY GIVES YOU
SPECIFIC RIGHTS AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS WHICH VARY FROM STATE/JURISDICTION TO STATE/JURISDICTION.

7. Export Laws. This License Agreement involves products and/or technical data that may be controlled under the United States Export Administration Regulations and may be subject to the approval of the
United States Department of Commerce prior to export. Any export, directly or indirectly, in contravention of the United States Export Administration Regulations, or any other applicable law, regulation or
order, is prohibited.

8. Governing Law. This License Agreement will be governed by the laws of the State of California, United States of America, excluding its conflict of law provisions.

9. United States Government Restricted Rights. The Software is provided with Restricted Rights. The Software and other materials provided hereunder constitute Commercial Computer Software and
Software Documentation and Technical Data related to Commercial Items. Consistent with F.A.R. 12.211 and 12.212 they are licensed to the U.S. Government under, and the U.S. Government’s rights
therein are restricted pursuant to, the vendor’s commercial license.

10. Severability. If any provision of this License Agreement shall be held to be invalid, illegal or unenforceable, the validity, legality and enforceability of the remaining provisions hereof shall not in any way
be affected or impaired.

11. No Waiver. No waiver of any breach of any provision of this License Agreement shall constitute a waiver of any prior, concurrent or subsequent breach of the same or any other provisions hereof, and no
waiver shall be effective unless made in writing and signed by an authorized representative of the waiving party.

12. Supplier Software. The Software may include certain software provided by TAIS suppliers. In such event, you agree that such supplier may be designated by TAIS as a third party beneficiary of TAIS with
rights to enforce the Agreement with respect to supplier’s software.

YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT AND THAT YOU UNDERSTAND ITS PROVISIONS. YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ITS TERMS AND CONDITIONS. YOU
FURTHER AGREE THAT THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT CONTAINS THE COMPLETE AND EXCLUSIVE AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU AND TAIS AND SUPERSEDES ANY PROPOSAL OR PRIOR
AGREEMENT, ORAL OR WRITTEN, OR ANY OTHER COMMUNICATION RELATING TO THE SUBJECT MATTER OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT.

Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc.

Telecommunication Systems Division 5932
9740 Irvine Boulevard
Irvine, California 92618-1697
United States of America

DSD 020905
T

Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc.

Telecommunication Systems Division
End-User Limited Warranty
Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc., (“TAIS”) warrants that this telephone equipment manufactured by
Toshiba (except for fuses, lamps, and other consumables) will, upon delivery by TAIS or an authorized TAIS
dealer to a retail customer in new condition, be free from defects in material and workmanship for twenty-four (24)
months after delivery, except as otherwise provided by TAIS in the TAIS warranty accompanying the products or
posted on TAIS’s website. Products which are not manufactured by Toshiba but are purchased from Toshiba, will
be subject to the warranty provisions provided by the equipment manufacturer, unless TAIS notifies the end-user
of any additional warranty provisions in writing.

This warranty is void (a) if the equipment is used under other than normal use and maintenance conditions, (b) if
the equipment is modified or altered, unless the modification or alteration is expressly authorized by TAIS, (c) if
the equipment is subject to abuse, neglect, lightning, electrical fault, or accident, (d) if the equipment is repaired
by someone other than TAIS or an authorized TAIS dealer, (e) if the equipment’s serial number is defaced or miss-
ing, or (f) if the equipment is installed or used in combination or in assembly with products not supplied by TAIS
and which are not compatible or are of inferior quality, design, or performance.

The sole obligation of TAIS or Toshiba Corporation under this warranty, or under any other legal obligation with
respect to the equipment, is the repair or replacement of such defective or missing parts as are causing the malfunc-
tion by TAIS or its authorized dealer with new or refurbished parts (at their option). If TAIS or one of its autho-
rized dealers does not replace or repair such parts, the retail customer’s sole remedy will be a refund of the price
charged by TAIS to its dealers for such parts as are proven to be defective, and which are returned to TAIS through
one of its authorized dealers within the warranty period and no later than thirty (30) days after such malfunction,
whichever first occurs.

Under no circumstances will the retail customer or any user or dealer or other person be entitled to any direct,
special, indirect, consequential, or exemplary damages, for breach of contract, tort, or otherwise. Under no circum-
stances will any such person be entitled to any sum greater than the purchase price paid for the item of equipment
that is malfunctioning.

To obtain service under this warranty, the retail customer must bring the malfunction of the machine to the atten-
tion of one of TAIS’ authorized dealers within the applicable warranty period and no later than thirty (30) days
after such malfunction, whichever first occurs. Failure to bring the malfunction to the attention of an authorized
TAIS dealer within the prescribed time results in the customer being not entitled to warranty service.

THERE ARE NO OTHER WARRANTIES FROM EITHER TOSHIBA AMERICA INFORMATION SYSTEMS,
INC., OR TOSHIBA CORPORATION WHICH EXTEND BEYOND THE FACE OF THIS WARRANTY. ALL
OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND FITNESS FOR USE, ARE EXCLUDED.
No TAIS dealer and no person other than an officer of TAIS may extend or modify this warranty. No such modifi-
cation or extension is effective unless it is in writing and signed by the Vice President and General Manager, Tele-
communication Systems Division.
WARRANTIES FOR NON-TOSHIBA BRANDED THIRD
PARTY PRODUCTS
A valuable element of Toshiba’s product strategy is to offer our customers a complete product portfolio.
To provide this value to our customers at the most optimal prices, we offer both Toshiba-branded and
third-party manufactured products that support our Toshiba Strata CIX product portfolio. Similar to
other resellers of software, hardware and peripherals, these third-party manufactured products carry
warranties independent of our Toshiba limited warranty provided with our Toshiba-branded products.
Customers should note that third-party manufacturer warranties vary from product to product and are
covered by the warranties provided through the original manufacturer and passed on intact to the
purchaser by Toshiba. Customers should consult their product documentation for third-party warranty
information specific to third-party products. More information may also be available in some cases
from the manufacturer’s public website.

While Toshiba offers a wide selection of software, hardware and peripheral products, we do not
specifically test or guarantee that the third-party products we offer work under every configuration with
any or all of the various models of the Toshiba Strata CIX. Toshiba does not endorse, warrant nor
assume any liability in connection with such third party products or services. If you have questions
about compatibility, we recommend and encourage you to contact the third-party software, hardware
and peripheral product manufacturer directly.
Contents

Chapter 1 – Strata CIX Programming Guidelines

Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up .......................................................................................1-1
Auto-programming Limitations .....................................................................................................1-2
Station and BIOU Auto-programming ..........................................................................................1-2
Station PDN Auto-programming ..................................................................................................1-3
CO Line Auto-programming .........................................................................................................1-3
MIPU / GIPU / LIPU / BIPU Settings ...........................................................................................1-6
CIX Processor NIC Interface TCP/IP Auto-programming ............................................................1-9
Default Feature Access Codes ..................................................................................................1-11
Plan Your System Requirements ..............................................................................................1-11
Program the CIX for First Time ..................................................................................................1-11
Review Program Flow ...............................................................................................................1-13
Identify Program Sequences .....................................................................................................1-14

Chapter 2 – Network eManager®

Installation Procedures ................................................................................................................2-2
System Requirements .................................................................................................................2-7
Network eManager Main Menu ..........................................................................................................2-9
Password Policy ........................................................................................................................2-10
Equipment Setup .......................................................................................................................2-12
Add Equipment Window ............................................................................................................2-13
Connect To Multiple CIX Systems .............................................................................................2-13
Connection Mode ......................................................................................................................2-13
Add New Station ........................................................................................................................2-14
MAS Licensing ...........................................................................................................................2-14
Add New Network eManager User ............................................................................................2-14
Network eManager Toolbar Setup Menu ...................................................................................2-15
Application Settings ...................................................................................................................2-15
Navigating The Menus ...............................................................................................................2-15
Features of Network eManager ........................................................................................................2-16
Excel Import ...............................................................................................................................2-16
Strata Synch - Export/Import from Active Directory® Services .................................................2-22
System Requirements for Strata Synch ....................................................................................2-23
Strata CIX Configuration Assumptions ......................................................................................2-23
Example 1 – Single Strata CIX Node ........................................................................................2-24
Example 2 – Multiple Strata CIX Nodes ....................................................................................2-25
Installing and Launching Strata Synch ......................................................................................2-26
Launch Strata Synch and Login to ADS: ...................................................................................2-28
Import User Data to Network eManager ....................................................................................2-37
Ongoing Change .......................................................................................................................2-43
Access Multiple Systems ...........................................................................................................2-45
Back Up Database on Multiple CIX Systems ...................................................................................2-46
CIX Data Backup .......................................................................................................................2-46

Strata CIX Programming Vol. 1 06/10 i

 Update Software on Multiple CIX Systems ......................................................................................2-47
Create Network DNs in Multiple Systems ........................................................................................2-47
Table Views ......................................................................................................................................2-47
Network eManager Data Import/Export Features ............................................................................2-49
Network eManager DID/DNIS Assignments - Import/Export .....................................................2-49
Network eManager Station Directory - Import/Export ................................................................2-53
System Speed Dial Export/Import .............................................................................................2-55
Station Speed Dial Export/Import ..............................................................................................2-56
Network eManager Network Calling Number Upload ................................................................2-60
Connection Entry for Dial-up ............................................................................................................2-62
Help Topics/Context Help ................................................................................................................2-68
About Network eManager ..........................................................................................................2-68
No Response from Device .........................................................................................................2-68
Network eManager DESI Integration / Telephone Keystrip Printing ................................................2-69
Manage Stand-Alone SES Systems ................................................................................................2-70
Network eManager Troubleshooting Check List ..............................................................................2-71
Confirm the Components Services Data: ..................................................................................2-71
Confirm the Internet Information Services Data ........................................................................2-74

Chapter 3 – Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD

License Consideration ........................................................................................................................3-1
License Code Generation, Inquiry and Summary for Dealers and National Accounts .......................3-2
License Inquiry ............................................................................................................................3-6
Open License Summary ..............................................................................................................3-8
MAS License Generation, Inquiry and Summary for Dealers and National Accounts .....................3-10
Transfer License ........................................................................................................................3-14
License Inquiry ..........................................................................................................................3-17
Open License Summary ............................................................................................................3-19
ACD Dongle License ........................................................................................................................3-20
R5 License Generation for CIX100, CIX670 and CIX1200 ........................................................3-25
Strata CIX System Licenses ............................................................................................................3-26
MAS Licenses ..................................................................................................................................3-29
ACD Dongle .....................................................................................................................................3-37
License Display Screen ....................................................................................................................3-50
License Control ..........................................................................................................................3-50

Chapter 4 – System
100 Cabinet Slot PCB Assignments ............................................................................................4-1
Dial Number Plan ...............................................................................................................................4-2
102 Flexible Access Codes .........................................................................................................4-3
Creating New Feature Codes ......................................................................................................4-4
Flexible Numbering Default Settings ...........................................................................................4-4
117 Public Dial Plan Digit Analysis ..............................................................................................4-8
103 Class Of Service ...................................................................................................................4-9
104 System Timer .....................................................................................................................4-12
105 System Data .......................................................................................................................4-15
System Call Forward ........................................................................................................................4-21
500 / 504 System Call Forward Assignment .............................................................................4-21
Copy ..........................................................................................................................................4-22
System Call Forward Table View ..............................................................................................4-23
501 System Speed Dial .............................................................................................................4-23
System Speed Dial Table View .................................................................................................4-24
Day Night Service ............................................................................................................................4-25

ii Strata CIX Programming Vol. 1 06/10

 112 Day/Night Mode Calendar ..................................................................................................4-25
106 Day/Night Mode Day of Week Mapping Assignment ..........................................................4-26
113 Day/Night Mode Daily Schedule .........................................................................................4-27
PAD Values ......................................................................................................................................4-28
PAD Values Interface ................................................................................................................4-28
PAD Table .................................................................................................................................4-29
107 PAD Table Assignment ......................................................................................................4-29
108 PAD Group Assignment .....................................................................................................4-31
114 PAD Conference Assignment .............................................................................................4-32
Miscellaneous System Commands ..................................................................................................4-33
110 Password ............................................................................................................................4-33
109 Music on Hold .....................................................................................................................4-34
I/O Device ..................................................................................................................................4-36
803 Application Port Assignments .............................................................................................4-36
801 Network Jack LAN Device Assignment ..............................................................................4-39
804 BSIS RS-232 Serial Port Setup ..........................................................................................4-41
115 Advisory Messages ............................................................................................................4-42
116 Data Initialize ......................................................................................................................4-43
120 Tenant Assignments ...........................................................................................................4-44

Chapter 5 – Trunks
304, 305 Incoming Line Group ....................................................................................................5-1
304 Incoming Line Group Assignment ........................................................................................5-2
306, 307 Outgoing Line Groups ..................................................................................................5-5
300, 301 Trunk Assignment .........................................................................................................5-7
313 Caller ID ..............................................................................................................................5-11
308 Trunk Timer ........................................................................................................................5-12
310 DIT Assignment ..................................................................................................................5-14
309, 312 Direct Inward Dialing ..................................................................................................5-16
318 DID Intercept Assignments .................................................................................................5-19
Service .............................................................................................................................................5-22
311 DISA Security Code ............................................................................................................5-22
319 Intercept Treatment ............................................................................................................5-23
315 T1 Trunk Card ....................................................................................................................5-24
DID/DNIS Table View ................................................................................................................5-25
ISDN .................................................................................................................................................5-26
317 ISDN BRI Trunk ..................................................................................................................5-26
302, 303 Strata Net (PRI) and Strata Net IP (QSIG) .................................................................5-30
ISDN Call-by-Call ......................................................................................................................5-35
323 CBC Service .......................................................................................................................5-35
324 CBC Time Zones ................................................................................................................5-37
320 PRI B Channels ..................................................................................................................5-37
316 Shared D Channel ..............................................................................................................5-39
Calling Number ..........................................................................................................................5-41
321 Calling Number Identification ..............................................................................................5-41
322 Called Number Table ..........................................................................................................5-42
Trunk DID/DNIS Setup Wizard .........................................................................................................5-43
325 Strata Net Full IP Trunk Assignment ..................................................................................5-47
326 SIP Trunk Assignment ........................................................................................................5-49
327 SIP Trunk Service Kind Assignment ...................................................................................5-50
328 SIP Trunk Service Assignment ...........................................................................................5-55
329 SIP URI Assignment ...........................................................................................................5-56

Strata CIX Programming Vol. 1 06/10 iii

 Chapter 6 – Station
Assignment ........................................................................................................................................6-1
200 Station Data ..........................................................................................................................6-1
204 DKT Parameters .................................................................................................................6-16
214 DSS Console Assignment ..................................................................................................6-25
205 / 213 / 215 Key ...................................................................................................................6-26
Shift and Hist Key Operation .....................................................................................................6-28
208 Timer ..................................................................................................................................6-31
216 Emergency Ringdown Assignment .....................................................................................6-32
206 Phantom DN .......................................................................................................................6-33
209 Hunt Group .........................................................................................................................6-35
218 Station Hunt Assignments ..................................................................................................6-37
Hunt Group Table View .............................................................................................................6-38
502 Paging Group .....................................................................................................................6-39
210 Pickup Group ......................................................................................................................6-41
Multiple Call Group ....................................................................................................................6-42
517, 519 Multiple Call Group Assignment .................................................................................6-44
518 Multiple Call Group Members Assignment .........................................................................6-45
516 Station Speed Dial ..............................................................................................................6-46
ISDN ..........................................................................................................................................6-48
202 ISDN BRI Station ................................................................................................................6-48
217 ISDN Station Data ..............................................................................................................6-52
Setup Wizards ..................................................................................................................................6-54
PDN Range Setup Wizard .........................................................................................................6-54
Multiple DN Assignment Wizard ................................................................................................6-54
VMID Range ..............................................................................................................................6-55
User Setup .................................................................................................................................6-56

Chapter 7 – Attendant
404 Attendant Group Assignment ...............................................................................................7-1
400 Emergency Call Destination Assignment .............................................................................7-3

Chapter 8 – IP Telephone Programming

IP Telephone Setup ...........................................................................................................................8-1
CIX IP Telephone Programming ..................................................................................................8-1
VLAN Setup .......................................................................................................................................8-3
Using the VLAN Wizard ...............................................................................................................8-3
Enable VLAN on the xIPU ...........................................................................................................8-3
CIX IP Telephone Programming Guidelines ......................................................................................8-4
Basic CIX IP Setup ......................................................................................................................8-4
IP Telephone Installation and Network Connection Setup .................................................................8-5
150 System IP Data .....................................................................................................................8-6
151 BIPU Configuration .............................................................................................................8-10
152 Voice Packet Configuration Table Assignment ..................................................................8-11
161 LIPU/MIPU/GIPU Configuration .........................................................................................8-13
250 IP Telephone (Station) Data Assignment ...........................................................................8-17
260 Full IP Station Assignment .................................................................................................8-21
674 Remote Node IPU IP Address Assignment ........................................................................8-29
IP Mobility Programming ..................................................................................................................8-30
Requirements ............................................................................................................................8-30
More IP Telephone DNs than xIPU ports ..................................................................................8-30
Feature Administration/Programming ..............................................................................................8-31
IP Mobility Programming Steps .................................................................................................8-32

iv Strata CIX Programming Vol. 1 06/10

 Compatibility ..............................................................................................................................8-32
xIPU and IPT Program Update ........................................................................................................8-33
FTP Server Information .............................................................................................................8-34
xIPU Program Update ...............................................................................................................8-34
IPT Program Update ..................................................................................................................8-36

Chapter 9 – Services
540, 541 Pilot DN Assignment .....................................................................................................9-1
579 System Voice Mail Data .......................................................................................................9-3
580 Voice Mail Port Data .............................................................................................................9-5
Destination Restriction/Least Cost Routing ........................................................................................9-6
DR Overview ...............................................................................................................................9-6
Destination Restriction Guide Page ...........................................................................................9-10
DR Dialing Setup .......................................................................................................................9-10
DR Digit Table Setup .................................................................................................................9-10
DR Class of Service Setup ........................................................................................................9-11
LCR Overview ..................................................................................................................................9-12
LCR Analysis Process ...............................................................................................................9-12
DR .............................................................................................................................................9-13
Route Analysis ...........................................................................................................................9-13
Time of Day ...............................................................................................................................9-13
Connection ................................................................................................................................9-13
LCR Guide Page .......................................................................................................................9-13
LCR Dialing Setup .....................................................................................................................9-14
LCR Route Plan Setup ..............................................................................................................9-14
LCR Day of Week and Time Zone Setup ..................................................................................9-15
LCR COS and Station Setup .....................................................................................................9-15
LCR/DR ............................................................................................................................................9-16
LCR Assignment ........................................................................................................................9-16
520 LCR Local Route Plan Assignment ....................................................................................9-16
521 LCR Route Plan Digit Analysis Assignment .......................................................................9-17
522 LCR Exception Number Route Plans .................................................................................9-18
Route Define ....................................................................................................................................9-19
524 Route Table to Route Definition Assignment ......................................................................9-19
525 LCR Route Definition Assignment ......................................................................................9-20
526 Modified Digits Table Assignments ....................................................................................9-20
Route Schedule ................................................................................................................................9-21
523 LCR Route Plan Schedule Assignments ............................................................................9-21
528 LCR Public Day of Week Mapping Table ...........................................................................9-22
Public Holidays and LCR Time Zones .............................................................................................9-23
527 LCR Holiday Table .............................................................................................................9-23
529 LCR Route Plan Time Zone Assignment ............................................................................9-23
LCR/DR Screening ...........................................................................................................................9-24
530 DR LCR Screening Table Assignment ...............................................................................9-24
531 DR Screening Table for OLG .............................................................................................9-25
Destination Restriction .....................................................................................................................9-26
532 DRL Table Allow/Deny Definition .......................................................................................9-26
533 DRL Table Assignment .......................................................................................................9-26
534 DRL Exception Table Assignment ......................................................................................9-27
111 DR Level (DRL) ..................................................................................................................9-27
DRL Table View .........................................................................................................................9-27
Centrex/PBX Screening Table View ..........................................................................................9-27
Account Codes .................................................................................................................................9-28
570 Account Code Digit Length .................................................................................................9-29

Strata CIX Programming Vol. 1 06/10 v

 506 Verified Account Codes ......................................................................................................9-30
571 Exception Numbers for Forced Account Codes .................................................................9-30
509 DR Override by System Speed Dial ...................................................................................9-31
510 COS Override Assignment .................................................................................................9-32
656 Node ID Assignment ...........................................................................................................9-33
670 Remote Node Data Assignment .........................................................................................9-34
651 Private Routing Plan Analysis ............................................................................................9-34
Private Route Choice Definition .......................................................................................................9-35
653 Private Route Choice Table Assignment ............................................................................9-35
654 Private Route Definition Table Assignment ........................................................................9-35
655 Private Network Digit Modification Table Assignment ........................................................9-36
Mapping ...........................................................................................................................................9-37
657 Network COS Mapping Table .............................................................................................9-37
658 / 659 / 660 Network DRL/FRL/QPL Mapping Tables ..........................................................9-38
661 Network DN Table Assignment ..........................................................................................9-38
219 Network DSS Notify Data Delete ........................................................................................9-39
Strata Net Over IP ............................................................................................................................9-40
671 IP Address Convert Table ..................................................................................................9-40
672, 673 Node ID Detail Information .........................................................................................9-41
Miscellaneous ..................................................................................................................................9-43
SMDR ...............................................................................................................................................9-43
512 SMDR for System Assignment ...........................................................................................9-43
513 SMDR for ILG Assignment .................................................................................................9-44
514 SMDR for OLG Assignment ...............................................................................................9-45
577 Caller History ......................................................................................................................9-46
650 Behind Centrex Assignment ...............................................................................................9-46
External Devices ..............................................................................................................................9-47
Door Phones ..............................................................................................................................9-47
507, 573 Door Phone Assignment .............................................................................................9-47
576 Door Phone Night Ring Over External Page .....................................................................9-49
508 Door Lock Control Assignment ...........................................................................................9-50
515 View BIOU Control Relay Assignments ..............................................................................9-52
503 Paging Devices Group Assignments ..................................................................................9-53
550 Enhanced 911 Emergency Call Group ...............................................................................9-54

Chapter 10 – Operation
System Setup ...................................................................................................................................10-1
900 CTX/CIX Restart .................................................................................................................10-2
901 CTX/CIX Version And Processor Hardware .......................................................................10-3
915 Regional Selection ..............................................................................................................10-3
Set Time and Date .....................................................................................................................10-4
121 Automatic Day Light Savings Time Change .......................................................................10-4
908 Secure Digital and SmartMedia ..........................................................................................10-5
Remote Program Update ...........................................................................................................10-8
910 Data Backup .......................................................................................................................10-9
916 IP Configuration ................................................................................................................10-10
FTP User Accounts ........................................................................................................................10-11
File Information ..............................................................................................................................10-11
Community Name ..........................................................................................................................10-12
909 MAC Address ...................................................................................................................10-13
License Control ..............................................................................................................................10-14
License Issue ...........................................................................................................................10-14
License Activate ......................................................................................................................10-15
License Information .................................................................................................................10-15

vi Strata CIX Programming Vol. 1 06/10

 Alarm Control .................................................................................................................................10-17
System Alarm Control (Program 919) .....................................................................................10-17
Alarm Control for Slot (Program 920) ......................................................................................10-18
Traffic Measurement ......................................................................................................................10-19
Program 921 Control Setup .....................................................................................................10-19
Program 922 Specified Traffic Reports ...................................................................................10-21
Trap Destinations (IP Trap Setup) .................................................................................................10-22

Chapter 11 – Maintenance
Trace Function .................................................................................................................................11-1
Trace Data .................................................................................................................................11-1
Event Trace Control .........................................................................................................................11-2
903 Start/Stop Trace .................................................................................................................11-3
904 ISDN Trace Location ..........................................................................................................11-3
905 All ISDN Lines Trace Level Selection .................................................................................11-3
906 Change Trace Selection .....................................................................................................11-4
Memory Access Operation ...............................................................................................................11-4
Components .....................................................................................................................................11-4

Chapter 12 – Tools and Profile

Tools ................................................................................................................................................12-1
Download ...................................................................................................................................12-1

Chapter 13 – Telephone Button Programming

Telephone Button Overview .............................................................................................................13-1
Telephone Button Commands ...................................................................................................13-2
Button Programming Procedure ................................................................................................13-3
900 Series Programs .......................................................................................................................13-5
System Initialize .........................................................................................................................13-5
Display Version ..........................................................................................................................13-6
Set Time and Date .....................................................................................................................13-8
ISDN Trace Location ...............................................................................................................13-10
All ISDN Trunk Trace ...............................................................................................................13-11
Event Trace Side Change .......................................................................................................13-11
System Admin Log ..................................................................................................................13-12
Format/Unmount Secure Digital/SmartMedia ..........................................................................13-12
MAC Address (System Serial Number) ...................................................................................13-13
Data Backup ............................................................................................................................13-14
Program Update ......................................................................................................................13-15
Make Busy Control ..................................................................................................................13-16
Regional Selection ...................................................................................................................13-17
IP Configuration .......................................................................................................................13-18

Chapter 14 – Data Backup and Restore

Data Backup and Restore ................................................................................................................14-1
Backup Feature .........................................................................................................................14-1
Restore Feature .........................................................................................................................14-3
System Turn-on and Start-up Time ..................................................................................................14-4
R3.0 and Earlier Data Backup ..........................................................................................................14-4
Backup Progress and Completion Indicators ............................................................................14-4
Restoring Programmed Data ...........................................................................................................14-5
Local Update ....................................................................................................................................14-5
Prerequisites for CIX100, CIX200, CIX670 and CIX1200 Local Update ...................................14-5

Strata CIX Programming Vol. 1 06/10 vii

 CIX Software Update Files ........................................................................................................14-5
CIX Software Identification ........................................................................................................14-6
Strata CIX670 or CIX1200 Local Update ...................................................................................14-9
Remote (Network eManager) Software Update .............................................................................14-12
Update Process .......................................................................................................................14-12
Update from R3 to R5 (or later) SD/SM Cards ...............................................................................14-14
Update from R3 to R5 (or later) Local PC ......................................................................................14-14

Appendix O – Applications Guide

Voice Mail Set Up .............................................................................................................................. A-1
Analog Ports ............................................................................................................................... A-1
Digital Ports ................................................................................................................................ A-2
Telephone Station Ports ............................................................................................................. A-2
Networking Multiple Voice Mail Systems .......................................................................................... A-3
Call Record and Soft Keys ......................................................................................................... A-3
Strata CIX BRI Video Conferencing Programming ........................................................................... A-5
IP Telephone Quality of Service (QoS) Programming ...................................................................... A-6
General QoS Adjustments .......................................................................................................... A-6
Priority Control Adjustments ....................................................................................................... A-7
Networking ........................................................................................................................................ A-8
Strata Net Private Networking .................................................................................................... A-8
QSIG ........................................................................................................................................... A-8
Node ID ...................................................................................................................................... A-8
Network Directory Number ......................................................................................................... A-8
Network Feature Access Code ................................................................................................... A-9
Digit Manipulation ....................................................................................................................... A-9
Traveling Class Mark ................................................................................................................ A-10
Path Replacement .................................................................................................................... A-10
Coordinated Numbering Plan ................................................................................................... A-10
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) ............................................................................. A-11
Centralized Voice Mail .............................................................................................................. A-12
Centralized Attendant ............................................................................................................... A-12
Network Busy Lamp Field (BLF) ..................................................................................................... A-13
Attendant Console BLF ............................................................................................................ A-14
Network DSS/BLF for Digital Telephones ................................................................................. A-15
Network DSS ............................................................................................................................ A-17
Network Feature Content ................................................................................................................ A-19
Strata Net Configuration .................................................................................................................. A-20
Strata Net Programming Overview ................................................................................................. A-20
Strata Net over IP Programming Guidelines ................................................................................... A-21
Example .................................................................................................................................... A-22
IP StrataNet Node Setup ................................................................................................................. A-23

Appendix P – Software and Firmware Updates

IP Telephone, MIPU, GIPU, LIPU and BIPU Firmware Update Procedures ..................................... B-1
Download Firmware Update Files .............................................................................................. B-2
Copy the IP Update Files to Network eManager Folders ........................................................... B-2
Copy the IP Update Files to the SM/SD Media Card .................................................................. B-2
xIPU Update ............................................................................................................................... B-3
IP Telephone Update .................................................................................................................. B-4
xIPU Update ............................................................................................................................... B-7
IP Telephone Update .................................................................................................................. B-7
Update From an FTP Directory on the Network eManager PC .................................................. B-8

Strata CIX Programming Vol. 1 06/10 viii

 IPT20X0 and IPT2008 Update ................................................................................................. B-10

Strata CIX Programming Vol. 1 06/10 ix

This page is intentionally left blank.
Introduction

This manual provides information required to program the Strata® CIX™ business telephone
systems using Toshiba’s Network eManager programming interface and the 900 series Button
Programming.
Important! Whenever the CIX100 is mentioned in this book, it applies to both the CIX100-S and
CIX100, unless specified otherwise. Whenever the CIX is mentioned in this book, it
applies to all CIX40, CIX100, CIX100-S, CIX200, CIX670 and CIX1200 systems,
unless specified otherwise.
Important! Do not downgrade to previous versions of CIX software. Downward compatibility of
CIX database is not supported. Toshiba recommends keeping the current database
for emergency situations. We guarantee upward compatibility of the database so
you can upgrade the system without any problems.

Release 4 and above Processors

The chart below shows the processor PCB required to support the Release 4 and later software
packages.

System: Processor PCB

Required to Support Release 4.x
CIX40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GCTU2A
CIX100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACTU3A
CIX200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LCTU1A, LCTU2A
CIX670 Basic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BCTU2A
CIX670 Expanded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BCTU2A with BEXU2A
CIX1200 Basic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HCTU1
CIX1200 Expanded A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HCTU1 with HEXAU1
CIX1200 Expanded B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HCTU1 with HEXBU1

Note The features described in this document assume that the Strata CIX system has the current
software release installed. At the time of printing, Strata CIX R5.20 and Network eManager
V5.20 are the most current versions.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 05/10 ix

 Organization

Organization
Chapter 1 - Strata CIX Programming Guidelines describes auto-recognition features, order of
programming, and overview of general CIX Programming operation.
Chapter 2 – Network eManager provides general information about the Strata Network
eManager software capabilities. Includes the installation steps needed to install Strata Network
eManager on a PC and establish a connection to the Strata CIX system.
Chapter 3 – Licenses Strata CIX license descriptions and procedures
Chapter 4 – System provides system programming information
Chapter 5 – Station discusses station and station feature programming.
Chapter 6 – Trunks explains trunk programming information including T1, ISDN Basic Rate
Interface (BRI) and Primary Rate Interface (PRI).
Chapter 7 – Attendant describes Attendant Console support and settings available in eManager.
Chapter 8 – IP Telephony Programming describes the programs required to program IP
Telephony features.
Chapter 9 – Services discusses programming of services available to Strata CIX through
eManager.
Chapter 10 – Operation explains system setup options available to eManager users. System
initialization, SmartMedia formatting, system software upgrades and Internet Protocol (IP)
configuration are among the topics discussed.
Chapter 11 – Maintenance provides system and component trace program information.
eManager Configuration and Flash Memory Testing are also described.
Chapter 12 – Tools and Profile discusses Strata CIX Tools and Utilities to help manage your
Strata CIX System more efficiently.
Chapter 13 – Telephone Button Programming discusses the 900 series button programming
interface provided with Strata CIX.
Chapter 14 – Data Backup, Restore and Update provides Strata CIX maintenance procedures
that can be activated from the programming telephone.
Appendix A – Applications Guide for setup and program specific applications such as Voice
Mail, IP Telephony, StrataNet and others
Appendix B – Software and Firmware Updates contains IP Telephone and BIPU Firmware
update procedures.

x Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 05/10

 Conventions

Conventions
Conventions Description
Elaborates specific items or references other information. Within some
Note tables, general notes apply to the entire table and numbered notes
apply to specific items.
Important! Calls attention to important instructions or information.
Advises you that hardware, software applications, or data could be
CAUTION!
damaged if the instructions are not followed closely.
WARNING! Alerts you when the given task could cause personal injury or death.
Represents any Directory Number button, also known as an extension
[DN]
or intercom number.
Represents any Primary Directory Number button (the extension
[PDN]
number for the telephone).
Represents any Secondary appearance of a PDN. A PDN which
[SDN]
appears on another telephone is considered an SDN.
[PhDN] Represents any Phantom Directory Number button (an additional DN).
Shows a multiple PC keyboard or phone button entry. Entries without
spaces between them show a simultaneous entry. Example: Esc+Enter.
Plus (+)
Entries with spaces between them show a sequential entry.
Example: # + 5.
Tilde (~) Means “through.” Example: 350~640 Hz frequency range.
Start > Settings > Denotes a progression of buttons and/or menu options on the screen
Printers you should select.
Grey or blue words within the printed text denote cross-references. In
See Figure 10 the electronic version of this document, cross-references appear in blue
hypertext.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 05/10 xi

 Related Documents/Media

Related Documents/Media
Note Some documents listed here may appear in different versions on the CD-ROM or in print. To
find the most current version, check the version/date in the Publication Information on the
back of the document’s title page.

Installation and Programming

• Strata CIX & MAS Installation and Maintenance Manual
• Strata CIX Programming Manual Volume 1
• Strata CIX Programming Manual Volume 2 – (Stratagy ES Voice Mail Application)
• Strata CIX Programming Manual Volume 3 – (Application Implementation)
• Strata CIX SIP Trunk Configuration Manual
• Telephone Button Programming Manual

User Guides
• Strata CIX IP5000-Series Telephone
• Strata CIX DKT/IPT Telephone
• Strata DP5000-Series Telephone
• My Phone Manager™ User Guide
• Strata CTX DKT3001/2001 Digital Single Line Telephone
• Strata CTX Standard Telephone
• Strata CTX DKT2204-CT/DKT2304-CT Cordless Telephones

Quick Reference Guide

• Strata CIX IP5000-Series Telephone
• Strata CIX DP5000-Series Telephone
• Strata CIX/CTX DKT/IPT Telephone

CD-ROMs
• Strata CIX Application Software and CIX Documentation Library - includes Network
eManager™ software.
• Strata CIX Call Center Solutions Application Software and CIX Documentation

For authorized users, Internet site FYI (http://fyi.tsd.toshiba.com) contains all current Strata CIX
documentation and enables you to view, print and download current publications.

xii Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 05/10

Strata CIX Programming Guidelines 1

Programming
Strata CIX
This chapter discusses Strata CIX programming basics and guides you through initial setup procedures. It
also describes auto-recognition features, order of programming, and overview of general CIX Network
eManager, and Button Programming operations. Programming sequence tables are provided to streamline
your programming tasks.

Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up

Important! All programs and instructions apply to all Strata CIX100, CIX1200 and CIX670 systems,
unless specified otherwise.

The CIX40 has a default database already stored. Refer to the CIX40 Installation Manual
(CIX-IM-CIX40) for details.

This feature reduces the programming time to install Strata CIX systems. The Strata CIX system will
automatically program specific default data in a number of programs based on the PCBs that are installed
in the system before processor initialization. The default data and procedure for auto-programming is
provided in this section.
1. Install all line, station and optional PCBs that should be recognized for auto programming.
2. Power-on the system and initialize auto-programming for the system (Program 900, Level 1).
3. Verify ”Station and BIOU Auto-programming’ on page 1-2.
4. Verify ”Station PDN Auto-programming’ on page 1-3.
5. Verify ”CO Line Auto-programming’ on page 1-3.
6. Verify ”CIX Processor NIC Interface TCP/IP Auto-programming’ on page 1-9.
Note
• The type of PCB, its cabinet and slot position are automatically recognized upon system initialization;
or, when powering the CIX processor for the first time.
• Each installed PCB circuit equipment number is set in numerical order based on the cabinet and slot
position of the PCB.
• Station Primary Directory Numbers (PDN) and CO line numbers are set in numerical order according
to their equipment cabinet/slot positions.
• Other default data, such as the Strata CIX LAN and modem interface IP address, station and line class
of service, outgoing and incoming line groups, etc., are automatically set for the optional hardware
originally installed.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 1-1

 Strata CIX Programming Guidelines
Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up

Auto-programming Limitations
The following are the limitations of Strata CIX auto-programming.
• CTI programs are not programmed automatically.
• Strata CIX cannot configure unique LAN requirements automatically. Strata CIX’s LAN system data,
CIX IP address and Community Name are set to a default.
Note DND is only assigned on 20-button telephones.
• When the system is initialized, it takes a few minutes to recognize the mounted hardware.
• The Primary DN on the first button and DND on the last button are assigned telephone buttons; all other
buttons are not assigned automatically.
• In the Strata CIX100, CIX670 or CIX1200 Slot 0101 must always have a BDKU, ADKU or PDKU. The
BDKU is assigned if no PCB is installed.
• In the Strata CIX200 Slot 0101 must always have an MIPU, LIPU, BDKU or PDKU. An xIPU is assigned
if no PCB is installed, however no stations are assigned. R5 software assigns an MIPU; R4 software
assigns an LIPU.

Station and BIOU Auto-programming

Table 1-1 shows the Station and BIOU PCBs that will be recognized and set in Program 100 during auto-
programming.
Note No special assignments are set for BIOU/LIPU/MIPU/GIPU during auto-programming.

Table 1-1 Auto-Programming for Station and BIOU PCB Recognition (Program 100)

Parameter
PCB Code PCB Name PCB Circuit Type Comments
Setting
000 No PCB or RRCU None or Remote Cabinets
002 RSTU 8 standard telephone Standard telephone - no VM interface
circuits settings
003 PDKU2 8 digital telephone PCM DKT2000 or DKT3000/3200 without
Highway: 8 S-OCA (DKT3000 limitations: DKT2000, 16
character LCD display on DKT3000,
DKT3000/3200 LCD Feature key does not
function, DKT3014 large screen LCD does
not display).
004 Not used Not used
017 BDKU 8 digital telephones 8, 1B circuits DKT2000 or DKT3000/3200 without S-OCA
018 BDKU1+BDKS 16 digital telephones 16, 1B DKT2000 or DKT3000/3200 without S-OCA
circuits
019 BIOU Page/MOH/Relay No functions assigned
interface#1
020 BIOU2 Page/MOH/Relay No functions assigned. Strata CIX100
interface#2 assigns a virtual BIOU2 into a virtual
location, Cabinet 02, Slot 05, to provide
control of the ACTU relay.

1-2 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Strata CIX Programming Guidelines
Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up

Station PDN Auto-programming

When auto programming recognizes installed station PCBs, it assigns PDNs in numerical order as follows:

Programming
Strata CIX
• Auto programming assigns PDNs to station PCB equipment numbers (cabinet, slot, circuit) in
equipment number order. All installed station PCB circuits will be assigned a PDN regardless of the
circuit type, digital (BDKU/BDKS, PDKU) or analog (RSTU). MIPUs, GIPUs and LIPUs are not
assigned PDNs.
• PDN 200 or PDN 2000 (depending on the system size) is assigned to the station circuit having the
lowest equipment number in the system. The PDN is then incremented by one digit and assigned to the
next highest station equipment number and so on. See Table 1-2.
• Program 205 Feature Button Setting – A Primary DN (PDN) is assigned to FB01 on each digital
telephone according to its equipment number (cabinet, slot, circuit) position. DND is assigned to FB20
on 20-button telephones. DND is not assigned on 10- and 14-button telephones.

Table 1-2 Auto-Programming for Station Primary Directory Number

First digit CIX Basic Processor CIX670 Exp Processor/CIX1200

Primary DNs (3-digits) Primary DNs (4-digit)
2 200~299 depending on quantity of station 2000~2571 depending on the quantity of station
PCBs installed PCBs installed
Primary DN (3-digits)
3 300~399 depending on the quantity of
station PCBs installed

CO Line Auto-programming
Table 1-3 shows the CO line PCBs that will be recognized and set in Program 100 during auto-
programming. The default data for CO line Incoming Line Groups (ILG), Outgoing Line Groups (OLG), and
CO line service type is set as shown in Table 1-4.
Important! PCBs must be installed per the rules in the Strata CIX and MAS Installation and
Maintenance Manual.

Table 1-3 Auto-Programming for CO line PCB Recognition (Program 100)

PCB
PCB Name PCB Circuit Type Parameter setting Comments
Code
000 - No PCB or RRCU None or Remote cabinets
001 RCOU, RGLU 4 analog Loop or Direct Incoming Termination (DIT) lines
Ground start lines
005 RCOU+RCOS 8 analog Loop start Direct Incoming Termination (DIT) lines
lines
006 RDDU 4 analog DID lines Direct Inward Dial lines
007 RDTU2 16 or 24 digital T1 PCM Highway: T1 Direct Incoming Termination (DIT)
lines lines
16 or 241

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 1-3

 Strata CIX Programming Guidelines
Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up

Table 1-3 Auto-Programming for CO line PCB Recognition (Program 100) (continued)

PCB
PCB Name PCB Circuit Type Parameter setting Comments
Code
008 RDSU 4 standard Standard Telephone, DKT2000 and
telephone and 4 DKT3000/3200 without S-OCA, DP5xxx
digital Telephone (DKT3000 limitations:
DKT2000, 16 character LCD display on
DKT3000/3200, DKT3000/3200 LCD
Feature key does not function, DKT3014/
3214 large screen LCD does not display)
009 RCIU2+RCIS 4 or 8 Caller ID Caller ID interface for RCOU/RCOS and
interface RGLU analog CLID lines. Note: The
same Prog 100 code (009) is used for
RCIU2 with or without RCIS.
010 RMCU+RCMS 2 or 4 E911 analog CAMA lines Note: The same Program
CAMA lines 100 code (009) used for RCIU2 with or
without RCIS.
011 REMU, BVPU 4 analog Tie lines, 4 Tie lines
VoIP circuits
012 RBSU 2 ISDN BRI (S/T) TEI Type: ISDN BRI CO lines
circuits
two TEIs
013 RBSU+RBSS 4 ISDN BRI (S/T) TEI Type: ISDN BRI CO lines
circuits
two TEIs
014 RPTU 16 or 24 ISDN PRI PCM Highway: ISDN BRI CO lines
channels 16 or 241
015 RBUU 2 ISDN BRI (U) TEI Type: ISDN BRI CO lines
circuits
two TEIs
016 RBUU+RBUS 4 ISDN BRI (U) TEI Type: ISDN BRI CO lines
circuits
two TEIs
1. If the slot next to an installed RDTU or RPTU is vacant, 24 lines or channels will be installed; If the slot next to an installed
RDTU or RPTU is occupied by another PCB, 16 lines or channels will be installed.

Table 1-4 Auto-Programming of Line Groups and Service Types

OLG ILG
CO line type CO Service Type
Prog 306 Prog 304
RCOU/RCOS and RGLU analog Loop 1 1 Direct In Termination (DIT) to the first PDN
and Ground start
(200 or 2000 – see Table 5)
RDDU analog DID 1 2 DID, wink – no default DID numbers
RDTU (T1) 1 3 DID – no default DID numbers
RMCU/RMCS analog CAMA 1 - Direct In Termination (DIT) to the first PDN
(200 or 2000 – see next table)
RBUU/RBUS and RBSU ISDN BRI - set 2 4 DID – no default DID numbers
as CO side

1-4 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Strata CIX Programming Guidelines
Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up

Table 1-4 Auto-Programming of Line Groups and Service Types (continued)

OLG ILG

Programming
CO line type CO Service Type
Prog 306 Prog 304

Strata CIX
ISDN PRI 2 5 DID – no default DID numbers
REMU analog E&M 3 6 Non-Strata Net
1. The line number is assigned to all lines in the numerical order according to the line PCB cabinet placements. Example:
Line number 1 will be on the first circuit of the line PCB placed in the lowest cabinet/slot number.
2. OLG:1 is created even if there is are no analog line PCBs installed.

Table 1-5 Auto-Programming of Miscellaneous Line Parameters

Item Settings
DIT line ringing assignment All of the ringing destinations of DIT lines are the first PDN:
Program 310 PDN 200 for CIX100, CIX200 and Basic Proc CIX670 (1~2 cab), CIX1200 Basic
PDN2000 for Expanded Processor CIX670. (3~7 cabinets), CIX1200 Expanded
DID numbers - not assigned The destination of DID is not assigned. DID numbers and ringing destinations
must be assigned manually from Strata eManager or the programming
Program 309
telephone.
Format setting for DIT (T1) Zero Code Suppress = B8ZS, Frame Format = ESF
Setting for CAMA / E911 The destination of internal notification is the first DN 200 or 2000 in the all
operation mode (Day1, Day2 and Night).
Setting for ISDN BRI CO Common D channel is not assigned. One channel group is assigned to each
BRI PCB installed. The channel group number is assigned to each BRI interface
in the order in which the BRI PCBs are installed. The destination of DID is not
assigned.
Setting for ISDN PRI CO Common D channel is not assigned. One channel group is assigned to each
PRI PCB installed. The channel group number is assigned to each PRI interface
in the order in which the PRI PCBs are installed. The destination of DID is not
assigned.
Setting for E&M Tie lines The node number and the other setting for networking are not assigned
automatically.

The destination of Program 318, No Calling Party Number (CPN) and Out Of Search [for] DID number, is
assigned to the first Primary DN of the system (200 or 2000) in the all system operating modes (Day1,Day
2 and Night).
The DIT line (Ground and Loop) destinations of all trunks which generated automatically are set as the first
PDN 200 or 2000 depending on the system size – see Table 1-4.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 1-5

 Strata CIX Programming Guidelines
Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up

MIPU / GIPU / LIPU / BIPU Settings

Table 1-6 MIPU, GIPU, LIPU, BIPU-M Automatic Settings

Item Description Settings

Card Type Card Type BIPU-M, LIPU, MIPU, GIPU
IP address (xIPU) IP address of xIPU In the order of smallest number of the slot
where xIPU is inserted
192.168.254.200
.201
.202/.......
Private address will be set
Subnet mask (xIPU) Subnet mask of xIPU substrate 255.255.255.0
Default gateway Default gateway of xIPU substrate 0.0.0.0

Table 1-7 IP Terminal Automatic Settings

Item Description Settings

DN Setting DN setting of the terminal Assigned in the order of the lowest slot
accommodated in xIPU number
Accommodated terminal setting Parameter setting of station Station ID = PDN
(Station ID) ID in xIPU
Accommodated terminal setting Parameter setting of IP IP address = 0.0.0.0
(IP Address) address in xIPU
Accommodated terminal setting Parameter setting of MAC MAC addresses = (no data)
(MAC addresses) addresses in xIPU

Table 1-8 System Related Basic Settings

Item Description Settings

QoS control Setting of priority control by Use of Diffserv: Not applicable
Diffserv/IEEE802.1p
Set value of DSField = 0
Use of IEEE802.1p: Not applicable
Priority level: Voice
Station ID Automatic setting of Station ID Not allowed
Terminal authentication setting Application or non-application of Not apply
connection restriction function
using MAC address

1-6 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Strata CIX Programming Guidelines
Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up

BIPU-Q1A Initial Programming

After initializing the CIX System with BIPU for Strata Net over IP, Strata CIX detects the BIPU card for

Programming
Strata Net over IP and basic programming is set automatically.

Strata CIX
Table 1-9 BIPU-Q1A Automatic Settings

Item Description Settings

Card Type Card Type BIPU-Q1A
IP address (BIPU) IP address of BIPU-Q1A In the order of smallest number of the slot
where BIPU is inserted
192.168.254.800 for 1st BIPU
.801 for 2nd BIPU
.802 for 3rd BIPU
Private address will be set
Subnet mask (BIPU) Subnet mask of BIPU-Q1A 255.255.255.0
Default gateway Default gateway of BIPU-Q1A 0.0.0.0

Table 1-10 IP-Trunk Information

Program Description Settings

ILG ILG number 7
Kind of trunk (Analog/ISDN) ISDN
Type of trunk TIE
OLG OLG number 4
Kind of trunk (Analog/ISDN) ISDN
Type of trunk TIE
ISDN trunk CG number 1: 1st BIPU-Q
2: 2nd BIPU-Q
3: 3rd BIPU-Q
Type of protocol IP
ILG 7
OLG 4
Voice coding procedure CODEC (G.711, G.729A) G.711
Index of Voice attribute table (1~256) 1
Parameter of voice attribute - Packet Interval: 20ms
table Type of Jitter buffer: Fixed
Size of Jitter buffer: 1
Max Acceptable Delay: 1
Measure Time: 1000ms
Packet Loss Ratio: 5
Packet Discard Ratio: 5

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 1-7

 Strata CIX Programming Guidelines
Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up

Table 1-11 LIPU Strata Net Automatic Settings

Item Description Settings

Card Type Card Type LIPU
IP address (LIPU) IP address of LIPU In the order of smallest number of the slot
where the LIPU is inserted
192.168.254.200 for 1st LIPU
.201 for 2nd LIPU
.202 for 3rd LIPU
Private address will be set
Subnet mask (LIPU) Subnet mask of LIPU 255.255.255.0
Default gateway Default gateway of LIPU 0.0.0.0

Table 1-12 Strata Net IP-Trunk Information

Run Programs in Sequence from left to right

Trunk Type Assignment

Strata Net Basic 304 306

Node 656 651 653 654 655
Remote node 670
Mapping 657 658 659 660
Network over IP 672 671

Table 1-13 System Information

Item Description Settings

QoS control Priority control by Diffserv. Diffserv: Disable
IEEE802.1p DS Field: 0
IEEE802.1p: Disable
Priority: Voice (6)

1-8 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Strata CIX Programming Guidelines
Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up

CIX Processor NIC Interface TCP/IP Auto-programming

The following are the initial values of the LAN data that is automatically created for the system.

Programming
Strata CIX
• Network TCP/IP. See “916 IP Configuration” on page 10-10.
- IP address – 192.168.254.253
- Sub network master – 255.255.255.0
- Default gateway – 0.0.0.0
- IP routing table – Not used
• SNMP Agent settings
- Community name – communityName
- IP address – 0.0.0.0 (not restricted by the IP address of the access source)
- Privileges – WRITE
- community-id – 1
- User level – Super user
• Trap destination
- Community name – Nothing
- IP address – Nothing
• Modem PPP Server settings
- IP Address – 192.168.255.254 (Strata CIX modem fixed IP address for dial-up connections).

Table 1-14 Public Numbering Plan Analyzed Digit Numbers (Program 117)

Public Numbering Plan Analyzed Number Public Numbering Plan Analyzed Digit Number
1NXX 11
N11 3
NXX 7
N = 2~9 and X = 0~9

Table 1-15 E911 Emergency Call to Outgoing Line Group (Program 550)

Emergency Call Group Number OLG1

1 1

Table 1-16 E911 Emergency Call Destination (Program 400)

System Mode Emergency Call Called Number Index Emergency Call Called Number
DAY1 1 200 or 2000 (the first PDN)
DAY2 1 200 or 2000 (the first PDN)
NIGHT 1 200 or 2000 (the first PDN)
The emergency call destination is set for the first PDN as 200 or 2000 in the all operation mode (DAY1, DAY2
NIGHT).

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 1-9

 Strata CIX Programming Guidelines
Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up

Table 1-17 Program 204 Default Data

In Program 204, all telephones are programmed as 20 buttons.
Table 1-18 Program 102 New Default Data
Feature Code Default Value Function
870 #963 Call monitor log off
Table 1-19 Program 205/213/215 New Default Data
Feature Code Function
870 Call monitor feature button
Table 1-20 Program 313 Default Data
Caller ID Prog 313 Function
field 1 Caller ID receive method nothing/ANI-MCI/ANI-Sprint/CLASS
Caller ID identification notice
field 2 ANI and DNIS/DNIS/DID
contents
Underlined entry is CIX100 and CIX200 default

Table 1-21 Program 100 Default Data

Virtual Slot
PCB Station Line
Equip. Circuits Connection
Code Numbers
Nos. *
0101 8 - Digital telephones (no spkr OCA) 017 200~207
GMAU1A
0102 3 - CO lines, with CLID 028 CO1~CO3
(motherboard)
0103 Not used
01~208 01-GMAU1A
0104 Standard telephone 01~02 026
02~217 02-GSTU1A
0105 4 - Voice mail ports 026 220~223 GVMU1A
0106 Not used
0107 8 - Digital telephones 017 209~216
GCDU1A
0108 3 - CO lines with CLID 028 CO4~CO6
Relay Contact
0205 Virtual BIOU 020 GCTU1A
Page, MOH
*Slot codes are set during system initialization and cannot be changed.

1-10 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Strata CIX Programming Guidelines
Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up

Default Feature Access Codes

Refer to ”102 Flexible Access Codes’ on page 4-3.

Programming
Strata CIX
Note For DKT and IP telephone, assign only the PDN. Do not program any other Flexible Buttons or
features in the phones. Strata CIX recognition and setup is automatic for these telephones.

Plan Your System Requirements

Plan your Strata CIX system requirements in detail before beginning your installation. The following are
some areas to consider:
• Flexible Numbering Plan (102) – Planning your Flexible Numbering requirements is essential to a
smooth installation. Trunk group access and station range requirements are especially important areas
of consideration.
• COS (103) – Determine the Class of Service (COS) requirements for your station and trunk groups.
There are up to 32 possible COS plans.
• DRL (111) – Define up to 16 Destination Restriction Level (DRL) assignments.
Important! Destination Restriction is an expanded feature of what has traditionally been known as Toll
Restriction. Toll Restriction is only one facet of Strata CIX’s Destination Restriction feature.
Refer to Destination Restriction in this manual when programming Toll Restriction
requirements.
• FRL and QPL (506) – Define up to 16 Facilities Restriction Level (FRL) and Queuing Priority Level
(QPL) assignments.

Program the CIX for First Time

Follow these steps to program the CIX for the first time. Following this initial setup procedure enables you
to perform a Strata CIX setup with common System and Station default assignments. Toshiba
recommends adherence to these procedures for initial setup. Refer to the CIX40 Installation and
Maintenance Manual (CIX-IM-CIX40-Vx) for the CIX40 default database and start-up procedures.
1. Card Assignments (100) – Choose System > Card Assignment. It is not necessary to physically install
PCBs prior to programming the Strata CIX.
If you physically install your PCBs prior to initial setup, Strata Network eManager automatically
recognizes PDKU, BDKU/BDKS, RSTU, RCOU/RCOS and RGLU PCBs and assigns default stations
and trunks automatically. All other PCBs are assigned manually. See ”100 Cabinet Slot PCB
Assignments’ on page 4-1 for more details.
2. ILG Assignment (304) – Choose Trunk > ILG to assign Incoming Line Groups (ILG). See ”304, 305
Incoming Line Group’ on page 6-1 for more details. ILGs enable line groupings of shared Class of
Service features for incoming call handling.
3. OLG Assignment (306) – Choose Trunk > OLG to assign Outgoing Line Groups (OLG). See ”306, 307
Outgoing Line Groups’ on page 6-5 for more details.
4. Trunk Assignment (300) – Choose Trunk > Trunk Assignments and click the Basic tab. Set up your
trunks in the following order (see ”300, 301 Trunk Assignment’ on page 6-7 for more details):
- Loop Start Trunks
- Ground Start Trunks
- T1 Trunks
- Tie lines
- FX lines
- PRI lines
- BRI lines

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 1-11

 Strata CIX Programming Guidelines
Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up

5. Station Assignment (200) – Choose Station >Station Assignments > Basic tab. Set up your stations in
the following order (see ”Assignment’ on page 5-1 for more details):
- DKT Stations
- DP Stations
- IP Stations
- Standard Stations
- Voice Mail (VM) Ports
- Attendant Positions
- Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Pilot DNs
- Door Phones
6. Create Station Links – Create the following groups wherever applicable and set stations to link as
necessary.
- Hunt Groups using Programs 209 and 218
- Paging Groups using Program 502
- Call Pickup Groups using Program 210
- Park Orbits using Program 102
- Paging Devices using Program 503
7. Backup Data – Choose Maintenance > CIX Data Backup. Make sure the SmartMedia card is properly
formatted (see ”Restoring Data from SM/SD’ on page 10-2) prior to running backup. See ”910 Data
Backup’ on page 10-9 for details.
8. Continue programming Strata CIX details.

1-12 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Strata CIX Programming Guidelines
Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up

Review Program Flow

The basic program flow needed to set up the Strata CIX is shown below. The figure displays the most

Programming
Strata CIX
critical programs in the left column and migrates right to optional programs. Also, programming flows from
specific (left) to general (right).

Card Assignment
(Program 100)
LS Trunks
GS Trunks Admin
T1 Trunks
Tie Trunks
Create ILGs FX Trunks
(Program 304) PRI Trunks
BRI Trunks Services
SIP Trunks

Create OLGs IP Stations

(Program 306) SIP Stations LCR / TR
DKT Stations
STD Stations
VM Ports
Attd Positions
Recommended* Pilot DNs (ACD)
System Program
Planning the following Door Phones
before proceeding: BRI Stations
Flexible Numbering Plan
(Program 102)
Trunk Group Access Plan
Station Range Plan Hunt Group
Create COS Plan (up to 32) Paging Group
(Program 103) Call P.U. Group
Park Orbits
Create DRL (up to 16)
(Program 111, 532 - 533) Paging Devices

Define FRL and QPL

meanings (up to 16)

* Planning these details in advance

enables Strata setup to proceed smoothly.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 1-13

 Strata CIX Programming Guidelines
Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up

Identify Program Sequences

Use the following tables to quickly identify the programs needed to fulfill your setup requirements. See the
Index to correlate program numbers and their functions.

Station Setup
Use the following table to quickly access the programs needed to set up station requirements.

Station
Assignment Run Programs in Sequence from left to right
Type
SLT DN 100 200
IP PDN 100 150 260
DKT PDN 100 200 204 208 205
DP PhDN 205 206
DADM 204 213
DDSS 214 215
Attd 100 200 204 208
Ext 100 200 208
VM 100 200 204 206 209 218 579 580
ISDN Ext 100 202 217
Pilot DN 540
Station Hunting 209 218
Call Pickup Groups 210
Emergency Ringdown 216
Paging Groups 502
Station Speed Dial 516

Trunk Setup – Analog

Use the following table to quickly access the programs needed to set up analog trunk requirements.

Trunk Type Assignment Run Programs in Sequence from left to right

Basic 100 304 306 300
Ring 310
LS/GS
Timer 308
DISA 310
Basic 100 304 306 300
Tie line Timer 308
DISA 310

1-14 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Strata CIX Programming Guidelines
Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up

Trunk Type Assignment Run Programs in Sequence from left to right

Programming
Strata CIX
Basic 100 304 306 300
Ring 309
Timer 308
DID
DISA 309
DNIS/ANI 313
Intercept 318 319

Trunk Setup – T1
Use the following table to quickly access the programs needed to set up T1 trunk requirements.

Trunk Type Assignment Run Programs in Sequence from left to right

Basic 100 304 306 300
Data 315
LS/GS Ring 310
Timer 308
DISA 310
Basic 100 304 306 300
Data 315
Tie line
Timer 308
DISA 310
Basic 100 304 306 300
Data 315
Ring 309
DID Timer 308
DISA 309
DNIS/ANI 313
Intercept 318 319

Trunk Setup – ISDN PRI

Use the following table to quickly access the programs needed to set up ISDN PRI trunk requirements.

Trunk Type Assignment Run Programs in Sequence from left to right

Basic 100 304 306 302 320 105
Ring 309
DISA 309
DID
DNIS/ANI 309
Intercept 318 319
CNIS 321 322

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 1-15

 Strata CIX Programming Guidelines
Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up

Trunk Type Assignment Run Programs in Sequence from left to right

Tie line Basic 100 304 306 302 320 105
Ring 309
Timer 308
Shared D-Channel 100 304 306 302 320 316
1 1 2
CBC 100 304 306 302 320 3233 324
Notes
1. Each CBC Group may require one ILG and one OLG.
2. Do not assign ILG/OLG using this program.
3. Assign ILG and OLG using Program 323.

Trunk Setup – ISDN PRI - Strata Net

Use the following table to quickly access the programs needed to set up ISDN PRI trunk requirements.

Trunk Type Assignment Run Programs in Sequence from left to right

Basic 100 304 306 302 120
Node 656 651 653 654 655
Strata Net Remote Node 670
Mapping 657 658 659 660
Network DN 318 319

SIP Trunking

Trunk Type Assignment Run Programs in Sequence from left to right

Basic 100 304 306 326
SIP Trunk Service 327 328 329
MIPU/GIPU 161

Miscellaneous
Use the following table to quickly access the programs needed to set up other Strata CIX features.

Feature Run Programs in Sequence from left to right

Account-Codes 570 571 103 506 306
Alarm Notification Utilities>Operations>Trap IP Setup
Analog Station with CLID
100 200
Support
Automatic Busy Redial (ABR) 103 208 104

1-16 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Strata CIX Programming Guidelines
Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up

Feature Run Programs in Sequence from left to right

Programming
Strata CIX
Automatic Call Back (ACB) 104
Automatic Camp-On 304
Auto-Release of CO 308
Background-Music (BGM) 102 103 109
Call Forwarding 103 200 217
Call History 204 205
Call Park Orbit 104 102
Call Pick Up 210 103 200 205 102
Call Xfer W/ Camp-On 103
Centralize SMDR 803 801
COS-CO 304 306
COS-Station 200 202
Credit-Card Calling 105 111 306
Day/Night service 500 106 112 113 103 105
Destination Restriction 200 202 306 650 530 531 532 533 534
Dial Directory 204
Digital PAD 107 114
Direct Inward Dialing 309 318 304
Direct Inward Termination 304 310
DISA 311
Do not Disturb (DND) 103 204 205 102
Door Lock Control 104 204 508 205
Door Phones 102 507 573
DR Override by System's Speed
105
Dial
DTMF Back Tone 204
DTMF DP Compatible 104
DTMF Signal Time 579 104
200
E911 105 217 550 104 306
202
Emergency Ring-Down 216
Executive Override 103 105
External Ringing Repeat 300 204
Flash 308 205 102 103
Flexible Numbering 102
Group Paging 502 503 102
Identification Services 309 318 579
Least-Cost-Routing (LCR) 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 528 529 103
Line Group 304 305 306 307 317 302 323 300
Message-Waiting Light 204 102 579
Music-on-Hold 102 105 109 309 310

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 1-17

 Strata CIX Programming Guidelines
Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up

Feature Run Programs in Sequence from left to right

Network Call – Incoming 102 656
Network Call – Outgoing 102 651 653 654 655
Off-Hook Camp-on 104 200 217
Out-Going calls 200 217 104
Relay Services 515
Ringing-Transfer 105
SMDI 200 202 579 580
SMDR 512 513 514 803 801 804
Station CO Line Access 204
System Call-Forward 200 217 104 500 504
Tandem Connection 103 104 300
Tone-First/Voice-First 204 206
Traffic Measurement and Report 921 922
Travelling COS 105 200 510
Uniform CAll Distribution 103 209 218 219 205
VLAN Tagging Advanced Configuration>IP-Telephony>IPT VLAN Setup
Voice-Mail Interface
See ”Telephone Station Ports’ on 100 200 209 218 579 580 803 804 309 318
page A-2

1-18 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

Network eManager® 2

Network eManager®
The Strata CIX systems are programmed using Network eManager. It is recommended you check FYI to ensure
you have the latest version.

Network eManager is designed to reduce the time needed to manage multiple CIX equipment sites and improves
system installation through such capabilities as the “Smart Checker” installation process and the Active Directory
Services export/import feature.

Situations when an administrator needs to configure multiple CIX systems as a group include:

• Multiple CIX systems in a Strata NET configuration.

• Setting up several CIX systems at different sites through a LAN at the same time.
• Several sites, at different geographical locations, each with its own CIX, all managed centrally over a
WAN.
Note Your version of Network eManager may be different from the version in these screens. However,
the installation procedure is the same for all versions of Network eManager version 5.20A06 and
later.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 2-1

 Network eManager®

Installation Procedures
Download the new latest version of Network eManager from FYI and run the Network eManager install file
to begin the InstallShield as shown below.

1. Run NetworkeManager .exe install file.

2. Select Install Now

3. The system will continue to check other prerequisites.

2-2 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Network eManager®

4. If the user has a previous version of Network eManager installed and performs an upgrade, either this
window is displayed or the Migration screen below.

Network eManager®
Migration Screen

5. Select Create New Database in either screen to install SQL database:

6. After the SQL database completion, the installer starts the Network eManager installation:

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 2-3

 Network eManager®

2-4 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Network eManager®

Network eManager®

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 2-5

 Network eManager®

2-6 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Network eManager®

Network eManager®
At the end of the installation process, click Finish to restart the PC. Once the PC is restarted, verify that
you are able to login to Network eManager and, if necessary, reconnect to the Windows domain.

System Requirements
A PC or server must meet the minimum requirements listed below.
• 1 GHz 32-bit (x86) or 64-bit (x64) processor
• Windows® XP Professional SP2 (See Important! below) or above, Windows Vista Business Edition,
Windows 2003 Server or Windows 2000 Professional
• Memory and available hard disk space requirements
Operating System Windows XP Professional Windows Vista Business
Windows 2003 Server
Memory Required 512 MB (min), 1 GB (recommended) 1 GB (min), 2 GB (recommended)
Available Hard Disk 512 MB (min), 1 GB (recommended) 1 GB (min), 2 GB (recommended)
Space
• CD or DVD-ROM drive
• 10/100BaseT Network Interface Card
• Internet Explorer 6.00 or later
• Microsoft Add-On Components:
• IIS, Management and Monitoring Tools, .NET Framework 2.0 or above.
Note The Windows operating system (as appropriate) CD-ROM must be available if any of the above
are not already installed.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 2-7

 Network eManager®

Note The Network eManager Help file is compatible with Adobe® Reader® 5.0 and later, except
versions 7.0.6, 7.0.7 and 7.0.8.

Important!
• If the system is running Windows XP Professional with SP2, the firewall that is automatically included
and enabled in Windows XP Professional - SP2 prevents login to Network eManager. When running
Windows XP Professional with SP2 you should turn off the firewall or follow the firewall configuration
guides in the MAS Installation section.
• The pop-up blocker in all Windows applications, anti-virus, and other applications must also be turned
off.

Anti-Virus Software
When a system has access to the internet anti-virus protection is recommended.

2-8 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Network eManager®
Network eManager Main Menu

Network eManager Main Menu

When a user logs into Network eManager the main menu appears. The main menu includes the following menu
icons:

• Equipment Setup — This new location is where the CIX system sites are built. The Equipment Setup
allows the technician to add new equipment or add equipment to an existing site, update equipment
and delete equipment.
• Connect to Equipment — This new option allows the user to select one or multiple CIX systems.

Network eManager®
• MAS Licensing — This new MAS Licensing utility is similar to the previous eManager utility Add New
User — This is where individual Network eManager user IDs can be built with one of four permission
levels.
• CIX Help – This feature allows the technician to view the online version of this manual, Programming
Manual, Vol 1
• Voice Mail Help - This selection allows the technician to view the Programming Manual, Vol 2, Stratagy
ES Voice Mail Application.
.

There is also a menu bar in the top right corner of the screen. This menu has four Menu Headings.
• Home - Returns to the main menu screen.
• Clients
– Client Equipment Setup - This is the same as selecting the Equipment Setup Icon
– Connect to Client Equipment - This is the same as selecting the Connect to Equipment icon
– Connect to Client SES Only - Allows you to connect to just SES system without connecting to
Strata CIX system.
• Connected Equipment - Shows the system(s) to which NeM is connected. Only available when the
NeM is connected to one or more systems.
• Application Settings

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 2-9

 Network eManager®
Network eManager Main Menu

– Choose another Theme

– Account Setup
• Add New User - Available only to the Administrator
• Change Password - A user can change his own password, the Administrator can change any
user’s password - Passwords can be up 32 alphanumeric and some special characters (!, @, #,
%, $, &)
• Change User Level - Available only to the Administrator - the User level can be changed
• Reset Password - Available only to the Administrator - The Administrator can change a user’s
password
• Change Password Policy - Available only to the Administrator - Refer to “Password Policy” on
Page 2-10.
• Delete User - Available only to the Administrator - The Administrator can delete a user
– Restriction
• Restrict User Access
• Update User Restriction
• Remove User Restriction

Password Policy
Using the password policy setting, the Administrator can either disable or enable the password security scheme for
Network eManager. By default, the Password Policy is set for disable. In disable mode, Network eManager
functions as described above. The passwords never expires and can be up to 32 characters in length. If this
function is enabled, then all security policy criteria is enabled.

When Password Policy is enabled the system will require the users to change any passwords that do not meet the
policy.

Password Complexity
Password complexity allows for more granular control of the password security features. Password Policy can only
be set by the Administrator. Password Policy effects all users. If password complexity is enabled passwords must
meet the following:

• Password cannot match the user login name

• Password must have at least the minimum number of characters

2-10 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Network eManager®
Network eManager Main Menu

• Password is case sensitive

• Password history criteria must be met

Force Password Change

The force password change criteria allows the network administrator to force all Network eManager users to
change their password the next time they log in.

Days After Password Expires

Network eManager®
The password will expire in this many days. The range is 1 to 365 days.

Days to Remind Password Will Expire

The number of days, before the password will expire, the Network eManager will begin to remind logged in users to
change the password. The range is 1 to 365 days.

Days After Password Expires

The password will expire in this many days. The range is 1 to 365 days.

Minimum Password Length

This value determines the least number of characters that a user account can specify for a password. The
minimum value is one character and the maximum value is 14 characters. The default value is six characters. The
maximum number of characters is 32.

Password History
This parameter sets the number of unique passwords that must be used before a previous password can be re-
used. If Password History is set to three, the system will ‘remember’ the last three passwords, any password
entered must be different than the previous three. The default value is two. The range is zero to seven. When set to
zero the password history is not enforced.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 2-11

 Network eManager®
Network eManager Main Menu

Equipment Setup
The Client Equipment Setup is used to build new equipment groups, add equipment to existing groups, update
equipment, and delete equipment. The Equipment is setup in a three-tier format:

• Company
• Site
• Equipment

In the example, Toshiba Training is a company with a site - Remote Training System. At that site are seven
systems. The buttons at the bottom of the screen are:

– Add Equipment (New Client) – Add a new company, a site, and the first system (Equipment) at that site.
– Add Equip. (Existing Client) – Add a site to a company or a system to a site.
– Update – Change a company name, site name, system name, or any information about the system.
– Delete – Delete the checked item. If a system is checked, only that system is deleted. If a site is checked,
all of the equipment assigned to that site is deleted. If a company is checked, all of the sites and equipment
is deleted.

2-12 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Network eManager®
Network eManager Main Menu

Add Equipment Window

The Add Equipment window is used to add a new Company Name, a new Site Name or new Equipment to a site.
When adding a company, all of the data including a site and one system must be entered. When adding a site or
system, the screen shown below will have the company name and/or the site name fields filled-in based on what
was selected when the Add Equip (existing client) button was clicked.

Network eManager®
Connect To Multiple CIX Systems
One of the most powerful features of Network eManager is the ability to connect to multiple systems at one time.
The eManager user can connect to multiple CIX systems in multiple nodes in multiple locations simultaneously.
This feature requires an IP connection to all the equipment to which the user wants to connect. In this example, by
simply clicking on the Toshiba Training main tree, it places a check mark to all the branch equipment beneath.

Connection Mode
There are two ways to connect to Network eManager. The default is Non-Strata Net mode. The Strata Net mode
allows the technician a feature to automatically build Network DNs to multiple nodes simultaneously.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 2-13

 Network eManager®
Network eManager Main Menu

Add New Station

The Add New Stations utility allows the technician to add a station DN to multiple systems in multiple nodes in a
Strata Net system by simply clicking on the Node Selection Panel.

MAS Licensing
The MAS licensing screen is used to: Upload, Delete, Issue, Activate, and View Licenses.

Add New Network eManager User

The Account Setup utility creates new Network eManager users, each with one of four levels of permissions.

2-14 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Network eManager®
Network eManager Main Menu

Clicking on the View Levels Default Permission will shows the different access permissions of each level.

Network eManager®
Network eManager Toolbar Setup Menu
In addition to the icons on the main menu page, there is a set of menus in the top right hand corner of the Network
eManager screen. These menus, similar to the icons on the body of the page, include a menu item, Clients.

In the drop-down menu, click on Connect to Client SES Only to connect to the SES in the selected system. Only
the Voice Mail menu will be available, all other menu items will be disabled

Application Settings
The Application Settings menu is used change the color theme of Network eManager, perform account setup and
set restriction access. The Account Setup and Restriction Menus are identical to the icon-based menus.

Navigating The Menus

When you click on a command, a drop-down box displays the commands in that function set. For example, all of
the Station-related programs are under the Station main menu. The list of station DNs are on the right side. The
Node Selection Panel allows you to see the data values from different CIX systems by simply clicking on the
equipment name without having to log out.

The left column on the screen shows the Node Connection Panel. All of the current CIX sites that you are
connected to are shown. The graphic in the middle of the screen shows the details of all the CIX equipment in the
node. The detail information includes: Equipment Type, Equipment Version, Equipment Name, IP Address, Voice

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 2-15

 Network eManager®
Features of Network eManager

Mail, MAC Address and Country. One node will be highlighted to indicate the current node connection. Clicking on
the other nodes display the data for that given node.

Features of Network eManager

Particular features of Network eManager are:

Excel Import
Toshiba has implemented an Excel import utility into Network eManager. Dealer technicians and Network
Administrators are able to populate Program 200 Station Data from an Excel spreadsheet. The Excel
import utility allows the technician to upload the following information:
• First Name
• Last Name
• Phone Number
• Email Address
• VM MW Center Port
The Excel spreadsheet utility is compatible with any version of Microsoft Excel including Excel 2007.
The Excel import utility works in conjunction with the Active Directory Services utility that is already built-in
to the current version of Network eManager.
The technician can either create a new spreadsheet with the above information or use an existing
customer spreadsheet that already has the information. The technician simply has to tell which Network
eManager which column in the spreadsheet corresponds to: First Name, Last Name, Phone Number,
Email Address and VM MW Center port. It does not matter if there are other columns in the spreadsheet
that are populated with data.

Performing the Excel Import

1. Prepare the Excel spreadsheet

- The technician can either create a new spreadsheet from scratch as shown in Figure 2-1 or
use an existing Excel spreadsheet that already has the data populated.
- The columns do not need to be in any specific order. During the import process the technician
has the option of specifying which column represents which field.
- The first row of the Excel spreadsheet MUST BE USED AS THE HEADER. Specifically, cell A1
must have data entered (see example, below). The Excel spreadsheet import utility DOES
NOT use the first row as data.

2-16 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Network eManager®
Features of Network eManager

Data in cell A1

Network eManager®
Figure 2-1. Excel Import Data

2. Access the Excel import feature in Network eManager

- The Excel import feature is located in the same location as the Active Directory Services
import: Station -> Strata Synch/Excel
- The first time the Excel utility is executed the file list will be empty.
- Click on the Browse button as shown in Figure 2-2.

Figure 2-2. Strata Synch/Excel

- Locate the .xls file that was created with the station data and click the Open button as shown
in Figure 2-3.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 2-17

 Network eManager®
Features of Network eManager

Figure 2-3. Choose File Screen

3. Upload the spreadsheet into Network eManager

- Once the path to the to the target .xls file has been entered, click the Upload button as shown
in Figure 2-4.

Figure 2-4. Upload Screen

4. Define the data

- Figure 2-5 is the data definition screen. This screen allows the technician to specify which
column represents which particular field. Notice that in Figure 2-5 below, column C is defined
as “Column for Extension” but the data actually shows phone numbers. This is acceptable
because the technician has the chance to specify which part of the phone number represents
the extension number.
- Click on Process Data to continue.

2-18 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Network eManager®
Features of Network eManager

Network eManager®
Figure 2-5. Data Definition Screen

5. Step 5 – Verify the data

- Figure 2-6 is the verification screen. This screen allows the technician to make sure field
names correspond with the data. Clicking the Back button on this screen takes the technician
back to the screen shown in Figure 2-5 and modify the columns, if necessary. Clicking the
Cancel button allows the technician to cancel the entire process and return to Figure 2-1.
- Click the Save button to continue with the import process and save the .xls file to the Network
eManager PC as shown on Figure 2-6.

Figure 2-6. Verification Screen

6. Start the import

- Figure 2-7 shows that the spreadsheet has been parsed and verified by Network eManager
and is now ready for importing.
- If this is the very first time the Excel import utility has been executed, click the Initial Install
button.
- The Delete button is simply used to delete the previously uploaded spreadsheet file.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 2-19

 Network eManager®
Features of Network eManager

- The Ongoing Change button is the process for adding, deleting, or changing stations after the
initial install. After an initial install has been performed, an image of the database is created on
the Network eManager PC. This image is used for comparison when adds, moves and
changes are executed. This button is only available after a successful initial install.
- The View Log button shows any recent activities adds/deletions and modifications.

Figure 2-7. Import Screen

7. Define the station types and extension numbers

- From the initial install screen as shown in Figure 2-8, the “Number of DN Digits” specifies how
many digits from far right to left should be counted as the extension number. Notice, for
example, the user Ericson Abing in Figure 2-8. The telephone number listed is 9495833500.
Since the “Number of DN Digits” is set to 4, Network eManager will use the last four numbers
as the extension number, in this example, 3500.
- Click Start to begin the import process.

Figure 2-8. Number of DN Digits

2-20 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Network eManager®
Features of Network eManager

8. Finish the Import Process

- Figure 2-9 shows that 5 users were created successfully.
- Click Done to exit.

Network eManager®
Figure 2-9. Created Users

- Figure 2-10 shows that extensions 3500-3504 have been created.

Figure 2-10.Program 260 - Full IP Station Assignments

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 2-21

 Network eManager®
Features of Network eManager

Strata Synch - Export/Import from Active Directory® Services

Active Directory Services (ADS) is a Microsoft database technology used as a central repository to store
information about a network resource. The primary goal of Active Directory services is to provide centralized
authentication and authorization services for Windows system-based computers. There are three main objects
stored in Active Directory Services: Resources (e.g., printers), Services (e.g., email) and Users. ADS provides
control, management, organization, and security for these objects. While Network eManager has its own set of
databases, these are not compatible with the ADS databases. This incompatibility in database format forces extra
work because data entry must be duplicated in both ADS and Network eManager. However, Strata Synch, in
conjunction with Network eManager, provides an interface between ADS databases and Strata CIX systems and
Strategy ES voice mail systems. The goal of Strata Synch is to decrease the programming time in new installations
by eliminating the need to manually create users in Network eManager and then create a corresponding voice mail
box for each user.
The Strata Synch utility can also be used for ongoing maintenance. Changes made to the ADS database (deletion,
name change, extension change) can be propagated to the CIX by simply re-running Strata Synch and importing
the database file into the CIX via Network eManager. Strata Synch is a one-way synchronization tool - changes
made to the CIX (user deletion, name change, extension change) will not update the ADS database.

Strata Synch, in conjunction with Network eManager, performs the following:

• Directly connects to the ADS database and displays a real-time representation of all folders and
organization units.
• Technicians can choose to download user information from a single folder or from multiple folders for a
multi-CIX site.
• The selected users database is exported to an XML file.
• Using the exported XML file, Network eManager populates the following programs:

– Program 200/260: Station Data/Full IP Station Assignment

- Auto create all types of extensions (DKT/IPT/SIP/SLT) and either manually or automatically assigns
PDN equipment numbers.
- FK19 – Automatically assigns VMID code to match extension numbers.
- FK09 – Populates the Name To Display field from information taken from the ADS database.
– Stratagy ES Voice Mail
- Auto-creates a voice mail box for each extension.
- Pre-fills Name1 and Name2 in the User Mode tab based on the ADS database.
- Pre-fills the email account information based on the ADS database.
– Distribution List
- Auto-creates voice mail distribution lists from group information gathered from the ADS database.

Strata Synch automatically creates stations and voice mailboxes from the user information taken from Active
Directory Services. Technicians spend the most time in on new installations creating and modifying stations. If the
user information is already stored in the ADS database, Strata Synch can assist in creating stations and voice mail
boxes saving the technician the task of having to manually enter in all the stations.
Strata Synch can also assist Network Administrators who manage their company’s Strata CIX system. Changes
made in the ADS database such as when employees leave the company, name changes, phone number changes,
etc., can be propagated into the CIX database by re-running Strata Synch.

2-22 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Network eManager®
Features of Network eManager

System Requirements for Strata Synch

• PC running Windows 2000 or higher (Win2000/2003, XP, Vista).
• The PC running Strata Synch must have network access to the Active Directory Services server.
• Strata Synch requires a Domain Admin level user account in order to connect to the ADS database.
• Network eManager V5.20 A08b or later.
• Strata CIX software R3.X or higher.

Network eManager®
Optimum Strata Synch use requires preparation by both the technician and the Network Administrator. In order to
extract the user information from ADS correctly, Strata Synch needs to know which folder or organizational unit in
which the user information is kept. Strata Synch can either pull the information from one folder or multiple folders
based on a keyword. The Network Administrator needs to enter a keyword to define which CIX system the user is
assigned to when the user information is entered in the ADS database.

Strata CIX Configuration Assumptions

• Extension Number – By default, the last four digits of the telephone number entered into the
Telephone number field, as shown in the following figures. This parameter can be set to use up to the
last five digits.
• Extension Name – The display name is taken from the First and Last Name fields of the General tab in
the User properties window.
• Voice Mail box Number – The extension number is used as the voice mail box number.
• Voice Mail Name 1, Name 2 – Name 1 and Name 2 of the voice mail box is taken from the First and
Last name fields of the General tab in the User properties window.
• VMID Code – The VMID Code in Program 260 FK19 is the same as the Extension number.
• Unified Messaging email address – The email address is taken from the eMail field in the General tab
of the User properties window in Active Directory.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 2-23

 Network eManager®
Features of Network eManager

Example 1 – Single Strata CIX Node

All Users in ADS stored in a Single Folder or Organizational Unit

Shown below is a sample Active Directory Users and Computers screen. In this first example, all of the users are
stored in one folder, the default Users folder. In this example the technician can simply select the Users folder from
within Strata Synch and export all of the contents of the Users folder.

All users stored in the

default Users folder

2-24 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Network eManager®
Features of Network eManager

Example 2 – Multiple Strata CIX Nodes

All Users located in the same Users Folder

This example is more complex because it requires assistance from the Network Administrator.
For example, this customer has two CIX nodes: one in Los Angeles and one in Irvine. All of the users, however, are
stored in the same default Users folder. Since all the users are stored in the same folder, Strata Synch must be told
how to differentiate users belonging to the Los Angeles CIX versus users belonging to the Irvine CIX.
The only way to differentiate users is to put a tag in the Users properties window to allow Strata Synch to filter the
different nodes. In the screen below, the user Ericson Abing belongs to the Irvine office as shown in the Office

Network eManager®
field. Users in the Los Angeles office would be tagged as belonging to the Los Angeles location.

Important! The Telephone number field must be populated. ADS uses this field to assign the extension
number. If this field is left blank no station is created for this name.

In the General tab - the Office field

is used to identify the user location.

The last four digits (default) are

used to create the extension
and the voicemail account.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 2-25

 Network eManager®
Features of Network eManager

Installing and Launching Strata Synch

The Strata Synch file (StrataSych_V1.2_Setup.zip) is a small file that must be run on a PC with Windows XP, 2000,
or 2003 which has network access to the Active Directory Server. The Strata Synch file is downloaded as a zip file.

1. After extracting the file, double-click the StrataSynch1_2.exe file. The setup wizard displays as shown.

2. Click Next.
3. The License Agreement Dialog opens. Read the license agreement, click to select I agree, then click Next.

2-26 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Network eManager®
Features of Network eManager

4. In the Select Installation Folder screen accept the default parameters and click Next.

Network eManager®
5. In the Confirm Installation dialog click Next.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 2-27

 Network eManager®
Features of Network eManager

6. When the installation is complete click the Close button.

7. Check for critical updates from Microsoft for .NET Framework.

Launch Strata Synch and Login to ADS:

1. Click on Start > Programs > Strata Synch > Strata Synch.
2. The login screen shown here appears. Type in either the host name or the IP Address of the Active Directory
Server in the Active Directory Server field.

3. Type in a user name that has Administrative privileges to the Active Directory Server.
4. Type in the password for that user name.

2-28 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Network eManager®
Features of Network eManager

Example 1
1. After a successful login, Strata Synch connects to the Active Directory Server and displays a real-time view of
all the folders or organizational units from the Active Directory Users and Computers screen as shown here.
From this screen, the technician or Network Administrator can select multiple folders from which to export
users. From our previous case example where there is only one CIX system and all the users are stored in the
default users folder, the technician can simply select the Users folder.

Network eManager®
Click to check-mark the Users folder
to use this folder for the export.

2. Click the Next button and the site configuration dialogue box appears. Because our first example is for a single
node CIX system, select the default single site as shown here. The Site Name field value is user configurable.
The value for this field is used for the file name of the export file.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 2-29

 Network eManager®
Features of Network eManager

3. Click Next and the dialog box as shown here displays. This screen shows that the tool is ready to start
exporting all the users Strata Synch found in the default Users folder in ADS.
4. Enter the directory path or click the Browse button to select the directory to which to export the users.
5. Click Export.

6. Once Export is pressed, the export process begins as shown in these figures.

2-30 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Network eManager®
Features of Network eManager

The File Export Log displays as shown.

Network eManager®
7. When the export process is finished, the log screen shows how many users were exported as well as how
many groups were exported. The export file (Site1.xml) is the name entered in the Site Name field in Step 2.
8. Click Next and the window as shown is displayed.

9. Selecting the Site1.xml displays all of the users exported to that file.
10. The files are saved by default to a folder in: C:\Documents and Settings\(user_name)\My Documents\Strata
Synch.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 2-31

 Network eManager®
Features of Network eManager

11. Click Finish to close the Strata Synch program. The XML files that were created are now saved to the folder as
shown here.

2-32 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Network eManager®
Features of Network eManager

Example 2 – Multiple Strata CIX Nodes

Example 2 is more complex than Example 1 because Strata Synch needs to be told how to filter users belonging to
different CIX nodes but are all in the same default Users folder. In order for Example 2 to work properly, the
Administrator has to put a tag on each user that is exported to the CIX system. The tag, as shown here, is the entry
in the User’s property window, General tab, Office field.

1. For multi-node CIX installations, click on the Multiple Sites radio button as shown here.

Network eManager®

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 2-33

 Network eManager®
Features of Network eManager

2. Enter the number of sites. For our example, chose two sites. The key field value allows the technician or
Network Administrator to choose which field in the Users property window in ADS to use as the tag filter. For
our example, we will use the Office field in the General tab of the User’s property window in Active Directory
Services.
3. This figure shows how the Office field is mapped to the Office field in the General tab (General_Office) of the
User’s property window.
4. The box that shows the Site names, Site1 and Site2 are default names but is user configurable. For example,
a more meaningful name would be CIX670 and CIX200 or Irvine and Los Angeles. The name chosen will be
the exported file name for each individual node as shown here.

5. The Key field in the figure above is the match word criteria (tag) that Strata Synch uses to determine which
users belong in the Irvine node and which users belong in the Los Angeles node.
6. The key field must be input manually and must match exactly with what the Network Administrator typed in the
Office field of the General tab in the User’s property window.

2-34 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Network eManager®
Features of Network eManager

7. Click Next to start the Export process.

Network eManager®
8. Click Export to start the export process.

Export Progress Display

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 2-35

 Network eManager®
Features of Network eManager

9. When the export process is finished, the log screen shows how many users were exported per site as well as
how many groups were exported. Notice that the file names are CIX670.XML, CIX200.XML, Unassign.XML
and Group.XML.

10. The Unassigned.XML file shows all the users that did not match the criteria for either Irvine or Los Angeles.
This means that these users either had nothing entered in the General_Office field, or the value does not
match the criteria.
11. The Group.XML file shows all of the groups found in the ADS. These groups can potentially be used for eMail
distribution groups.

2-36 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Network eManager®
Features of Network eManager

12. Selecting either the CIX670.xml or CIX200.xml displays all of the users exported to that file.

Network eManager®
13. The files are saved by default to a folder in: C:\Documents and Settings\(user)\My Documents\Strata Synch.
14. Click Finish to close the application.

Import User Data to Network eManager

As described previously, Strata Synch is used for gathering station user information from the ADS, formatting it,
and saving that information in an XML file. This section describes how to import the XLM files into Network
eManager.
Important! You must be logged into Network eManager as Administrator for the Active Directory feature
to appear under the Stations menu.

Before using Network eManager:

1. Login to Strata Synch.

2. Create the XML files.
The following process shows how to upload the XML file, import the file into Network eManager, and create the
station assignments.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 2-37

 Network eManager®
Features of Network eManager

1. Launch Network eManager (version R520A08b or higher). On the main menu screen select: Station > Strata
Synch/Excel.

2. The Active Directory window opens. The Upload Target, by default, automatically checks both the CIX and
voice mail boxes, indicating that Strata Synch will populate both the Strata CIX system and the Stratagy voice
mail system.

Note If you have connected to a CIX system without voicemail, only the CIX check box is shown.

2-38 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Network eManager®
Features of Network eManager

3. Click Browse to locate the XML file Strata Synch created earlier. When the file is located click Open. The
Choose file dialog box opens.

Network eManager®
In the example shown here, Irvine.xml file is selected. Highlight the file you wish to use then click the Open
button. Group.xml is the voicemail group.

4. The selected XML file displays on screen. Click Upload. This copies the XML file from the target directory into
the Network eManager PC to be processed.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 2-39

 Network eManager®
Features of Network eManager

With a file uploaded the following functions are available:

- Delete – Deletes the uploaded XML file.
- Ongoing Change – see “Ongoing Change” later in this section.
- Initial Install – Used to import the first file into the system database. This function allows the
technician to load all of the station data without the need to manually enter all the station names into
the CIX system database.
Note Strata Synch assumes that there are no users in the system database, not even the default
extensions created on first power-up. If there are any station cards in the system during the first
power-up and the CIX system creates the default extensions, they must be removed so the
resources can be freed from the xIPU cards to be used by the Strata Synch application. Do not use
the Strata Synch application on a Strata CIX system that already has an existing database.

If this is a new installation (no system data saved) click the Initial Install button.
Note If using multiple XML files:
1. Select one XML then, select Initial Install.
2. Select the next XML file and select Ongoing Change.

• Clicking Initial Install displays the screen shown here. Notice that the XML file has been parsed and
Network eManager displays the following information extracted from the XML file:
• Telephone number
• First Name
• Last Name
• eMail Address

When the XML file has been parsed, the technician can select the station type of each DN. By default, all the
extensions are created as DKT-type. Select the type of phone all of the extensions by clicking on the drop-down
box to select the correct phone type and then clicking the Set All Phones Type to command. In the example given
above the two extensions were set to be IPTs.

2-40 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Network eManager®
Features of Network eManager

By default, Network eManager builds the stations using the first available xIPU with open resources to build the
stations. Station cards are found by scanning the system cabinet card slots from left to right and from the top down.
For example, it starts with Cabinet 1 and looks for a card from Slot 1 to Slot 8. Then it goes to Cabinet 2 and
performs the same routine until all the cabinets have been checked.

If the technician wants to specify a particular xIPU card for an IPT extension, the Equipment Number (Cabinet #
and Slot #) must be specified in the PDN Equipment Number field for that DN.

When you are satisfied that all of the Phone Types and PDN Equipment Numbers are set, click Start.

Network eManager®
Network eManager starts to process the XML file and begins building the extensions. When completed, Network
eManager displays the number of users created as shown here.

The figure shows that extension 5551 has been built on an LIPU card. Notice that field #10 [Name to Display] has
been populated with the correct name and field #19 [VMID Code] has been populated to match that of the
extension.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 2-41

 Network eManager®
Features of Network eManager

Strata Synch also builds a corresponding mailbox by default (uncheck the voice mailbox to create stations without
mailboxes). Notice that in this example, a mailbox has been created for extension 5551, and that Name1 and
Name 2 have been populated.

Strata Synch also populates the eMail account field in the voice mailbox if it finds a corresponding email address
from the imported XML file.

2-42 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Network eManager®
Features of Network eManager

Ongoing Change
An Ongoing Change is the process for adding, deleting, or changing stations after the initial install. After an initial
install has been performed, an image of the database is created on the Network eManager PC. This image is used
as the comparison when adds, moves and changes are executed. The Ongoing Change button is only available
after a successful initial install.
Note Strata Synch cannot verify that an XML file is valid for a specific CIX system before it is uploaded
to that system. You must ensure that the correct XML to be used for the ongoing change is
selected.
In the example, shown here, the last name for extension #5555 is changed from ‘L’ to ‘Lemon’. The first name for

Network eManager®
extension #5551 is changed from ‘Eric’ to ‘Ericson’.

The uploaded ‘ongoing change’ information is compared to the ‘initial install’ image. The differences are flagged
and shown on this screen.

The changes are not made until you check mark the box and click the Apply button.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 2-43

 Network eManager®
Features of Network eManager

This example shows both items were selected, the Apply button was clicked, and Network eManager successfully
applied both changes.

The View Log screen displays all the actions that were performed using the Strata Synch application.

2-44 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Network eManager®
Features of Network eManager

Access Multiple Systems

A powerful feature of Network eManager is the ability to access the programming data on multiple CIX systems
without having to log-off of one system and then log-on to the next system. In this example Network eManager is
currently viewing the Station programming data for the CIX200-TECH switch. Program 200 displays the familiar list
of stations on the right with the details of each station in the work area.

Network eManager®
By simply clicking on a different system in the Node Selection Panel, the Administrator can switch from viewing the
Station Programming data at one node to viewing the data from another node without having to logout.

Node Selection Panel

The Node Selection Panel provides the following features:

• Provides a list of the group member CIX systems and CIX/SES pairs (nodes).
• Allows the user to show the data from another node on the current page by simply clicking on the node.
• Indicates Active Node with a distinct glyph. The Active Node is the CIX or CIX/SES pair that is currently
accessed by the page.

Copy To Multiple Equipment

A powerful feature of Network eManager is the ability to selectively copy data from one CIX system to multiple CIX
systems. For example, to copy selected fields in Program 260, Full IP Station Assignments:

1. Click on the DN to select the fields to copy and click on Selective Copy.
2. Click on all the fields to be copied. For example; COS Day1, DRL Day1, FRL Day1, QPL Day1 and LCR
Group. The ‘Highlight All’ button is still available to select all values for a copy.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 2-45

 Network eManager®
Back Up Database on Multiple CIX Systems

3. Click the ‘Select Copy To PDN(s)’ button.

4. Notice that PDNs from different systems are visible. Select all the PDNs the selected fields will be copied to.

Apply To Multiple Equipment

Network eManager allows the user to modify programming and Apply To multiple CIX systems. When you click the
Apply To button (not seen in all commands), the Apply To Group CIX dialogue box appears (right). From the
dialogue box the user can select which CIX systems the changes are applied to.

When the Submit button is clicked the changed program values propagates to all of the connected systems. There
is no need to switch back and forth between CIX systems to copy the changed data to different systems.

Back Up Database on Multiple CIX Systems

CIX Data Backup
Network eManager can backup data from multiple systems. This function can save significant time when preparing
to update the CIX system software on multiple nodes and when a backup needs to be done on each node.
The new database backup method provides extended functionality including:

• Selecting the new software file directly from the user’s PC.
• Selecting multiple CIX systems for update and starting the procedure at once without further user
interaction during the procedure.

The following actions must be done before the update process can start:

• Locate the new CIX software by CIX system type.

• Decide which CIX systems will be updated - type should match with software.
• Decide for each system whether the new software should be automatically activated after it is
uploaded.
• Decide for each system whether the current CIX database should be restored during the new software
activation. If yes, Network eManager creates a CIX database backup prior to uploading the new
software.

2-46 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Network eManager®
Update Software on Multiple CIX Systems

The new CIX Data Backup is under Maintenance > CIX Data Backup. The user can select which systems need to
be backed up or can select all of the systems at the site. If any of the systems fail to backup, it will not halt the
entire backup operation. The backup procedure continues to run for the other systems.

Update Software on Multiple CIX Systems

The new CIX Software Update is located under Maintenance > CIX Software Update. In the window you have the
option of backing up the CIX systems prior to the upgrade. If the user clicks the Yes button, the database backup
screen is displayed allowing you to select the databases to backup. Once the backup procedure is completed, click
the Browse button to find the corresponding CIX software update for each CIX system which needs backing-up.

Network eManager®
The update software must match the corresponding system, otherwise the update procedure will fail. Then click the
Upload file(s) to eManager server button. Network eManager then copies the update software to a designated
folder in the Network eManager server.

When all the CIX software updates have been uploaded press Start to complete the process.

Note Network eManager requires the update file you download from the Toshiba FYI website to remain
in zip format. Do not unzip the update file or the update process will fail.

Create Network DNs in Multiple Systems

Network eManager can automatically build Network DN stations from one system and have it automatically created
in the other nodes of a Strata Net network. From the Network eManager configuration screen, click on Strata Net >
Network DN Setup > Add New Station.
Note Only one DN can be created across multiple nodes at one time.

In the Add New Station window, fill in the following information:

• User Name
• Phone Type
• Extension

Click Submit.

Table Views
Some programs contain supporting tables views. These tables can be accessed from the Program Menu or from
the program itself by clicking a button in the command screen. For example, the System Speed Dial Table View can
be accessed by clicking System > System Speed Dial Table View, or by clicking System > System Speed Dial, then
clicking the System Speed Dial Table View button at the bottom of the screen.
Notes
• Depending on the speed of your PC and the size of your database the table may take several minutes to
download.
• Once table view displays, you can minimize the screen or send it to the background. It is an independent
window that can always be brought back to the front of the screen for reference.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 2-47

 Network eManager®
Table Views

The tables have the following functionality (see Table View example below):

Navigational controls enable viewing or moving in a table by 25-entry screens. These controls help sort information
found in the table or view the table in full. These controls are found as Previous and Next buttons above the
header.

If you want to print or analyze the table you can also select All from the Drop down between the Previous and Next
buttons to view the entire table in blocks of 25 entries.

In the Navigation Control bar, every button is dynamically activated or deactivated. For example, in the figure
above, the Previous button is not active because the view starts with the first record. Submit is also not available
because nothing has been changed.

• Sort – You can sort tables by clicking the column header. The direction of the up/down toggles
Ascending or Descending sort. The color indicator pointing Up or Down in the Header row indicates the
column the sort is performed by.
• Bookmark – You can bookmark a row on some tables by clicking on the row. This enables you to move
forward or backward and come back to the original position with no problem.
Note The bookmark function is not provided in tables that have a Delete button. Tables that have a
Delete button also have Select All and Unselect All buttons.

• Edit/Refresh/Print buttons – You can edit, refresh or print the table by clicking the appropriate buttons at
the top of the screen. In some tables the Edit button toggles between View Collected Data and Edit.
- The Edit function works for the Name, Number and Destination columns. Use the Refresh button if
you add, delete or make changes to table entries in Programs that feed tables or in Guide pages.
- The Print button enables you to print tables. However, when you click the Print button only the part
of the table that is displayed on the screen prints. Use the scroll bar to Print beyond what is
displayed. It will then automatically print from where the last screen ended.

2-48 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Network eManager®
Network eManager Data Import/Export Features

Network eManager Data Import/Export Features

The enhancements listed below can be used with all Releases of CTX/CIX systems.
These new features can save significant time and effort by exporting data such as station speed dial lists or DID
assignments to a file and then importing the file for assignment.

Network eManager DID/DNIS Assignments - Import/Export

This feature allows all DID/DNIS numbers and parameters assigned to one or more Incoming Line Groups (ILG) to
be exported as a comma separated value (CSV) file and saved on the Network eManager PC. This file can then be

Network eManager®
imported and automatically uploaded to another ILG in the same CIX or to a different CIX system.

Download
The system will create a text file. The text is the CSV data.To download DID/DNIS assignments:
1. Display the DID/DNIS Table by clicking Trunk > DID/DNIS Table View.
2. Click Yes in the popup.
3. Click on the Export button.
4. A dialog box will open. Select the location to save the file and assign a file name.

Example

The following is an example of using this process to copy the DID/DNIS numbers from ILG #5 to ILG #7 in the
same CIX system. After the DID/DNIS numbers and parameters have been assigned to ILG #5 perform the
following:
1. Create DID/DNIS numbers and parameters, etc. for ILG Group 5 using the DID/DNIS wizard.
2. Open the DID/DNIS Table View located under Trunk > DID/DNID Table View. All assignments for DID
ILG Group 5 are displayed.
3. At the top of the DID/DNID Table View screen click on the Export button.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 2-49

 Network eManager®
Network eManager Data Import/Export Features

4. Select or create the folder where the ILG #5 DID/DNIS assignment file will be saved and then click
Save. This will save the DID numbers and parameters of ILG #5 as a comma delimited text file.

5. Create DID Incoming Line Group ILG #7 in Trunk Programming, Program 304. Assign the number of
digits the DID numbers should have in Program 304 -11 (four digits in this example). The number of
digits for ILG #7 should be the same as ILG #5.
6. After creating DID ILG #7 open the exported ILG #5 DID text file using Windows. This is the file saved
in Step 4.

7. In the text file, change the ILG number from 5 to 7. Be sure to keep the same comma delimited format
intact as shown below, then save the file under a different name.

8. In Network eManager, open the DID/DNIS Table View located under Trunk > DID/DNIS Table View. All
assignments for DID ILG Group 5 are displayed.

2-50 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Network eManager®
Network eManager Data Import/Export Features

9. On the top of the DID/DNID Table View screen click on the Import button.

Network eManager®
10. In the Choose file dialog box use the Browse button to find the text file containing ILG #7 created in
Step 7.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 2-51

 Network eManager®
Network eManager Data Import/Export Features

11. After selecting the ILG #7 file click on Open. The Network eManager Select Import File dialog box will
open. Click on Import Now. Network eManager will import and upload the ILG #7 data to the CIX.

12. In Network eManager, open the DID/DNIS Table View, select Trunk > DID/DNIS Table View and click
Refresh. All assignments for DID ILG Group 5 and 7 are displayed. This means that all of
ILG #5 DID assignments have been applied to ILG #7 in the CIX database.

13. If you failed to create ILG #7 in Step 5 with the correct number of DID digits in Program 309 -11 the
following error message will be presented on the Table View screen.

2-52 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Network eManager®
Network eManager Data Import/Export Features

Network eManager Station Directory - Import/Export

This feature allows CIX station assignments such as user names and telephone numbers to be exported to a
comma separated value (CSV) text file. This file can be imported by third party software to create dialing
directories. Station Assignments Table View is displayed in Network eManager, then exported as a CSV text file to
the Network eManager computer.

Station Directory Information Example

1. In Network eManager select Station > Station Assignments > PDN Table button, or go directly to the table view
by selecting Station > PDN Table View.

Network eManager®
2. Click Yes in the popup. All station assignments are displayed in a table.
3. Click the Export button on the top of the screen.

4. From the dialog box that appears after clicking Export, name the file and select or create the folder it should be
downloaded to.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 2-53

 Network eManager®
Network eManager Data Import/Export Features

5. Open the exported text file.

6. One application for this file is to edit the unwanted fields out to allow third party software to create a directory.
The format of the edited file may need to vary depending on the third party software that creates the directory.
The file below has all table view fields deleted except:
• Extension Number (PRG 200 Prime DN)
• Extension Name (PRG 200-09)
• Network Calling Number (PRG 200-46)

2-54 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Network eManager®
Network eManager Data Import/Export Features

The edited text file can be opened with Microsoft Excel as a comma delimited text file and columns can be
rearranged as needed.

Network eManager®
Microsoft Excel can be used to format the directory appearance.

System Speed Dial Export/Import

This feature allows station and system speed dial names and numbers to be exported and imported. The exported
speed dial data is saved into a comma separated value (CSV) text file which can be edited using any text editor
such as Word Pad. The exported file can be imported by other CIX systems to save installation time.

The exported and imported speed dial file format is shown below. The exported file header and line format must not
be change or an error message will occur when trying to import a file. Commas are always required between fields
as shown.

• System Speed Dial File Format:

Speed Dial Index (01 ~ 799),Speed Dial Number,Name

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 2-55

 Network eManager®
Network eManager Data Import/Export Features

• Station Speed Dial Format:

Prime DN,Speed Dial Index (01 ~ 99),Speed Dial Number,Name

You can edit exported speed dial files to add more speed dial names and numbers, change formats between
system and station, and change Prime DNs. Editing allows:

• One station’s speed dial names/numbers can be edited and imported into another station’s speed dial
bins.
• A station’s speed dial names/numbers can be edited and imported into CIX system Speed Dial.
• System speed dial names/numbers can be imported into another CIX system.
• System speed dial names/numbers can be edited and imported into station speed dial bins.
• System and Station speed dial files can be used by third party software to create dialing directories.

Station Speed Dial Export/Import

This feature allows all station speed dial numbers of one station to be exported and saved as a file on the
eManager PC. The assignments in this file can then be imported and automatically uploaded to another station
speed dial bin in the same CIX or into System Speed dial.

Example: Assign station 200 speed dial numbers to station 205 in the same CIX system.

1. Make sure that station 200 has speed dial number memory assigned in Program 200-35. Create
station speed dial numbers and names for station 200 using the Station Speed Dial Table View.
2. Open the Station Speed Dial Table View, select Advanced Configuration > Station > Station Speed Dial
Table View. All of the assignments for station speed dial are displayed.
3. At the top of the Station Speed Dial Table View screen click on the Export buttom.

2-56 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Network eManager®
Network eManager Data Import/Export Features

4. Select or create the folder where the station speed dial assignment file for station 200 will be saved,
then click Save. This will save the station speed dial names and numbers as a CSV text file.

Network eManager®
5. Make sure that station 205 has speed dial number memory assigned in Program 200-35.
6. Open the exported station 200 speed dial CSV text file saved in Step 4, using Word Pad.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 2-57

 Network eManager®
Network eManager Data Import/Export Features

7. In the text file, change the Prime DN from 200 to 205 – be sure to keep the same comma delimited
format intact as shown below and do not change the header. Save the file under a different name.

8. In Network eManager, select Station > Speed Dial Table View. All assignments for Station Speed Dial
are displayed.
9. On the top of the Station Speed Dial Table View screen click on Import.

2-58 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Network eManager®
Network eManager Data Import/Export Features

10. The Choose File dialog box will open. Use the Browse button to find the text file containing the speed
dial assignments for station 200 (created in Step 7 above).

Network eManager®
11. After selecting the station 205 speed dial file click Open. A Network eManager dialog box will prompt
you to Import the data to the CIX. Click Import Now. This will cause Network eManager to import and
upload the station 205 speed dial data to the CIX.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 2-59

 Network eManager®
Network eManager Data Import/Export Features

12. In Network eManager select Station > Speed Dial Table View. All assignments for station speed dial
are displayed. Station 205 will have the same speed dial assignments as station 200.

Network eManager Network Calling Number Upload

The Network Calling Number is normally entered and submitted one-at-a-time for each PDN using Program 200-
46. This can take a lot of time if the system has many PDNs. The Network Calling Number Upload feature allows
you to create a comma separated (CSV) text file containing PDNs and their associated Network Calling Numbers
and then upload the text file to the CIX once.

The format of the text file is: Prime DN,Network Calling Number

To create the CSV file for uploading you must create a list of all of the stations in the CIX system. One method for
creating the list is display the Table View of the stations, export the table, then delete all but the station numbers in
the text file that was exported.

Example: Upload Network Calling numbers for stations 200~207.

1. Create a CSV text file containing the PDN and Network Calling number for each station. In this
example the file shown was created using Microsoft Notepad.

As noted above, a Network eManager Imported Table View file could be used to start this by

2-60 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Network eManager®
Network eManager Data Import/Export Features

generating all PDNs (then, in the imported text file, delete all other fields except the PDNs so that all
that would need to be entered is the Network Calling numbers).

2. Open the station PDN Table View and select Station > PDN Table View. All of the station table view
assignments will be displayed (Note: Network Calling Numbers not are shown).

3. Click on the Upload CID button at the top of the PDN Table View screen and browse to the file created
in Step 1.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 2-61

 Network eManager®
Connection Entry for Dial-up

4. Click Import Now. Network eManager will upload the selected file into the CIX database and then
update Program 200-46 and the PDN Table View automatically (Note: Network Calling Numbers are
shown).

Connection Entry for Dial-up

This new connection setup must be completed in order to use the modem in the Network eManager PC to dial-up
a CIX system. The following steps cover the network connection setup in the PC that must be done to use the PC
modem.
1. In Control Panel Network Connections, select Create a new connection to start the wizard:

2. Click Next.

2-62 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Network eManager®
Connection Entry for Dial-up

3. Select ‘Connect to the network at my workplace’ then click Next.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 2-63

 Network eManager®
Connection Entry for Dial-up

4. Select ‘Dial-up connection,’ then click Next.

RemoteCTX1

5. Enter “RemoteCTX1” as the name of the connection (this entry is case sensitive and must not have any
spaces), and click Next.

2-64 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Network eManager®
Connection Entry for Dial-up

6. You must leave the Phone number empty, the phone number will be configured later in the Network eManager
equipment profile. Click on Next.

RemoteCTX1

7. Do not click on the ‘Add a shortcut’ box.’ Click Finish, it will create the new entry and pop up the Connect
dialog.

8. Do not make any entries in this dialog box. Click on Properties to continue with the setup:

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 2-65

 Network eManager®
Connection Entry for Dial-up

The CIXModem Properties dialog box will open.

9. Select your modem and configure if necessary, otherwise leave the default values for other fields including the
Options Security and Advanced tabs. You must leave the Phone number empty for now. The phone number
will be configured later in the Network eManager equipment profile. Click on the Networking tab.

PPP protocol

2-66 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Network eManager®
Connection Entry for Dial-up

10. Select PPP protocol from the ‘Type of dial-up server I am calling:’ drop-down list. Uncheck all items on the
other list except TCP/IP. (You cannot uncheck Network Monitor Driver if it is there.) Select TCP/IP and click
Properties:

11. Click to select: Enter an IP address between 192.168.255.2 and 192.168.255.252. Use an IP address that is
not already in use on this PC and its network.
12. Click OK, then OK again to close the Properties.
13. Click Cancel on the Connect CIXModem dialog to close it. The new entry is created in Network Connections.
14. The Connect RemoteCTX1 screen will appear. Click on Cancel.
The new network connection entry can be viewed by going to the Control Panel.

RemoteCTX1

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 2-67

 Network eManager®
Help Topics/Context Help

Help Topics/Context Help

In Network eManager, move the pointer over Help>. The drop-down menu shows: Command Table, CIX Help, SES
Help. Click Command Table to show the entire Command structure in numerical order. Click CIX Help to open the
Programming Manual Vol. 1 (this manual), or SES Help to open the Stratagy ES Programming Manual Vol. 2.

About Network eManager

Every Network eManager screen displays the software version numbers.

No Response from Device

While using Network eManager the error message ‘No response from device’ may appear. The following is a list of
conditions that may cause the problem and suggestions for trouble shooting.

• The connection parameters in the Profile database Equipment List are incorrect. No CIX is configured
as listed on the network. Check whether the IP Address and the Community Name are correct as
shown in the Equipment List.
• There is no IP network path between Network eManager and the CIX. Ping the CIX from the Network
eManager server PC to determine if there is connectivity.
• Between Network eManager and the CIX, the SNMP messages are blocked by a network device
(router, firewall, etc.). Check the network device(s) and firewall configuration, verify that the SNMP
protocol and IP ports 161 and 162, and also the FTP protocol and IP ports 20 and 21 are not blocked.
• Network latency is due to high traffic, not enough bandwidth. Use network monitoring tools to verify that
SNMP responses from the network location of the CIX arrive at the Network eManager PC location
within 3000ms.
• The CIX is turned off or not functioning. Verify that the targeted CIX is turned on and running.
• The CIX processor is overloaded, delaying processing SNMP request messages. In this case the
normal SNMP message flow will be restored by CIX. The system congestion is cleared up and the
system is running under normal load.

2-68 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Network eManager®
Network eManager DESI Integration / Telephone Keystrip Printing

Network eManager DESI Integration / Telephone Keystrip

Printing
Network eManager provides a function to collect all keystrip button assignments programmed in a system and
download them as a comma separated value (CSV) text file to the Network eManager Hard Drive. The keystrip
data file contains the data for all IP and DKT Telephones, DSS Consoles and Add-On-Modules.
Telephone Keystrip Label software from DESI Telephone Labels, Inc. can import this file and print keystrips on
DESI keystrip paper. Keystrips can be printed without having to manually type labels for each button on each
Telephone, DSS and ADM keystrip. This feature provides a large labor cost saving. Clicking on Download Keystrip
Data will display this screen.

This feature supports DESI Telephone Labels, Inc. products only and requires DESI Print Engine 2.74 software or
later and Toshiba format Keystrip paper. DESI keystrip paper is available for all Toshiba DKT2000/DKT3000/
DKT3200/IPT2000/IP5000-series telephones DSS consoles and Add-On-Modules. To order DESI Software and
Keystrip paper for Toshiba telephone products go to www.DESI.com or call 1-800-814-3922.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 2-69

 Network eManager®
Manage Stand-Alone SES Systems

Manage Stand-Alone SES Systems

Network eManager provides a sparate menu item to select an SES system for administration. NeM
connection to a stand-alone SES sytem is different from connection to an SES with Strata CIX system in
that only voice mail menus are available.

1. To connect to a stand-alone SES select Connect to Client SES Only from the NeM home page Client
menu.

2. Click on Connect to Client SES Only.

Main VM

3. Enter the IP addreess or the host name of the SES system then, lick on the Connect button.
4. The Stratagy ES menu will appear when the connection is made.

Main VM

2-70 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Network eManager®
Network eManager Troubleshooting Check List

Network eManager Troubleshooting Check List

This procedure is intended to help troubleshoot problems with Network eManager installation. The following
examples are based on Windows XP operating system.

Confirm the Components Services Data:

1. On the Network eManager (NeM) PC main menu select Control Panel > Administrative Tools >
Component Services.
2. Expand each file under Component Services > Computer > My Computer > COM + Applications

3. Highlight, IIS-{Default Web Site//Root/eManager} > right click > select properties

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 2-71

 Network eManager®
Network eManager Troubleshooting Check List

4. Select the Identity tab.

Click to select This user

User: Computer Name\eManagerUser
Password = password
Confirm password = password

How to determine the Computer Name:

1. My Computer > right click > select Properties
2. Select Computer Name tab

2-72 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Network eManager®
Network eManager Troubleshooting Check List

5. Confirm the identity of the eManager dial account. From Control Panel > Administrative Tools >
Component Services

6. Expand each file under Component Services > Computer > My Computer > COM + Applications.
Refer to Step 2.
7. Highlight, IIS-{Default Web Site//Root/eManagerDial} > right click > select properties. Refer to Step 3.
8. Select the Identity Tab

The System Account: Interactive user -The current logged on user should be selected.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 2-73

 Network eManager®
Network eManager Troubleshooting Check List

Confirm the Internet Information Services Data

1. From Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Internet Information Services
2. Expand the Internet Information Services > (local computer) > Web Sites > Default Web Site > Select
eManager > right click > select Properties
3. Select the ASP.NET tab
Ensure the ASP.NET version: displays 2.050727

4. Select the Directory Security tab > Select Edit button under the Anonymous access and authentication
control.
5. Select Anonymous access
User Name = ComputerName\eManager User
6. Expand the Internet Information Services > GWENNORTH (local computer) > Web Sites > Default
Web Site > Select eManagerDial > right click > select Properties
7. Select Directory Security tab > Select Edit

2-74 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Network eManager®
Network eManager Troubleshooting Check List

8. Check Integrated Windows authentication. (It uses the Windows log on password.)

9. Select the ASP.NET tab

Ensure ASP.NET version: 2.0.50727 is selected.

End of procedure.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 2-75

This page intentionally left blank
Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD 3

License Consideration
This chapter describes the content and use for Strata CIX, Media Application Server (MAS) and ACD don-
gle license.

• Each of the following items requires an IP Port (end point) license:

– IP5000/IPT2000 series
– SIP telephones
– SoftIPT (Also requires a Soft IPT License)

• Basic Port licenses are required for each of the following when using GIPU, MIPU, LIPU/LIPS
ports (the LIC-CIX is not required to support these items):
– IP Voice Mail
– IP ACD Announcement port
– IP Attendant Console (does not require a Soft IP License)
– Strata Net IP trunks (requires a Strata Net License)

• IP End-Point Licenses included with the IP System license:

– CIX100 and CIX670 ship with four IP End-Point licenses
– CIX200 ships with 16 IP End-Point licenses
– CIX1200 ships with 4 IP End-Point licenses

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 3-1

 Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
License Code Generation, Inquiry and Summary for Dealers and National Accounts

License Code Generation, Inquiry and Summary for

Dealers and National Accounts
Important! Pop-Up Blockers should be disabled before beginning this process

1. Click on License Codes and in the drop-down box click on Generation.

2. The License Code Generation screen as shown below appears. Enter the information as specified.

• Select the Product Line.

• Select the Generation Type.
• For National Account, check the National Account box.
• Enter the Order #.
• Enter the Serial # OR the MAC Address.
• Click Set Software Version.

3-2 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
License Code Generation, Inquiry and Summary for Dealers and National Accounts

3. Select the features to apply to the system. The required minimum software version is automatically populated
based on the features selected.

Click Submit.

4. You are returned to the License Code Generation screen with the software version populated.

Click Submit.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 3-3

 Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
License Code Generation, Inquiry and Summary for Dealers and National Accounts

5. When a license is generated for a version greater than the last license generated, a warning displays asking if
you have upgraded your software. If you answer Yes, you continue with the generation; a No takes you back to
Select Version.

CAUTION! Once this version has been generated, you CANNOT go back to a lower version,
nor can you regenerate a lower version.

Click Continue.

6. This displays the Purchased quantity, Available quantity, Serial # and MAC Address. Enter the Activate Qty (for
National Accounts, the Activate Qty is automatically filled and cannot be changed). The Site Description and
Install Instructions are for your information only.

Click Submit.

3-4 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
License Code Generation, Inquiry and Summary for Dealers and National Accounts

7. Enter the End User Site information (* are required fields) and click Continue.

8. The License Agreement displays for you to read and agree. Click Finalize.

9. The License Display Page displays all information for the generation. Copy (Ctrl C) and Paste (Ctrl V) the code
into Network eManager.

CAUTION! Be careful not to copy any blank spaces, either at the beginning or at the end of the
code

• Maintain System Site Info can be used to update site information for maintenance reminders.
• Email the file to technicians by entering up to four email addresses and clicking Submit.
• Configuration Details can be viewed by clicking on the link.
• Click Return to generate another code or click the left navigation bar for other options.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 3-5

 Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
License Code Generation, Inquiry and Summary for Dealers and National Accounts

License Inquiry
1. Click on License Codes. A drop-down box appears - click Inquiries.

3-6 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
License Code Generation, Inquiry and Summary for Dealers and National Accounts

2. You can inquire on the Serial # OR MAC Address. Click Submit.

3. The License Display Page displays all information for the generation. By clicking on the down arrow in the Date
Box and highlighting a date, the generation for that date displays, or enter the Order # and click Submit (see
next page).
• Configuration Details can be viewed by clicking on the link.
• Maintain System Site Info can be used to update site information that is used for maintenance
reminders.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 3-7

 Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
License Code Generation, Inquiry and Summary for Dealers and National Accounts

Licenses generated from the order display as follows. Click on the red Generation Time to display details.

Open License Summary

1. Click on License Codes and click on Open License Summary.

3-8 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
License Code Generation, Inquiry and Summary for Dealers and National Accounts

2. Search by any option or simply check the Search All box and click Search.
• To view the license use HTML format.
• To save to another file use the XLS format.

3. Find the license you want and click on the red Part Num. Click Expand Orders Lists to see all order numbers.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 3-9

 Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
MAS License Generation, Inquiry and Summary for Dealers and National Accounts

MAS License Generation, Inquiry and Summary for

Dealers and National Accounts
Important! Pop-Up Blockers should be disabled before beginning this process.

1. Click on License Codes and in the drop-down box click on Generation.

Make the following entries:

• Select the Product Line

• Select the Generation Type - For National Account check the National Account box
• Enter the Order #
• Enter the Serial # OR the MAC Address
• Click Set Software Version

3-10 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
MAS License Generation, Inquiry and Summary for Dealers and National Accounts

2. Select the features to apply to the system. The required minimum software version is automatically populated
based on the features selected. Click Submit.

3. You are returned to the License Code Generation screen with the software version populated.

Click Submit.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 3-11

 Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
MAS License Generation, Inquiry and Summary for Dealers and National Accounts

4. When a license is generated for a version greater than the last license generated, a warning displays asking if
you have upgraded your software. If you answer Yes, you continue with the generation; a No takes you back to
Select Version.

CAUTION! Once this version has been generated, you CANNOT go back to a lower version,
nor can you regenerate a lower version

Click Continue.

5. This displays the Purchased quantity, Available quantity, Serial # and MAC Address. Enter the Activate Qty (for
National Accounts, the Activate Qty is automatically filled and cannot be changed). The Site Description and
Install Instructions are for your information only.

Click Submit.

3-12 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
MAS License Generation, Inquiry and Summary for Dealers and National Accounts

6. Enter the End User Site information (* are required fields) and click Continue.

7. The License Agreement displays for you to read and agree. Click Finalize.

8. The License Display Page displays all information for the generation. Copy (Ctrl C) and Paste (Ctrl V) the code
into Network eManager.

Important! Be careful not to copy any blank spaces, either at the beginning or the end of the code.

• Maintain System Site Info can be used to update site information for maintenance reminders.
• Email the file to technicians by entering up to four email addresses and clicking Submit.
• Configuration Details can be viewed by clicking on the link.
• Click Return to generate another code or click the left navigation bar for other options.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 3-13

 Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
MAS License Generation, Inquiry and Summary for Dealers and National Accounts

Transfer License
1. Click on License Codes and in the drop-down box click Inquires.

2. In the License Code Inquiry screen (shown next):

• Select the Product Line.
• Select the Generation For Replacement.

3-14 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
MAS License Generation, Inquiry and Summary for Dealers and National Accounts

• For National Account, check the National Account box.

• Enter the old Serial # OR the MAC Address.
• Enter the new replacement Serial # OR the MAC Address.

Click Submit.

3. In the next screen, License Code Generator, enter the End User Site information (* are required fields).

Click Continue.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 3-15

 Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
MAS License Generation, Inquiry and Summary for Dealers and National Accounts

4. The License Agreement displays for you to read and agree.

Click Finalize.

5. The License Display Page displays all information for the generation. This page explains that a transfer was
generated from one serial # to another.

• Email the file to technicians by entering up to four email addresses and clicking Submit.
• Click Return to generate another code or click the left navigation bar for other options.

3-16 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
MAS License Generation, Inquiry and Summary for Dealers and National Accounts

License Inquiry
1. Click on License Codes and in the drop-down box click on Inquiries.

2. You can inquire on the Serial # OR MAC Address.

Click Submit.

3. The License Display Page displays all information for the generation. By clicking on the down arrow in the Date
Box and highlighting a date, the generation for that date displays.Or you can enter the Order # (shown next
page).
• Configuration Details can be viewed by clicking on the link.
• Maintain System Site Info can be used to update site information that is used for maintenance
reminders.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 3-17

 Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
MAS License Generation, Inquiry and Summary for Dealers and National Accounts

Click Submit.

Licenses generated from the order number display as shown below. Click on the red Generation Time to dis-
play details.

3-18 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
MAS License Generation, Inquiry and Summary for Dealers and National Accounts

Open License Summary

1. Click on License Codes and in the drop down box click on Open License Summary.

2. Search by any option or simply check the Search All box and click Search.
• To view the license use HTML format.
• To save to another file use the XLS format.

3. Find the license you want and click on the red Part Num. Click Expand Orders Lists to see all order numbers.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 3-19

 Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
ACD Dongle License

ACD Dongle License

Important! Pop-Up Blockers must be disabled before beginning this process.

National Accounts License Codes can be generated by either the originating or installing dealer. To generate a
license code, you need the Order # for the license and the Serial # of the ACD Dongle.
• Order # – An Order # is issued to your dealership for every order placed. You need to obtain the
applicable license order #. The order MUST be placed on FYI, passed through credit and the invoice
generated before the license can be generated (please allow 24 hours).
• Serial # - The Serial # is located on a sticker on the dongle. FYI License Code Generation Help Desk:
(800) 645-6078.

1. Click on License Codes. A drop-down box appears.

3-20 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
ACD Dongle License

2. Click on Generation. The first License Code Generator screen appears. Enter the information as follows:
• Choose Product Line: ACD Dongle
• License Generation Type: Standard Generation
• Check National Account if applicable
• Enter the Order #
• Enter the ACD Dongle Serial #

Click Submit.

If a serial number is entered that does not belong to your dealership, the warning below will display. If you re-
enter the serial number it will allow you to continue (however, once the license has been generated, it CAN-
NOT be returned or refunded).

3. Click Cancel to go back, or re-enter the Serial # and click Continue.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 3-21

 Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
ACD Dongle License

Another License Code Generator page displays giving the number of licenses Purchased, licenses still Avail-
able, Current Cfg and Max Cfg.

4. Enter the quantity of licenses to be activated under Activate Qty.

Note If this is a National Account, the Activate Qty field is already populated and cannot be altered.

Site Description and Install Instructions fields are designed for you to enter information to assist you.

Click Submit.

5. Enter the End User Site information ( are required fields).Click Continue.

3-22 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
ACD Dongle License

6. Verify information and click Finalize.

7. The License Agreement will display for you to read and agree. Click Finalize.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 3-23

 Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
ACD Dongle License

8. The License Display Page displays all information for the generation. Enter the required information as follows:

• Copy (Ctrl C) and Paste (Ctrl V) the code into Network eManager.

Important! Be careful not to copy any blank spaces, either at the beginning or the end of the code.

• For TASKE License, click Download License File or Maintain System Site Info can be used to update
site information for maintenance reminders.
• Email the file to technicians by entering up to four email addresses and clicking Submit.
• Configuration Details can be viewed by clicking on the link.
• Click Return to generate another code or click the left navigation bar for other options.

3-24 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
ACD Dongle License

R5 License Generation for CIX100, CIX670 and CIX1200

Upgrading from R4 to R5 software is a straight forward process. To upgrade from R3 to R5 you must first upgrade
from R3 to R4.

To generate a Release 5 license for a CIX100, CIX670 or CIX1200:

1. Login to the Toshiba FYI web site.
2. Select License Codes -> Generation.
3. Enter your dealer number.
4. Under Choose Product Line select 100, 200, 670 or 1200.
5. Under Select Version choose 5.x.
6. Then select Standard Generation or Generation for Replacements (must be same processor type).
Note Please notice that the new license string will have additional characters. You must use Network
eManager 5 or later to apply the license to the system.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 3-25

 Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
Strata CIX System Licenses

Strata CIX System Licenses

These are the licenses are for the Strata CIX system. Licenses for the MAS and the ACD dongle are in following
sections.

IP5022-SD-LIC
Bundle includes 10-button IP telephone with 4-line LCD, LIC-CIX-IP PORT Endpoint License, AC local power
supply. Color - Black. Telephone uses 1-channel on MIPU or LIPU/LIPS in Strata CIX100/200/670, or 1-channel on
GIPU8, MIPU or GIPH in CIX40.

IP5122-SDC-LIC
Bundle includes 10-button IP telephone with analog loop start line interface for connection to local Central Office
and 4-line Backlit LCD, LIC-CIX-IP PORT Endpoint License, AC local power supply. Color - Black. Telephone uses
1-channel on MIPU or LIPU/LIPS in Strata CIX100/200/670, or 1-channel on GIPU8 or MIPU or GIPH in CIX40.

IP5122-SD-LIC
Bundle includes 10-button IP telephone with 4-line Backlit LCD, LIC-CIX-IP PORT Endpoint License, AC local
power supply. Color - Black. Telephone uses 1-channel on MIPU or LIPU/LIPS in Strata CIX100/200/670, or 1-
channel on GIPU8 or MIPU or GIPH in CIX40.

IP5131-SDL-LIC
Bundle includes 10-button IP telephone with 9-line Backlit LCD and key labels, LIC-CIX-IP PORT Endpoint
License, AC local power supply. Color - Black. Telephone uses 1-channel on MIPU or LIPU/LIPS in Strata CIX100/
200/670, or 1-channel on GIPU8 or MIPU or GIPH in CIX40.

IP5132-SD-LIC
Bundle includes 20-button IP telephone with 4-line Backlit LCD, LIC-CIX-IP PORT Endpoint License, AC local
power supply. Color - Black. Telephone uses 1-channel on MIPU or LIPU/LIPS in Strata CIX100/200/670, or 1-
channel on GIPU8 or MIPU or GIPH in CIX40.

LIC100S-8 PORTS
8-port Line/Station License CIX100S (17-24/25-32 Ports).
Required for CO Line/Station Ports 17-24 and 25-32 on a ACTU2A-S or ACTU3A-S processor.

LIC100-STRATA N
CIX/CTX100 Strata Net Networking Application License.
One per CTX or CIX 100 system (node) required to network multiple systems using Strata Net networking.

LIC1200STRATA N
CIX1200 Strata Net system license.
Enables unlimited Strata Net channels on a CIX1200 system. Valid on HCTU1A processor only.

LIC-1-DP5022SDM
License to allow DP5022-SDM to operate on CIX100, CIX200, CIX670.
The DP5022-SDM operates on CIX40 without this license. This license is required for DP5022-SDM to operate on
CIX100, CIX100-S, CIX200 and CIX670 systems. This license can only be applied to aforementioned systems
running CIX Rls 5.1 or higher software. It must be ordered on FYI and applied to the CIX processor as any other
CIX license.

3-26 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
Strata CIX System Licenses

LIC-2 GVPH
2-port GVPH License for Strata CIX40 Systems.
Enables 2 additional VM ports on a GVPH1A Voice Processing card. The CIX40 software enables 4 GVPH ports by
default, the LIC-2 GVPH is used to enable 2 additional ports with each license up to 8 GVPH ports maximum. The
LIC-2 GVPH can only be applied to CIX40 processors with R5.1 software and above. This license can be used on
CIX40 R1 and R2 cabinets with R5.1 software. This license can be used on GVPH1A V1 and V2 circuit cards.

LIC-2 LVMU
2-port LVMU License for Strata CIX Systems.
Enables 2 additional VM ports on an LVMU1A card. The CIX R4.2 processor enables 2 LVMU ports by default, the
LIC-2 LVMU is used to enable 2 additional port with each license up to 8 LVMU ports maximum. The LIC-2 LVMU
can be only applied to CIX processors with R4.2 software and above.

LIC200-STRATA N
CIX200 Strata Net Networking Application License.
One per CIX 200 system (node) required to network multiple systems using Strata Net networking.

LIC-2P-VM-MAS-H
Two Voice Mail Port License for MicroMAS with HMP 3.0.
Increments the voice mail port allotment of a MicroMAS-H equipped with Dialogic Host Media Processing (HMP)
Version 3.0. MAS systems running HMP 1.1 must first install HMP 3.0 prior to applying this license. Failure to do so
will cause a disruption in service.

LIC-4 BASIC
4-port CO Line/Station License for Strata CIX/CTX Systems.
Required for every 4 ports used for CO lines, DKT or SLT stations, Attendant Consoles, voice mail ports, Strata Net
channels, and ACD announcement ports beyond the ports bundled with the system processor.

LIC-4 DTMF
4-port DTMF Receiver License for Strata CIX/CTX Systems.
Required for activation of 4 DTMF receiver ports number 5 and above on system. Maximum is determined by the
CTU card in use.

LIC-4P-VM-MAS
Four Voice Mail Port License for MAS with HMP 3.0.
Increments the voice mail port allotment of a Media Application Server equipped with Dialogic Host Media
Processing (HMP) Version 3.0. MAS systems running HMP 1.1 must first install HMP 3.0 prior to applying this
license. Failure to do so will cause a disruption in service.

LIC670-STRATA N
CIX/CTX670 Strata Net Networking Application License.
One per CTX or CIX 670 system (node) required to network multiple systems using Strata Net networking.

LIC-ACD
ACD Server License for Strata CIX and CTX Systems.
Required to activate ACD support in a Strata CIX/CTX system (one license is included in ACD turnkey packages
and software packages). One license is required for each CIX system in the network ACD system. Also required for
Tracer and Talkument system if ACD or Net Phone is not installed.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 3-27

 Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
Strata CIX System Licenses

LIC-ATT
Attendant Console License for Strata CIX and CTX Systems.
One license is required to activate each Attendant Console on a Strata CIX or CTX system. This license is also
bundled with Toshiba supplied Attendant Console PCs CIX-IPATTCONS and CTX-ATTCONSOLE2 so it is NOT
necessary to order the LIC-ATT for these parts. LIC-ATT should only to be ordered separately when using a Dealer
or customer supplied PC for the Attendant Console. This license can be used for the Attendant Console with an IP
or Digital talk path. Attendant Console Software and Documentation is available for download on TSD FYI.

LIC-CIX-FF
FeatureFlex license for Strata CIX.
Strata CIX license to activate FeatureFlex. Requires one per CIX system to run FeatureFlex applications.

LIC-CIX-IP PORT
IP Endpoint License for Strata CIX.
IP Endpoint License required per IP telephone connected to LIPU/S-X.

LIC-CIXR3.1-VCS
VCS System License for CIX R3.1.
VCS system license for CIX R3.1 system. This license can be used with CIX R4.0 but R4.0 customers are
encouraged to upgrade to R4.1. This license is not needed with CIX R.4.1 or later release.

LIC-CIX-SIPT-CH
License for one SIP Trunk channel.
One required for each SIP Trunk. SIP Trunk licenses are supported by CIX40, CIX100, CIX100-S, CIX200 and
CIX670 and requires CIX R5.1 MS18 or higher software. SIP Trunking is only supported by the MIPU card with
version MIPU01_07 or higher. eManager R5.1 A07 or higher is required to program SIP Trunking.

LIC-CIX-STRN-CH
License for one Strata Net Channel.
One required for each Strata Net channel when the Strata Net system license (LIC100-SRTATA-N, LIC200-
SRTATA-N, LIC670-SRTATA-N) is not used. Strata Net Channel licenses are supported by CIX40, CIX100,
CIX100-S, CIX200 and CIX670 and requires CIX R4.1 software. Note: All CIX40 systems support LIC-CIX-STRN-
CH licenses but do not support Strata Net System licenses.

LIC-HMP3.0-UPG
HMP 3.0 Upgrade System License.
One time system license to upgrade any Media Application Server to HMP 3.0. This license must be purchased in
order to upgrade an existing HMP 1.1 equipped system to HMP 3.0. After May 2, 2008, all installed MAS systems,
that require additional voice mail or voice assistance ports, must be first upgraded to HMP 3.0 before applying
additional port licenses. This applies to 1U and 2U Standard MAS systems and MicroMAS-H platforms. MicroMAS-
D platforms DO NOT require this upgrade.

LIC-SER PORT
Serial Port License required for 2nd BSIS Port on Strata CIX/CTX.
One each required to activate serial ports 2~4 in Strata CTX and CIX systems (license for serial port 1 included
with BSIS).

3-28 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
MAS Licenses

LIC-SOFTIPT
License for one SoftIPT user on Strata CIX/CTX systems.
1 required for each SoftIPT application interfaced to the Strata CTX or CIX. 1 LIPU-X or LIPS-X or BIPU-M port
required for each SoftIPT. Requires IP endpoint license when connected to LIPU/S-X.

LIC-VCSBASIC5
VCS Starter - 1 Server License (No Charge), 5 User License.
This includes the VCS Server license and 5 User licenses. Add additional User licenses as needed.

LIC-VCSTRIAL
VCS 90 Day Trial License - 1 Server License, 512 User Licenses.
90 Day period starts from the day the license key is issued from FYI. You can purchase and activate permanent
server and user licenses before the trial license expires.

LIC-VCSUSER1
1 VCS User License.
1 additional VCS User License beyond the 5 included with the VCS Server license.

LIC-VCSUSER10
10 VCS User License.
10 additional VCS User Licenses beyond the 5 included with the VCS Server license.

LIC-VCSUSER20
20 VCS User License.
20 additional VCS User Licenses beyond the 5 included with the VCS Server license.

MAS Licenses
LICMAS-ACDBRA
MAS Advanced Partner Program ACD Demo SW.
Includes ACD software with 2-port Voice Assistant and HMP license (LICMAS-ACDBR2), Taske Contact demo
license (LICMAS-TASDEMO) and LIC-ACD. Requires Media Application Server with Stratagy voice mail.

LICMAS-ACDIVR
MAS OAISYS IVR Option with Database Assistant & Text Reader.
Provides IVR operation with customer's existing ODBC database. Requires custom development quote from Com-
puter Telephony Solutions, Inc. to create the IVR application. Requires Strata ACD for MAS.

LICMAS-ACDVA2
MAS VA port license with HMP license.
1 VA port license and 1 HMP license used for announcement. Requires MAS based ACD system.

LICMAS-APPLSWB
MAS ACD Application SW Pack.
Strata ACD application SW package includes LICMAS-APPLSW2 (Basic 10 agent,1 VA port/HMP, 10 NetPhone)
and CIX license (LIC-ACD). Requires Media Application Server with Stratagy Voice Mail system.

LICMAS-BAADDL1
MAS Single basic agent license. One additional basic agent license

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 3-29

 Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
MAS Licenses

LICMAS-CALLRUTR
MAS Call Router License for Strata ACD. Provides advanced call routing capabilities for ACD or CTI applications.
Requires Strata ACD for MAS.

LICMAS-CHATSEAT
MAS Chat Text Messaging License.
Provides Text Messaging capabilities. Requires Strata ACD for MAS. One license is required for each user.

LICMAS-D-2P-UPG
MicroMAS-D 2 port upgrade. Upgrades a MicroMAS-D by 2 voice mail ports. Dialogic boards sold separately.

LICMAS-DACDBRA
MAS ACD Demo SW - Branches for Micro MAS-D.
Includes ACD software with 2-port Voice Assistant (LICMAS-ACDBR1), Taske Contact Demo (LICMAS-TAS-
DEMO) and LIC-ACD. Requires Media Application Server with Stratagy voice mail and available ports on Dialogic
D4PCI card.

LICMAS-DACDVA
MAS VA port for Micro MAS-D.
One Voice Assistant license for MicroMAS-D system required per announcement port. Requires Strata ACD appli-
cation package (Strata ACD Server or OAISYS Net Server).

LICMAS-DAPPLSWB
MAS ACD Application SW Pack for Micro MAS-D.
Strata ACD application SW package includes LICMAS-DAPPLSW1 (Basic 10 agent,1 VA port, 10 NetPhone) and
CIX license (LIC-ACD). Requires Media Application Server with Stratagy Voice Mail system and available D4 PCI
card.

LICMAS-ENADDL1
MAS Single enhanced agent license. One additional enhanced agent license

LICMAS-FF-ACLK
FeatureFlex application license for FF Alarm Clock.
Application license to run FeatureFlex Alarm Clock application to provide the alarm clock function on the DKT and
IPT phone. Requires one per system.

LICMAS-FF-APBD1
FeatureFlex application license for FF Application Bundle #1.
FeatureFlex application license bundle that includes FF Call Monitor, FF Call Return, FF Alarm Clock, FF One
Number Access, and FF Call Screen. Requires one per system.

LICMAS-FF-CMON
FeatureFlex application license for FF Call Monitor.
Application license to run FeatureFlex Call Monitor application which enables the user to listen to the voice mes-
sage being recorded by the caller. Requires one per system. Requires MAS or MicroMAS-H.

LICMAS-FF-CRET
FeatureFlex application license for FF Call Return.
Application license to run FeatureFlex Call Return application which enables the user to respond to the caller while
listening to the message and return to the voice mail. Requires one per system.

3-30 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
MAS Licenses

LICMAS-FF-CSCR
FeatureFlex application license for FF Call Screen.
Application license to run FeatureFlex Call Screen application where the call is screened selectively by the caller
ID. Requires one per system.

LICMAS-FF-HDSK
FeatureFlex application license for FF HotDesk.
Application license to run FeatureFlex HotDesk application where the shared office user can use any phone for the
user's published directory number. Requires one per system.

LICMAS-FF-ONUM
FeatureFlex application license for FF One Number Access.
Application license to run FeatureFlex One Number Access application where the system contacts multiple desti-
nations sequentially to reach the party. Requires one per system.

LICMAS-FFOPEN
FeatureFlex open license.
FeatureFlex runtime license to run 3rd party or plain script FeatureFlex applications. Not required for Toshiba Fea-
tureFlex applications. Requires one per system.

LICMAS-FF-PCH
FeatureFlex application license for FF Personal Call Handler.
Promotion price is valid through December 31, 2008.

LICMAS-FF-SRNG
FeatureFlex application license for FF Simultaneous Ring.
Application license to run FeatureFlex Simultaneous application where the incoming call rings both the desk phone
and one more phone such as cell phone, specified by the user. Requires MAS or MicroMAS-H.

LICMAS-FF-SUPD
FeatureFlex application license for FF Security Code Update.
Application license to run FeatureFlex Security Code Update application that prompts user for the new security
code periodically to provide the better security.

LICMAS-FG-FAX
MAS Fax Feature Group License.
Enables the fax feature on all MAS systems. Actual number of available fax ports predicated by what the installed
fax hardware (e.g. fax modem boards or D/4PCIU-F) supports.

LICMAS-INSAP10
MAS Insight for application pack.
Insight-CIX for 10 agent. Includes one supervisor license. An agent can be added by INSIGHT-APBAG1. Can be
upgraded to INSIGHT Plus by appropriate quantity of LICMAS-INSPUP1.

LICMAS-INSBAG1
MAS additional basic agent for Insight application pack.
One Insight basic agent license to be included in the realtime display and reporting for MAS Insight for application
pack.

LICMAS-INSIGHT
MAS Insight license.
Includes the license to activate Insight for MAS. Requires Strata ACD for MAS.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 3-31

 Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
MAS Licenses

LICMAS-INSITSUB
MAS additional Supervisor license for Insight Plus.
Includes the license to activate additional one Supervisor for Insight for MAS. Requires Insight Plus for MAS.

LICMAS-INSITUPG
MAS Insight upgrade to Plus for Strata ACD.
Includes the license to upgrade to Insight Plus. Requires Insight for MAS.

LICMAS-INSPAG1
MAS additional Plus agent for Insight Application pack.
One agent license to be included in the realtime display and reporting for MAS Insight Plus for application pack.

LICMAS-INSPUP1
MAS agent upgrade to Insight Plus.
Upgrades a basic Insight agent to MAS Insight Plus agent. All basic agents need to be upgraded to Insight Plus.

LICMAS-INVIEW1
MAS inView client license for one user.
Includes the license to activate one concurrent inView client.

LICMAS-INVIEW10
MAS inView client license for ten users.
Includes the license to activate ten concurrent inView clients.

LICMAS-INVIEW20
MAS inView client license for twenty users.
Includes the license to activate twenty concurrent inView clients.

LICMAS-INVIEW30
MAS inView client license for thirty users.
Includes the license to activate thirty concurrent inView clients.

LICMAS-INVIEW40
MAS inView client license for forty users.
Includes the license to activate forty concurrent inView clients.

LICMAS-INVIEW5
MAS inView client license for five users.
Includes the license to activate five concurrent inView clients.

LICMAS-INVIEW50
MAS inView client license for fifty users.
Includes the license to activate fifty concurrent inView clients.

LICMAS-NETPHACD
MAS ACD add-on to Net Phone package.
Includes Strata ACD system with 10 basic agents and no VA port. This is only applicable an add-on to a Net Phone
system (LICMAS-NETPHSW). Add necessary number of VA port separately (LICMAS-ACDVA2/LICMAS-
DACDVA).

3-32 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
MAS Licenses

LICMAS-NETPHSWB
MAS Net Phone server and 10 client license.
Includes the CIX license (LIC-ACD) and Net Server and 10 client license (LICMAS-NETPHSW). Requires the
MAS. MicroMAS-H or MicroMAS-D.

LICMAS-NETPH-VO
MAS voice plug-in for NetPhone.
Voice plug-in license to support VoIP for NetPhone for MAS. Requires the NetPhone license (LICMAS-NETSEAT)
as well as IP end point license (LIC-CIX-IP-PORT).

LICMAS-NETSEAT
MAS NetPhone and chat license.
Provides desktop call control, PC phone functionality, and Chat text messaging capabilities. Requires Strata ACD
for MAS. One license is required for each user.

LICMAS-NETST10
MAS Net Phone 10 client license pack.
Includes Net Phone 10 client license. Requires the MAS Strata ACD system or Net Phone system.

LICMASSFGTTSETI
Text-To-Speech Feature Group for MAS.
This Feature Group for the Media Application Server uses ETI Eloquence TTS to provide 2 channels of Text To
Speech for reading email messages. REQUIRES Release 4 Stratagy ES/iES32 system software and the Unified
Messaging (UM) Feature Group to be installed. Max. 8 Channels.

LICMAS-SUP-OAI
MAS Maintenance support.
Covers annual ongoing support for Call Router, Net Phone, and Chat per MAS after the warranty period. This
includes all software upgrades and technical support during the covered period. Specify number of years. Please
contact Customer Service to place an order.

LICMAS-TASAGENT
MAS TASKE Contact Agent. License to add an agent in TASKE reporting for MAS.

LICMAS-TASAGNTP
TASKE Contact agent for promo bundle.
License to add an agent in TASKE reporting. Available only when ordered with the Taske promo bundle (LICMAS-
TASPROMO). Valid through March 31, 2009.

LICMAS-TASBASEP
MAS TASKE Contact system.
TASKE Contact software package includes 20 agents, 1 supervisor, 1 DisplayCentral, 1 Desktop and 1 year free
upgrades/tech support. Valid through March 31, 2009.

LICMAS-TASCONA
MAS Taske Contact maintenance - Per Agent.
Annual maintenance for ongoing support and free upgrades for TASKE for MAS. Required LICMAS-TASCONB.
The quantity must match with the number of licensed agents. If the system is out of maintenance for more than 3
months, LICMAS-TASCONR must be purchased and activated at the same time. NOTE: Taske maintenance parts
are now manual order items and the orders must be processed by a Customer Service Representative (CSR).
Download the TASKE Maintenance Order Form from FYI > Tools > Forms > Miscellaneous. Simply fill out the form
and send to a CSR.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 3-33

 Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
MAS Licenses

LICMAS-TASCONB
MAS Taske Contact maintenance - Base Renewal.
Annual maintenance for ongoing support and free upgrades for smaller sites (guideline: less than 150 agents) for
TASKE for MAS. If the system is out of maintenance for more than 3 months, LICMAS-TASCONR must be pur-
chased and activated at the same time. NOTE: Taske maintenance parts are now manual order items and the
orders must be processed by a Customer Service Representative (CSR). Download the TASKE Maintenance
Order Form from FYI > Tools > Forms > Miscellaneous. Simply fill out the form and send to a CSR.

LICMAS-TASCONR
MAS Taske Contact maintenance - Re-enlist Site.
Order 1 if the maintenance for the license on your site has been expired for at least 3 months for TASKE for MAS.
Must be activated with LICMAS-TASCONA/TASCONB. NOTE: Taske maintenance parts are now manual order
items and the orders must be processed by a Customer Service Representative (CSR). Download the TASKE
Maintenance Order Form from FYI > Tools > Forms > Miscellaneous. Simply fill out the form and send to a CSR.

LICMAS-TASCONS
MAS Taske Contact maintenance - Per Site.
Annual maintenance for ongoing support and free upgrades. Recommended for larger TASKE Site (guideline:
more than 150 agents) in lieu of the Base plus agent model for TASKE for MAS. If the system is out of maintenance
more that 3 months, LICMAS-TASCONR must be purchased and activated at the same time. NOTE: Taske mainte-
nance parts are now manual order items and the orders must be processed by a Customer Service Representative
(CSR). Download the TASKE Maintenance Order Form from FYI > Tools > Forms > Miscellaneous. Simply fill out
the form and send to a CSR.

LICMAS-TASDC1
MAS Taske Display Central.
Single Display Central license for Taske Contact for MAS to show realtime statistics and/or external data on the
computer screen such as large LCD/plasm display. May be used as the replacement of wall mount display.

LICMAS-TASDESUP
MAS Taske Desktop Advance upgrade per Taske Desktop.
Taske Desktop upgrade to Advance for screen pop and other automated tasks. Quantity must be same as the
number of Taske Desktop license.

LICMAS-TASECLI
MAS Taske Essential Supervisor client.
Taske Essential supervisor client license for realtime status display and reporting

LICMAS-TASEEXTN
MAS Taske Essential Extension. Adds 50 extension to Taske Essential

LICMAS-TASENTER
MAS TASKE Enterprise Client Software for MAS.
Allows the supervisor to manage multiple contact centers simultaneously. Requires TASKE Contact for MAS at
each site and a TCP/IP network connection.

LICMAS-TASESSB
MAS Taske Essential Base.
Taske Essential Base license to support up to 50 extensions with 1 supervisor client license. Requires ACD or Net
Phone system.

3-34 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
MAS Licenses

LICMAS-TASESUP
MAS Taske Essential annual maintenance.
Taske Essential annual maintenance service allows the software upgrade and the technical support after the initial
year

LICMAS-TASLBWF
MAS TASKE Contact Left Bank integration.
Provides an interface between TASKE Contact and Left Bank Solutions Monet for MAS. Used to transfer historical
data for forecasting and scheduling and real-time data for agent adherence.

LICMAS-TASLICUP
MAS license for the latest release of Taske Contact or Reporter.
Retrieves the license for the latest version of Taske Contact or Taske Reporter software. The Taske system must
be under the valid maintenance.

LICMAS-TASMTP
MAS Taske Reporter promo.
Taske Reporter, web based reporting promo license includes 20 agents and 1 supervisor. Requires Strata MAS
ACD or Voice mail system. Valid through October 30, 2008.

LICMAS-TASMTSUP
MAS myTaskeReporter additional supervisor.
Additional supervisor client license for myTaskeReporter for MAS.

LICMAS-TASMTUPP
MAS Taske Reporter promo upgrade to Contact.
Taske Reporter promo (LICMAS-TASMTP) upgrade to Taske Contact Promo package. Valid through October 30,
2008.

LICMAS-TASNETP
MAS Taske Contact Net Phone/Tracer integration.
Adds Net Phone/Oaisys Tracer integration capability to Taske Contact so that Taske web client can show the ACD
silent monitor status and control the playback of OAISYS Tracer.

LICMAS-TASPROMO
TASKE Contact promotion for MAS.
Promo package includes LICMAS-TASBASEP (TASKE Contact software package includes 20 agents, 1 supervi-
sor, 1 Display Central, 1 Desktop and 1 year free upgrades/tech support). Additional agents at the discounted price
(LICMAS-TASAGNTP) may be purchased when it is ordered with this promotion part number. Valid through March
31, 2009.

LICMAS-TASSIGN
MAS TASKE Contact Desktop.
Concurrent user license for an agent to view customizable real-time contact center information on the agents desk-
top for TASKE for MAS.

LICMAS-TASSITE
MAS Taske Contact Site license.
TASKE Contact with 360 agents. Also includes 2 supervisor user license, 1 DisplayCentral user license, 5 Desktop
user license and 12 Months Total Care maintenance. Software only. Requires a dedicated computer.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 3-35

 Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
MAS Licenses

LICMAS-TASSUP1
MAS TASKE Supervisor Client, 1 license for MAS.
Concurrent user license for monitoring, reporting, database searches, database administration, and forecasting for
TASKE for MAS.

LICMAS-TASSUP10
MAS TASKE Supervisor Client, 10 license for MAS.
Supervisor client license package including 10 supervisors for TASKE for MAS.

LICMAS-TASSUP3
MAS TASKE Supervisor Client, 3 license.
Supervisor client license package including 3 supervisors for TASKE for MAS.

LICMAS-TASSUP5
MAS TASKE Supervisor Client, 5 license.
Supervisor client license package including 5 supervisors for TASKE for MAS.

LICMAS-TASSUPMT
MAS myTaskeReporter Total Care support.
Annual maintenance for ongoing support and free upgrade for myTaskeReporter after the initial first year warranty.

LICMASUM10SEATS
10 Seat Unified Messaging Upgrade for MAS.
Upgrade license for the Media Application Server available on FYI. Requires UM Feature Group. Unified Messag-
ing Seat Upgrades are added incrementally in the Stratagy ES. The UM Feature Group includes 5 UM client seats.
With LICMASUM10SEATS, total UM seats would be 15 (5 + 10).

LICMAS-UM-1SEAT
Single Seat Unified Messaging Upgrade for MAS.
Upgrade license for the Media Application Server available on FYI. Requires UM Feature Group. Unified Messag-
ing Seat Upgrades are added incrementally in the Stratagy ES. The UM Feature Group includes 5 UM client seats.
With LICMAS-UM-1SEAT, total UM seats would be 6 (5 + 1).

LICMASUM25SEATS
25 Seat Unified Messaging Upgrade for MAS.
Upgrade license for the Media Application Server available on FYI. Requires UM Feature Group. Unified Messag-
ing Seat Upgrades are added incrementally in the Stratagy ES. The UM Feature Group includes 5 UM client seats.
With LICMASUM25SEATS, total UM seats would be 30 (5 + 25).

LICMASUM50SEATS
50 Seat Unified Messaging Upgrade for MAS.
Upgrade license for the Media Application Server available on FYI. Requires UM Feature Group. Unified Messag-
ing Seat Upgrades are added incrementally in the Stratagy ES. The UM Feature Group includes 5 UM client seats.
With LICMASUM50SEATS, total UM seats would be 55 (5 + 50).

LICMASUMUNLIMT
Unlimited Seat Unified Messaging Upgrade for MAS.
Upgrade license for the Media Application Server available on FYI. Requires UM Feature Group.

3-36 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
ACD Dongle

LICMAS-UPGREN1
MAS upgrade single basic agent to enhanced agent.
Upgrade one basic agent to one enhanced agent. Quantity must match with the number of existing basic agents as
all basic agents must be upgraded to enhanced agents.

LICMASUPTTSETI
2 Channel upgrade for Text To Speech for MAS.
Upgrade license for the Media Application Server available on FYI. Requires prior installation of LICMASF-
GTTSETI. Maximum 8 Channels.

MAS-ACDBR-DPKG
ACD Demo System for Micro MAS-D.
Includes turnkey Strata ACD system with Micro MAS platform, ACD software with 2-port Voice Assistant (LICMAS-
DACDBR1). Taske Contact demo (LICMAS-TASDEMO) with a Dialogic card (SYS-D4PCIUF), and CIX license
(LIC-ACD).

MAS-ACDBR-PKG
Advanced Partner Program ACD Demo System.
Includes turnkey Strata ACD system with Media Application Server platform and ACD software with 2-port Voice
Assistant and HMP license (LICMAS-ACDBR2), Taske Contact demo license (LICMAS-TASDEMO) and ACD
license for CIX (LIC-ACD).

ACD Dongle
CTI-TASKE-LICUP
License for the latest release of Taske Contact or Taske Reporter.
Retrieves the license for the latest version of Taske Contact or Taske Reporter software. The Taske system must
be under the valid maintenance.

ACD-APP-BRA
Advanced Partner Program ACD Demo System - Branches.
Includes turnkey Strata ACD sys w/ PC hardware and ACD software and license w/ 2-port VA (ACD-APP-BR1).

ACD-APPL-SWB
ACD Application SW Pack.
Strata ACD application SW package includes ACD dongle (ACD-STARTER-TOS), ACD-APPL-SW1(Basic 10
agent/1 VA port, 10 NetPhone) and LIC-ACD (CIX license). Requires customer supplied hardware.

ACD-BASC-ADDL1
Single basic agent license.
One additional basic agent license

ACD-CALL RUTR
OAISYS Call Router License for Strata CIX/CTX.
Provides advanced call routing capabilities for ACD or CTI applications. Requires Strata ACD Server or OAISYS
Net Server. One Call Router license required per system.

ACD-CHAT SEAT
OAISYS Chat Text Messaging License for Strata CIX/CTX.
Provides text messaging capabilities. Requires Strata ACD Server or OAISYS Net Server. One Chat license
required for each user.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 3-37

 Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
ACD Dongle

ACD-CT4-SVR
Strata ACD 4-slot (PCI) system.
Tower system equipped with 4 PCI slots, 512MB RAM, 10/100baseT NIC, keyboard and mouse, Windows 2000
Server. Requires ACD software package (ACD-APPL-SWA) and add optional voice boards as desired for ACD or
IVR voice assistant announcement ports. See Sales Bulletin and System 2 Installation Guide for details

ACD-CT8-SVR
Strata ACD 8-slot (PCI) system.
Rackmount system equipped with 8 full size PCI slots, Intel Pentium 4 2.0GHz CPU, 512MB RAM, 10/100 Base-T
Ethernet connection, keyboard and mouse, Windows 2000 Server. Requires ACD software package (ACD-APPL-
SWA) and add necessary number of voice cards for VA announcement or IVR operation.

ACD-D120JCT
12-port PCI analog voice card.
Dialogic 12 port PCI analog voice card to be used for VA port that requires VA port license. Requires full length PCI
slot and is not compatible with PCI-X.

ACD-ENHD-ADDL1
Single enhanced agent license.
One additional enhanced agent license

ACD-IVR
OAISYS IVR Option with Database Assistant & Text Reader.
Provides IVR operation with customer's existing ODBC database. Requires custom development quote from
Computer Telephony Solutions, Inc. to create the IVR application. Requires Strata ACD Server or OAISYS Net
Server.

ACD-NET PH SEAT
OAISYS Net Phone & Chat License for Strata CIX/CTX.
Provides desktop call control, PC phone functionality, and Chat text messaging capabilities. Requires Strata ACD
Server or Net Server. One Net Phone/Chat license required for each user.

ACD-NETPH-VO
Voice plug-in for NetPhone.
Voice plug-in license to support VoIP for NetPhone. Requires the NetPhone license (ACD-NET PH SEAT) as well
as IP end point license (LIC-CIX-IP-PORT).

ACD-STARTER-TOS
Toshiba USB dongle starter kit.
Spare part use only. This kit is usually included in any of ACD/Net Phone bundle part number. ACD starter kit
includes Toshiba USB dongle, CD, and the document.

ACD-UPGR-ENHD1
Upgrade single basic agent to enhanced agent.
Upgrade one basic agent to one enhanced agent. Quantity must match with the number of existing basic agents as
all basic agents must be upgraded to enhanced agents.

ACD-VA-PER PORT
Strata CIX/CTX ACD/IVR Voice Assistant Announcement License.
Requires Strata ACD Server or Net Server. One Voice Assistant license required per announcement port.

3-38 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
ACD Dongle

CIX-AG-ACDSYSVC
CIX ACD System Administrator Guide.
Provides the programming information on the Strata ACD system.

CTI-NETPH-ACD
ACD add-on to Net Phone package.
Includes Strata ACD system with 10 basic agents and 1 VA port. This is only applicable as an add-on to a Net
Phone system (CTI-NETPH-SWB).

LIC-ACD
ACD Server License for Strata CIX and CTX Systems.
Required to activate ACD support in a Strata CIX/CTX system (one license is included in ACD turnkey packages
and software packages). One license is required for each CIX system in the network ACD system. Also required for
Tracer and Talkument system if ACD or Net Phone is not installed.

CTI-NETPH-ACD
ACD add-on to Net Phone package.
Includes Strata ACD system with 10 basic agents and 1 VA port. This is only applicable as an add-on to a Net
Phone system (CTI-NETPH-SWB).

CTI-NETPH-ST10
Net Phone 10 client license pack.
Includes Net Phone 10 client license. Requires the Strata ACD system or Net Phone system.

CTI-NETPH-SWB
Net Phone server and 10 client license.
Includes the CIX license (LIC-ACD), Toshiba dongle (ACD-STARTER-TOS) and Net Server and 10 client license
(CTI-NETPH-SW). Requires the customer provided PC to run the server software.

CTI-SUPP-OAI
Maintenance support.
Covers annual ongoing support for Call Router, Net Phone, and Chat per system (server) after the warranty period.
This includes all software upgrades and technical support during the covered period. Specify number of years.

CTI-TAS-ESSBASE
Taske Essential Base system.
Taske Essential Base license to support up to 50 extensions with 1 supervisor client license. Requires ACD or Net
Phone system.

CTI-TAS-ESSCLI
Taske Essential Supervisor client.
Taske Essential supervisor client license for realtime status display and reporting

CTI-TAS-ESSEXTN
Taske Essential Extension.
Adds 50 extension to Taske Essential

CTI-TAS-ESSSUP
Taske Essential annual maintenance.
Taske Essential annual maintenance service allows the software upgrade and the technical support after the initial
year

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 3-39

 Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
ACD Dongle

CTI-TAS-MTUPP
Taske Reporter promo upgrade to Contact.
Taske Reporter promo (CTI-TASKE-MTP) upgrade to Taske Contact Promo package. Valid through October 30,
2008.

CTI-TASKE-AGENT
TASKE Contact agent license.
License to add an agent in TASKE reporting.

CTI-TASKE-AGNTP
TASKE Contact agent for promo bundle.
License to add an agent in TASKE reporting. Available only when ordered with the Taske promo bundle (CTI-
TASKE-PROMO). Valid through March 31, 2009.

CTI-TASKE-BASEP
TASKE Contact system.
TASKE Contact software package includes 20 agents, 1 supervisor, 1 DisplayCentral, 1 Desktop and 1 year free
upgrades/tech support. Valid through March 31, 2009.

CTI-TASKE-CONV
TASKE Contact conversion from other PBX.
Used to convert an existing site from one PBX to another. The result will be the equivalent number of licensed
seats, Agent Desktops, and Supervisors, an Enterprise Supervisor as the original site.

CTI-TASKE-DC1
Taske Display Central.
Single Display Central license for Taske Contact to show realtime statistics and/or external data on the computer
screen such as large LCD/plasm display. May be used as the replacement of wall mount display.

CTI-TASKE-DESUP
Taske Desktop Advance upgrade per Taske Desktop.
Taske Desktop upgrade to Advance for screen pop and other automated tasks. Quantity must be same as the
number of Taske Desktop license.

CTI-TASKE-ENTER
TASKE Enterprise software license.
Allows the supervisor to manage multiple contact centers simultaneously. Requires TASKE Contact at each site
and a TCP/IP network connection.

CTI-TASKE-LBWF
TASKE Contact Left Bank integration.
Provides an interface between TASKE Contact and Left Bank Solutions Monet. Used to transfer historical data for
forecasting and scheduling and real-time data for agent adherence.

CTI-TASKE-LICUP
License for the latest release of Taske Contact or Taske Reporter.
Retrieves the license for the latest version of Taske Contact or Taske Reporter software. The Taske system must
be under the valid maintenance.

CTI-TASKE-MTP
Taske Reporter promo.

3-40 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
ACD Dongle

Taske Reporter, web based reporting promo license includes 20 agents and 1 supervisor. Requires PC based
Strata ACD system. Valid through October 30, 2008.

CTI-TASKE-MTSUP
myTaskeReporter additional supervisor.
Supervisor client license for myTaskeReporter.

CTI-TASKE-MTUPG
myTaskeReporter upgrade to Taske Contact.
Upgrade from myTaskeReporter (CTI-TASKE-MT) to Taske Contact Base (10 agents, 1 supervisor). Additional
agents and supervisors will require the separate license. Cannot upgrade myTaske Reporter included in the
application package.

CTI-TASKE-NETP
Taske Contact Net Phone/Tracer integration.
Adds Net Phone/Oaisys Tracer integration capability to Taske Contact so that Taske web client can show the ACD
silent monitor status and control the playback of OAISYS Tracer.

CTI-TASKE-PROMO
TASKE Contact promotion.
Promo package includes CTI-TASKE-BASEP (TASKE Contact software package includes 20 agents, 1 supervisor,
1 Display Central, 1 Desktop and 1 year free upgrades/tech support). Additional agents at the discounted price
(CTI-TASKE-AGNTP) may be purchased when it is ordered with this promotion part number. Valid through March
31, 2009.

CTI-TASKE-SIGN
TASKE Contact Desktop license.
Concurrent user license for an agent to view real-time contact center traffic conditions on the agents computer
desktop. It can be customized for each agent and configured to display Queue status information, performance
parameters and other key measures. Thresholds can be applied to each parameter alerting agents to make
informed decisions and meet service level targets.

CTI-TASKE-SITE
Taske Contact Site license.
TASKE Contact with 360 agents. Also includes 2 supervisor user license, 1 DisplayCentral user license, 5 Desktop
user license and 12 Months Total Care maintenance. Software only. Requires a dedicated computer.

CTI-TASKE-SUP1
TASKE Supervisor client license.
Concurrent user license for monitoring, reporting, database searches, database administration, and forecasting.

CTI-TASKE-SUP10
TASKE 10 Supervisor client license.
Supervisor client license package including 10 supervisors.

CTI-TASKE-SUP3
TASKE 3 Supervisor client license pack.
Supervisor client license package including 3 supervisors.

CTI-TASKE-SUP5
TASKE 5 Supervisor client license pack.
Supervisor client license package including 5 supervisors.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 3-41

 Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
ACD Dongle

CTI-TASSUP-CONA
TASKE Contact Agent support.
Annual maintenance for ongoing support and free upgrades per agent. Requires CTI-TASSUP-CONB. The
quantity must match with the number of licensed agents. If the system is out of maintenance for more than 3
months, CTI-TASSUP-CONR must be purchased and activated at the same time. NOTE: Taske maintenance parts
are now manual order items and the orders must be processed by a Customer Service Representative (CSR).
Download the TASKE Maintenance Order Form from FYI > Tools > Forms > Miscellaneous. Simply fill out the form
and send to a CSR.

CTI-TASSUP-CONB
TASKE Contact Base support.
Annual maintenance for ongoing support and free upgrades for smaller sites (guideline: less than 150 agents). If
the system is out of maintenance for more than 3 months, CTI-TASSUP-CONR must be purchased and activated
at the same time. NOTE: Taske maintenance parts are now manual order items and the orders must be processed
by a Customer Service Representative (CSR). Download the TASKE Maintenance Order Form from FYI > Tools >
Forms > Miscellaneous. Simply fill out the form and send to a CSR.

CTI-TASSUP-CONR
TASKE Contact re-enlist site support.
Order 1 if the maintenance for the license on your site has been expired for at least 3 months. Must be activated
with CTI-TASSUP-CONA/CONB. NOTE: Taske maintenance parts are now manual order items and the orders
must be processed by a Customer Service Representative (CSR). Download the TASKE Maintenance Order Form
from FYI > Tools > Forms > Miscellaneous. Simply fill out the form and send to a CSR.

CTI-TASSUP-CONS
TASKE Contact Site support.
Annual maintenance for ongoing support and free upgrades. Recommended for larger TASKE Site (guideline:
more than 150 agents) in lieu of the Base plus agent model. NOTE: Taske maintenance parts are now manual
order items and the orders must be processed by a Customer Service Representative (CSR). Download the
TASKE Maintenance Order Form from FYI > Tools > Forms > Miscellaneous. Simply fill out the form and send to a
CSR.

CTI-TASSUP-MT
myTaskeReporter Total Care support.
Annual maintenance for ongoing support and free upgrade for myTaskeReporter after the initial first year warranty.

CTI-TMENT-2003
OAISYS Talkument Win2003 server upgrade.
Upgrade OAISYS Talkument system from Windows XP to Windows 2003 server. Must be purchased with the new
system or the refresh program. Cannot upgrade the systems in the field. (The license activation code will be sent
by the 3rd party vendor to the e-mail address provided to Toshiba by the dealer at time of order entry in FYI).

CTI-TMENT-DEMO
OAISYS Talkument Dealer Demo System.
OAISYS Talkument Voice Documentation System for dealer demo purpose only and not for resale. Includes PC,
cards and software, equipped for 2T1/PRI interfaces or 48 IP end points with unlimited users. Monitor sold
separately. Requires LIC-ACD if ACD or Net Phone is not installed. VoIP requires a LAN switch with port mirroring
to capture the audio stream of all IP phones. Additional switches with port mirroring may be needed if phones are
connected to different networks. (The license activation code will be sent by the 3rd party vendor to the e-mail
address provided to Toshiba by the dealer at time of order entry in FYI).

3-42 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
ACD Dongle

CTI-TMENT-SOA
OAISYS Talkument Small Office Analog System.
OAISYS Talkument Voice Documentation System includes PC, cards and software, equipped for 8 analog CO
interfaces or 20 IP end points with unlimited users. Includes one year warranty. Monitor sold separately. Requires
LIC-ACD if ACD or Net Phone is not installed. VoIP requires a LAN switch with port mirroring to capture the audio
stream of all IP phones. Additional switches with port mirroring may be needed if phones are connected to different
networks. (The license activation code will be sent by the 3rd party vendor to the e-mail address provided to
Toshiba by the dealer at time of order entry in FYI).

CTI-TMENT-SOF
OAISYS Talkument Small Office System.
OAISYS Talkument Voice Documentation System includes PC, cards and software, equipped for 20 IP end points
with unlimited users. Includes one year warranty. Monitor sold separately. Requires LIC-ACD if ACD or Net Phone
is not installed. VoIP requires a LAN switch with port mirroring to capture the audio stream of all IP phones.
Additional switches with port mirroring may be needed if phones are connected to different networks. (The license
activation code will be sent by the 3rd party vendor to the e-mail address provided to Toshiba by the dealer at time
of order entry in FYI).

CTI-TMENT-SUPG
OAISYS Talkument Small Office Upgrade.
Upgrade for OAISYS Talkument Small Office System to increase from 20 IP end points to 48 IP end points.
Includes one year warranty. Monitor sold separately. (The license activation code will be sent by the 3rd party
vendor to the e-mail address provided to Toshiba by the dealer at time of order entry in FYI).

CTI-TMENT-SYS
OAISYS Talkument system.
OAISYS Talkument Voice Documentation System includes PC, cards and software, equipped for 2T1/PRI
interfaces or 48 IP end points with unlimited users. Includes one year warranty. Monitor sold separately. Requires
LIC-ACD if ACD or Net Phone is not installed. VoIP requires a LAN switch with port mirroring to capture the audio
stream of all IP phones. Additional switches with port mirroring may be needed if phones are connected to different
networks. (The license activation code will be sent by the 3rd party vendor to the e-mail address provided to
Toshiba by the dealer at time of order entry in FYI).

CTI-TRACER-16P
Tracer 16 port voice board. 16 port analog voice board.

CTI-TRACER-16S
Tracer 16 port station board. 16 port digital station board

CTI-TRACER-24A
Tracer 24 port voice board. 24 port analog voice board.

CTI-TRACER-24P
Tracer single T1/PRI voice board. Single T1 or PRI voice board.

CTI-TRACER-24S
Tracer 24 port station board. 24 port digital station board

CTI-TRACER-48P
Tracer dual T1/PRI voice board. Dual T1 or PRI voice board.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 3-43

 Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
ACD Dongle

CTI-TRACER-4P
Tracer 4 port voice board. 4 port analog voice board.

CTI-TRACER-8P
Tracer 8 port voice board. 8 port analog voice board.

CTI-TRACER-8S
Tracer 8 port station board. 8 port digital station board

CTI-TRACER-8SD
Tracer 8 port add-on board.
8 port add-on digital station card to 8 port station card (CTI-TRACER-8S).

CTI-TRACER-AD
Tracer advanced base package.
Free upgrade is available. Please order CTI-TRACER-ST before December 31, 2008, and it is automatically
upgraded to CTI-TRACER-AD.
Tracer Advanced Base Package (max. 96 ports). Requires LIC-ACD if ACD or Net Phone is not installed.
- Rack mount, Pentium 4, 1GB, 4PCI
- Windows XP Pro
- 160GB/250GB HD, up to 30,000 hours
- DVD+RW for archive storage
- 2 Call Manager client license

CTI-TRACER-ADP
Tracer advanced plus package w/dual power supply.
Advanced Plus Package w/dual PS (max. 192 ports). Requires LIC-ACD if ACD or Net Phone is not installed.
-Rack mount, Pentium 4, 1GB, 4 PCI
-Win 2003/SQL Server w/5 licenses
-160GB/320GB HD, up to 52,000 hours
-DVD+RW
-5 Replay Clients
-3 Call Manager client license

CTI-TRACER-ADPR
Tracer advanced plus pkg w/RAID1/dual power supply.
Advanced Plus Package w/dual PS/RAID1 (max. 192 ports). Requires LIC-ACD if ACD or Net Phone is not
installed.
-Rack mount, Pentium 4, 1GB, 4 PCI
-Win 2003/SQL Server w/5 licenses
-160GB/320GB HD, up to 52,000 hours
-DVD+RW
-3 Call Manager client license

3-44 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
ACD Dongle

CTI-TRACER-ADR
Tracer advanced base package w/RAID1.
Free upgrade is available. Please order CTI-TRACER-STR before December 31, 2008, and it is automatically
upgraded to CTI-TRACER-ADR.
Tracer Advanced Base Package (max. 96 ports). Requires LIC-ACD if ACD or Net Phone is not installed.
- Rack mount, Pentium 4, 1GB, 4PCI
- Windows XP Pro
- 160GB/250GB HD, up to 30,000 hours
- DVD+RW for archive storage
- 2 Call Manager client license

CTI-TRACER-CCM
Adds Tracer call center management.
Adds Tracer call center management software to an OAISYS recording appliance (Talkument). The PC platform
and voice cards can be retained. Comes with the matching quantity of Tracer voice port license.

CTI-TRACER-CLI
Tracer Management Client License.
One concurrent additional Tracer Management Client License to provide the user with the live recording monitor
capability and management tools for the reporting and evaluation of the system. Requires Tracer 5 or later.(The
license activation code will be sent by the 3rd party vendor to the e-mail address provided to Toshiba by the dealer
at time of order entry in FYI).

CTI-TRACER-DEA
Tracer advanced dealer demo system - No card.
Tracer Advanced Dealer Demo system up to 30,000 hours of storage. Voice cards needs to be purchased.
Requires LIC-ACD if ACD or Net Phone is not installed.

CTI-TRACER-DES
Tracer standard dealer demo system - No card.
Tracer Standard Dealer Demo system up to 14,000 hours of storage. Voice cards needs to be purchased. Requires
LIC-ACD if ACD or Net Phone is not installed.

CTI-TRACER-INT
Tracer 3rd part application integration option.
Provides the interface to the 3rd party application to integrate Tracer for Recording/Playback control from the
applications such as Predictive Dialer and/or CRM application. (The license activation code will be sent by the 3rd
party vendor to the e-mail address provided to Toshiba by the dealer at time of order entry in FYI).

CTI-TRACER-OUT
Tracer/Talkument Diamond support.
OAISYS Tracer/Talkument Diamond out-of-plan upgrade makes out-of-warranty system eligible for Diamond
support plan. Quantity needs to match with the number of quarters without maintenance, not exceeding 8 quarters.
Per system (server). (The license activation code will be sent by the 3rd party vendor to the e-mail address
provided to Toshiba by the dealer at time of order entry in FYI).

CTI-TRACER-RAD
Tracer Advanced server upgrade.
Upgrades the server and the software to the latest Tracer Advanced system. Includes PC platform, preinstalled
latest software, one year warranty, installation support, and data transfer services from the existing system. Voice
cards and the dongle/license need to be ported from the existing system. (The license activation code will be sent
by the 3rd party vendor to the e-mail address provided to Toshiba by the dealer at time of order entry in FYI).

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 3-45

 Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
ACD Dongle

CTI-TRACER-RADP
Tracer Advanced Plus server upgrade.
Upgrades the server and the software to the latest Tracer Advanced Plus system. Includes PC platform,
preinstalled latest software, one year warranty, installation support, and data transfer services from the existing
system. Voice cards and the dongle/license need to be ported from the existing system. (The license activation
code will be sent by the 3rd party vendor to the e-mail address provided to Toshiba by the dealer at time of order
entry in FYI).

CTI-TRACER-RADR
Tracer Advanced with Raid server upgrade.
Upgrades the server and the software to the latest Tracer Advanced w/Raid system. Includes PC platform,
preinstalled latest software, one year warranty, installation support, and data transfer services from the existing
system. Voice cards and the dongle/license need to be ported from the existing system. (The license activation
code will be sent by the 3rd party vendor to the e-mail address provided to Toshiba by the dealer at time of order
entry in FYI).

CTI-TRACER-RAPR
Tracer Advanced Plus w/Raid server upgrade.
Upgrades the server and the software to the latest Tracer Advanced Plus w/Raid system. Includes PC platform,
preinstalled latest software, one year warranty, installation support, and data transfer services from the existing
system. Voice cards and the dongle/license need to be ported from the existing system. (The license activation
code will be sent by the 3rd party vendor to the e-mail address provided to Toshiba by the dealer at time of order
entry in FYI).

CTI-TRACER-RPT
Tracer reporting option (StreetView).
Optional software license to provide the reporting capability. Requires any model of Tracer system. (The license
activation code will be sent by the 3rd party vendor to the e-mail address provided to Toshiba by the dealer at time
of order entry in FYI).

CTI-TRACER-RSTD
Tracer Standard server upgrade.
Upgrades the server and the software to the latest Tracer Standard system. Includes PC platform, preinstalled
latest software, one year warranty, installation support, and data transfer services from the existing system. Voice
cards and the dongle/license need to be ported from the existing system. (The license activation code will be sent
by the 3rd party vendor to the e-mail address provided to Toshiba by the dealer at time of order entry in FYI).

CTI-TRACER-ST
Tracer standard package.
Free upgrade is available. When CTI-TRACER-ST is ordered before December 31, 2008, it is automatically
upgraded to CTI-TRACER-AD.
Tracer Standard Base Package (max. 48 ports). Requires LIC-ACD if ACD or Net Phone is not installed.
-Tower, Celeron, 512MB, 4 PCI
-Windows XP Pro
-160 GBHDD, up to 14,000 hours
-DVD+RW for archive storage
-1 Call Manager client license

3-46 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
ACD Dongle

CTI-TRACER-STR
Tracer standard package w/RAID1.
Free upgrade is available. When CTI-TRACER-STR is ordered before December 31, 2008, it is automatically
upgraded to CTI-TRACER-ADR.
Tracer Standard Base Package (max. 48 ports) w/RAID1. Requires LIC-ACD if ACD or Net Phone is not installed.
-Tower, Celeron, 512MB, 4 PCI -Windows XP Pro -120 GBHDD, up to 14,000 hours -DVD+RW for archive storage
-10 Replay Clients (Recommend 5 max)

CTI-TRACER-SUPP
Tracer/Talkument Diamond support.
Tracer/Talkument Diamond Support for annual maintenance for Tracer Software only. This includes the technical
support and free upgrades during the covered period after the initial warranty.
HW maintenance is sold separately. Please contact OAISYS. (The license activation code will be sent by the 3rd
party vendor to the e-mail address provided to Toshiba by the dealer at time of order entry in FYI).

CTI-TRACER-VOIP
Tracer VoIP recording engine.
VoIP recording module to record the conversation at VoIP stations. Supports up to 48 ports. Requires a LAN switch
with port mirroring to capture the audio stream of all IP phones. Additional switches with port mirroring may be
needed if phones are connected to different networks.

CTI-TRACER-VP
Tracer voice port license.
Single voice port license for monitoring. Required for each voice port of trunk, station, or VoIP recording engine.
(The license activation code will be sent by the 3rd party vendor to the e-mail address provided to Toshiba by the
dealer at time of order entry in FYI).

CTI-TRACER-W16P
Extended to 3 year warranty for 16 port voice board.
Extend the 16 port voice board warranty to 3 years.
Includes AWR. (The license activation code will be sent by the 3rd party vendor to the e-mail address provided to
Toshiba by the dealer at time of order entry in FYI).

CTI-TRACER-W16S
Extended 3 year warranty for 16 port station board.
Extend the 16 port station board warranty to 3 years including the initial warranty.
Includes AWR.

CTI-TRACER-W24A
Extended 3 year warranty for 24 port analog voice board.
Extend the 24 port analog voice board warranty to 3 years including the initial warranty.
Includes AWR.

CTI-TRACER-W24P
Extended to 3 year warranty for T1 voice board.
Extend the T1 voice board warranty to 3 years.
Includes AWR.

CTI-TRACER-W24S
Extended 3 year warranty for 24 port station board.
Extend the 24 port station board warranty to 3 years including the initial warranty.
Includes AWR.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 3-47

 Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
ACD Dongle

CTI-TRACER-W48P
Extended to 3 year warranty for dual T1 voice board.
Extend the dual T1 voice board warranty to 3 years.
Includes AWR.

CTI-TRACER-W4P
Extended to 3 year warranty for 4 port voice board.
Extend the 4 port voice board warranty to 3 years.
Includes AWR.

CTI-TRACER-W8P
Extended to 3 year warranty for 8 port voice board.
Extend the 8 port voice board warranty to 3 years.
Includes AWR.

CTI-TRACER-W8S
Extended 3 year warranty for 8 port station board.
Extend the 8 port station board warranty to 3 years including the initial warranty.
Includes AWR.

CTI-TRACER-W8SD
Extended 3 year warranty for 8 port add on board.
Extend the 8 port add on station board warranty to 3 years including the initial warranty.
Includes AWR.

CTI-TRACER-WADV
Extended to 3 year warranty for Advanced system.
Extend the Tracer hardware (PC) of Advanced system to 3 years.
Includes AWR.

CTI-TRACER-WBAS
Extended to 3 year warranty for Standard Base system.
Extend the Tracer hardware (PC) of Standard system warranty to 3 years.
Includes AWR.

CTI-UNIFIER10
Strata Unifier 10 node license.
Strata Unifier to support up to 10 node Network ACD system. It also supports Net Phone. Each CIX node must
have a valid LIC-ACD license, and Strata ACD/Net Phone license to cover the entire network is also required.
Requires Network Assessment to receive technical support.
Please contact Sales Applications Desk or a Sales Engineer prior to quoting this product. Purchasing Unifier
requires the approval from a Sales Engineer.

CTI-UNIFIER3
Strata Unifier 3 node license.
Strata Unifier to support up to 3 node Network ACD system. It also supports Net Phone. Each CIX node must have
a valid LIC-ACD license, and Strata ACD/Net Phone license to cover the entire network is also required. Requires
Network Assessment to receive technical support.
Please contact Sales Applications Desk or a Sales Engineer prior to quoting this product. Purchasing Unifier
requires the approval from a Sales Engineer.

3-48 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
ACD Dongle

CTI-UNIFIER5
Strata Unifier 5 node license.
Strata Unifier to support up to 5 node Network ACD system. It also supports Net Phone. Each CIX node must have
a valid LIC-ACD license, and Strata ACD/Net Phone license to cover the entire network is also required. Requires
Network Assessment to receive technical support.
Please contact Sales Applications Desk or a Sales Engineer prior to quoting this product. Purchasing Unifier
requires the approval from a Sales Engineer.

Table 2: Type and Number of Licenses Required by Feature

Strata
IP Interface Basic Port SoftIPT IP Port
Feature Net
Card License1 License License4
3
License2
IP ACD (MAS) Announcement ports MIPU/GIPU or LIPU/S Each Port
IP Attendant Console MIPU/GIPU or LIPU/S Each Port
IP Voice Mail (MAS) MIPU/GIPU or LIPU/S Each Port
Each
Strata Net IP MIPU/GIPU or LIPU/S 1*
Trunk
Each
IPT2008-SDL MIPU/GIPU or LIPU/S
Station 5
IPT2010- Each
MIPU/GIPU or LIPU/S
SD/2020-SD S Station 5
Each
IP5000-Series MIPU/GIPU or LIPU/S
Station 5
Each
SIP Phone MIPU/GIPU or LIPU/S
Station
Each
Each
SoftIPT MIPU/GIPU or LIPU/S Active
Station 5
Station
ACD Announcement ports N/A Each Port
Each
Attendant Console N/A
Console
DKT/SLT Interface ports N/A Each Port
Trunk Interface Port N/A Each Port
Voice Mail ports N/A Each Port
* One license per system

1. LIC-4 BASIC
2. LIC100 STRATA N
LIC200 STRATA N
LIC670 STRATA N
LIC1200 STRATA N
3. LIC-SOFTIPT
4. LIC-CIX-IP PORT
5. R5 and later software - one license per active station; R4 and earlier software - one license per station

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 3-49

 Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
License Display Screen

License Display Screen

In the example screen below, the “Number of Basic Ports” installed on the processor is 112 but only 20 ports are
programmed (used). The “used” ports could be a mix of PDN ports, CO line ports, etc. This lets the installer know
how much system capacity is available for future growth without installing more licenses. To view this page in Net-
work eManager go to: Maintenance > Licensing > License Information.

License Control
The following programs enable you to issue and maintain License Activation settings for Strata Network eManager
users.

This program enables you to issue new licenses.

1. From the Network eManager menu, click Maintenance > Licensing > License Control.
2. Issue a License by cutting and pasting or manually entering the 60-character string in the License Code text
box.
Note If you are not adding the License Code to Network eManager immediately, copy and save the code
onto a disk. Save code in Notepad using Fixedsys font.
3. Click one of the following buttons:
• Issue – to issue the License Code.
• Cancel Issue – to cancel the License Code issue.

4. Activate the License entered above by selecting the delay timer.

5. Click one of the following buttons:
• Activate – for license activation.
• Cancel Activate – to cancel license activation.
Note Cancel Issue (step 3) and Cancel Activate buttons work only in Standby mode.

3-50 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
License Display Screen

License Issue

This program enables System Administrators to issue Licenses for Strata Network eManager users.

Field Description

Status applies to both License issue and License Activate. Displays Licensing Status.
Status Not yet, Issue Stand by, Issue Finished, Cancel Issue, Activate Stand by, Activate Finished
or Cancel Activate

Cut and paste the License code text string or manually enter the License Code (six
characters per box).
60 characters.
License Code The License Code will have to be generated from Toshiba’s FYI website (http://
fyi.tsd.toshiba.com). After obtaining the License code from FYI save it as a Text file. Cut
and paste the License code obtained from Toshiba’s FYI website. The License Code is
made up of the MAC Address and the number of ports. The License Code generated for a
particular MAC Address is only good for the processor that contains that MAC Address.

License Activate (Prerequisite Program - License Issue)

This program enables activation of Strata Network eManager licenses issued in Program 913, License Issue.
.
Field Description

Select Activation Delay Timer in hours.

0~24 (default = 0)
Delay Timer Enter 0 to issue or activate the license immediately or 1~24 to set the automatic delay
activation feature, where 1 = 1 hour delay; 2 = 2 hour delay, etc.
After the license is activated, use the License Information screen below to check that all
ports and features have been activated properly.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 3-51

 Licenses - SYSTEM, MAS, ACD
License Display Screen

License Information

The following programs enable you to set up Licensing details for Network eManager users.

1. From the Network eManager menu, click Maintenance > Licensing > License Information.
2. View Licensing details for this Strata CIX account.
This view is read-only information.

Field Description

Basic Release Number of CIX software. To view the Active Software

CIX Release Number
Version, go to Operations/System Setup.

Identifies the type of CIX system the Network eManager is currently

System Type
connected to.

Maximum Number of Identifies the maximum number of cabinets. The total of base plus
Cabinets expansion cabinets.

Number of serial ports licensed on the BSIS.

One license is needed for each SMDR and SMDI device connected to
Number of Serial Ports
BSIS.
(Programs 803 and 804 assigns BSIS ports).

The number of DTMF receivers licensed. The ARCS Subassembly is

Number of DTMF Receivers required on the CIX100 processor, no additional hardware is required for
CIX670 or CIX1200.

The number of Line circuits, Station circuits and ISDN B channels licensed,
and the number of licenses in use (or programmed).
Station circuits use a license only when a PDN, DDS, BATI or door phone
is assigned to the circuit.
Number of Basic Ports
Analog and T1 line circuits use a license only when a line number is
assigned to the circuit or B-channel.
ISDN B-Channels use a license when assigned in PRI and BRI
assignments.

The number of Strata Net channels licensed, and the number of licenses in
Strata Net Channels use (or programmed). This license must be enabled on each CIX in a
Strata Net network.

The number of licensed CTI sessions. Each Attendant Console, the ACD
Number of CTI Sessions or OAISYS Sever and each third party CTI application requires one CTI
session license. (Command 803 assigns CTI sessions).

The number of Attendant Consoles licensed. One license is required for

Number of Attendant
each Attendant Console. A CTI Session License is also required for each
Consoles
Attendant Console (see Number of CTI Sessions).

Number of Softphones The number of Soft IP Phones licenses. Each phone requires one license.

CIX IP Telephony Shows CIX IP Telephony is Enabled or Disabled.

The number of IP Endpoints licensed, and shows the number of licenses in

Number of IP Endpoints
use (or programmed).

3-52 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

System 4

This chapter provides Strata CIX system programming information for programmers using the Strata
Network eManager programming interface.

100 Cabinet Slot PCB Assignments

Prerequisite Program: None
All PCBs, except the system processors, are assigned to cabinet slots using this command. The CIX has a
dedicated slot in the Base cabinet for the system processors so they do not require this assignment.
• The CIX100 provides one Base (4) and one Expansion (Exp) cabinet (4) for a total of eight slots.
• The CIX200 Base cabinet has three slots (S101~S103) and the Exp cabinet has four slots
(S201~S204) for a total of seven slots.
• The CIX670 system provides one Base cabinet and up to six Exp cabinets. The Base cabinet has eight
slots and each of the six Exp cabinets have 10 slots for a total of 68 slots.
• The CIX1200 system can be configured with up to 12 cabinets - one Base cabinet and up to 11
Expansion cabinets for a total of 118 slots.
1. In Network eManager, click System > Card Assignment. The Card Slot Assignment screen displays.
2. Cabinet (01~012) – Select the two-digit cabinet number to be assigned. The cabinet and slot number
appear in the cab/slot field.

System
- Select 01 for CIX40.
- Select 01 for Base and Exp. cabinet (CIX100).
- Select 01 or 02 for CIX200.
- Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively, for each Exp. cabinet (CIX670).
- Select 01 for Base and 02~12 respectively, for each Exp. cabinet (CIX1200).
3. Slot (01~10) – Select the two-digit card slot number to be assigned.
- Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Exp. slots (CIX100).
- Select 01~04 for CIX200 Base and Exp. slots. Slot 04 in the Base Cabinet is the LSLU card slot.
- Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Exp. slots (CIX670).
- Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Exp. slots (CIX1200).

Note The CIX100 ACTU built-in relay is programmed as relay 5. For this relay operation, BIOU2 is
installed as default in a virtual equip position: Cabinet 2, Slot 5, PCB code 20 in Program 100. To
install an actual BIOU2 and disable the ACTU built-in relay, use the programming telephone to
remove the virtual BIOU2, then install the actual BIOU2 in Cabinet 01/Slot 01~08 in the normal
manner.
4. Select the PCB Type. Use the drop down menu to select the PCB type. The selected PCB type will
appear in the PCB Type field.
5. Click Submit to save your data.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 4-1

 System
Dial Number Plan

Dial Number Plan

Prerequisite Program: None
The Dial Number Plan lets you download all current dialing numbers registered in the CIX database.
The Numbering Plan screen gives you details on the different categories of Numbers. The table below
contains the information shown on the screen.

Number Type Description

Digit Groups Lists all numbers that begin with each digit 0~9 separately.

DKT Prime DNs Lists all Prime Directory Numbers assigned to a digital telephone in Program
200.

SLT Prime DNs Lists all Prime Directory Numbers assigned to a standard telephone in Program
200.

ISDN DNs Lists all Directory Numbers assigned to ISDN telephones in Program 202.

Phantom DNs Lists all Phantom Directory Numbers assigned to digital telephones, Add-On-
Modules and DSS consoles in Programs 205, 213, 215 respectively.

IPT_B Prime DNs Lists all Prime Directory Numbers assigned to BIPU-M card in Program 200

IPT_L Prime DNs Lists all IPT Prime Directory Numbers assigned to BIPU-L card in Program 200

SIP Prime DNs Lists all SIP Prime Directory Numbers assigned to BIPU-L card in Program 200

ACD Pilot Lists all ACD Pilot Numbers assigned in Program 540.

Hunt Group Pilot Lists all Hunt Group Pilot Numbers assigned in Program 209.

Access Codes Lists all feature, line and line group access codes assigned in Program 102.

Click Continue to view the next screen. You will be able to view all the DNs, IP DNs and other numbers
used.

4-2 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 System
Dial Number Plan

102 Flexible Access Codes

Prerequisite Program: None
Strata CIX comes with pre-assigned Flexible Access Codes that the telephone dials to access features.
This enables you to create customized Flexible Access Codes. The Strata CIX Flexible Numbering Plan
associates features stored in memory (i.e., “Store Code,” see Table 4-1) to a Flexible Numbering Code
assigned by the user.
Note Flexible Numbering Plan access codes cannot conflict with DN assignments.

1. Enter your customized Flexible Numbering Plan in the “Programmed Value” column of Table 4-1.
2. In Network eManager, click System > Flexible Access Code. The Flexible Access Codes screen
displays.
3. 00 Access Code – Enter the digits to be dialed (0~9,#,*) to access a feature or an OLG. To delete,
select “No Data” in 01 Feature Name. Conflict with an assigned DN will produce an error.
4. 01 Feature Name – Select the Flexible Numbering Feature (see Table 4-1) to see which access code is
being assigned.
Note To assign an access code to an OLG, select “Line Group access code - one access code for each
OLG.” To assign the prefix digit(s) for the access code of individual lines, select “Line access code -
leading digit(s) to access individual lines.” Example: If #7 is selected as the line access prefix, the
users will dial #7xxx to access an individual line (where xxx is the line number).
5. 02 OLG Number – Enter the Outgoing Line Group number to which the OLG access code is being
assigned. This field is only required if you chose “Line Group Access Code – one access code for each
OLG in Step 4 above. Enter a 0 in this field if a Feature Code other than 551 was selected.
Note 02 OLG Number:
• 0~32 CIX100 and CIX200
• 0~128 CIX670
• 0~220 CIX1200

System
• Field appears only when 01 Feature Name - Line Group access code – one access code for
each OLG, is selected.
6. Click Submit.

To delete an access code assignment

1. Click the Create button and enter the access code in the index, select No Assignment, click Submit.
This clears the access code so that you can reassign it to another feature.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 4-3

 System
Dial Number Plan

Creating New Feature Codes

1. Click on the Create button.
2. Enter new feature/access code. Click OK. When complete, your screen will change to a gray (edit
mode) color and the feature/access code will be red.
3. From the Feature Name drop down menu select the feature to be assigned.
4. Submit your data.
Notes
• To range program feature/access codes use a “-” between a range of values and a “,” for an additional
entry not in a range.
• System Date and Time Access Codes – The system date adjust code and system time adjust code is
different for every system. The defaults are #651 and #652 respectively.
Important! If you backup a CIX database (default.dat) with software that does not support Time/Date
access codes and then restore it to a CIX software version that supports these access
codes, you must use this program to set the Time/Date access codes. This must be done to
allow end users to set the Time/Date from their LCD digital telephones.

Flexible Numbering Default Settings

Table 4-1 shows the default Flexible Numbering Feature and Flexible Numbering Plan code relationships.
Pressing the Flexible Numbering Plan code from any station enables users to directly access the Flexible
Numbering Feature. The Feature Index Codes will display on the LCD of the telephone once the Default
Access Codes are entered.
Note These three-digit Feature Index Numbers should not be confused with the Program 205 three-digit
Button Codes.

Table 4-1 Flexible Numbering Plan Default Settings

Feature Default Programmed

Flexible Numbering Feature
Index Access Code Value
No Data
ABR - Activate 150 #441
ABR - Cancel 151 #442
Call Park Orbits - Activate 170 #33
Call Park Orbits - Park Answer (Retrieve Parked Call) 173 #32
System Orbit Number 174 7000~7019
DND - Local Activation 180 #6091
DND - Local Cancellation 181 #6092
DND - Remote Activation 182 #6191
DND - Remote Cancellation 183 #6192
Door Lock Control -Unlock 190 #12
Door Phones - Call 191 #15
Flash - short 200 #450
Flash - long 210 #451
Group Paging - Invoke All Group Paging 220 #30
Group Paging - Invoke Individual Group Paging 230 #31
Answer for External Group Paging 232 #5#36
Emergency Page - Invoke All Emergency Paging 240 #37

4-4 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 System
Dial Number Plan

Table 4-1 Flexible Numbering Plan Default Settings (continued)

Feature Default Programmed

Flexible Numbering Feature
Index Access Code Value
Emergency Page - Invoke Individual Emergency Paging 250 #38
Originate Call by Terminal Speed Dial (Index: 00-99) 260 *1
Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 000-099) 261 *2
Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 100-199) 262 *3
Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 200-299) 263 *4
Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 300-399) 264 *5
Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 400-499) 265 *6
Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 500-599) 266 *7
Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 600-699) 267 *8
Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 700-799) 268 *9
Register Speed Dial 269 #66
Call Forward (CF-A; Any Call) - Activation 340 #6011
Call Forward (CF-B; Any Call) - Activation 341 #6021
Call Forward (CF-NA; Any Call) - Activation 342 #6031
Call Forward (CF-B/NA; Any Call) - Activation 343 #6041
Call Forward (CF-A; External Call) - Activation 350 #6013
Call Forward CF-B; External Call) - Activation 351 #6023
Call Forward (CF-NA; External Call) - Activation 352 #6033
Call Forward (CF-B/NA; External Call) - Activation 353 #6043
Call Forward (CF-A; Any Call) - Remote Activation 360 #6012
Call Forward (CF-B; Any Call) - Remote Activation 361 #6022
Call Forward (CF-NA; Any Call) - Remote Activation 362 #6032

System
Call Forward (CF-B/NA; Any Call) - Remote Activation 363 #6042
Call Forward (CF-A; External Call) - Remote Activation 370 #6014
Call Forward (CF-B; External Call) - Remote Activation 371 #6024
Call Forward (CF-NA; External Call) - Remote Activation 372 #6034
Call Forward (CF-B/NA; External Call) - Remote Activation 373 #6044
Call Forward (Any Call) - Cancellation 380 #6051
Call Forward (External Call) - Cancellation 390 #6053
Call Forward (Any Call) - Remote Cancellation 400 #6052
Call Forward (External Call) - Remote Cancellation 410 #6054
Change Password for Remote Activation/Cancellation 420 #670
Input Account Code 530 #46
Change DISA Security Code 540 #658
Outgoing Call by Directing Individual Trunk 550 #7
Outgoing Call by Directing Outgoing Line Group 551 None
Three Way Conferencing (Override to Tandem Connection) 560 #494
Enter User Programming Mode 570 #9876
LCR -Outgoing Call 580 9
Set Voice Mail Message Waiting (activate MW without ringing for VM) 591 #63

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 4-5

 System
Dial Number Plan

Table 4-1 Flexible Numbering Plan Default Settings (continued)

Feature Default Programmed

Flexible Numbering Feature
Index Access Code Value
Release Received Message Waiting 592 #409
Release Sent Message Waiting (Cancel MW without ringing for VM)) 593 #64
MW Answer access code (Retrieve Received Message Waiting) 594 #408
Cancel ACB 600 #431
Start BGM 610 #490
Stop BGM 611 #491
Start BGM for External Paging Device 612 #492
Stop BGM for External Paging Device 613 #493
Built-in modem 630 #19
Night Ring Answer 640 #5#39
Travelling Class Override Code Input Number 650 #471
Change Travelling Class Override Code 651 #69
Activate System Call Forward 670 #620
Cancel System Call Forward 671 #621
Call Pickup -Directed DN Pickup of Ringing or Held DN calls and Call
678 #5#29
Park Answer
Call Pickup1 - Directed DN pickup for either Ringing or Held Calls
679 #5#6
(Release 2.0, MF017 or higher)
Call Pickup for Incoming Call -Group Pickup 680 #5#34
Call Pickup for Incoming Call -Directed Terminal 681 #5#5
Call Pickup for Incoming Call -Directed Group 682 #5#32
Call Pickup for Incoming Call -Directed DN 683 #5#22
Call Pickup for Incoming Call -Any External Call 684 #5#9
Call Pickup for On-Hold Call -Directed CO Retrieve 685 #5#73
Call Pickup for On-Hold Call -Local Retrieve 686 #5#71
Call Pickup for On-Hold Call -Remote Retrieve 687 #5#72
Call Pickup for On-Hold Call -Directed DN Retrieve 688 #5#74
Transfer to Voice Mail 690 #407
Repeat Last Number Dialed 700 *0
Volume Control for BEEP 710 #6101
Change LCD Display Language 720 #495
Advisory Message - Activation 730 #411
Advisory Message - Cancellation 731 #412
Emergency Call 740 #911
Attendant Console Group Access Code 750 0
Operator Call Special Dial (for Tenant Service) 751
Private Network Access Code 760 8
Node ID (Coordinated Directory Number Prefix) 770 None
Substitution of Dial * 780 441
Substitution of Dial # 781 440

4-6 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 System
Dial Number Plan

Table 4-1 Flexible Numbering Plan Default Settings (continued)

Feature Default Programmed

Flexible Numbering Feature
Index Access Code Value
Originate Call with Sub Address -Outgoing Call/Internal Call 782 ##
Specified caller number access code 783 #888
Application starting access code 800 #18
Split (Conference) 860 860
Voice Mail Call Monitor Off 870 #963
UCD Agent Log in (Local Activation) 890 #6061
UCD Agent Log out (Local Activation) 891 #6062
UCD Agent Log in (Remote Activation) 892 #6161
UCD Agent Log out (Remote Activation) 893 #6162
System Date Adjust Code (Release 1.02, MA227 or higher) 910 #651
System Time Adjust Code (Release 1.02, MA227 or higher) 911 #652

1. Feature key is not provided for this Call Pickup. If you want a feature key, please use Single Touch Button that has a feature
access code for this call pickup.

System

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 4-7

 System
Dial Number Plan

117 Public Dial Plan Digit Analysis

Prerequisite Program: None
This program is used to prevent users from circumventing Destination Restriction (DR) by sending tones
directly to the PSTN before DR analysis is complete. It defines the number of digits expected in PSTN
numbers beginning with identified sequences.
For example, a number starting with the toll prefix “1” would be expected to be 11 digits long. Calls will be
cut through to the public network only after the expected number of digits have been received.

1. In Network eManager, click System > Public Numbering Plan.

2. Enter the Identifying Digits used for external calls.
3. Select Pattern Digit Length. Total digits beginning with the selected Prefix digit.
4. Get Default sets all values to factory default.
5. Click Submit.

FIELD DESCRIPTION

00 Identifying Digits Enter the initial identifying external digits. 1 to 7 digits may include wild
cards “X” and “N”.
Possible values:1~7 (N = 2~9 and X = 0~9) (default = no value)

01 Pattern Digit Length Select the number of digits to follow the prefix number established
above. It is the total number of digits in a number beginning with the
00 Prefix Number entered above.
Possible values:0~64 (default = 0)
Default: 1NXX=11, N11=3, NXX=7

4-8 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 System
Dial Number Plan

103 Class Of Service

Prerequisite Program: None
Class of Service (COS) (1~32) assignments are made for users of telephones, attendant consoles, and
incoming calls based upon the line the call arrives or, in some cases, on a call-by-call basis when using
DISA or Tie Line with Q-Sig interfaces. For telephone users, the COS assignments are made for each of
the Day/Night Modes to allow different services during different parts of the day.
1. In Network eManager, click System > Class of Service.
2. COS Number – Select the COS Number (1~32).
3. Place a check mark in each of the services you wish to allow.
4. Get Default sets all values to factory defaults.
5. Click Submit.

FIELD DESCRIPTION
01 Auto Busy Redial Allow Automatic Busy Redial after dialing a busy outside
destination.
02 Call Forward Override Allow Call Forward Override. If allowed, this station does not
forward calls from a calling station with System or Station Call
Forward activated. This includes when dialing from the dial pad
or DSS button located on the telephone or DSS console.
03 Call Transfer w/ Camp-on Allows a call transferred by a station to Camp-on to a busy
destination.
04 Change DISA Codes Allow stations to change the DISA security code.
05 DND Override - Calling Permits a caller to override the DND status of a station.
Party

System
06 DND Override - Called Allows calling parties with DND Override privileges to override
Party DND status.
07 Do Not Disturb Allows user to place stations on DND mode.
08 Remote Set/Reset DND Provides stations with the ability to set/reset DND on other
phones.
09 Executive Override Allow Executive Override on a call.
10 Executive Override Allow Executive Override for incoming callers.
Allowed
11 Offhook Camp-on Allow Off-hook Camp-on when encountering a busy destination.
12 Group Pickup Allow stations for Group Call Pickup within one's own group.
13 Directed Station Pickup Allow stations to pick another specific ringing station.
14 Directed Group Call Allow stations to pick up a ringing station in a specified group.
Pickup
15 Directed DN Call Pickup Allow stations to pick up a specified DN.
16 Ext Call Pickup Allow stations to pick up any incoming trunk call.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 4-9

 System
Dial Number Plan

FIELD DESCRIPTION
17 Directed CO Call Pickup Allow stations to pick up a specific incoming trunk call.
18 Remote Retrieve Call Allow stations to retrieve any call placed on Hold at a designated
Pickup station (PDN).
19 DN Retrieve Call Pickup Allow stations to retrieve a held call on another DN.
20 Handsfree Override Allow stations to override Hands Free Answerback with Ringing
mode.
21 Privacy Override Allow user to override a private call when accessing a trunk that
is in use.
22 Executive Privacy Allows other stations to use Executive/Privacy Override on this
Override station’s calls.
23 Invoke Emergency Page Allow the Emergency Page feature. (Not used in Release 1.)
24 Join Feature Allow the Join feature.
25 Through Dialing Allow to perform Through Dialing (Attendant Feature). Attendant
can connect an inbound trunk call to another trunk with
permission to use DTMF.
26 Tandem CO Connection Allow user to set up a Trunk-to-Trunk connection and exit the
conversation. This is required for a tandem between two stations
in different nodes.
27 Day/Night Control Allow Day/Night Mode changing privilege.
28 Ext BGM Control Allow BGM over external speakers to be turned on/off.
29 LCR Feature Allow access to LCR.
30 Individual Trunk Access Allows user to dial individual trunk access codes, or use direct
line appearances, to access specific lines.
31 Trunk Access Allowed Allow access to trunk groups by trunk access codes.
32 Forced Account Codes Must use Forced Account Codes for placing external calls.
33 Verified Account Codes Verify Account Codes before an external call is placed.
34 Allow Short Hook Flash Allow a Short Flash signal over outside lines.
35 Allow Long Hook Flash Allow a Long Flash signal over outside lines.
36 Allow Hook Flash Receive hook flash over CO Lines, and enable telephones and
voice mail ports to perform hook flashes.
38 Can Receive OCA Allow others to call this station using Off-hook Call Announce.
40 Disconnect Outgoing Call If this parameter is allowed any O/G calls made by Extensions
with this COS will be automatically released after a defined time
period (defined in Program 104).
41 BGM Enable Allow Background Music from stations with this COS.

4-10 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 System
Dial Number Plan

FIELD DESCRIPTION
42 DSS Override Call Fwd Enable: When this station calls another station using a DSS key,
the called station will NOT call forward if Call Forward is set.
When calling stations use the dial pad the called station’s Call
Forward will occur.
Disable: When this station calls another station using a DSS key,
the called station will call forward if Call Forward is set. When
calling stations use the dial pad the called station's Call Forward
will occur.
43 DNIS LCD Preference Allows the telephone to display either the DNIS Name or ANI
Name on incoming PRI calls.
Enable: DNIS Name displays as programmed in the CIX
database.
Disable: ANI Name displays as received from the PRI provider.
44 Auto Page Disconnect This feature is used for preventing Page busy-out if station users
forget to hang up after making a Page call.
Enable: Stations having this COS enabled will automatically
disconnect from an external Page call after a determined time if
the station does not hang up after connecting to the Page call.
The time the auto disconnect will occur is determined by the
Page disconnection timer in Program 104-25.
Disable: Stations having this COS disabled will not disconnect
from a Page call until the station is hung up.
45 UCD Local Log-in Allows this telephone to login to a UCD group locally.
Possible values:Enable (default) - allows local login to UCD

System
group
Disable - does not allow local login
46 UCD Remote Log-in Allows one telephone to login another telephone to a UCD group
remotely.
Possible values:Enable - Allow remote login
Disable (default) - Remote login not allowed

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 4-11

 System
Dial Number Plan

104 System Timer

Prerequisite Program: None
This command assigns the system timers. System timers set a variety of times to control calls and features
for the Strata CIX.

1. In Network eManager, click System > System Timer.

2. Select the desired timer value for each of the fields.
3. Get Default sets all values to factory default.
4. Click Submit.

FIELD DESCRIPTION

01 ACB Callback Timer The Automatic Callback timer sets the time that Automatic Callback will wait
for Ring Back Tone being cancelled.
Possible values:5~180 sec. (default = 30)

02 ACB Cancel Recall Select the ACB overall timer value. This value establishes a time limit for
Timer the destination telephone number to become available. Once the timer
expires, the callback will be cancelled.
Possible values:5~180 min. (default = 30)

03 Park Recall Timer Select the Park timer value. This sets the length of time a call can remain in
Park.
Possible values:10~600 sec. (default = 120)

04 Camp-on Timer Select Camp-on timer value. This sets the time needed to remain off-hook
prior to Camp-on being automatically activated.
Possible values:5~15 sec. (default = 10)

05 SMDR Valid Call The length of time that a call should be active before being captured by
Timer SMDR. The SMDR Answer timer sets a default time for when an outgoing
call will be considered to be answered for SMDR reporting when a true
answer signal is not returned from the public network. Setting the time too
short will include calls that may not be completed, setting the time too long
may exclude short calls that are answered and terminated in a short time.
Possible values:0~180 sec. (default = 10)

06 Tandem Timer #1 Select timer for a trunk-to-trunk connection for which neither CO line has
release supervision, a timer is needed to release the call if no user
monitoring has taken place.
Possible values:0~3600 sec. (default = 300)

07 Tandem Timer #2 Provides the time to enable an external user to dial a digit to extend the
disconnect time when the connection is unsupervised. This feature is used
primarily with DISA.
Possible values:0~180 (default = 30)

08 CF No Answer Time The System Call Forward No Answer timer specifies the time period that a
phone will ring prior to invoking the Call Forward operation.
Possible values:1~180 sec. (default = 30)

4-12 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 System
Dial Number Plan

FIELD DESCRIPTION

09 Dial Input Timer Permits dialed input for a telephone and trunk using DTMF.
Possible values:0~60 sec. (default = 20)

10 Delay 1 Ringing Specifies the time to wait before applying ringing to the phones designated
Timer to ring on Delay 1.
Possible values:1~60 sec. (default = 12)

11 Delay 2 Ringing Selects the time to wait before applying ringing to the phones designated to
Timer ring on Delay 2.
Possible values:1~60 sec. (default = 24)

12 Door Unlock Timer Select the length of time to send an electrical signal to a door for releasing
the lock.
Possible values:1~30 sec. (default = 6)

13 9+11 Judgment Timer The 9+11 inter-digital timer provides a timing value for the system to wait for
additional digits to be dialed looking for the 911 or 9+911 dialed codes for
treatment using the E911 procedures rather than normal dialing treatment.
Possible values:1~30 sec. (default = 5)

14 Emergency Call Sets a time for advancing the call to the next station in a list of destinations
Timer for the call.
Possible values:10~180 sec. (default = 30)

15 ABR Busy Detection The Destination Busy Detection timer sets the time to wait while looking for
Time a busy condition on an external call. If detected, it will trigger the initiation of
the Automatic Busy Redial cycle.
Possible values:1~30 sec. (default = 5)

System
16 Lost Call Timer The Lost Call timer sets the time that a failed transfer recall will ring on the
originating station prior to attempting to recall a secondary location.
Possible values:1~600 sec. (default = 180)

17 Lost Call Final Timer The Lost Call Final timer sets the time that a failed transfer recall will ring on
the secondary location before being automatically disconnected.
Possible values:1~600 sec. (default = 30)

18 DTMF Tone Sending The DTMF tone sending duration for dialing on CO lines.
Time
Possible values:80msec (default) or 160msec

19 Auto Disconnect Time after which an unsupervised trunk will be automatically released.
Possible values:0~60 min. (default = 0)

20 Tie Line Delay Timer This timer inserts a pause before any dialed information is sent to a Tie line.
This pause allows the distant end time to prepare for the receipt of dialed
digits.

21 Answer timer before If an incoming DISA call routes over a Tie line and the call is not answered
disconnect by the distant end within a certain period of time the DISA caller will be cut
off. The time period before cut off is determined by this setting.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 4-13

 System
Dial Number Plan

FIELD DESCRIPTION

22 Outgoing Call Talking If PGM 103 field 40 is set to enable, after this timer expires the out-going call
Disconnect Timer is cut off.

23 Network DSS Refresh Select Network DSS Refresh Timer. The time interval when all network DSS
Timer settings are refreshed system-wide.
Note DSS button LEDs change state immediately when the status of the
DSS button changes - regardless of this timer value.
Possible values:20~180 seconds (default = 30)

24 Outgoing Number This timer sets how long dialed numbers will display on telephone LCDs for
Display Timer outgoing line calls.
Possible values: 1~120 seconds (default = 10)

25 Page Auto Automatically disconnects the station from a Page call if the station does not
Disconnect Timer hang-up when this timer expires (1~240 seconds in one second intervals).
Default=10 seconds
The station must be enabled for this feature in Prog 103-44 for this timer to
apply to the Page call.

26 Caller ID Display This timer determines how long Caller ID information displays on telephone
Timer LCDs after a call is answered (1~300 seconds in one second intervals).
Default=15 second

4-14 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 System
Dial Number Plan

105 System Data

Prerequisite Program: None
This command assigns system settings for your Strata CIX.

1. In Network eManager, click System > System Data.

2. Enter System Parameter data using the table below.
3. Get Default sets all values to factory default.
4. Click Submit.

FIELD DESCRIPTION

01 Executive Override Enable break in warning tone for Executive Override.

Possible values:Enable (default) or Disable

02 Station MOH Source Music On Hold selection for private lines, Tie lines and stations.
Refer to PRG109 for equipment MOH assignments.
Possible values:Quiet Tone, External 1 ~ 15, Internal (default)

03 Ring Transfer Tone Determines whether a call hears RBT or MOH while being transferred and
prior to the destination party answering.
Possible values:RBT (default) or MOH

04 Transfer Privacy Transfer Privacy enabled: CO line buttons that have multiple appearances
will only flash and ring on the transferred-to telephone; the same CO line
button on other telephones will be red-busy.
Transfer Privacy Disabled: CO line buttons that have multiple appearances
will flash and ring on all telephones having the CO line button appearance.

System
Possible values:Enable (default) or Disable

05 Privacy Override Enables warning tone to members of a call prior to that call’s being subject
to Privacy Override or Attendant Monitor.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)

06 Credit Card Code Enter Service Indentifier for Credit Card Calling. If no value is entered in this
field any previously programmed data is lost.
Possible values:Up to 32 digits (default = no value)

07 Credit Card Digits Minimum Dial Digits required for Credit Card Calling. This should be the
quantity of digits in a credit card number. If this quantity of digits is not
dialed when making credit card calls, the caller will be disconnected. This is
to ensure that the call is charged to a credit card. DRL tables in Program
111 and OLGs in Program 306 must be enabled with credit card calling for
this feature to be active. Users must be assigned to a DRL table enabled
with credit card calling and call out on a credit card calling enabled OLG for
this featured to be applied to the call.
Possible values:1~32 (default = 21)

08 E911 Service Enable E911 Service availability.

Possible values:Enable (default) or Disable

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 4-15

 System
Dial Number Plan

FIELD DESCRIPTION

09 DR Override by SSD Enable DR Override by System Speed Dial.

Possible values:Enable (default) or Disable

10 Auto Station Release Enable Automatic Station Release - when the other party disconnects the
station is automatically set to idle.
Possible values:Enable (default) or Disable

11 ISDN SPID Enable Auto Service Profile Identifier (SPID).

Possible values:Operable or Not Operable (default)

12 Night Mode Relay Assign BIOU Relay as the Night Relay. This relay activates when the
system is in the Night Mode.
Possible values:0~8 (default = 0)
BIOU1 provides relays 1 to 4; BIUO2 provides relays 5 to 8
Note CIX100 (ACTU) and CIX200 (LCTU): The built-in relay is
programmed as relay 5. For this operation, in Program 100 the
BIOU2 must be installed in Cabinet 2, Slot 5, PCB code 20.

13 BGM External Paging Set the External Page Group Number that includes the external paging
zones to which BGM will be sent. See Program 503.
Possible values:0~4 (CIX100)
0~8 (CIX200)
0~16 (CIX670)
0~24 (CIX1200
(default = 0)

14 Lost Call Destination Enter Lost Call Destination. Any valid DN such as PDN, PhDN or Pilot DN.
Possible values:Any DN (Up to 5 digits) (default = no value)

15 COS Override Code Class of Service Override Code Digits (1-8 digits). The digit length of COS
override codes. COS override codes are set in Program 510.
Possible values:1~8 (default = 1)

16 Multi-Conference Enable Multi-Conference capabilities for Analog Internal Calls and Outgoing
Calls.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)

17 Caller Number Enable Calling Number Display. If a soft key display competes with a Caller
Display ID, the Caller ID displays if enabled. Otherwise, the soft key function will
continue to be displayed.
Possible values:Enable (default) or Disable

4-16 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 System
Dial Number Plan

FIELD DESCRIPTION

18 Night Bell Relay Assign BIOU Relay (1~8) as the Night Relay - this relay activates when the
system is in the Night Mode.
BIOU1 provides relays 1 to 4.
BIOU2 provides relays 5 to 8
Note The CIX100 ACTU and CIX200 LCTU built-in relay is
programmed as relay 5. For this relay operation, a virtual
BIOU2 is installed, as default, in a virtual equipment position
- Cabinet 2 slot 5. (Cab. 02 slot 05, PCB code 20, in prog.
100)

To install an actual BIOU2 and disable the ACTU built-in

relay, use the programming telephone to remove the virtual
BIOU2 and then install the actual BIOU2 in Cab. 01/slot
01~08 in the normal manner.

19 Display Preference Select whether to display DNIS or Caller ID.

Possible values:DNIS (default) or Caller ID

20 Transit Counter Select the Networking Transit Counter. This device limits the number of
nodes through which a Strata Net call can pass before being terminated as
a lost call.
Possible values:0~128 (default = 1)

21 Primary Clock Enter data as xxyyzz. (xx = cabinet, yy = slot, zz = channel)

22 Secondary Clock zz=channel 01 if clock source is RPTU or RDTU
zz=channel 01, 02, 03, or 04 if clock source is RBUU/RBUS or RBSU
Example: If the Primary Clock Source should be assigned to an RPTU in

System
Cabinet 5, slot 2, enter 050201.
Cabinet numbers:
CIX100 and CIX200: Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
CIX670: Select 01 for Base and 02~07 for Expansion cabinets.
CIX1200: Select 01 for Base and 02~12 for Expansion cabinets
Slot numbers:
CIX100: Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots.
CIX200: Select 01~03 for Base slots and 01~04 for Expansion slots.
CIX670: Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.
CIX1200: Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots

23 Call History Prefix 1 Add the dialing prefix 1 when using the callback feature in Call History.
Possible values:Add (default) or Do Not Add

24 Emergency Digits Enter an alternative emergency dialing string. If no value is entered in this
Sent field any previously programmed value is overwritten.
Possible values:Up to 5 digits (default = 911)

25 DP Make Ratio Select the Dial Pulse Make/Break ratio.

Possible values:33% (default) or 40%

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 4-17

 System
Dial Number Plan

FIELD DESCRIPTION

26 Call Button Jumping Select whether to execute Jumping LED.

If enabled, line calls move from a telephone DN button to a line button after
they are answered. After the call is answered the DN button is cleared to
receive another call. With this operation the DN acts as an answer button
for the telephone. This operation only applies if the line that is answered
has a CO, GCO, or Pooled line button appearance on the telephone. If
disabled, line calls remain on the DN after they are answered.
Possible values:Enable (default) or Disable

27 Set Domestic Code Set to 0 (zero) to enable the CIX to insert the leading zero when receiving a
National CLI (not used in US)

28 Set International Set to 00 (zero zero). Enables CTX to insert two leading zeros when
Code receiving an International CLI (not used in US)

29 CPN Numbering Plan Called Party Number numbering plan format.

Possible values: Unknown (default) or ISDN

30 SLT Recall Timer Hooking = 100ms, On-Off Hook = 500ms

31 Analog Trunk This parameter defines the order in which analog trunks are selected during
Hunting the outgoing call trunk selection process.
Possible values:Terminal (default) or Cyclical

32 Display Check Sum Enable a System Checksum error to be displayed and an error log to be
Error created.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)

33 Analog Tie Line Analog Tie Line Disconnect Timer enables tandem analog Tie lines to
Disconnect automatically disconnect if the timer expires.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)

34 Analog DID Method Analog DID method: Normal (DTMF)/MFC-R2 3 digits/MFC-R2 4 digits
Possible values:Normal (default), MFC-R2 3, MFC-R2 4

35 ALaw/MuLaw Choose the companding technique appropriate to the local PSTN. Mu Law
in North America.
Possible values:A Law or Mu Law (default)

36 Play Melody Whether to play melody or not

Possible values:1 - Start, 2 - Stop
Default: 2 - Stop

37 Select Melody Select melody

Possible values:1 - Melody1, 2 - Melody2
Default: 1 - Melody1

4-18 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 System
Dial Number Plan

FIELD DESCRIPTION

38 Internal Pad Whether to insert internal pad or not

Possible values:1 - Enable, 2 - Disable
Default: 2 - Disable

39 Std. Tel. Ringing Select the Ringing Cadence for Standard Telephone circuits.
Cadence
Note This does not apply to Digital or IP telephones.
Ringing Type 1
External Ring: 20Hz, 1sec. ON - 3sec. OFF
Internal Ring: 20Hz, 0.4sec.ON - 0.2sec. OFF 0.4sec. ON - 3sec. OFF
Recall:20Hz, 1sec. ON - 1sec. OFF
Ringing Type 2
Ringing Type2 is the same Ringing Cadence as DK.
External Ring:20Hz, 0.4sec. ON - 0.2sec. OFF 0.4sec. ON - 3sec. OFF
Internal Ring:20Hz, 1sec.ON - 3sec. OFF
Recall:20Hz, 1sec. ON - 3sec. OFF

40 Sys CF Cascade Enable: A call that forwards to a device that is also System Call Forwarded
will be sent to the device’s System Call Forward destination.
Note If enabled, the SCF alternate destination set in Prog 500-05 will be
ignored.
Disable: A call that forwards to a device that is System Call Forwarded will
not follow the device’s System Call Forward.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)

41 CSTA B-Ch. Enabled - CSTA shall provide full 'B' Channel path information. Disabled -
Operation CSTA shall provide channel group only.

System
Possible values:Enable (default) or Disable

42 ISDN Complete IE Whether to append Sending Complete IE into SETUP message and INFO
Option message in ISDN.
Possible values:Enable (default) or Disable

43 Repeat Last No. Enable - store dialed numbers that are not complete in the last number
Dialed dialed buffer.
Disable - only store complete telephone numbers in the last number dialed
buffer.
Possible values:Enable (default) or Disable

44 Default Calling Enabled - the system will send the default Calling Number to the PSTN
Number when stations make ISDN calls in the local node.
Disable - the system will not send the default Calling Number to the PSTN
on ISDN calls in the local node.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 4-19

 System
Dial Number Plan

FIELD DESCRIPTION

45 DSS Ringing/DND Select whether DSS LEDs should flash red, light steady or not light when
Indication their respective Directory Numbers are ringing/DND.
Ringing – DSS LEDs flash red when their respective Directory Numbers are
ringing or in DND.
Idle – DSS LEDs are idle (not lit) when their respective Directory Numbers
are ringing and flash when in DND.
Idle/DND-On – DSS LEDs are idle (not lit) when their respective Directory
Numbers are ringing and steady lit when in DND.
Possible values:Ringing (default), Idle or Idle/DND On

46 Caller ID Call Types Enable this feature if CO line Caller ID should display on the LCD of a
station that receives a Forwarded, Transferred, or Recall call.
Disable this feature if the originating Station Name\PDN should display on
the LCD of a station that receives a Forwarded, Transferred, or Recall call.
Possible values:Enable (Default) or Disable

47 ISDN CPN: Number ISDN Calling Party Number type of number setup message format.
Type
Possible values:System (Default), Unknown, International, National,
Network, Subscriber, Abbreviated Enable call.

48 ISDN CPN: ISDN Calling Party Number numbering plan ID Setup message format.
Numbering Plan
Possible values:System (Default), Unknown, ISDN, Data, Telex, National
Std, Private

50 LCD Keystrip The CIX processor can automatically send a refresh signal to all LCD
Refresh Interval keystrips.
This is the time period, measured in hours, between refresh commands
sent to the telephone LCD keystrips.
Possible values:0~24 hours (Default is 1 hour.) 0 = No refresh sent

51 Caller ID Line Access This is the line or trunk access code the telephones will automatically dial to
Code access an outgoing line when pressing the Call softkey to dial a selected
Caller ID telephone number.
Default is 9 (Maximum of 8 characters)

4-20 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 System
System Call Forward

System Call Forward

Program Number(s): 500 and 504
Set up System Call Forward (SCF) parameters using the following programs:
1. In Network eManager, click System > System Call Forward.
2. Enter Program 500 data; enter Program 504 data.
3. Get Default sets all values to factory default.
4. Click Submit.

500 / 504 System Call Forward Assignment

Prerequisite Program: None
This assignment is used to configure up to 32 system call forward patterns. Station DNs are assigned to
these patterns in the station COS assignments.
Note The Administrator programs the condition of transfer by setting Call Type, Period and Telephone
Status. Destinations 1 and 2 should be programmed after transfer conditions are set.
FIELD DESCRIPTION

00 System Call Select the SCF pattern number to configure.

Forward Template
Possible values:0~4 (CIX/CTX100 & CTX28 & CIX40), 0~10 (CIX/CTX670
& CIX200 Basic), 0~32 (CIX/CTX670 Exp), 0~10 (CIX200
Basic HCTU only), 0~48 (CIX1200 Exp. HEXAU or
HEXBU)
(default = no value)

02 Active Telephone Select the telephone DN status that should cause this SCF pattern to
Status operate.

System
Possible values:No Forwarding, Busy, No Answer, Busy No Answer or
DND (default = No Forwarding)

03 Telephone Status Select the telephone DN status that should cause this SCF pattern to
operate.
Possible values:No Forwarding, Busy, No Answer, Busy No Answer or
DND (default = No Forwarding)

04 Call Type Select the type of call that should forward in this pattern.
Possible values:CO Loop or Grd, DID, Tie, Ring Transfer and Internal
(default = no value)

05 Period Select the system time period in which this SCF pattern should operate.
Possible values:Day, Day2 or Night (default = Day)

06 Destination 1 Enter the first destination to which the call should forward.
Possible values:Up to 32 digits (default = no value)

07 Destination 2 Enter an alternate destination to which the call should forward.

Possible values:Up to 32 digits (default = no value)

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 4-21

 System
System Call Forward

Copy
The copy function enables you to selectively copy SCF destinations to any or all SCF segments and any or
all SCF templates. It combines Programs 500 and 504 on the same screen.
1. Select System > System Call Forward > a SCF template (1-32), and then a Telephone Status (example
“Busy No Answer”). The System Call Forward screen displays showing the status of the first available
call forwarding system.
2. Select the needed values from the drop-down menus for the System Call Forward and Telephone
Status fields. These fields are required. As soon as the second field is selected the full page displays for
editing.
Note If it is not yet configured, the Telephone Status field indicates No Forwarding.
3. Select Call Type and Period by highlighting the desired line in the display.
4. Type the needed information into the Destination 1 and 2 fields. Destination 1 is always required,
Destination 2 is optional.
5. Click Submit to send the data to the CIX.
6. Click Submit to send the destination assignments to the CIX
… or click Copy to display the Copy dialog box. You can click on Copy at any time to copy Destinations
to any SCF template, Call type and period, including all SCF segments and templates.

Copy Dialog Box

To copy SCF Destinations to any selected SCF assignment click Copy on the System Call Forward
screen. The System Call Forward Range Copy screen displays.

To select the Destination(s) that should be copied

1. You can remove a destination entry by removing the checkmark from it.
2. Select the appropriate Period, Call type, Status and SCF assignments to which the destination(s)
should be copied.
3. Click Copy Now. Your entries are submitted to the CIX and the destination(s) are copied to all
assignments that you selected.

4-22 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 System
System Call Forward

Possible Errors
• If you attempt to remove Destination 1 (only) when there is a Destination 2 assigned.
• If you attempt to assign Destination 2 when Destination 1 is not assigned.

Notes
• If you check “Prompt on Error,” the copy function stops if one of the above errors occurs. You are then
given a choice to continue or abort. Continue skips the error and does not perform the copy.
• If you do not check “Prompt on Error,” all errors, if any, are skipped and the copy is not executed.
• You can assign or remove both destinations at the same time without causing an error.

System Call Forward Table View

SCF Table View shows the entire set up of all available system call forward levels.

To access the SCF Table View

Select System > SCF Table View or if you are in Prog 500 or 504, click the SCF Table View button.
See Table Views in Chapter 2 for table functionality.

501 System Speed Dial

Prerequisite Program: None
System Speed Dial consists of up to 800 pre-programmed numbers each containing up to 32 digits. If the
number being entered exceeds the 32 digits, the next speed dial location will automatically be appended to
create longer numbers. One other speed dial location can be nested within the number for dialing a
common routine with the number (see “516 Station Speed Dial” on page 5-40 for more information about
nesting).
1. Select > System > System Speed Dial.

System
2. Enter Program 501 data.
3. Get Default sets all values to factory default.
4. Click Submit.

FIELD DESCRIPTION

00 Speed Dial Index Enter the speed dial bin location.

Possible values:000~799 (default = no value)

01 Number This is the dialable number stored in the speed dial bin.
Possible values:Up to 32 digits, 0~9, *, # and Pauses (default = no
value)
To enter pauses enter Px, where x equals 1~9 (seconds), which is the
length of the pause.

02 Name This is the Name that appears on Telephone LCD dial directories.
Possible values:Up to 8 ASCII characters (default = no value)

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 4-23

 System
System Call Forward

System Speed Dial Table View

System Speed Dial Table View shows the entire set up for all speed dial numbers.

To access the System Speed Dial Table View

Select System > System Speed Dial Table View or if you are in Prog 501, click the System Speed Dial
Table View button.

4-24 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 System
Day Night Service

Day Night Service

Program Number(s): 112, 103, 106 and 113
Note Refer to Automatic Day Light Savings Time Change, Program Number “121 Automatic Day Light
Savings Time Change” on page 10-4.
The programs that follow are used to set up Day and Night modes in Strata CIX.
1. Select > System > Class of Service
Add (27) Day/Night Control to each COS Number that requires Day/Night Service control.
2. Select > System > Day Night Service.
3. Select the Tenant number for which the daily schedules will be configured.
Possible values: 1~8 (default = no value)
4. Enter the Calendar Day (YYYYMMDD) to assign a Working Day Type schedule
… or click on one of the following buttons:
• List – View a summary list of programmed Calendar days.
• Copy Tenant – Copies the currently viewed record to another record(s).
• Get Default - Restores factory default data.
5. Enter remaining Program 112 data.
6. Enter Program 106 data.
7. Enter Program 113 data.
8. Click Submit.

112 Day/Night Mode Calendar

Prerequisite Program: 106

System
This program enables you to assign Working Day Types for up to 128 unique Calendar Days. These
settings override the default system schedules in the CIX to enable Day/Night scheduling for unique
circumstances.
FIELD DESCRIPTION

01 Calendar Day Enter the Calendar Day for which to assign a Working Day Type schedule.
Possible values:YYYY = Year, MM = Month, DD = Day (default = no
value)

02 Working Day Type Select the Working Day Type.

Possible values:Delete, Work Day, Non-Work Day or Holiday, (default= no
value)

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 4-25

 System
Day Night Service

106 Day/Night Mode Day of Week Mapping Assignment

Prerequisite Program: 113
The Day of the Week schedule defines each day as the type of day the schedule shall follow. These types
of days are called Work Day, Non-work Day, and Holiday. Each day of the week can be classified.
FIELD DESCRIPTION

01 Monday Assign the type of day schedule that is to be used for each day of the
week.
02 Tuesday
Possible values:Work Day, Non-Work Day (default) or Holiday
03 Wednesday

04 Thursday

05 Friday

06 Saturday

07 Sunday

4-26 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 System
Day Night Service

113 Day/Night Mode Daily Schedule

Prerequisite Program: None
The Day/Night Mode daily schedule defines the times for the start of the Work Day, Non-work Day, and
Holiday for each of the modes (Day, Day2. Night) per Tenant. Each “type of day” defined in “106 Day/Night
Mode Day of Week Mapping Assignment” on page 4-26 requires an assigned schedule.
Note The start time for Day 1 mode equals the end time for Night mode.
FIELD DESCRIPTION

Tenant Number Select the Tenant number for which the daily schedules will be configured.
(This feature is available with R2.2 or higher.)
Possible values:1~8.

Work Day Enter the Day1, Day2 and Night Mode start time for Work Day day type.
• 01 Day1 Mode/ Possible values:hhmm; hh = hour (00~23, 99), mm = minutes (00~59, 99)
Work Day (default = 9999)
• 02 Day2 Mode/ Note 9999 deletes or skip modes.
Work Day

• 03 Night Mode/
Work Day

Non-Work Day Enter the Day1, Day2 and Night Mode start times for Non-Work Day day
type.
• 04 Day1 Mode/Non-
Work Day Possible values:hhmm; hh = hour (00~23, 99), mm = minutes (00~59, 99)
(default = 9999)
• 05 Day2 Mode/Non-
Work Day Note 9999 deletes or skip modes.
• 06 Night Mode/
Non-Work Day

System
Holiday Enter the Day1, Day2 and Night Mode start times for Holiday Day day type.
• 07 Day1 Mode/ Possible values:hhmm; hh = hour (00~23, 99), mm = minutes (00~59, 99)
Holiday (default = 9999)
• 08 Day 2 Mode/ Note 9999 deletes or skip modes.
Holiday

• 09 Night Mode/
Holiday

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 4-27

 System
PAD Values

PAD Values
PAD Values Interface
Network eManager displays PAD values as a worksheet (partial example below). To change a value click
on the number. The line will expand and up/down arrows (spin arrows) will appear. Click on the arrows to
adjust the PAD level. The changes are only in the worksheet until it is submitted. You can change as many
PAD values as you like, then submit once to change the system database.

Click on a value to change it.

Export
The Worksheet can be exported. The Export button stores the worksheet as a comma delimited file on the
local PC. The exported file can be opened and modified using word processing or spreadsheet programs.
Import
A worksheet file can be imported as a worksheet. The worksheet can be compared to the default PAD
values or to the system database. The PAD value worksheet can be exported before making changes to
the PAD settings. If necessary, the old settings can be restored by importing the worksheet file.
Change Compare
When a worksheet is compared to the system database or the default values, the differences can be seen
as highlighted values in the worksheet.
Load Default
Loads the PAD Table default values into the worksheet. Click on the Submit button to restore the default
PAD values in the CIX database.

CAUTION! Any PAD groups you have created are not part of the default. These groups
will be lost when the default values are restored.

4-28 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 System
PAD Values

PAD Table
Program Number(s): 107, 108 and 114
Assign PAD groups, PAD tables and PAD conference tables using these programs.
1. Select System > PAD Table.
2. Enter Program 107 data.
3. Enter Program 108 data.
4. Enter Program 114 data.
5. Click Submit.

107 PAD Table Assignment

Prerequisite Program: None
Assigns additional Sender and Receiver PAD values to PAD groups in the PAD table.
FIELD DESCRIPTION

01 Sender PAD Device Enter Sender PAD device or group. See Table 4-2 or use drop-down menu.
Number
Possible values:Analog telephone, DKT, Analog trunk, T1 trunk, ISDN
station, ISDN trunk, CONF bridge, Music source, EXT.
paging, IPT-B, IPT-L/SIP, MIPU/GIPU_IPT2000/IP5000,
MIPU/GIPU-Strata Net, SIP Trunk, PAD group 1~17.
(default = no value.)

CIX100 - 6 PAD group numbers

CIX200/670/1200 Basic - 10 PAD group numbers
CIX670, CIX1200 Expanded - 32 PAD group numbers

02 Receiver PAD Enter Receiver PAD device or group number. See Table 4-2 or use drop-

System
Device Number down menu.
Possible values:Same as above
CIX100 - 6 PAD group numbers
CIX200/670/1200 Basic - 10 PAD group numbers
CIX670, CIX1200 Expanded - 32 PAD group numbers)

03 PAD Loss Enter PAD Value (see Table 4-2 or use the drop-down menu). The value
shown represents the net effect.
Note To PAD is to insert loss; therefore, “negative loss” equals net gain.
Possible values:1 = 6 dB Net Gain More volume
2 = 3dB Net Gain
3 = 0dB
4 = 3dB Net Loss
5 = 6dB Net Loss
6 = 9dB Net Loss
7 = 12dB Net Loss Less volume
8 = 15dB Net Loss
(default = no value)

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 4-29

 System
PAD Values

Program 107 PAD Table Example

If the Sender is an analog telephone (PAD device number 1) and the receiver is a T1 trunk (PAD device
number 4), then the PAD value is 6. (6 = 9dB Net Loss).
PAD group numbers are assigned in Program 108 PAD Group Assignment.

4-30 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 System
PAD Values

108 PAD Group Assignment

Prerequisite Program: None
You can enter up to 32 additional device groups to the PAD table to deal with exceptions to the default
table.
FIELD DESCRIPTION

00 PAD Group Device Enter the Device Type.

Type
Possible values:Station, Analog trunk, T1 trunk, ISDN trunk, CONF
bridge, Music source, EXT. paging
(default = no value.)

01 PAD Group Number Enter the PAD Group Number.

Possible values:0~6 (CIX100)
0~10 (CIX200, CIX670 Basic, CIX1200 Basic)
0~32 (CIX670 Exp, CIX1200 Exp)
(default = 0)

Table 4-2 Program 108 PAD Group Device Type Examples

Device Type Possible Values
Station 0~99999 (PDN)
ISDN Trunk Channel Group No. 1~128
Analog Trunk, T1 Trunk Trunk Number 1~264
Conference Bridge None (Conference Bridge is only one)
Music Source Music Port 1~15
External Paging Device Zone Relay Number 1~8

System

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 4-31

 System
PAD Values

114 PAD Conference Assignment

This program enables you to assign PAD values for combinations of analog trunks and telephones in
conference.
FIELD DESCRIPTION

01 PAD Conference Enter the number of analog trunks.

Trunks
Possible values:0~6 (default = 0)

02 PAD Conference Enter the number of analog telephones.

Telephones
Possible values:0~8 (default = 0)

03 PAD Conference Enter the desired PAD Value for the combination of analog trunks and
Value telephones specified in 01 PAD Conference Trunks and 02 PAD
Conference Telephones above. The value shown shows the net effect.
Note To pad is to insert loss; therefore, “negative loss” equals net
gain.
Possible values:1 = 6 dB Net Gain
2 = 3dB Net Gain
3 = 0dB
4 = 3dB Net Loss
5 = 6dB Net Loss
6 = 9dB Net Loss
7 = 12dB Net Los
8 = 15dB Net Loss
(default = no value).

4-32 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 System
Miscellaneous System Commands

Miscellaneous System Commands

110 Password
Prerequisite Program: None
This command assigns the password. The system has two passwords levels. Logging into the system with
the Level 1 password enables the user to administer all system programs while the level 2 password
provides restricted program administration.

1. Select System > Password.

2. Enter 00 Password Level.
3. Enter 01 Password.
4. Get Default sets all values to factory default.
5. Click Submit.

FIELD DESCRIPTION

00 Password Level Enter the digit 1 or 2 for the password as follows:

Possible values:Enter 1 to set the unrestricted administration password.
Enter 2 to set a restricted administration password.
Level 2 users can administer all programs but are
restricted from initializing the CIX and from updating the
CIX software
(default = 0000 (password will not display)).

01 Password Enter a 1~16 digit password for the selected level.

Note Only one password can be set for each level.

System
Possible values:Up to 16 ASCII character (default = no value)

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 4-33

 System
Miscellaneous System Commands

109 Music on Hold

Prerequisite Program: None
This command assigns external Music on Hold (MOH) and Background Music (BGM) sources.

1. Select System > Music on Hold.

2. For fields 01~07, click in the adjacent radio button to activate MOH/BGM.
3. For fields 08~15, enter the equipment location identifier and check the Connected box to activate.
4. Get Default sets all values to factory default.
5. Click Submit.

FIELD DESCRIPTION

01 MOH/BGM 1 For MOH/BGM #2~#7, click in the radio button to enable MOH/BGM for the
(ACTU or BECU) specified BIOU (MOH/BGM #1 enabled by default).

02 MOH/BGM 2 Possible values:Enable (default) or Disable

(BIOU1-J1)

03 MOH/BGM 3
(BIOU1-J2)

04 MOH/BGM 4
(BIOU1-J3)

05 MOH/BGM 5
(BIOU2-J1)

06 MOH/BGM 6
(BIOU2-J2)

07 MOH/BGM 7
(BIOU2-J3)

4-34 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 System
Miscellaneous System Commands

FIELD DESCRIPTION

08 MOH/BGM 8 Enter the analog station card equipment number to which MOH/BGM source
(RSTU/BSLU #9~1510 is connected.
Equip. No.)
Enter data as XXYYZZ:
09 MOH/BGM 9 XX=cabinet 01~07
(RSTU/BSLU
Equip. No.) YY=slot 01~10
ZZ=circuit 01~16
10 MOH/BGM 10
(RSTU/BSLU Example: If the MOH/BGM source should be a assigned to an RSTU in cabinet
Equip. No.) 5, slot 2, circuit 3; enter 050203.
1. A PDN can not be assigned to an BSTU/BSTCIU/RSTU/BSLU/ASTU/LSLU
11 MOH/BGM 11
equipment number if it is to be a MOH circuit.
(RSTU/BSLU
Equip. No.) If a PDN is assigned to the circuit that will connect to a MOH/BGM source, you
must first delete it using PRG201.
12 MOH/BGM 12
(RSTU/BSLU 2. On CIX100, ASTU=010901and 010902.
Equip. No.) 3. On CIX200, LSLU=010401and 010402.
13 MOH/BGM 13 Cabinet numbers:
(RSTU/BSLU • CIX/CTX100: Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
Equip. No.)
• CIX200: Select 01 for Base and 02 for Expansion cabinet.
14 MOH/BGM 14 • CIX/CTX670: Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each
(RSTU/BSLU Expansion cabinet.
Equip. No.)
• CIX1200: Select 01 for Base and 02~12 respectively for each
15 MOH/BGM 15 Expansion cabinet.
(RSTU/BSLU Slot numbers:
Equip. No.)

System
• CIX/CTX100: Select 01~04 for Base slots; 05~09 for Exp.
• CIX/CTX100: Virtual Slot for ACTU Relay = Cab 02, Slot 05.
• CIX200: Select 01~04 for either cabinet.
• CIX/CTX670: Select 01~08 for Base slots; 01~10 for Exp.
• CXI1200:Select 01~08 for Base slots; 01~10 for Exp.
• CTX28 and CIX40 assignments are hard coded and cannot be
changed.
• Virtual Slot for GCTU Relay = Cabinet 02, Slot 05.
01, 01 - 8 digital tel on motherboard (CTX28, CIX40 R1HW and R2HW).
01, 02 - 3 CO lines on motherboard (CTX28, CIX40 R1HW), 4 (CIX40 R2HW)
01, 03 - no card (CTX28, CIX40 R1HW), GVPH (CIX40 R2HW)
01, 04 - 1 (Base) or 2 (GSTU) analog station ports (CTX28, CIX40 R1HW and
R2HW)
01, 05 - GVMU (CTX28), GVPH (CIX40 R1HW), GIPx, MIPU or GCOCIH
(CIX40 R2HW)
01, 06 - GIPx, MIPU16 or GCOCIH (CIX40 R1HW), no card (CTX28, CIX40
R2HW)
01, 07 - 8 digital tel on GCDU (CTX28, CIX40 R1HW and R2HW).
01, 08 - 3 CO lines on GCDU (CTX28, CIX40 R1HW and R2HW).

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 4-35

 System
Miscellaneous System Commands

I/O Device
Program Number(s): 803, 801 and 804
These commands assign LAN devices, RS-232C devices and device relationships for I/O Logical Devices
SMDR, SMDI, CTI and physical ports.

1. Select System > I/O Device.

2. The tab sections are: I/O Logical Device (803), LAN Device (801), and RS232 Serial port (804).

803 Application Port Assignments

This program assigns one of the following:
• SMDR and CIX Proprietary Integration to the logical device and BSIS, RS-232 port numbers.
• ACD server, CIX Proprietary Integration and Attendant Console to BECU, Network Jack logical device
and LAN port numbers. Refer to Table 4-4 on page 4-40.
FIELD DESCRIPTION

00 Logical Device Select the 3 digit logical device number for SMDR, SMDI, and LAN devices
Number or Network application. See Table 4-3.
Possible values: 100 = SMDR
200~206 = CTI LAN devices or PCs (default = no value) -
Do not use for My Phone Application or Feature Flex.
208 = Feature Flex (do not use for anything else)
300 = SMDI or CIX Proprietary Integration
301 = SMDI or CIX Proprietary Integration
400 = BLF (for CIX Attendant Console)
500 = DSS (for Telephone, DSS Console, and ADM DSS
buttons)
600 = Traffic Report

01 Device Connection 1. Select RS-232 for serial connection to SMDR or SMDI devices or PCs.
These devices are connected to BSIS, RS-232 ports.
2. Select LAN for Strata eManager, ACD Server, SMDR LAN connection,
CIX Proprietary Integration, and Attendant Console PC. These devices are
connected to the BECU Network Jack directly or via a HUB or LAN.
Possible values:None (default), LAN or RS-232

4-36 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 System
Miscellaneous System Commands

FIELD DESCRIPTION

Port Index No. Select the Device Port numbers (one port per device).
Possible values:For a RS-232 connection: 1~4 (default = 1)
For an LAN connection: 1~9 (default = 1)
For BLF Networking: 11
For DSS Networking: 12
Note
• SMDR and SMDI devices can be assigned to any BSIS RS-232 Port.
• LAN devices and PCs can be assigned to logical Ports 1~9 according
to the following logical device number assignments:
LAN Port1 = device 200
LAN Port2 = device 201
LAN Port3 = device 202
LAN Port4 = device 203
LAN Port5 = device 204
LAN Port6 = device205
LAN Port7 = device206

• For Network SMDR, when the Device Port is LAN, set the Client TCP
Port Number to:

6000 - SMDR Call Accounting device that supports receiving SMDR

data from multiple CIX nodes on one TCP port.

600x - SMDR Call Accounting device that does not support receiving
SMDR data from multiple CIX nodes on one TCP port. Set each CIX

System
node to a unique value. The MDR Call Accounting device must be
capable of receiving data from each client port simultaneously.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 4-37

 System
Miscellaneous System Commands

Table 4-3 Device Table

Physical Device Define I/O

Logical
Logical Device Smart Media or
LAN PPP RS-232C Device
Secure Digital Number
SMDR OK - OK - 100
OK - - - 200
OK - - - 201
OK - - - 202
CTI OK - - - 203
OK - - - 204
OK - - - 205
OK - - - 206
JTAPI / VCS™ OK - - - 207
Feature Flex OK - - - 208
Stratagy or other SMDI OK - - - 300
Attendant BLF OK - - - 400
Attendant DSS OK - - - 500
Traffic Measurement OK - OK OK 600
SMDI OK - OK - 300

4-38 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 System
Miscellaneous System Commands

801 Network Jack LAN Device Assignment

Prerequisite Program: 803 on page 4-36.
This assigns Strata CIX LAN parameters, enabling PC applications to connect to the BECU network jack.

1. Select > System > I/O Device.

2. Click the LAN Device tab.
3. Enter Program 801 data. Refer to Table 4-4 on page 4-40
4. Get Default sets all values to factory default.
5. Click Submit.
FIELD DESCRIPTION

00 LAN Port Index No. Enter the port number of the LAN device to be assigned or select from the
list. Refer to “803 Application Port Assignments” on page 4-36.
Possible values:1~12 (default = no value)

01 Protocol Select Communication Protocol.

Possible values:TCP (default) or UDP
Note Select UDP for Network DSS and TCP for CIX applications.

02 Application Type Select the Operation Type.

• If Server is selected, make an entry in 04 Server Port Number.
• If Client is selected, make an entry in 05 Client IP Address.
Possible values:Server (default) or Client

03 Data Flow Select the data flow protocol for CIX and PC communications.
Possible values:Synchronous or Asynchronous (default = Asynchronous)

System
04 Server Port No. Enter the Server Port Number and proceed to 07 Read Retry Number. This
field is required if Server was selected in 02 PC Operation Type above. If not,
leave this field blank and proceed to 05 Client IP Address.
Possible values:0~65535 (default = 0)

05 Client IP Enter the Client LAN IP Address. This field is required if Client was selected
in 02 PC Operation Type above.
Possible values:0~255 for each octet (default = 0)

06 Client Port No. Enter the Client Port number

Possible values: 0~65535 (default = 0)
For Central LAN SMDR in a Strata Net use the same port number if the
SMDR Application supports receiving data from multiple nodes on one port
(i.e. 6000). Use a unique port number in each node if the SMDR Application
does not support receiving data from multiple nodes on a single port (i.e.
Node 1=6000, Node 2=6001). Refer to Figure 4-1 on Page 4-40.

07 Read Retry No. Set the maximum number of Read Retries.

Possible values: 0 ~ 10 (default = 1)

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 4-39

 System
Miscellaneous System Commands

FIELD DESCRIPTION

08 Write Retry No. Set the maximum number of Write Retries.

Possible values: 0 ~ 10 (default = 1)

09 Caller Name Set To The Caller Name can be sent to the CSTA application.
CSTA
Possible values:Yes - Net Phone (Set the Caller Name to CSTA) or
NO - Other CTI device (Do not send Caller Name) (Default)

Table 4-4 I/O Device Information

DSS Buttons
Program 803 SMDI LAN SMDI LAN BLF
Feature Flex (DSS
SMDR SMDI CTI CIX Proprietary CIX Proprietary Attendant
Console,
Port Assignments MAS ES/IES32 Console
DKT, & ADM
Logical Device No. 208 CTI #8 300 SMDI #0 300 SMDI #0 400 BLF 500 DSS
Device Connection LAN LAN LAN LAN LAN
Device Port No 8 10 10 11 12
DSS Buttons
Program 801 SMDI LAN SMDI LAN BLF
Feature Flex (DSS
LAN Device CIX Proprietary CIX Proprietary Attendant
Console,
Assignments MAS ES/IES32 Console
DKT, & ADM
LAN Port No 8 10 10 11 12
Protocol TCP TCP TCP TCP UPD
PC Operation Type Server Client Client Server Server
Data Flow Asynchronous Asynchronous Asynchronous Asynchronous Asynchronous
Server Port No. 1117 0 0 6000 3000
Client Port No. 0 1000 5000 0 0
IP address of
IP address of MAS
Client IP 0 ES / IES32 0000 0000
192.168.254.252
192.168.254.252
Retry No. 1 1 1 1 1
Write Retry Counter 1 1 1 1 1

CIX/CTX

Strata Net
CIX/CTX

CIX/CTX LAN
or
WAN
SMDR
Call Accounting

Figure 4-1 SMDR LAN Connection in a Strata Net

4-40 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 System
Miscellaneous System Commands

804 BSIS RS-232 Serial Port Setup

Prerequisite Program: None
Use this screen to setup the RS-232 serial ports on the BSIS PCB.

1. Select > System > I/O Device.

2. Click the RS232 Serial Port tab.
3. Enter Program 804 data.
4. Get Default sets all values to factory default.
5. Click Submit.

FIELD DESCRIPTION

00 BSIS Port (1~4) Enter the BSIS PCB port number.

Possible values:1~4 (default = no value)

01 Port Speed Select the data speed for the BSIS port in bits per second (bps).
Possible values:300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 (default), 19200, 38400 or 57600
Note The total combined maximum speed of BSIS ports cannot exceed
57,600 bps.

02 Port Parity Select the parity error checking method used by the BSIS port.
Possible values:None, Even or Odd (default)

03 Data Bits Select Data Length.

Possible values:7 Bits (default) or 8 Bits

04 Flow Control This setting indicates the type of flow control used between the BSIS port and
the SMDI or SMDR device. To enable the CIX to buffer call records set this field

System
to Flow.
Possible values:None (default) or Flow

05 Wait Timer Select the maximum time to wait for connection. The Timer value can be one
through 255 seconds. Select 0 to set to permanent waiting.
Possible values:0~255 (default = 30)

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 4-41

 System
Miscellaneous System Commands

115 Advisory Messages

Prerequisite Program: None
Specifies a set of messages that users may apply to their telephone to provide status information when
others call their station. When the user sets a message on a telephone, LCD telephones that call this
telephone will display the message. When the user sets a message, the message can be customized to
include a variable directory number, time or date as part of the message.

1. Select System > Advisory Messages.

2. Select the Message Number.
3. Enter the desired message in 01 Message.
4. Select 02 Additional Digits Type.
5. Get Default sets all values to factory default.
6. Click Submit.

FIELD DESCRIPTION

Message Number Select from 5 pre-programmed messages or 5 custom messages. All

messages (0~9) can be edited; the first 5 messages have commonly
used default values.
Possible values:0~4 = preprogrammed messages, 5~9 = custom
messages (default = 0)

01 Message Text Defines the text portion of the LCD Advisory Message to be displayed.
The total message text, plus the user entered variables (4-digit time or
date; or 1~5 digit DN) cannot exceed 16 characters total.
Possible values:Up to 16 ASCII characters (default = no value)

02 User Entered Defines the text portion of the LCD Advisory Message to be displayed.
Variable
The total message text, plus the user entered variables (4-digit time or
date; or 1~5 digit DN) cannot exceed 16 characters total.
Possible values:None (default), DN, Time or Date

Table 4-5 Advisory Message Default Code Table

# Advisory Message Type of Additional

0 OUT TO LUNCH None
1 IN A MEETING None
2 CALL Directory Number
3 BACK AT Time
4 RETURN ON Date
5 (No Data) None
6 (No Data) None
7 (No Data) None
8 (No Data) None
9 (No Data) None

4-42 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 System
Miscellaneous System Commands

116 Data Initialize

Prerequisite Program: None
This program is used to initialize the tables of selected programs in the Strata CIX system.

1. Select System > Data Initialize.

2. Select a Program to initialize from the 01 Command No. dialog box.
3. Get Default sets all values to factory default.
4. Click Submit.

System

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 4-43

 System
Miscellaneous System Commands

120 Tenant Assignments

Prerequisite Program: None
This program enables you to select an Attendant or Night Bell to ring when dialing 0 in Day 1, Day 2 or Day
3 mode for up to eight Tenants. You can also assign the general purpose relay to the Night Bell.

1. Select System > Tenant Data.

2. Enter the Tenant Number or use the pull-down to select a number.
3. Enter data.
4. Get Default sets all values to factory default.
5. Click Submit.

FIELD DESCRIPTION

00 Tenant Number Select Tenant.

Possible values: 1~8. No Data (Default)

01 Dial 0 Call Day 1 Dst Type This determines the destination type for calls dialing the Tenant
02 Dial 0 Call Day 2 Dst Type Attendant Access Code in each tenant for each time mode (Day 1,
Day 2 and NIght).
03 Dial 0 Call Night Dst Type
Important! The Tenant Attendant Access Code must be
assigned in Prog 102. If it should be 0, the
Attendant Console Group Access Code, which
is 0, must be deleted.
Possible values:No Data (default), Dialing Digits, Night Bell

01 Dial 0 Call Day 1 Dst Enter the PDN of the Attendant to ring when dialing Tenant Attendant
Digits Access Code in Day, Day2, or Day 3 mode.
02 Dial 0 Call Day 2 Dst Possible values:Up to 32 digits for each Day Mode selected
Digits (default =no data)
03 Dial 0 Call Night 3 Dst
Digits

04 Night Mode Relay Enter the General Purpose relay number assigned to the Night Bell.
BIOU relays 1~8. This operation activates the relay continuously
when the system is in the night mode.
Possible values:
BIOU 1 = relay 1~4
BIOU 2 = relays 5~8
ACTU, GCTU and LCTU = relay 5

05 Night Bell Relay Enter the General Purpose relay number assigned to the Night Bell.
BIOU relays 1~8. This operation activates the relay when a CO line or
DID rings when the system is in night mode. The CO or DID line must
be assigned to ring the night bell.
Possible values:
BIOU 1 = relay 1~4
BIOU 2 = relays 5~8
ACTU, GCTU and LCTU = relay 5

4-44 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

Station 5

This chapter provides Strata CIX station programming information.

Assignment
Program Number(s): 200, 201, 203, 204, 214, 205, 213, 215, 208, 210, 216, 260, and 502
The following programs assign station data.

200 Station Data

Prerequisite Program: 100 page 4-1
This command assigns stations to the system.

1. Select Station > Station Assignments.

2. Click on the Basic tab.
3. To modify an existing station enter its DN number in the Primary DN field or select a DN from the list on
the right side of the screen.
4. To create a new DN with custom settings click Create. A dialog box will appear.
• Select PRG 200: DKT/SLT/IPT_B/SL_VMU if you are creating a Digital Key Telephone, Single Line
Telephone or IPT-1020SD
• Select PRG 260: IPT_L/SIP/IP_VA/IP_ATT/IP_VM if you are creating an IPT2000-, IP5000-series or
a SIP telephone.
• Enter the desired values.
• Click Submit.
5. Delete – Enter a Primary DN or a range of Primary DNs to delete and click OK.
6. Change DN – Enter a DN in the Primary DN field and click Change DN. Enter the new DN assignment

Station
and click OK.
• Setup the DN by adding values to the remaining fields.
• Get Default sets all values to factory default.
• Click Submit.

The following table takes you through the parameters for IP station assignment (PRG 260).

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 5-1

 Station
Assignment

Table 5-1 Station Assignment Data for DKT, SLT and IPT1020SD Telephones (Prog 200)

FIELD DESCRIPTION

01 PDN Equipment No. Enter the PDN (xxyyzz). This is the cabinet, slot, and circuit number of the
ADKU, BDKU/BDKS, PDKU, or RSTU interface PCB to which the PDN is, or
should be assigned.
Example: If the PDN should be a assigned to a BDKU in cabinet 5, slot 2,
circuit 3; enter 050203.
Cabinet numbers:
• CIX100: Base, Exp.01
• CIX200: Base 01, Exp.02
• CIX670: Base 01, Exp 02~07.
• CIX1200: Base 01, Exp 02~12
Slot numbers:
• CIX100: Base 01, Exp.05~08
• CIX100: ACTU Relay Equipment= Cab 02, Slot 05.
• CIX100: ASTU Equipment=010901 and 010902
• CIX200: Base/Exp.01~04
• CIX200: LSLU Equipment=010401 and 010402.
• CIX670/1200: Base 01~08
• CIX670/1200: Exp.01~10

02 Station Type Select Station Type.

Possible values:DKT (default) or SLT

03 Circuit Type Select Extension or Assign Voice Mail attributes to analog circuits
Possible values: Extension (default) or Voice Mail
• Extension – Should be assigned to PDNs that are associated with Digital or
Standard telephones.
• Voice Mail – Should be assigned to PDNs associated with Voice Mail
circuits.
• Announce – Not used in the U.S.A. or Canada.

04 COS Day1 Assign COS to Day1, Day 2 and Night modes.

• Day2 Possible values:1~32 (default = 1)
• Night

05 DRL Day1 DRL for DAY1, Day 2 and Night

• Day2 Possible values:1~16 (default = 1)
• Night

06 FRL Day1 Assign FRL to Day1, Day 2 and Night modes. The higher the FRL number, the
• Day2 more trunk access is available.
• Night Possible values:1~16 (default = 1)

5-2 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Station
Assignment

Table 5-1 Station Assignment Data for DKT, SLT and IPT1020SD Telephones (Prog 200)

FIELD DESCRIPTION

07 LCR Group Station LCR Group Number

Possible values:1~16 (default = 1)

08 QPL Day1 QPL for Day1, Day 2 and Night modes.

• Day2 Possible values:1~16 (default = 1)
• Night

09 Station Name Enter Station Name to be displayed on this PDNs LCD.

Max. 16 chars. (default = no value)

10 Call Waiting Tone Select desired waiting tone for Offhook Campon.
Possible values:None (default), Singular or Continuity

11 Dialing Progress Tone Select type of Tone to hear after dialing LCR access code
Possible values:Dial Tone (default), Entry Tone or Silence

12 System Call Forward. Select the System Call Forward Group number.
Possible values:0~4 (CIX100), 0~10 (CIX200:), 0~32 (CIX 670), (default = 0)

13 Call Pickup The station privilege to activate Call Pickup.

Possible values:Permitted (default), Group Only or Not Permitted

14 Bearer Capability ISDN Bearer Capability the PSTN is expecting from non ISDN stations. 3.1kHz
Audio (data and speech) or Speech.

Notes
• Standard telephone type data devices (modems, G3-Fax signals) must be
set for 3.1KHz audio on ISDN lines.
• The Strata Net IP network does not support 3.1KHz (data and speech), all
standard telephone equipment must be set to 'Speech' if making calls over
Strata Net IP.
Possible values:3.1kHzAudio or Speech (default = 3.1kHzAudio)

15 Display DN Enter the number to be displayed on the calling telephone that rings this PDN
number. This number is will be overridden by Program 209, 04 (if assigned)

Station
and if the PDN is in a hunt group.
Possible values:Up to 5 ASCII characters (default = no value)

16 Caller Emergency Service Enter the E911 Calling Party Information identifier for this station (CESID).
Identification (CESID)
Possible values:Up to 16 digits (default = no value), however CESID should be
10 digits or less for Centralized Automatic Message
Accounting (CAMA) E911 trunk. PRI E911 allows upto 16
digits.

17 Emergency Call Group Enter the Emergency call group that this station belongs to.
Possible values:1~8 (default = 1)

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 5-3

 Station
Assignment

Table 5-1 Station Assignment Data for DKT, SLT and IPT1020SD Telephones (Prog 200)

FIELD DESCRIPTION

18 Remote CF/DND Password Enter password to set or cancel DND or station Call Forward from another CIX
station; or, for Call Forward only, from a external DSIA line.
Possible values:Up to 4 ASCII characters (default = no value)
Note DND can not be set/canceled remotely from a DISA line.

19 VMID Code SMDI Enter the voice mail box number that should answer calls when this PDN calls
voice mail; or, when this PDN is called and then forwards to voice mail (this
number is prefixed by codes in Program 579, 11~16)
Possible values:Digits 0~9, * and #, up to 10 characters (default = no value).
Note This VMID code is sent to the voice mail device in SMDI packets or
DTMF tones on direct calls to voice mail from the PDN; and on calls to
the PDN that forward to voice mail. See Program 580 for SMDI or
DTMF choice.

22 MW to VM Port Enter the Message Waiting center DN. For Remote CIX, assign message
center including Node IP for CIX Proprietary Integration integration. This
parameter enables Call Record function too.
Possible values:Up to 7 ASCII characters (default = no value)

23 Travelling COS Change Enable this station with the privilege to change the Travelling COS Override
Code.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Disable)

24 TGAC Override1 Enable Trunk Group Access Code (TGAC) override (for Attendant console)
from this station.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Disable)

25 Service Tones Disable Services Tone for Data Privacy. Service tone, such a Call Waiting
Tone, should be disabled for modems, FAXes, and similar devices.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Enable)
Note Service tone such as Call Waiting should be disabled for modems,
faxes, and similar devices.

26 CW and ROB Tone Enable/Disable the station to receive Call Waiting (Camp-on) and Ring Over
Busy Tone.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Enable)

Notes
• CW tone is always two beeps.
• ROB tone can be two beeps or continuous as set in PRG 204, 27.

27 Name Display Enable the privilege to put the user name in the Directory Assistance display of
a large LCD.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Enable)

28 Door Ovr DND Enable DND override by door phone.

Possible values:Override or Do not Override (default = Do not override)

5-4 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Station
Assignment

Table 5-1 Station Assignment Data for DKT, SLT and IPT1020SD Telephones (Prog 200)

FIELD DESCRIPTION

30 Set System Speed Dial Privilege to set System Speed Dial numbers
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Disable)

31 Network COS Select Network COS value.

Possible values:1~32 (default = 1)

32 Auto OCA OCA occurs automatically when making a call to a busy station that allows
OCA calls to be received.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Disable)

33 Originate OCA Enable this station with the privilege to make OCA calls to other stations.
Note: This privilege must be disabled for all Voice Mail and Auto Attendant
ports.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Enable)

34 RSTU Supervision This enables the auto disconnect Tandem timer in Program 104, FB06 for
these types of Connections.
Possible values:Received (default) or Not Received
Devices connected to RSTU circuits that do not automatically hang up, and
connect to CO lines that do not provide disconnect supervision, should be set
with “Not Received.”

35 Station SpDial Bins The number of station speed dial bins allocated to this station:
Possible values:0~100 (default = 0)

36 Set SLT Dial Type Choose DP (Old style - dial pulse dialling) or DTMF (Newer type - tone
dialling).
Possible values:DP or DTMF (default = DTMF)

37 Set Call Forward Dial When the handset is picked up, the user will hear stutter dial tone if a call
Tone forward is enabled.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Disable)

38 Dialing Digit Restriction After the Extension has made a call it can be prevented from dialling any
subsequent digits.

Station
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Disable)

39 CO Park & Hold You can enable or disable CO Park and Hold.
Enabled: When this station parks a line call, CO or GCO buttons of the parked
line that appear on other stations will be on hold. This will allow the other
stations to press the CO or GCO button to pickup the parked call.
Disabled: When this station parks a line call, CO or GCO buttons of the parked
line that appear on other stations will appear busy. This will prevent the other
stations to press the CO or GCO button to pickup the parked call.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Disable)

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 5-5

 Station
Assignment

Table 5-1 Station Assignment Data for DKT, SLT and IPT1020SD Telephones (Prog 200)

FIELD DESCRIPTION

40 MW & DND Dial Tone Enable: When this station goes off hook, the station will receive stuttered dial
tone when it has a message waiting indication; and the station will receive a
busy tone burst before dial tone when in the DND mode.
Disable: This station will receive normal dial tone when it has a message
waiting or when it is in the DND mode.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Enable)

41 Activate Message Waiting Enable: This station is allowed to activate station-to-station message waiting
on other stations by dialing the other station number plus 7, 8 or 9; or, by
pressing the Msg key.
Disable: This station cannot activate station-to-station message waiting on
other stations by dialing the station number plus 7, 8 or 9.

Notes
• When disabled, digital telephones are still allowed to activate station-to-
station message waiting by pressing the Msg button.
• This parameter does not apply to Voice Mail ports to use the special
Message Waiting access codes.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Enable)

42 Tenant Number Enter the Tenant number to which this PDN should be assigned.
Possible values:1~8 (default = 1)

43 Hook-Switch Recall Whether to start Recall when a station does On Hook in C-Hold.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Enable)

44 Auto-Campon to PDN This feature allows automatic camp-on to a PDN, even when it is busy and
called by a CO line. If Automatic Camp-on to PDN is enabled, a call to a PDN
can camp on even if the CO line group has auto-camp on disabled in Program
304-17.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Disable)

45 LCR PDN Code Enter the number of digits that determine when to send the LCR PDN code.
The PDN code is registered in the LCR Modified Digits table.
Possible values:Possible values:3 digits (default) or 4 digits.

46 Network Calling Number Enter the CLID telephone number that should be sent for this station when
making external calls through the StrataNet ISDN network (32 digits max.).
When this station makes outgoing calls through the StrataNet network, this
number will be sent over the Strata Net network to the terminating PSTN
connected to the far-end node (Providing this is allowed by the PSTN). This
number will be displayed as the Caller ID number at the terminating external
telephone. This number is not sent to local PSTNs connected to the node from
which the call is originated; nor is it sent when making conventional Tie line
calls that terminate on a PSTN at a far-end node.
Possible values:0 ~ 32 digits (default = no data)

5-6 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Station
Assignment

Table 5-1 Station Assignment Data for DKT, SLT and IPT1020SD Telephones (Prog 200)

FIELD DESCRIPTION

47 Personal Admin Enter the Personal Admin password for this station.
Password
Possible values:0 ~ 16 characters (default = no data)

48 Personal Admin Level Enter the Personal Admin user privilege level for this station.
Possible values:Normal, Super1 or Super2 (default = Normal)

49 SLT MW/CLID Option Enter the Message Waiting control type and Caller ID (CLID) for this standard
telephone.
Two types of message waiting signaling are available on the BSTCIU: (1) FSK
Visual Message Waiting Indication (VMWI) for standard telephones with CLID
and Relay Control for a 90v message waiting lamp.
1. Relay control only - same as BSTU interface relay control of MW lamp
voltage with no CLID signaling. (Some phones do not support message waiting
lamps. Refer the Prog. 208-08 (Station Timer assignments) to disable or delay
sending MW lamp signal.
2. Type 1 - No call waiting tone, with FSK VMWI.
3. Type 1 and Type 2 - with call waiting tone, with FSK VMWI
When using a BSTCIU to send CLID to a standard telephone option 2 or 3
must be selected to enable FSK signaling.
Possible values:1, 2, 3
1 - Relay control

50 Off-Hook Preference for Enter Off-Hook Preference for this station.

SLT Possible values:None (Internal Dial Tone) (default)
CO Line Access - Enter the line/trunk number
OLG - Enter the OLG number
LCR - Station will access LCR
For OLG or LCR - The station can dial the Override SLT CO Line Preference
code.

51 CAll Name Type Enter the Calling Name for Outgoing Name delivery..
Possible values:None - Do not send a name
LCD - Send the name assigned in FK09 Station Name for this

Station
station
SPECIAL - Send the name assigned in Trunk > Calling
Number (CNIS Presentation and Special Number
Assignment) parameter 04: Special Name Assignments
DEFAULT - Send the name assigned in Trunk > Calling
Number (Calling Number Identificatio) parameter 05: Default
Name

52 Simple SystemSpeed Dial Allows or denies Simple System Speed Dial for this station.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)

53 Analog Disconnect Signal Set to Enable to provide Disconnect Signal after the Disconnect Timer (System Timer)
expires.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 5-7

 Station
Assignment

Table 5-2 Station Assignment Data for IP, and SIP Telephones (Prog 260)

00 Prime DN Prime DN (enter an existing PDN or enter a PDN you wish to create for a new
station).

02 PDN Equipment Number Enter the PDN equipment number (0000 means auto assignment).
• IPT1020-SD must be installed on BIPU-M; IPT1020 cannot be installed on
LIPU/LIPS, MIPU or GIPx.
• SIP phones must be installed on LIPU/LIPS, MIPU or GIPx; SIP phones
cannot be installed on BIPU-M
• IPT2000 series and IP Softphones can be installed on LIPU/LIPS, MIPU,
GIPx or BIPU-M (see Prog 260 for LIPU/LIPS, MIPU or GIPx PDN
assignments). MIPU and GIPU require R5.0 software or higher.
Cabinet numbers:
• CIX100: Base, Exp.01
• CIX200: Base 01, Exp.02
• CIX670: Base 01, Exp 02~07.
• CIX1200: Base 01, Exp 02~12
Slot numbers:
• CIX100: Base 01, Exp.05~08
• CIX100: ACTU Relay Equipment= Cab 02, Slot 05.
• CIX100: ASTU Equipment=010901 and 010902
• CIX200: Base/Exp.01~04
• CIX200: LSLU Equipment=010401 and 010402.
• CIX670/1200: Base 01~08
• CIX670/1200: Exp.01~10
CTX28 and CIX40 assignments below are hard coded and cannot be
changed.
01, 05 – GVMU - 28, GVPH - 40 R1HW, GIPx, MIPU or GCOCIH - 40 R2HW
01, 06 – GIPx, MIPU16 or GCOCIH - 40 R1HW, no card - 28, 40 R2HW

01 Type Assign device types to GIPx, MIPU, LIPU/LIPS ports:

IPT2000-series telephones and IP Softphones are IPT (require End Point
licenses).
SIP telephones are SIP (require End Point license).
IP Attendant Consoles are ATTENDANT (require Basic Port License).
VM Ports are VOICE MAIL (require Basic Port License and MAS HMP
resource).
ACD Announcers are ACD ANNOUNCE (require Basic Port License and MAS
HMP resource).
Note IPT1020-SD telephones cannot be assigned to GIPx, MIPU, LIPU/
LIPS; they must be assigned to BIPU-M in Prog 200.

5-8 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Station
Assignment

Table 5-2 Station Assignment Data for IP, and SIP Telephones (Prog 260) (continued)

03 LAN Interface Number Enter “1” for an LIPU, GIPx or MIPU, enter “2” for an LIPS.
Possible values:1 (Default) or 2

05 COS Day1 Class of Service for Day1 mode.

Possible values:1~ 32 (default = 1)

• Day2 Class of Service for Day 2 mode.

Possible values:1 ~ 32

• Night Class of Service for Night mode.

Possible values:1 ~ 32 (default = 1)

06 DRL Day1 Destination Restriction Level for Day1 Mode (used for credit card calling).
Possible values:1 ~ 16 (default = 1)

• Day 2 Destination Restriction Level for Day2 Mode.

Possible values:1 ~ 16 (default = 1)

• Night Destination Restriction Level for Night Mode.

Possible values:1 ~ 16 (default = 1)

07 FRL Day1 Facilities Restriction Level for Day 1 Mode.

Possible values:1 ~ 16 (default = 1)

• Day 2 Facilities Restriction Level for Day 2 Mode.

Possible values:1 ~ 16 (default = 1)

• Night Facilities Restriction Level for Night Mode.

Possible values:1 ~ 16 (default = 1)

08 LCR Group Least Cost Routing Group Number.

Possible values:1 ~ 16 (default = 1)

09 QPL Day1 Queuing Priority Level for Day 1 Mode.

Possible values:1 ~ 16 (default = 1)

• Day 2 Queuing Priority Level for Day 2 Mode.

Station
Possible values:1 ~ 16 (default = 1)

• Night Queuing Priority Level for Night Mode.

Possible values:1 ~ 16 (default = 1)

10 Name to Display Enter the name that should be displayed on telephone LCDs for this PDN.
Possible values:16 ASCII Characters (default = no data)

11 Dialing Progress Tone Type of Tone to hear after dialing LCR access code.
Possible values:Dial Tone (Default), Entry Tone or Silence

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 5-9

 Station
Assignment

Table 5-2 Station Assignment Data for IP, and SIP Telephones (Prog 260) (continued)

12 System Call Forward System Call Forward group number.

0~4 (CIX/CTX100 & CTX28 & CIX40), 0~10 (CIX/CTX670/1200 Basic &
CIX200), 0~32 (CIX/CTX670 with expansion processor), 0~48 (CIX1200 with
A or B expansion processor).
Default = 0.

13 Call Pickup The station privilege to activate Call Pickup.

Possible values:Permitted (Default), Group Only, Not Permitted

14 Bearer Capability ISDN Bearer Capability the PSTN is expecting from non ISDN stations:
3.1kHzAudio (data and speech) or Speech.
Important!
Standard telephone type data devices (modems, G3-Fax signals) must be set
for 3.1KHz audio on ISDN lines.
The Strata Net IP network does not support 3.1KHz (data and speech). All
standard telephone equipment must be set to 'Speech' if making calls over
Strata Net IP.
Possible values:Audio (Default) or Speech

15 Display DN If this station is a member of a Hunt Group that has a Pilot Number and Pilot
Display Number set in Prog 209-02 and Prog. 209-04 respectively, enter the
HG Pilot Display Number in this field. This number will display on the LCD of
telephones when calling or when called by this station or VM port.
This is necessary for proper operation of Hunt Groups, including centralized
Voice Mail, over Strata Net.
Possible values:Dial String of 1~ 5 digits

16 CESID E911 Calling Party Information identifier for this station (CESID). Should be a
valid NANP telephone number.
Possible values: Up to 16 digits (default = no data)

17 Emergency Call Group The Emergency call group that this station belongs to.
Possible values:1 (default) ~ 8

18 Remote CF/DND Password to remotely set or cancel DND or Station Call Forward from another
Password CIX station or, for Call Forward only, from an external DISA line.
Note: DND cannot be set/canceled remotely from a DISA line.
Possible values:1 ~ 4 digits (default = no data)

5-10 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Station
Assignment

Table 5-2 Station Assignment Data for IP, and SIP Telephones (Prog 260) (continued)

19 VMID Code Enter the voice mailbox number that should answer calls when this PDN calls
voice mail, or when this PDN is called and then forwards to voice mail (this
number is prefixed by codes in Prog 579, 11~16).
Valid entries: digits 0~9, * and #, maximum 10 characters.
This VMID code is sent to the voice mail device in SMDI packets or DTMF
tones on direct calls to voice mail from the PDN and on calls to the PDN that
forward to voice mail.
Note: see Prog. 580 for SMDI or DTMF choice.
Possible values:1 ~ 10 digits (default = no data)

20 VM MW Center Port Message Waiting Center DN.

Enter the VM PDN or Pilot DN number that should display on telephone LCDs
when calling Voice Mail or receiving calls from Voice mail.
Possible values:Valid DN (default = no data)

21 Travel COS Change Privilege Change the Traveling Class of Service Override Code.
Possible values:Enabled or Disabled (default = Disabled)

22 TGAC Override Trunk Group Access Code Override for Attendant console.
Possible values:Enabled or Disabled (default = Disabled)

23 Service Tones Disable Services Tone for Data Privacy. Service tone, such a Call Waiting
Tone, should be disabled for modems, FAX machines, and similar devices.
Possible values:Enabled or Disabled (default = Enabled)

24 Call Waiting Tone Enable/Disable the station to receive call waiting (camp-on) and ring over busy
(rob) tone.
CW tone is always two beeps.
ROB tone can be two beeps or continuous as set in PRG 204, 27.
Possible values:Enabled or Disabled (default = Enabled)

25 Dial Directory Privilege to put the user name in the list display of large LCD (Directory
Assistance)
Possible values:Enabled or Disabled (default = Enabled)

Station
26 Door Over DND Enable DND to be overridden by a door phone.
Possible values:Override or Not Override (default = Not Override)

27 Set System Speed Dial Privilege to set System Speed Dial numbers.
Possible values:Enabled or Disabled (default = Disabled)

28 Network COS Network Class Of Service number.

Possible values:1~ 32 (default = 1)

29 Auto OCA OCA occurs automatically when making a call to a busy station that allows
OCA calls to be received.
Possible values:Enabled or Disabled (default = Enabled)

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 5-11

 Station
Assignment

Table 5-2 Station Assignment Data for IP, and SIP Telephones (Prog 260) (continued)

30 Originate OCA The privilege to make OCA calls to other stations.

Important!: This privilege must be disabled for all Voice Mail and Auto
Attendant ports.
Possible values:Enabled or Disabled (default = Enabled)

31 RSTU Supervision Devices connected to RSTU circuits that do not automatically hang up, and
connect to CO lines that do not provide disconnect supervision, should be set
with Not Received. This enables the auto disconnect Tandem timer in PROG
104, PB06 for these types of connections.
Possible Values: Received or Not Received (default = Received)

32 Station SpDial Bins The number of station speed dial bins allocated to this station.
Possible values:0 ~ 100 (maximum=100 per station).

33 Call Forward Dial Tone When the handset is picked up the user will hear stutter dial tone if Station Call
Forward is set on the telephone.
Possible values:Enabled or Disabled (default = Enabled)

34 Dialing Digit Restriction After the Extension has made a call it can be prevented from dialing any
subsequent digits.
Possible values:Enabled or Disabled (default = Disabled)

35 CO Park & Hold Enabled: When this station parks a line call, CO or GCO buttons of the parked
line that appear on other stations will be on hold. This will allow the other
stations to press the CO or GCO button to pickup the parked call.
Disabled: When this station parks a line call, CO or GCO buttons of the parked
line that appear on other stations will appear busy. This will prevent the other
stations to press the CO or GCO button to pickup the parked call.
Possible values:Enabled or Disabled (default = Disabled)

36 MW & DND Dial Tone Enable: When this station goes off hook it will receive stuttered dial tone when
it has a message waiting indication. The station will receive a busy tone burst
before dial tone when in the DND mode.
Disable: This station will receive normal dial tone when it has a message
waiting or when it is in the DND mode.
Possible values:Enabled or Disabled (default = Enabled)

37 Activate Message Waiting Enable: This station is allowed to activate station-to-station message waiting
on other stations by dialing the other station number plus 7, 8, or 9, or by
pressing the Msg key.
Disable: This station can not activate station-to-station message waiting on
other stations by dialing the station number plus 7, 8, 9, or by pressing the Msg
key.
This parameter does not apply to Voice Mail ports; they use the special
Message Waiting access codes.
Possible values:Enabled or Disabled (default = Enabled)

5-12 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Station
Assignment

Table 5-2 Station Assignment Data for IP, and SIP Telephones (Prog 260) (continued)

38 Tenant Number Enter the Tenant number to which this PDN should be assigned.
Possible values:1~ 8 (default = 1)

39 Hook-Switch Recall Enable Recall for Digital Telephones for normal operation.
Disable Recall on Standard Telephones that produce hook-switch bounce
when they are hung-up. This prevents annoying ring recalls when the user
hangs up on a call.
Possible values:Enabled or Disabled (default = Enabled)

40 Auto-Campon to PDN Enable - to allow auto-campon to this PDN when busy and called by a CO line
even if the CO line group has auto-campon disabled in Program 304-17.
Disable - to not allow auto-campon to this PDN when called by a CO line if the
CO line group has auto-campon disabled in Program 304-17.
Note
Auto-campon will always occur on the PDN if the calling CO line group has
auto-campon enabled in Program 304-17 regardless of how this option is set.
Auto-campon will be applied or not to PhDNs according to the PhDN owner
PDN setting for this option.
Possible values:Enabled or Disabled (default = Enabled)

41 LCR PDN Code Enter the number of digits that determine when to send the LCR PDN code.
The PDN code is registered in the LCR Modified Digits Table.
Possible values:G711, G729A or None (default = G729A)

42 Network Calling Number Enter the CLID telephone number that should be sent for this station when
making external calls through the Strata Net ISDN network (32 digits max.).
When this station makes outgoing calls through the Strata Net network this
number will be sent over the Strata Net network to the terminating PSTN
connected to the far-end node (providing this is allowed by the PSTN). This
number will be displayed as the Caller ID number at the terminating external
telephone. This number is not sent to local PSTNs connected to the node from
which the call is originated, nor is it sent when making conventional Tie line
calls that terminate on a PSTN at a far-end node.
Possible values:32 Digits Max.

43 Security Code Enter the My Phone Manager password for this station. This security code is

Station
also the IP Mobility Login password (refer to field 49).
Possible values:16 Characters Max

44 My Phone Manager Level Enter the My Phone Manager user privilege level for this station.
Possible values:Normal, Super 1 or Super2 (default = Normal)

45 Speaker OCA Enable or disable Speaker OCA on an IP telephone. When speaker OCA is
assigned to an IP set an additional IP port is assigned to the IP. If there is no
available IP port S-OCA cannot be assigned and an eManager error will occur.
Possible values:Enabled or Disabled (Default)

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 5-13

 Station
Assignment

Table 5-2 Station Assignment Data for IP, and SIP Telephones (Prog 260) (continued)

49 IP Phone Login Password Whether or not to apply the Login Password Authentication - Uses the
Personal Password (43)
Possible values:Enabled or Disabled (Default)

50 Transfer Registration Whether or not to apply Transfer Registration - Set to Enable to allow IP
Mobility for this DN.
Possible values:Enabled or Disabled (Default)
Note Assign a “Phone Logout” feature key on this DN.

51 Station Connecting Enter the PDN equipment number (0000 means auto assignment).
Equipment
• IPT1020-SD must be installed on BIPU-M; IPT1020 cannot be installed on
LIPU/LIPS, MIPU or GIPx.
• SIP phones must be installed on LIPU/LIPS, MIPU or GIPx; SIP phones
cannot be installed on BIPU-M
• IPT2000 series and IP Softphones can be installed on LIPU/LIPS, MIPU,
GIPx or BIPU-M (see Prog 260 for LIPU/LIPS, MIPU or GIPx PDN
assignments). MIPU and GIPU require R5.0 software or higher.
Cabinet numbers:
• CIX100: Base, Exp.01
• CIX200: Base 01, Exp.02
• CIX670: Base 01, Exp 02~07.
• CIX1200: Base 01, Exp 02~12
Slot numbers:
• CIX100: Base 01, Exp.05~08
• CIX100: ACTU Relay Equipment= Cab 02, Slot 05.
• CIX100: ASTU Equipment=010901 and 010902
• CIX200: Base/Exp.01~04
• CIX200: LSLU Equipment=010401 and 010402.
• CIX670/1200: Base 01~08
• CIX670/1200: Exp.01~10
CTX28 and CIX40 assignments below are hard coded and cannot be
changed.
01, 05 – GVMU - 28, GVPH - 40 R1HW, GIPx, MIPU or GCOCIH - 40 R2HW
01, 06 – GIPx, MIPU16 or GCOCIH - 40 R1HW, no card - 28, 40 R2HW

52 Simple System SpeedDial Whether or not to system speed dial supplement is allowed.
Possible values:Enabled or Disabled (Default)

53 Analog Station Whether or not Analog Station Disconnect Signal is sent. Refer to “208 Timer”
Disconnect Signal on page 5-31.
Possible values:Enabled or Disabled (Default)

5-14 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Station
Assignment

Station PDN Selective Copy

This screen gives you the option of selecting either all or some of the parameters to be copied to the
destination PDNs.

Using this screen you can do any of the following functions:

• Copy to multiple destination PDNs.
• Check All to select all the parameters, or select individual/multiple parameter(s) to be copied.

1. Select Station > Station Assignments. Enter the Primary DN.

2. Click Selective Copy. The Selective Copy screen displays.
3. Check Highlight All to select all the parameters or select individual/multiple parameter(s) to be copied.
Note If you want to copy almost all items and leave out a few, you can check Highlight All and then click
on the items that you don’t want to copy to deselect them.
4. Click Select ‘Copy To’ PDN(s) to start the copying process. End of Copy is displayed when copy is
complete.
Note You can return to the previous page and/or reselect copy to different destination PDNs by clicking
Back.

Station
PDN Table View
The PDN Table View displays the following parameters set in Program 200/260—Station Equipment
Number, Type, Extension/Voice Mail, Primary DN, User Name, PDN VMID, COS, DRL, FRL, LCR Group,
System Call Forward Template, Network COS, the quantity of Station Speed Dial bins and Tenant.
To access the extended list
Select Station > Station Assignments and click the PDN Table View button. The Extended List
spreadsheet displays after it downloads from the CIX. This takes some time depending on the CIX
connection speed and database size.
The screen may be kept up and moved around to use as a reference and can be printed. The Extended
List spreadsheet can be sorted by all 20 columns and sorting can be toggled between Ascending and
Descending order. The entire table can be printed using the Print button on the screen.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 5-15

 Station
Assignment

204 DKT Parameters

Prerequisite Program: 200 page 5-1
This command is used to set up DKT digital telephone station parameters.

1. Select > Station > Station Assignments.

2. Click on the DKT tab.
3. To modify an existing station, enter its DN number in the Primary DN field or select a DN from the list on
the right side of the screen.
4. To create a new DN with custom settings click Create in the Basic tab. A dialog box will appear.
• Select DKT/SLT/IPT_B/SL_VMU if you are creating a Digital Key Telephone, Single-line Telephone
or IPT-1020SD.
• Enter the desired values.
• Click OK.
5. Delete (Basic tab) – Enter a Primary DN or a range of Primary DNs to delete and click OK.
6. Change DN (Basic tab) – Enter a DN in the Primary DN field and click Change DN. Enter the new DN
assignment and click OK.
• Setup the DN by adding values to the remaining fields.
• Get Default sets all values to factory default.
• Click Submit.

FIELD DESCRIPTION

01 Station Type Select the Station Type. When set to Attendant the system can support four
circuits.
Possible values:Extension (default) or Attendant

02 Key Strip Pattern This option allows you select a pre-defined keystrip pattern and submit it to
the digital telephone. It does not display what pre-defined keystrip (if any)
has been assigned to the telephone.
Use the Key tab screen to view or edit telephone keystrip assignments.

CAUTION! Submitting a keystrip pattern will overwrite existing keys

programmed on a telephone.

Default key strip patterns for digital telephones. The selected pattern is
applied to the 'Key Strip Type' parameter.
None – applies PDN to button 01 and blank to all other buttons.
Pattern 1 – applies PDN to button 01, plus line buttons and DND.
Pattern 2 – applies PDN to button 01, plus line buttons, One-Touch buttons
and DND.
Pattern 3 – applies PDN to button 01 and blank to all other buttons.
(DKT3014/3214 uses only Pattern 1 or None).
Possible values:Pattern 1, 2, 3, or None (default)

5-16 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Station
Assignment

FIELD DESCRIPTION

03 Keystrip Button Select the number of feature buttons to assign to this station.
Quantity
Note Although the scroll down menu enables you to choose any value
from 1~24, valid values are 10, 14, and 20.
Possible values:1, 3, 7, 8, 10, 14, or 20 (default)
Applies 1, 3, 10, 14, or 20 button keystrip type to digital telephones:
1 and 3 button keystrips apply to DKT2001, DKT3001/3201|, and DP5008
7 button keystrips apply to DKT3007/32307 and SoftIPT
8 button keystrips apply to IPT2008-SDL
10 button keystrips apply to DKT2010, DKT3001/3201, DP5018, DP5022,
DP5122, DP5130, IP5122-SD -SDC and IP5131-SDL.
Note Set keystrips buttons to 20 for DP5130-SDL, DP5120-FSDL, and
IP5131-SDL with a SHIFT key on systems with R5.2 MT021
software or higher on Release 4.0 processors.
Note To set as or change from DP5130 or IP5131-SDL, refer to Keystrip
Type.
14 button keystrips apply to the Large LCD DKT3014/3210
20 button keystrips apply to DKT2020, DKT3020/3220, DP5032, DP5132
and IP5132-SD

04 Add-on Modules Select the number of DADM or LM Add-on-Modules assigned to this

station.
If the Add-on-Module is an LCD Line Module, LM5110, identify it as such in
parameter 40 and/or 41 of this program.
Possible values:None (default), 1 unit, or 2 units

05 Tone Ring/Voice Set PDN to have Tone First or Voice First signaling when called.
Announce For each iES32 PDN, set to “Tone First”; if set to Voice First iES32 will not
answer.
Possible values:Tone or Voice (default)

06 OCA Type Select the OCA type. This field must be programmed with Auto OCA
Originate below.
Possible values:Handset (default) or Speaker

09 Handsfree MIC If you call a station configured for Voice First signaling you can use this

Station
Setting parameter to enable the called parties microphone from your DKT.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Enable)

10 Handsfree Tone If you call a DKT configured for Voice First signaling you can use this
parameter to send a splash tone to the called party.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Enable)

11 Ext. Ring Repeat Enable repetitive ringing for incoming CO / PBX / Centrex signals.
Disabling this parameter defaults to standard CO ringing pattern (1 sec on /
3 sec Off).
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Disable)

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 5-17

 Station
Assignment

FIELD DESCRIPTION

13 Off Hook Select Off Hook Preference.

Preference
Possible values:Idle, Ringing, Prime, No Preference, Prime and Idle, Prime
and Ringing or Ringing and Idle (default)
When a digital telephone user goes off hook, presses the Spkr Button or
dials a digit while the telephone is idle (Hot Dial Pad), the telephone will
select an idle PDN or Line button or answer an incoming call according to
the preferences set in this command.
This command works in conjunction with the 14 PDN/Line Preference and
15 Ringing Preference programs.
The possible values are described as follows:
• Idle – The telephone will select an idle DN or Line button depending on
the 14 PDN/Line Preference choice. In either case priority is always the
lowest numbered button that is idle. The telephone will not answer
ringing calls automatically.
• Ringing – The telephone will answer a ringing call (any PDN, secondary
DN, PhDN, or any Line type button) by call type or longest ringing
button depending on the 15 Ringing Preference choice. The telephone
will not automatically select a DN or Line button when going off hook to
originate a call.
• Primary DN – The telephone will automatically try to select the PDN
button, if idle or ringing, no matter what the status is of other buttons on
the telephone.
• No Preference – The telephone will not select any button when the user
goes off hook or presses the Spkr button. This selection will also disable
the telephone’s Hot Dial Pad feature.
• Primary DN and Idle – The telephone will automatically try to select the
PDN button if idle or ringing. If the PDN is busy the telephone will select
an idle Line button (14 PDN/Line Preference - Line Preference) or
another idle DN button (14 PDN/Line Preference - PDN Preference).
• Primary DN and Ringing – The telephone will automatically try to select
the PDN button if idle or ringing. If the PDN is busy the telephone will
select a ringing Line button (14 PDN/Line Preference - Line Preference)
or a ringing DN button (14 PDN/Line Preference - PDN Preference).
• Ringing and Idle – The telephone will always answer any ringing call
according to 15 Ringing Preference. If a call is not ringing it will select
an idle Line button (14 PDN or Line Preference - Line Preference) or
idle DN button (14 PDN or Line Preference - PDN Preference).

5-18 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Station
Assignment

FIELD DESCRIPTION

14 PDN/Line Offhook preference button type.

Preference
Possible values:CO Key or DN Key (default)
• CO Line buttons - Line buttons (any type CO, Pooled or Group CO line
button) have priority over DN buttons with 13 Off Hook Preference
choices. The lowest numbered line button on the telephone has priority
over other line buttons for idle selection.
• Primary DN button - DN buttons (any type PDN, Secondary DN or
PhDN button) have priority over Line buttons with 13 Off Hook
Preference choices. The PDN button has first priority for idle selection.
The lowest numbered DN button on the telephone has priority over
other DN buttons for idle selection if the PDN button is busy.
Note Off hook ringing selections are also based on 15 Ringing
Preference choices.

15 Ringing Ringing call answer preference.

Preference
Possible values:Longest or Call Type (default)
• Longest Ringing - any call type - Calls are answered in order of the
longest ringing line no matter what type of call (FIFO).
• Longest Ringing - by call type priority - Call Type priority is applied to
the longest ringing button.
Call Type Priorities are fixed in software as shown below:
• Emergency Calls
• Hands Free Calls (after it is switched to ringing by the caller)
• ACD calls
• Recalls (Hold recall, Automatic call back, ABR, etc.)
• External Calls (DID, DIT DISA line calls etc.)
• Internal Calls (station, Attendant, Tie line, door phone, etc.)

16 Text Msg Display Select whether to display an LCD text message. Immediate displays the
message. Not immediate does not display the message.
Possible values:Immediate (default) or Not Immediate

Station
17 Call History Enter the number of calls to be stored in memory for this station.
Memory
Possible values:0~100 (def = 0) Increments of 5 (0, 5, 10, 15, 20, … 100)
Note Up to the system max: CIX40, 100 = 660, CIX200, 670 Basic, 1200
Basic = 1000, 670 Exp = 2000, CIX1200 Exp = 3000

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 5-19

 Station
Assignment

FIELD DESCRIPTION

19 Continuous Enable / Disable Continuous DTMF for DKT2000 and DTK3000 series
DTMF telephones.
Enabled allows the telephone to send DTMF tones to the far end
continuously as long as the key on the dial pad is held down.
Note
• For each iES32 PDN, set to 'Not Continuous' - if set to 'Continuous',
outdial notification to pagers and calls to AMIS nodes will not function
properly.
• DKT1000 series telephones do not support continuous DTMF.
DKT1000 series telephones must be set to 'Not Continuous' or they will
misdial.
Possible values:Continuous (default) or Not Continuous

20 Display Select the LCD Display Language.

Language
Possible values:English (default), British English, French, Spanish
Note The display language must also be set at IPT2008-SDL and
IP5131-SDL stations using access code #495.

21 Adapter Select the Adapter Type (Desktop OAI or Attendant Console).

• BPCI – for USB interface
• BATI – for PC Attendant Console Interface
Possible values:None (default), BPCI or BATI

22 Blind Transfer Set Blind Transfer Action (Attendant Type Only).

Possible values:Leave or Separate (default)

23 Mailbox Selection Select the method to enter the destination Mailbox for Call Recording. If set
to Auto the CIX uses the VMID of the station initiating the record function.
Note
• The DN assigned as the MSG center in PROG 200 is used to call the
VM port or Hunt group (PROG 200 FK 22).
• When set to Auto the VMID of the station initiating the record function is
sent to Stratagy ES as the destination mailbox.
• When set to Manual Input the user may enter any valid mailbox followed
by the “#” sign. If the user presses “#” without additional data the CIX
will send the VMID of the originating station.
Possible values:Auto or Manual (default)

24 MIC Init. Value Turn on the microphone automatically when making a speakerphone call.
Note The microphone must be enabled.
Possible values:On (default) or Off

25 Microphone Enable microphone.

Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Enable)

5-20 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Station
Assignment

FIELD DESCRIPTION

26 Speaker Mode Enable telephone to receive Call Waiting (Camp-on) and Ring Over Busy
Tones (ROB) Tone while on a speakerphone call.
Possible values:Yes (default) or No

27 Call Waiting Set ROB to ring two times or continuously.

Tones
Possible values:Two Cycles or Continuous (default)
Note See PRG200, 26 to enable ROB to be sent to individual
telephones.

28 Attd Overflow Select overflow destination for attendant.

Dest.
Possible values:Up to 32 ASCII characters (default = none)

29 Trunk Test & Allow Trunk Tests and Verification.

Verify
Possible values:Yes or No (default)

30 Auto Line Hold Enable Automatic Line Hold. This parameter allows a station to “line hop”
from one call to another automatically by placing the first call on hold.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Disable)

31 Call Progress Allows the telephone to be set to ring or not ring when busy on a call. If a
Dependency telephone has multiple DNs (PDN + PhDNs) set this parameter to the Line
Mode.
Line Mode: Calls will ring the telephone when the user is talking on a line or
DN button if the telephone has multiple DN or line buttons in a hunt
configuration. If Call Forward Busy/No Answer is set, the telephone will
Ring No Answer, and then forward when a call is delivered to the telephone
while the user is talking on a DN or CO line button.
Terminal Mode: Callers will receive busy tone when any DN or CO line
button on the telephone is in use. If Call Forward Busy/No Answer is set on
the telephone, a call to the telephone will forward immediately when a call
is delivered while the user is talking on any DN or CO line button.
Possible values:Line Mode (default) or Terminal Mode

32 Programming Enable: Allows the telephone to enter the Programming Mode.

Mode Disable: Restricts the telephone from entering the Programming Mode.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Enable)

Station
33 Stop Sending Turn this parameter On to stop sending LCD information to this port. This
LCD Data must be turned on for Stratagy iES32 voice assistant ports.
Possible values:On or Off (default = Off)

34 Administrator Enable to allow this telephone to function as an Administrator telephone.

Phone
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Disable)

35 Pool Line Flash Enable this feature if pooled line buttons should only flash when they ring
this telephone. If disabled, pooled line buttons will flash on this telephone
when the pooled line is ringing any telephone - even if not ringing this
telephone.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Enable)

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 5-21

 Station
Assignment

FIELD DESCRIPTION

36 Exclusive Hold Enable: If the user presses the Hold button twice in succession the
telephone places the current call on Exclusive Hold.
Disable: The telephone cannot place calls on Exclusive Hold.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Enable)

37 Dial Directory - Enable: Allows access to the telephone Dial Directory by going off-hook,
Off Hook pressing the Spkr button or pressing the first softkey on the left side of the
LCD.
Disable: Denies access to the telephone Dial Directory by going off-hook or
pressing the Spkr button. User must press the first softkey on the left side
of the LCD to access the Directory Dial feature.
Note This option only applies to 7, 10, and 20 button telephones with
small LCDs.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Disable)

38 Dial Directory - Enable: Allows user to originate a call by going off-hook, pressing the Spkr
Make Call button or pressing the CALL softkey after finding a name using the small
LCD telephone Dial Directory feature.
Disable: User must press the CALL softkey to originate a call using the
small LCD telephone Directory Dial feature. After finding a name, nothing
will happen when going off-hook or pressing the Spkr button.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Disable)

39 LARGE LCD Select DP5130/IP5131 if this is a DP5130-SDL/IP5131-SDL or DP5130-

PHONE FSDL large LCD telephone with programmable LCD keys.
Note If this is a DP5130/IP5131 type telephone, with a SHIFT key and
with system software R5.2 MT021 or higher on Release 4.0
processors select 20 buttons in parameter 03 of this program,
earlier software must select 10 buttons in parameter 03 of this
program.
Note to 20 for DP5130-SDL, DP5120-FSDL, and IP5131-SDL
Select NOT DP5130/IP5131 for all other telephone types.

40 ADM1 - LCD Select LM5110 if Add-on-Module 1 is a LCD Line Module with

KEYSTRIP programmable LCD keys.
Select NOT LM5110 for all other KM or DDADM types
Possible values:1: Not LM5110 (Default)
2: LM5110

41 ADM2 - LCD Set this value to LM5110 if the add-on module 2 is an LCD line module with
KEYSTRIP programmable LCD keys.
Possible values:1: Not LM5110 (Default)
2: LM5110

5-22 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Station
Assignment

FIELD DESCRIPTION

To Remove an To remove an LM module (ADM 1 or ADM2)

LM5110 Add-on 1. Change FK 40 for ADM1, change FK 41 for ADM 2 to Not LM5110 -
Module then click on Submit.
2. Change FK 4 to One or None as appropriate. - then click on Submit.

Feature Button Patterns

The following tables show the various feature button patterns available for field 02 above.
Table 5-3 20 Button (when field 03 value is 20)
PATTERN1 PATTERN2 PATTERN3
FB01 Primary DN Primary DN Primary DN
FB02 CO 1 CO 1 No Data
FB03 CO 2 CO 2 No Data
FB04 CO 3 CO 3 No Data
FB05 CO 4 CO 4 No Data
FB06 CO 5 CO 5 No Data
FB07 CO 6 CO 6 No Data
FB08 CO 7 CO 7 No Data
FB09 CO 8 CO 8 No Data
FB10 CO 9 CO 9 No Data
FB11 CO 10 CO 10 No Data
FB12 CO 11 CO 11 No Data
FB13 CO 12 CO 12 No Data
FB14 CO 13 Single Touch Button No Data
FB15 CO 14 Single Touch Button No Data
FB16 CO 15 Single Touch Button No Data
FB17 CO 16 Single Touch Button No Data
FB18 CO 17 Single Touch Button No Data
FB19 CO 18 Single Touch Button No Data
FB20 Do Not Disturb Do Not Disturb No Data

Table 5-4 10 Button (when field 03 value is 10)

Station
PATTERN1 PATTERN2 PATTERN3
FB01 Primary DN Primary DN Primary DN
FB02 CO 1 CO 1 No Data
FB03 CO 2 CO 2 No Data
FB04 CO 3 CO 3 No Data
FB05 CO 4 CO 4 No Data
FB06 CO 5 Single Touch Button No Data
FB07 CO 6 Single Touch Button No Data
FB08 CO 7 Single Touch Button No Data
FB09 CO 8 Single Touch Button No Data
FB10 Do Not Disturb Do Not Disturb No Data

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 5-23

 Station
Assignment

Table 5-5 14 Button (when field 03 value is 14)

PATTERN1 PATTERN2 PATTERN3
FB01 Primary DN Primary DN Primary DN
FB02 CO 1 No Data No Data
FB03 CO 2 No Data No Data
FB04 CO 3 No Data No Data
FB05 CO 4 No Data No Data
FB06 CO 5 No Data No Data
FB07 No Data No Data No Data
FB08 CO 7 No Data No Data
FB09 CO 8 No Data No Data
FB10 CO 9 No Data No Data
FB11 CO 10 No Data No Data
FB12 CO 11 No Data No Data
FB13 Do Not Disturb No Data No Data
FB14 No Data No Data No Data

5-24 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Station
Assignment

214 DSS Console Assignment

Prerequisite Program: 200 page 5-1
This assignment allows up to eight Direct Station Selection (DSS) Consoles to be assigned to a station.
The assignment is referenced to the stations’s Primary DN.

1. Select > Station > Station Assignments.

2. Click on the DSS tab.
3. Enter a DN number in the Primary DN field or click the list on the right side of the screen
4. Enter the Equipment number in which the DSS(s) is installed.
5. Get Default will set all data to the factory defaults.
6. Click Submit.

FIELD DESCRIPTION

Prime DN Enter the PDN of the station that is to be associated with the DSS console(s).
Possible values:Any string up to 5 digits (default = no value).

01~08 DSS Equipment No. Enter the DSS equipment number.

1~8
Cabinet numbers:
• CIX100: Base, Exp.01
• CIX200: Base 01, Exp.02
• CIX670: Base 01, Exp 02~07.
• CIX1200: Base 01, Exp 02~12
Slot numbers:
• CIX100: Base 01, Exp.05~08
• CIX100: ACTU Relay Equipment = Cab 02, Slot 05.
• CIX100: ASTU Equipment=010901 and 010902
• CIX200: Base/Exp. 01~04
• CIX200: LSLU Equipment=010401 and 010402.
• CIX670/1200: Base 01~08
• CIX670/1200: Exp. 01~10
CTX28 and CIX40 assignments below are hard coded and cannot be

Station
changed.
01, 01 - 8 digital telephones on motherboard - 28, 40 R1HW and R2HW
01, 05 – GVMU - 28, GVPH - 40 R1HW, GIPx, MIPU or GCOCIH - 40 R2HW
01, 06 – GIPx, MIPU16 or GCOCIH - 40 R1HW, no card - 28, 40 R2HW
01, 07 - 8 digital telephones on GCDU - 28, 40 R1HW and R2HW

Example: If the DSS console should be connected to a BDKU in cabinet 5,

slot 2, circuit 3; enter 050203.
Note If a PDN is assigned to the DSS equipment number, it must be
deleted using PRG201 before attempting to assign the DSS console.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 5-25

 Station
Assignment

205 / 213 / 215 Key

Program Number(s): 205, 213, and 215
Prerequisite Program: 200 page 5-1 and 204 page 5-16
The Feature Button assignments enable each button on the telephone to be addressed and coded to
represent a function or feature to be performed. Some feature buttons require additional parameters to
completely define the key (e.g., a Phantom DN needs a directory number, ringing assignment, and the
tone pitch when ringing occurs).

1. Select > Station > Station Assignments.

2. Click on the Key tab.
Notes
- To Program DSS buttons, Program 214 should be completed.
- To program ADM buttons (ADM 1 or ADM 2), field 04 (Add on Modules) in Program 204 must be
set to One or Two.
3. Enter one of the following in the Primary DN field:
• Primary DN to program DKT FBs.
• Primary DN plus an ADM number to Program ADM FBs.
• Primary DN plus DSS Key Assignment button to program DSS FBs or click one of the following
buttons:
- PDN Table View – view a detailed list of programmed DNs.
- Copy – After entering the source DN in the Primary DN field, click Copy and designate which FB
buttons to copy (click the DKT Phone header to select all). Enter the destination DN and click OK
(range is permitted).
- Cross Copy – This button enables you to copy specific keys from a station’s keypad to desired
keys of other station keypads.
4. Click on the FB to program (the button turns from yellow to red).
5. Click the desired option from the blue parameter buttons on the right.
• Directory No – Assign a Primary DN key, Secondary/Phantom DN, Phantom DN Message Waiting,
or DSS key to this FB. See ”Directory Number Sub-parameters’ on page 5-29 for more details.
• CO Lines – Assign FB as a CO, GCO or a Pooled Line. See ”CO Lines Sub-parameters’ on
page 5-29 for more details.
• Features – Assign ABR, ACB, DND, Short Flash, Long Flash, Privacy, Privacy Release, BGM Key,
Program Access, Account Code, Application Starting, Split Key, or System Alarm feature to this FB.
• Call Control – Activate Speed Dial, Release Button, Release/Answer, Cancel, Source Party,
Destination Party, CLID or Night Transfer from this FB.
• Call Forward – Set Call Forwarding assignments for this FB. Forward All Calls, Forward Busy,
Forward No Answer, Forward Busy No Answer, Forward Ext/All Call, Forward Ext/Busy, Forward
Ext/No Answer and Forward Ext/Busy No Answer are available selections.
• Park Page – Assign Call Park Orbit, All Paging, Group Paging, All Emergency Paging, Individual
Emergency Paging and Paging Answer Feature access to this FB.
• Call Pickup – Assign FB to a Pickup-Group, Pickup-Directed Terminal, Pickup-Directed Group,
Pickup-Directed DN, Pickup-Any External, Pickup-CO Retrieve, Pickup-Local Retrieve, Pickup-
Remote, Pickup-Directed DN Retrieve and Pickup-On Hold and Incoming.
• Door Lock – Enable FB to unlock Door Lock.
• Voice Mail – Enable FB to Record or Pause/Resume Voice Mail.

5-26 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Station
Assignment

• Attendant – Assign Out Dial, Attendant Answer, Overflow, Position Busy, Trunk Test, Attendant
Loop or Supervised Loop Key Attendant features to this FB.
• ACD – Assign Log In/Out, Available/Unavailable, Work Unit, ACD Help, ACD Pickup, End WrapUp,
Join ACD Call, Monitor ACD Call, Start/End Shift, Display Status, or UCD Agent Login/Out features
to this FB.
• One Touch – Assign FB as a One Touch button. See ”Setting the One Touch Button’ on page 5-21.
• Split – Assign FB to Split the connected party and the conference master from the conference (for
private call). (Join button is used to reconnect both parties to the conference.) The Split button
should not be assigned to a DKT2304-CT cordless telephone.
• Blank – Clear FB assignment.
6. Click on one feature in the sub-parameter dialog box. If no other settings are required, the FB displays
an abbreviation for the selected feature or if you select Directory No, CO Lines or Door Lock
parameters, additional fields are required. See the tables that follow for more details.
7. Follow the directions in each pop-up dialog box. To modify an existing feature button double-click the
feature button and make the change in the appropriate dialog box that displays.
8. Click Submit.

Cross Copy
Use the following steps to cross copy keys from one station to the keys of another station’s keypad:

1. From the Key Page, enter the Prime DN.

2. Click Submit.
3. Click the Cross Copy button. The Source and Target
Copy screen displays (shown right). Enter the “Copy
To” PDNs or click Select to select the target PDN.
4. From the Source DKT, select key to be copied.
5. Click the Copy Now button.
6. Click Done. Target DKT with the copied key displays.
7. Verify the key copied.

Setting the One Touch Button

Follow the step above 1~8 above to assign an FB as a One Touch button. Then complete the following
steps:

1. Double-click the key assigned as One Touch.

Station
2. Enter the One Touch data, then click OK.
Example 1: Setting up a One Touch button to transfer to Voice Mail.
Select the Cnf/Trn from the white box on the right, CNF displays in the One Touch Data field. Then
type #407 after CNF displays in the One Touch Data box. It adds Cnf/Trn #407 in the One Touch Data.
Click OK. Then click Submit.
Example 2: To originate a call from the PDN, select the FK as 01 if the PDN is on the first key then add
the telephone number next to FK01 in the One Touch Data box.
Cancel clears the changes and takes you back to the previous page.
DP5000 and IP5000 series Large Screen telephones can offer 10 more flexible keys. In addition to the added
10 keys, a dedicated Call History button gives access to the Caller ID history of incoming calls. Also, dial by
name directory enables calling by pressing the button associated with the name of the person (R5.2 MT021
software or higher on Release 4.0 processors). On Strata CIX systems running this version of software the

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 5-27

 Station
Assignment

DP5310-SDL, DP5130-FSDL and IP5131-SDL large screen telephones are provided with the following
enhancements:
• Flexible Key capacity - 10 Keys to 20 Keys using the Shift key.
• Dedicated Call History Button using the History (Hist) key (DP5130-SDL & DP5130-FSDL only).
• Enhanced Dial-By-Name Directory operation.

Shift Key and History Key

Two unused keys on the telephones, the bottom left and right keys become functional buttons. The “Shift” key
toggles the LCD screen between flexible keys 1~10 and flexible keys 11~20; the “Hist” key accesses the Caller
ID history. These buttons have no function when the telephone is connected to a CIX system running on
software released prior to R5.2 MT021.

Important! Important Large Screen Telephone 20-Key Programming restrictions.

1. All call buttons should be either on keys 1~10 or 11~20. Mixing call buttons on both screens
(keys 1~10 and 11~20) will cause user confusion. Call buttons include Directory Number buttons,
Pilot Number buttons, CO line, Pooled line, GCO line buttons, etc.
2. DP5000-series Large Screen Telephones requiring Feature Flex and/or ACD application buttons
cannot be set up in the 20-key configuration. Application buttons such as ACD Agent, ACD
Supervisor, Call Return, Call Monitor etc. are not currently compatible with Large screen 5000
series telephones in the 20-Key configuration they only function properly on the large screen 10-
key configuration.

To program the 20 flexible keys using Network eManager:

1. In Prog 204 set 03 - Keystrip Button Quantity to 20 and 39 - Large LCD Phone to 20
2. In Stations > Station Assignment > Key set flexible buttons

Shift and Hist Key Operation

Shift Key Operation
At any time, press the Shift key to alternate between the keys 1~10 and keys 11~20.

Shift to Answer calls

If the LCD screen is set to view keys 11~20 and a call comes in on key 1 the phone will ring and Caller ID
information will display on the top of the screen - press the Shift key to view keys 1~10 and answer the call.

Hist Key Operation

At any time while your phone is idle press the Hist key to view and dial Caller ID numbers stored in the station
history log. Press the Hist key when the phone is idle. Use the soft keys to view and place calls. Note: The
phone must have Caller ID history programmed.

5-28 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Station
Assignment

Directory Number Sub-parameters

FIELD DESCRIPTION

Primary DN 1. Select Ringing Assignment for Day1, Day2 and Night.

Possible values:No Ring, Immediate Ring, Delayed Ring1 and Delayed
Ring2.
2. Select Tone Pitch.
Possible values:1~4 (default = 1)

Secondary/Phantom DN 1. Enter DN Number.

Possible values:Any string up to 5 digits
2. Select Ringing Assignment for Day1, Day2 and Night.
Possible values:No Ring, Immediate Ring, Delayed Ring1 and Delayed
Ring2.
3. Select Tone Pitch.
Possible values:1~4 (default = 1)

Phantom DN Message Enter Phantom DN No.

Warning
Possible values:Any string up to 5 digits

DSS Key Enter DSS Primary DN No.

Possible values:Any string up to 5 digits

CO Lines Sub-parameters
FIELD DESCRIPTION

CO 1. Select CO Line #.
Possible values:1~56 (CIX200), 1~64 (CIX100), 1~96 (CIX670 Basic, CIX1200
Basic), 1~264 (CIX670 Exp, CIX 1200 Exp A), 1~440 (CIX1200 Exp
B), (default = no value)
2. Enter Owner DN.

Station
Possible values:Any string up to 5 digits
3. Select Ringing Assignment for Day1, Day2 and Night.
Possible values:No Ring, Immediate Ring, Delayed Ring1 and Delayed Ring2.
4. Select Tone Pitch.
Possible values:1~4 (default = 1)

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 5-29

 Station
Assignment

FIELD DESCRIPTION

GCO 1. Select GCO No.

Possible values:1~20 (CIX200, CIX670 Basic, CIX1200 Basic), 1~32 (CIX100),
1~128 (CIX670 Exp, CIX1200 Exp A), 1~220 (CIX1200 Exp B),
(default = no value)
2. Select Index.
Possible values:1~128 (CIX200, CIX670), 1~32 (CIX100), 1~220 (CIX1200)
(default = no value)
3. Enter Owner DN.
Possible values:Any string up to 5 digits
4. Select Ringing Assignment for Day1, Day2 and Night.
Possible values:No Ring, Immediate Ring, Delayed Ring1 and Delayed Ring2.
5. Select Tone Pitch. 1~4 (default = 1)

Pooled Line Key 1. Select Pool Line No.

Possible values:1~32 (CIX100), 1~50 (CIX200, 670 Basic, 1200 Basic), 1~‘28
(CIX670 Exp, 1200 Exp A) 1~220 (CIX1200 Exp B)
(default = no value)
2. Select Ringing Assignment for Day1, Day2 and Night.
Possible values:No Ring, Immediate Ring, Delayed Ring1 and Delayed Ring2.
3. Select Tone Pitch. 1~4 (default = 1)

Door Lock Sub-parameters

FIELD DESCRIPTION

Door Unlock Select Door Lock No.

Possible values:1~10 (default = 1)

5-30 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Station
Assignment

208 Timer
Program Number(s): 208
Prerequisite Program: 200 page 5-1
Assigns timing parameters to Primary DNs.

1. Select: Station > Station Assignments.

2. Click on the Timer tab.
3. Enter a DN in the Primary DN field or select an existing record by clicking one of the following buttons:
• List – select from the list of programmed DKTs on the right side of the screen.
• Copy – Enter a DN in the Primary DN field and click Copy. Enter a new DN to assign existing
Station Timer settings.
4. Select the desired values. See descriptions below.
5. Get Default will set all data to the factory defaults.
6. Click Submit
FIELD DESCRIPTION

Prime DN Enter the Prime DN.

Possible values:Up to 5 digits (default = no value)

01 Automatic Busy Redial Enter the number of retry attempts made by ABR when dialing a busy
Retry Count telephone number.
Possible values:5~20 (default = 15)

02 Automatic Busy Redial Select the amount of time (in seconds) ABR waits between dialing attempts.
Retry Interval Timer
Possible values:30~180 (default = 60)

03 Automatic Busy Redial Select the number of seconds ABR will call back the station after receiving ring
Recall Timer back tone from the dialed number.
Possible values:5~60 (default = 20)

04 Hold Recall Timer Select the number of seconds before a held call recalls.
Possible values:0~255 (default = 60)

05 First Interdigit Timer Enter the First Interdigit Timer in seconds.

Possible values:1~180 (default = 15)

Station
06 Second Interdigit Timer Enter the Second Interdigit Timer in seconds.
Possible values:1~180 (default = 5)

07 Ring Xfer No Answer Enter the Ring Xfer No Answer Timer in seconds.
Timer
Possible values:1~600 (default = 32)

08 SLT MW Lamp Signal The time in seconds to wait before sending the Message Waiting Lamp signal
Timer to a standard telephone.
Note Some SLTs do not support MW lamps
Possible values:1(Default) - 10; 0 = MW signal not sent

09 Analog Station The time in seconds, after the the disconnect until the disconnect signal is sent.
Disconnect Signal Timer
Possible values:1~120 (default = 1)

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 5-31

 Station
Assignment

216 Emergency Ringdown Assignment

Program Number(s): 216
Prerequisite Program: 200 page 5-1
Assigns Emergency Ring Down parameters to Primary DNs.

1. Select > Station > Station Assignments.

2. Click on the RingDown tab.
3. Enter a DN number in the Primary DN field or select an existing record by clicking one of the following
buttons:
• List – select from the list on the right side of the screen.
• Copy – Enter a DN in the Primary DN field and click Copy. Enter a new DN to assign existing
Station Timer settings.
4. Select the desired values. See descriptions below.
5. Get Default will set all data to the factory defaults
6. Click Submit
FIELD DESCRIPTION

01 Emergency Enable an Emergency Ringdown Number.

Ringdown
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Disable)

02 Emergency Enter the length of off-hook time that will cause a DN to originate an Emergency.
Ringdown Timer
Possible values:0~60 (default = 0)
Note For DKT, IP, and IPT stations, do not set the time to more than 30 seconds.

03 Emergency Enter the destination DN for the Emergency Ringdown.

Ringdown
Possible values:Up to 5 digits (default = no value)
Destination

5-32 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Station
Assignment

206 Phantom DN
Prerequisite Program: 200 page 5-1
This command assigns Phantom DN parameters.

1. Select > Station > Phantom DN.

2. Enter a Phantom DN number or click one of the following buttons:
• List – view a summary list of programmed Phantom DNs.
• Copy – Enter the Phantom DN to copy data from, then click Copy and designate a Phantom DN to
copy the data to. Click OK.
• Get Default - Sets all data to factory defaults.
3. Click Submit.

FIELD DESCRIPTION

Phantom DN Enter Phantom DN.

Possible values:Up to 5 ASCII characters (default = no value)

01 Owner PDN Set Phantom DN's Owner Station.

Possible values:Up to 5 ASCII characters (default = no value)

02 Tone/Voice First Choose Tone First or Voice First signaling.

Possible values:Tone First (default) or Voice First

04 Display DN Enter the number displayed on the calling telephone that rings this Phantom DN
number.
Possible values:Up to 5 ASCII characters (default = no value)
This number is overridden by the number in Program 209, field 04 (if assigned) and if
the Phantom DN is in a hunt group. When calling from this Phantom DN the number
displayed on the called telephone appears in order of priority as follows:
This number in Program 209, field 04 (if assigned) and if the PhDN is in a hunt group.
… or this number in Program 200, field 15 (if assigned).
… or the calling telephone's PDN.

05 System Call Select the System Call Forward value.

Forward
Possible values:0~4 (CIX100), 0~10 (CIX200, 670 Basic, 1200 Basic), 0~32 (CIX 670

Station
Exp.), 0~48 (CIX1200 Exp), (default = 0)

06 VM ID Code Enter the voice mailbox number that should answer calls when this PhDN calls voice
mail; or when this PhDN is called and then forwards to voice mail (this number is
prefixed by codes in Program 579, field 11~field 16).
Possible values:Digits 0~9, * and #, up to 10 characters (default = no value).
This VMID code is sent to the voice mail device in SMDI packets or DTMF tones on
direct calls to voice mail from the PhDN and on calls to the PhDN that forward to voice
mail (see Program 580 for SMDI or DTMF choice).
Note Do not enter a VMID code in this field if this PhDN is associated with a PDN in
a multiple DN hunt group (Program 209, field 06).
The associated PDN’s VMID code (Program 200, field 19) will be sent to voice mail.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 5-33

 Station
Assignment

FIELD DESCRIPTION

09 Message Center Enter the Message Waiting Center DN, VM Pilot Number or lowest member of VM hunt
group.
Up to 7 ASCII characters (default = no value)

10 LCD Name Enter the name that should be displayed on telephone LCDs for this PhDN.
Possible values:Up to 8 ASCII characters (default = no value)

11 Display Name Select radio button for user name to be included in the list display of Large LCD
(Directory Assistance).
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Disable)

5-34 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Station
Assignment

209 Hunt Group

Prerequisite Program: 200 page 5-1
This command assigns Station Hunting Group data.

1. Select > Station > Hunt Group.

2. Click on the Group tab.
3. Enter a Group Number for an existing record or click one of the following buttons:
• List - View list of programmed hunt groups.
• Create – Assign a new hunt group with custom settings.
• Get Default - Sets all data to factory defaults.
4. Click Submit.
FIELD DESCRIPTION

Hunt Group Number Hunt Group Number

Possible values:1~90 (CTX28, CIX40 CTX100), 1~200 (CTX670 Basic & CIX200),
1~640 (CTX670 Exp) 1~200 (CTX1200 Basic HCTU only), 1~1100
(CTX670 Exp HEXAU or HEXBU)
(default = no value)

01 Hunt Method Select Hunt Method

Possible values:Distributed (for voice mail and UCD hunt groups - MAS Voice Mail
Ports connected to a GIPx, MIPU, LIPU or LIPS interface that should
be set as IP Voice Mail, or Circular (for Multiple DN hunt groups)
(default)

02 Pilot Number Enter Pilot Directory Number. This is the number that is dialed to call the hunt group.
Possible values:Up to 5 ASCII characters (default = no value) any type of hunt group
can have a pilot number.
Note Any type of hunt group can have a pilot number. Distributed hunt groups
must have a pilot number. Voice mail hunt groups should be distributed with a
Pilot Number. Multiple DN hunt groups should be circular with no Pilot
Number.

04 Number to Display Enter the number that is displayed when called by, or when calling any member of the
hunt group.
Possible values:Up to 5 ASCII characters (default = no value)

Station
Note This number should be the DH Group Pilot number for Voice Mail hunt
groups. This number could be the PDN of a Multiple DN hunt group, in which
case the number would override the number assigned in Program 200, field
15 for PDNs and Program 206, field 04 for Phantom DNs.

05 Pilot No. SCFwd Allows you to assign a system call forward pattern to the Pilot Number of a hunt
group.
Possible values:0~4 (CIX/CTX100 & CTX28 & CIX40), 0~10 (CIX/CTX670 & CIX200
Basic), 0~32 (CIX/CTX670 Exp), 0~10 (CIX200 Basic HCTU only),
0~48 (CIX1200 Exp. HEXAU or HEXBU)
(default = 0)

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 5-35

 Station
Assignment

FIELD DESCRIPTION

06 Muitple DN Hunt Enable if hunt group is created for multiple DN operation. Multiple DN hunt groups
should be circular with no pilot number. Set to disable for UCD group.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Disable)

07 DHG Auto CampOn Whether to execute Automatic Camp On to the distributed hunt group or not.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Disable)
Should be applied to VM Distributed hunt groups so callers automatically camp on to
voice mail when all VM ports are busy. Does not apply to circular or serial hunt
groups.
Set to Enable for UCD group

08 UCD Enable/ To turn on or off the Universal Call Distribution feature.

Disable
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Disable)

09 UCD MOH Source Select which MOH interface will be connected to the music source of the Universal
Call Distribution. This source will be played to calls in the UCD Queue.
Possible values:No MOH Source, BIOU-1-J1~J3, processor MOH Jack, BIOU-2-
J1~J3, XSTU-1~8
Note Maximum 128 calls in queue at one time.

The number of calls waiting in the queue times the number of agents in the
system must be less than 128. For example, two UCD groups - group #1 has
10 agents and group #2 has 15 agents. Group #1 can have only 3 calls
queued (10x3 = 30) when group #2 already has 6 calls in the queue (15x6 =
90). A total of 120.

10 UCD Overflow Select the amount of time that UCD calls should remain in the UCD Queue before
Timer they overflow.
Possible values:1 to 3600 seconds in 1 second intervals (default = 300 seconds)
Note The overflow destination is the destination assigned to the UCD Pilot System
Call Forward-No Answer Timer.

11 UCD RBT Timer If no UCD agents are available when a call is routed to the UCD group the caller will
hear Ring Back Tone (RBT) for the length of time set for this timer. After this time
expires the caller will be routed from RBT to the UCD MOH interface.
Possible values:0~30
Default = 10

5-36 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Station
Assignment

218 Station Hunt Assignments

Prerequisite Program: 209 page 5-35
This program assigns station DNs to hunt groups using Program 209 and assigns the rotation order in
which DNs are hunted.

1. Select Station > Hunt Group.

2. Click on the Member tab.
3. Enter a Member Number for an existing record or click one of the following buttons:
• List –Select from the list of programmed hunt groups on the right side of the screen.
• Insert – Assign a new station DN to the hunt group number entered above.
• Append – Assign a new DN as the last DN in a hunt group’s hunt order.
• Modify – Highlight an existing DN in the hunt order and change the station DN assignment.
• Delete – Delete station DN assignment to Hunt Order number.
• Get Default - Sets all data to factory defaults.
4. Click Submit.
FIELD DESCRIPTION

Hunt Group Number Enter an existing hunt group number or use the List, Add, Append, Modify, or Delete
buttons as described above.
Possible values:0~18 (CTX28), 0~32 (CIX40), 0~90 (CIX/CTX100), 0~200 (CIX/
CTX670 & CIX200 Basic), 0~640 (CIX/CTX670 Exp), 0~200 (CIX1200
Basic HCTU only),
Possible values:0~1100 (CIX1200 Exp. HEXAU or HEXBU) (default = no value)

Hunt Order This field assigns a station DN position within a hunt group’s hunt order. The hunt order
is selected automatically by Strata eManager. Programmers should assign the last
station in the hunt order first and assign the first station in the hunt order last.
Possible values:1~72 (CIX100), 1~160 (CIX200, CIX670/1200 Basic),
1~560 (CIX670 Exp, CIX1200 Exp A), 1~1100 (CIX1200 Exp B)
(default = no value)

DN By selecting the Insert button you can add a new DN to the hunt group’s hunt order.
Enter the desired DN in the pop-up dialog box.
To modify an existing entry use the Modify button as described above.

Station
Possible values:Up to 5 ASCII characters (default = no value)

Set Type Insert, Append, Modify (replace), Delete an existing assignment.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 5-37

 Station
Assignment

Hunt Group Table View

Hunt Group Table View enables you to view all hunt groups and its members.

To access the Hunt Group Table View

Select Station > Hunt Group Table View.
See Table Views in Chapter 2 for table functionality.
Note This table has more functions in addition to the regular functionality found in other table views.
The Navigation Bar has the following additional buttons:
• Delete – Click on a row to delete any directory number from a Hunt Group then click the Delete button.
When the Delete button is active the Add button and the Delete Group button will not be active. To
unselect a row that is selected (in yellow), click the row again.
• Add – To add directory numbers to a hunt group select the Hunt Group in the table view from the
Navigation drop down in the Navigation bar, then click the Add button.

If no rows are selected, the Add button is active. Click the Add button to add members to Hunt Groups.
When you click the Add button the Add dialog box displays.

Select the DN from the Available Directory Numbers box, then click the Arrow button in the center. This
moves the DN to Hunt Group box on the left. Click Add Now to Save the entry or Cancel to cancel.
Clicking Add Now automatically refreshes the table view.

In the dialog box, if you want 6200 to appear before 5200, click 6200 on the right, then click 5200 on the
left and then click the arrow in the center.
• Select All and Unselect All – Clicking these buttons selects or unselects all groups in a table.

5-38 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Station
Assignment

502 Paging Group

502 Terminal Paging Group Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 200 page 5-1
Assigns Primary DNs to Paging Group(s).

1. Select Station > Paging Group.

2. Enter a DN in the Primary DN field or select an existing record by clicking one of the following buttons:
• List – select from a summary list of programmed DKTs on the right side of the screen.
• Copy – Enter a DN in the Primary DN field and click Copy. Enter a new DN(s) to assign existing
Paging Group settings.
• Get Default - Sets all data to factory defaults.
3. Select the desired values. See descriptions below.
4. Click Submit.
FIELD DESCRIPTION

00 Primary DN Enter the Prime DN of the station to be assigned to paging groups. A station may
belong to more than one paging group.
Note You can have up to 72 stations in a paging group in the CIX100 and up to 120
stations in a paging group in the CIX200, CIX670 & CIX1200.
Page Group capacity:
• CIX100, CIX40 & CTX28, 4 Page Groups
• CIX670 Basic & CIX200, 8 Page Groups
• CIX670 Expanded, 16 Page Groups
• CIX1200 Basic, 8 Page Groups (HCTU only)
• CIX1200 Expanded, 24 Page Groups (HEXAU or HEXBU)
Possible values: Up to 5 ASCII characters (default = no value))

01~16 Page Group Check to assign the DN to this paging group.

(CIX40, 100, Page Group capacity:
670)
• CIX100, CIX40 & CTX28, 4 Page Groups
• CIX670 Basic & CIX200, 8 Page Groups
19-26 for PG17~24
(CIX1200 only) • CIX670 Expanded, 16 Page Groups

Station
• CIX1200 Basic, 8 Page Groups (HCTU only)
• CIX1200 Expanded, 24 Page Groups (HEXAU or HEXBU)
Note Note: You can have up to 72 stations in a paging group in the Strata
CIX100 and up to 120 stations in a paging group in the Strata CIX 200/
670/1200.
Possible values: On or Off (default).

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 5-39

 Station
Assignment

FIELD DESCRIPTION

17 All Call Page Check to assign the DN to this paging group.

Group
Page Group capacity:
• CIX100, CIX40 & CTX28, 4 Page Groups
• CIX670 Basic & CIX200, 8 Page Groups
• CIX670 Expanded, 16 Page Groups
• CIX1200 Basic, 8 Page Groups (HCTU only)
• CIX1200 Expanded, 24 Page Groups (HEXAU or HEXBU)
Note Note: You can have up to 72 stations in a paging group in the Strata
CIX100 and up to 120 stations in a paging group in the Strata CIX 200/
670/1200.
Possible values: On or Off (default))

18 All Call Check to assign the DN to the All Emergency Page Group.
Emergency Page
Page Group capacity:
Group
CIX100, CIX40 & CTX28, 4 Page Groups
CIX670 Basic & CIX200, 8 Page Groups
CIX670 Expanded, 16 Page Groups
CIX1200 Basic, 8 Page Groups (HCTU only)
CIX1200 Expanded, 24 Page Groups (HEXAU or HEXBU)
Note You can have up to 72 stations in a paging group in the Strata CIX100
and up to 120 stations in a paging group in the Strata CIX 200/670/1200.
Possible values: On or Off (default)

19 Page Group Check to assign the DN to this paging group.

17~24
Page Group capacity:
CIX100, CIX40 & CTX28, 4 Page Groups
CIX670 Basic & CIX200, 8 Page Groups
CIX670 Expanded, 16 Page Groups
CIX1200 Basic, 8 Page Groups (HCTU only)
CIX1200 Expanded, 24 Page Groups (HEXAU or HEXBU)
Note You can have up to 72 stations in a paging group in the Strata CIX100
and up to 120 stations in a paging group in the Strata CIX 200/670/1200.
Possible values: On or Off (default)

5-40 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Station
Assignment

Paging Group Table View

Paging Group Table View enables you to view all paging groups and its members.
To access the Paging Group Table View
Select Station > Paging Group Table View, or if you are in Prog 502, click Terminal Paging Group Table
View.
See Table Views in Chapter 2 for table functionality.
For functionality on Delete, Add, Select All and Unselect All, refer to ”Hunt Group Table View’ on
page 5-38
Note The Add button works a little different on this table. When you click Add, the Add dialog box
displays. Select the entry by clicking on it and then click the Add Now button.

210 Pickup Group

Prerequisite Program: 200 page 5-1
The Call Pickup Group assignments specify which group numbers this station will participate in when either
the Group Call Pickup or the Group Directed Call Pickup features are invoked. A user may be assigned to
more than one group.

1. Select Station > Pickup Group.

2. Enter a DN in the Primary DN field or select an existing record by clicking one of the following buttons:
• List – select from a summary list of programmed DKTs on the right side of the screen.
• Copy – Enter a DN in the Primary DN field and click Copy. Enter a new DN(s) to assign existing
Paging Group settings.
• Get Default - Sets all data to factory defaults.
3. Select the desired values. See descriptions below.
Click Submit
FIELD DESCRIPTION

01~48 Click in the radio button to Indicate which Call Pickup Group(s) this station
is to participate in. A station can be assigned to more than one group.
Possible values:check = On; or unchecked = Off (default)
Note 01~05 CIX40/100 and CTX28, 01~10 CIX200/670/1200 Basic,
01~32 CIX670 Expanded, 01~48 CIX1200 Expanded.

Station
Pickup Group Table View
Pickup Group Table View enables you to view all Pickup groups and members.

To access the Paging Group Table View

Select Station > Pickup Group Table View. If you are in Prog 210, click the Call Pickup Group Table View
button.
See Table Views in Chapter 2 for table functionality.
For functionality on Delete, Add, Select All and Unselect All, refer to ”Hunt Group Table View’ on
page 5-38.
Note The Add button works a little different on this table. When you click Add, the Add dialog box
displays. Select the entry by clicking on it and then click the Add Now button.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 5-41

 Station
Assignment

Multiple Call Group

To set up Multiple Call/Delayed Ringing you must have a Multiple Call (MC) Group set in Program 517. You
can register up to 25 calling members for every MC Group in Program 518. You can set each member to
be Immediate, Delayed Ring 1, or Delayed Ring 2. The Delayed Ring times are independently adjustable
(1~180 seconds) for each Multiple Call Group Member.
Important! Immediate Destinations can only be PDNs (Digital and/or Standard Telephones) and
PhDNs. See Member Requirements below.

Delay Destinations can be PDNs of standard telephone circuits only and Voice Mail
Hunt Group Pilot Numbers (not Multiple DN Hunt Groups).

Incoming Call to Multiple Call (MC) Group

The following can occur when calling members are set as Immediate, Delayed Ring 1, or Delayed Ring 2.
• If the members of an MC Group are assigned Immediate ring, the call is received at all destinations
immediately. In this case, each destination LCD displays the same incoming call information.
• If the MC Group destination (member) is assigned to Delayed Ring 1 or Delayed Ring 2, each
destination will start to ring when the delay time runs out. During the delay time the member PDN or
PhDN button will flash red but not ring.
Important! Delay Destinations can be PDNs of standard telephone circuits only and Voice Mail
Hunt Group Pilot Numbers (not Multiple DN Hunt Groups).
• If some MC Group destinations are busy, incoming calls ring only idle destinations. However, if the
camp-on feature is in effect incoming calls will camp-on to busy destinations.
• Members can be assigned to multiple MC Groups.
MCPN Owner Privileges
When you assign members to an MC group the member assigned to Index 1 in Program 518 is considered
the owner of the group. The owner of the group is the only member entitled to the following privileges:
• The owner is the only member in the group that can receive Automatic Call Back calls and Message
Waiting Indications.
• The ringing option for the owner is always set to Immediate ring.
• The owner can be a PhDN or PDN.

5-42 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Station
Assignment

Member Requirements
The table below has details for members that can and cannot be in a group.

Members that can be in a Group Members that cannot be in a Group

PDNs Pilot DNs - ACD, MCP
PhDNs CO Line Access Codes
Station Hunt Group Pilot DNs Attendant Consoles and BATI or DKTs assigned to the Attendant in
programming.

Important!
• Immediate Destinations can only be PDNs (Digital and/or Standard Telephones) and PhDNs.
• Delay Destinations can be PDNs of standard telephone circuits only and Voice Mail Hunt Group Pilot
Numbers (not Multiple DN Hunt Groups).
• Attendant Consoles cannot be members of multiple call groups and cannot overflow to MC groups.
Assigning Attendant Consoles to MC groups will cause Attendant Consoles to malfunction. Do not set
Attendant Consoles to overflow to MC groups.

Call Forward Activation

System and Station Call Forward can be set up for each Multiple Calling (MC) Group. The Call Forward
Remote Access Code is used to activate or de-activate Station Call Forward of MC Group. System Call
Forward is activated/deactivated using Strata eManager. The MC Group can also be set as the destination
of System or Station Call Forward.

Station

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 5-43

 Station
Assignment

517, 519 Multiple Call Group Assignment

Multiple Call/Delayed Ringing which enables you to delay ring to voice mail and auto attendants.

1. Select Station > Multiple Calling Group.

2. Click Create. A dialog box displays.
3. Enter a calling group index in the dialog box.The calling group index can be:
1~16 (CIX100), 1~32 (CIX200, CIX670 Basic), 1~64 (CIX670 Expanded) 1~32 (CIX1200 Basic), 1-96
(CIX1200 Expanded)
4. Click OK. Parameter - 01 MC Group Pilot Number gets highlighted.
5. Enter the DN of the MC group. This number should not conflict with an existing telephone number.
6. Verify and change other parameters.
• Get Default - Sets all data to factory defaults.
7. Click Submit. The group index displays on the left of the program name.

FIELD DESCRIPTION

Multiple Call Group Number Select a group number.

Possible values:1~16 CTX28, 1~16 CIX40, 1~16 CTX/CIX/100, 1~32 CIX200,
1~32 CTX/CIX 670 BCTU only or BBCU only, 1~64 CTX/
CIX670 BCTU + BEXU or BBCU + BECU, 1~32 CIX1200
HCTU only, 1~96 CIX1200 HCTU + HEXAU, 1~96 CIX1200
HCTU + HEXBU

01 MC Group Pilot Number Enter the pilot directory number that should be assigned to the Multiple Call
Group. This can be any number, 1~5 digits, that does not conflict with numbers
in the current system number plan.
Possible values:1~5 digits (default = no data)

02 Ring Delay 1 Timer Set the timer in seconds.

Possible values:1~180 (default = 12)

03 Ring Delay 2 Timer Set the timer in seconds.

Possible values:1~180 (default = 24)

04 System Call Forward Assign a system call forward template number to the multiple calling group.
Possible values:0~4 CIX/CTX100 & CTX28 & CIX40, 0~10 CIX/CTX670 &
CIX200 Basic, 0~32 CIX/CTX670 Exp., 0~10 CIX200 Basic
HCTU only, 0~48 CIX1200 Exp. HEXAU or HEXBU
(default = 0)

05 Voice Mail ID Enter the VM call forward ID digits for the multiple calling group.
Possible values:Up to 10 digits (default = no data).

5-44 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Station
Assignment

518 Multiple Call Group Members Assignment

Prerequisite Program: 517
Use this program to assign members to a group.
1. Select > Station > Multiple Call Group.
2. Click the Member tab.
3. Select the Index Number, then enter the Member DN.
Important! Immediate Destinations can only be PDNs (Digital and/or Standard Telephones) and
PhDNs.

Delay Destinations can be PDNs of Standard Telephone circuits only and Voice Mail
Hunt Group Pilot Numbers (not Multiple DN Hunt Groups).

Note Each group can have up to 25 members. You can have up to 64 groups.

Note The buttons on this screen are dynamic. When you select an empty index number the Add button
displays. When you select an existing index number the Modify and Remove buttons display.
Modify enables you to edit, while Remove deletes the multiple ringing group index number.

FIELD DESCRIPTION

Multiple Call Group Number Multiple Call Group Number

CIX100, enter 1~16. CIX200, CIX670 Basic enter 1~32.
CIX670 Exp enter 1~64, CIX1200 Basic, enter 1~32, CIX1200 Exp enter 1~96

03 Member DN Select an index to a add a new member to this MC Group; or select an existing
Member DN to Modify or Delete the member.
To add a Member DN, enter a PDN, PhDN, or Hunt Group Pilot number that
exists in the system, then select which ringing option should be assigned to the
member (Member DNs can be in multiple MC Groups).
Possible values:Up to 32 digits (default = No Data)

04 Ringing Options Select: Immediate, Delay 1 or Delay 2 ring.

Note
• Immediate ring assignments will continue to ring when Delay 1 & 2 ring
assignments ring.

Station
• Delay 1 ring assignments will continue to ring when Delay 2 ring
assignments ring.
• Delay ring PDN and PhDN buttons will flash red and not ring immediately
after the MC Group is called; they will ring and flash green when their delay
ring timers expire.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 5-45

 Station
Assignment

516 Station Speed Dial

Prerequisite Program: 200 page 5-1
Up to 100 pre-programmed speed dial numbers (up to 32 digits each) can be assigned to each station.
speed dial numbers are stored in “bins” and each station accesses the speed dial numbers by entering the
speed dial bin number from their respective stations. The following advanced speed dialing features are
available in Strata CIX.
• Speed Dial Bin Linking – Whenever a speed dial number exceeds the 32-digit speed dial bin memory
limitation the digits exceeding the 32 digit limitation are automatically stored into the adjacent speed dial
bin. The entire string is activated by using the primary speed dial bin number.

Note Bin-linking is automatic. Any previously programmed data in the “adjacent speed dial bin” as
described above is overwritten. Furthermore, if a number exceeding the maximum allowable dial
digit length is overwritten with a new number which complies to the 32-digit restriction, the excess
digits recorded in the next bin (from the previous entry) is treated as a unique speed dial record.

• Speed Dial Number Nesting – A speed dial number can be nested into another speed dial number. For
example, if an international dialing prefix is used often, program the prefix in any speed dial bin. Then in
another speed dial bin program the first bin number + the number to dial. When the second speed dial
bin is activated, Strata CIX first retrieves and dials the international dialing prefix from the first bin
location, then adds the numbers to dial.

1. Select Station > Speed Dial.

2. Enter Program 516 data.
3. Click Submit.

FIELD DESCRIPTION

Prime DN Select the PDN assigned the speed dial number.

01 Speed Dial Index Enter the station speed dial bin number. A station can have up to 100 speed
dial bins.
Possible values:00~99 (default = no value)
Note Adding bin numbers here will automatically increment the number of
speed dial bins available to the station in increments of 10 speed dial
bins. The number of speed dial bins available to the station can also be
assigned and displayed in Prog 200, 35 - Station SpDial Bins.
Example: If bin number 50 is entered here, 50 speed dial bins will
automatically be assigned to the station and will also be displayed in
Prog 200, 35.

5-46 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Station
Assignment

FIELD DESCRIPTION

02 Number This is the dialable number stored in the speed dial bin.
Possible values:Up to 32 digits, 0~9, *, # and Pauses (default = no value)
To enter pauses enter Px, where x equals 0~9 (seconds), which is the length of
the pause, 0=10 seconds.
Note
• If the number being entered exceeds the 32 digits, the next speed dial
location will automatically be appended to create longer numbers.
• Also another speed dial bin can be nested within another bin for dialing
common numbers. If speed dial bin 100 has long distance access digits
1010321, these digits can be nested in to other speed dial bins by using
*100 as the first digits of the other bins. Example: Putting *10017145563425
into speed dial bin 150 would cause SD150 to dial the access digits plus the
number 10132117145563425.
• If you are programming from the telephone, the digits * and # have a special
meaning when programming speed dial numbers. The # digit indicates the
end of entry and * is an escape character. To dial the digits * or # as part of
the number; enter ** or *#. To enter pauses enter *0~*9. The second digit
represents the number of seconds for the pause function.

03 Speed Dial Name Enter the LCD Name that displays on LCD dial directories.
Possible values:Up to 8 characters (default = no value)

Dialing Code Dial code that user accesses from the phone.

Station Speed Dial Table View

Station Speed Dial Table View shows the entire set up for all speed dial numbers.

To access the System Speed Dial Table View

Select System > System Speed Dial Table View or from the program (516), click the Station Speed Dial
Table View button.
See Table Views on page 2-17 for table functionality.

PDN Table View

Station
This screen shows the entire list of available PDNs.
To access the Station Speed PDN Table View
Select Station > PDN Table View.
Note See Table Views on page 2-17 for table functionality.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 5-47

 Station
Assignment

ISDN
The following programs assign ISDN data to stations.
Program Number(s): 202 and 217

202 ISDN BRI Station

Prerequisite Program: 100 page 4-1
This command assigns ISDN BRI stations.

1. Select Station > Basic ISDN.

2. Enter a Primary DN for an existing record or click one of the following buttons:
• List – view a summary list of programmed DNs.
• Create – Assign a new Primary DN with custom BRI Station settings.
• Copy – Enter a DN in the Primary DN field and click Copy to make a new DN assignment with BRI
Station settings copied from the DN entered in the Primary DN field.
• Delete – Enter an ISDN Primary DN to delete and click OK.
• Change DN – Enter a DN in the Primary DN field and click Change DN to assign a new DN to the
ISDN BRI Station.
• Get Default - Sets all data to factory defaults.
3. Set up ISDN BRI Station using the Program Detail table below.
4. Click Submit.

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Primary DN Enter the PDN. When a required DN is not programmed, the DN is regarded as a
new station. The system assigns default data as defined in 217 ISDN Station Data.
Possible values:Up to 5 digits (default = no value)
01 PDN Equipment No. Enter the BRI equipment number assigned to this PDN. This is the cabinet, slot,
and circuit number of the RBUU/RBUS or RBSU/RBSS interface PCB to which the
PDN is or should be, assigned. Enter data as xxyyzz:
Example: If the PDN should be assigned to a BDKU in cabinet 5, slot 2, circuit 3,
enter 050203.
Cabinet numbers:
CIX100: Select 01 for Base and Exp cabinet.
CIX200: Select 01 for Base and 02 for Exp cabinet.
CIX670: Select 01 for Base and 02~07 for each Exp cabinet.
CIX1200: Select 01 for Base and 02~12 for each Exp cabinet

Slot numbers:
CIX100: Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Exp slots.
CIX200: Select 01 ~ 04 for either cabinet.
CIX670: Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Exp slots.
CIX1200: Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Exp slots
02 ISDN Channel Group Enter the ISDN Channel Group number.
Possible values:1~32 (CIX100), 1~48 (CIX200, CIX670 Basic)1~128 (CIX670
Exp), 1~48 (CIX1200 Basic), 1~128 (CIX1200 Exp A), 1~220
(CIX1200 Exp B) (default = 1)

5-48 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Station
Assignment

FIELD DESCRIPTION
03 ISDN Protocol Select the ISDN protocol. Only Bearer capabilities specified by the protocol can be
entered in this field. The Initial value for ISDN Protocol corresponds to information
set in the hardware level.
Possible values:Nat’l ISDN (default), ETSI, TTC or Nat’l ISDN Nortel
Note National ISDN = North America, ETSI = England and TTC = Japan.
04 Type Connection Select Point to Point or Point to Multi-point connection type.
Possible values:Point to Point (default) or Point to Multi-point
05 COS Select the BRI Station Class of Service assignments.
• Day1 COS Possible values:1~32 (default = 1)
• Day2 COS
• Night COS
06 DRL Select the BRI Station Destination Restriction Level assignments.
• Day1 DRL Possible values:1~16 (default = 1)
• Day2 DRL
• Night DRL
07 FRL Select the BRI Station Facilities Restriction Level assignments.
• Day1 FRL Possible values:1~16 (default = 1)
• Day2 FRL
• Night FRL
08 LCR Group Select the Least Cost Routing Group number to which this BRI Station belongs.
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)
09 QPL Select the BRI Station QPL assignments.
• Day1 QPL Possible values:1~16 (default = 1)
• Day2 QPL
• Night QPL
10 Speech Capability Bearer Capability Speech See Table 5-6 on page 52.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Enable)
11 3.1KHz Audio Bearer Capability 3.1kHzAudio See Table 5-6 on page 52.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Enable)
12 7KHz Audio Bearer Capability 7kHzAudio. See Table 5-6 on page 52.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Disable)
13 64Kbps Unrestricted Bearer Capability unrestricted digital information 64kbps. See Table 5-6 on page
52.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Enable)
14 56Kbps Unrestricted Bearer Capability unrestricted digital information 56kbps
15 2x64Kbps Bearer Capability unrestricted digital information 2x64kbps
Unrestricted

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 5-49

 Station
Assignment

FIELD DESCRIPTION
16 B Channel Selection Select originating B Channel method.
Possible values:
• Exclusive – (default) Channel is indicated and no alternative is acceptable.
• Preferred – Channel is indicated and any alternative is acceptable.
• Any Channel – Channel is indicated and any channel is acceptable.
17 Idle B Channel Choose Idle B Channel selection method.
Selection
Possible values:Forward Cyclic, Backward Cyclic, Forward Terminal or Backward
Terminal (default)
• Select Forward Cyclic (from lowest to highest number of B-channel).
• Select Backward Cyclic (from highest to lowest number of B-channel).
• Select Forward Terminal for the lowest number B-channel (The Low-Low B-
channel selection).
• Select Backward Terminal for the highest number B-channel. (The High-High
B-channel selection)
18 Interdigit Timer 1 Select the Interdigit timer value to time-out during dial tone.
Possible values:1~180 (default = 15)
19 Interdigit Timer 2 Interdigit timer value to time-out after the first digit is dialed.
Possible values:1~180 (default = 5)
20 CESID Enter the CESID value for 911 calls.
Possible values:Up to 16 ASCII characters (default = no value)
21 Number Voice Calls Select the Number of Voice Calls Allowed. If a selection is not made, previously
Allowed written data in this field is erased.
Possible values:One or Two (default)
Note If One is selected the other channel is reserved for Data.
22 Service Tone Enable Service Tone Permission. Select Disable for modems and faxes.
Permission
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Disable)
23 TGAC Override Enable TGAC Override.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Disable)
24 Set System Speed Enable System Speed Dial changing permission.
Dial
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Disable)
25 Network COS Enter the Network COS value. If a selection is not made, previously written data in
this field is erased.
Possible values:1~32 (default = 1)
26 DN2~32 DN8 Add a DN to this BRI Station. When a DN is entered into one of the seven available
fields, default data as defined in 217 ISDN Station Data is applied to the DNs. If a
selection is not made, any previously written data in this field is erased.
Possible values:Up to 5 ASCII characters (default = no value)

5-50 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Station
Assignment

FIELD DESCRIPTION
33 Auto OCA Enable OCA to occur automatically when making a call to a busy station that
allows calls to be received.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Enable)
34 Originate OCA Enable this station to make OCA calls to other stations.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Disable)
35 Station SpDial Bins The number of station speed dial bins allocated to this station.
Possible values: maximum=100
36 Call Forward Dial When the handset is picked up the user will hear stutter dial tone if a call forward is
Tone enabled
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Disable)
37 Dialing Digit After the ISDN extension has made a call it can be prevented from dialing any
Restriction subsequent digits.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Disable)
38 MW Stuttered Dial Enable: When this station goes off hook, the station will receive stuttered dial tone
Tone when it has a message waiting indication, and the station will receive a busy tone
burst before dial tone when in the DND mode.
Disable: This station will receive normal dial tone when it has a message waiting or
when it is in the DND mode.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Enable)
39 Tenant Number Enter the Tenant number to which this PDN should be assigned.
Possible values:1 ~ 8 (default = 1)
40 Auto-Campon to PDN This feature allows automatic camp-on to a PDN even when it is busy and called
by a CO line. If automatic camp-on to PDN is enabled, a call to a PDN can camp-
on even if the CO line group has auto camp-on disabled in Prog 304-17.
Possible values:Enable: Allow auto camp-on to PDN or Disable: No auto camp-on
to PDN
41 LCR PDN Code Enter the number of digits that determine when to send the LCR PDN code. The
PDN code is registered in the LCR Modified Digits table.
Possible values:Three Digits or Four Digits (default = Three Digits)
42 Network Calling Enter the CLID telephone number that should be sent for this station when making
Number external calls through the Strata Net ISDN network (32 digits max.). When this
station makes outgoing calls through the Strata Net network, this number will be
sent over the Strata Net network to the terminating PSTN connected to the far-end
node (providing this is allowed by the PSTN). This number will be displayed as the
Caller ID number at the terminating external telephone. This number is not sent to
local PSTNs connected to the node from which the call is originated, nor is it sent
when making conventional Tie line calls that terminate on a PSTN at a far-end
node.
Possible values:Up to 32 digits (default = no data)

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 5-51

 Station
Assignment

Table 5-6 BRI Bearer Capability of ISDN

Bearer Services Bellcore Nat’l ISDN ETSI TTC
Circuit Speech X X X
Mode 3.1kHz Audio X X X
7kHz Audio X X
Unrestricted Digital 64 kbps X X X
Information Rate adaptation from 56
X
kbps
2x64 X X

217 ISDN Station Data

Prerequisite Program: 202 page 5-48
Set ISDN Station parameters to define ISDN capabilities.

1. Select Station > ISDN Station Data.

2. Enter a Primary DN for an existing record or click one of the following buttons:
• List – view a summary list of programmed Hunt Groups.
• Copy – Enter a DN in the Primary DN field and click Copy to make a new DN assignment with BRI
Station settings copied from the DN entered in the Primary DN field.
• Get Default - Sets all data to factory defaults.
3. Set up ISDN Station Data using the Program Detail table below.
4. Click Submit.
FIELD DESCRIPTION

Primary DN Enter Primary DN.

Possible values:Up to 5 digits (default = no value)

01 Station LCD Name Enter the name that should be displayed on telephone LCDs for this PDN. (Max.
8 characters with R1.0~R2.20; Max.16 characters with R2.21 and above.
Possible values:Up to 9 ASCII characters (default = no value)

02 Dial Method Select the audible tone when dialing.

Possible values:Dial Tone (default), Entry Tone or No Tone

03 System Call Forward Select the System Call Forward assignment for this station.
Possible values:0~4 (CIX100), 0~10 (CIX200, CIX670/1200 Basic),
0~32 (CIX670 Exp), 0~48 (CIX1200 Exp) (default = 0)

04 CF Password Protect the System Call Forward settings by creating a password.

Possible values:Up to 4 digits (default = no value)

05 Door Phone Override Enable the Door Phone ringing indicator to override Do Not Disturb.
DND
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Disable)

5-52 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Station
Assignment

FIELD DESCRIPTION

06 Emerg Call Group Select this station’s emergency call group.

Possible values:1~8 (default = 1)

07 COS Override Code Enable Class of Service Override.

Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Disable)

08 Display DN Enter the DN to be displayed on the LCD.

Possible values:Up to 5 digits (default = no value)

09 VMID Code Enter the voice mailbox number that should answer calls when this PDN calls
voice mail, or when this PDN is called and then forwards to voice mail (this
number is prefixed by codes in Prog 579, 11~16).
Possible values:Digits 0~9, * and #, up to 10 characters (default = no value).
Note This VMID code is sent to the voice mail device in SMDI packets or
DTMF tones on direct and forwarded calls to the PDN. See Prog 580 for
SMDI or DTMF choice.

12 Name Display Whether to put the user name in the list display.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Disable)

13 CPN Presentation to Determine what is sent to an SBus extension from an incoming ISDN trunk
SBus
Possible values:DN, CPN or DN AND CPN (default = DN)

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 5-53

 Station
Setup Wizards

Setup Wizards
There are three station setup wizards—PDN Range, Multiple DN, and VMID Range. Each of them are
described below.

PDN Range Setup Wizard

This wizard is a programming time saver that reduces the time it takes to create or change Primary
Directory Numbers (PDN) and assign them to phones. The wizard guides the user to create a range of
desired PDNs to be assigned to a range of available station ports.

1. Select Station > DN Setup > PDN Range.

Review the instructions that display on the Wizard screen.
2. Click Start. The Primary DN Setup Wizard screen displays.
3. Select the appropriate radio buttons and enter the data in the other fields.
• Range of associated PDN equipment.
• Selection to overwrite the existing PDNs.
4. (Optional) Click Number Plan button to access Numbering Plan page.
5. (Optional) Click PDN Table View button to view existing PDN Table.
6. Press Start to create PDNs.
The screen containing the PDN assignments displays.
Note The first available equipment number (card slot/circuit) is automatically used to create the first PDN,
etc.

Multiple DN Assignment Wizard

Important!
• To avoid conflicts on new installations you should use this wizard immediately after establishing and
assigning Primary DNs on telephones, especially before you program key strips or hunt groups.
• The wizard can be used to assign Multiple DNs to new stations when adding new station cards.

This wizard substantially reduces CIX installation time when you need multiple DN buttons on telephones.
Multiple DNs are required in most CIX installations.
The wizard automatically programs multiple buttons onto telephones to operate as PDN buttons on the
telephones. This wizard automatically groups the telephone’s PDN button with the Phantom Directory
Number (PhDN) buttons so they all operate like PDNs on the telephone—this simulates Strata DK multiple
PDN operation. You will not have to set Call forward or VMID codes for the PhDNs since they
automatically assume the PDN Call Forward and VMID code assignments.
On these screens you need to specify how many button appearances should appear as PDNs on each
telephone or range of telephones (the number of buttons including the PDNs plus the PhDNs). You should
also specify the starting PhDN and Hunt Group number to be used to set up the multiple DN groups.
Important! Make sure you know exactly how many multiple DNs should be on each telephone before
using this wizard. After running the Multiple DN wizard, deletions or additions to Multiple DN
assignments must be made manually, one-by-one, for each telephone PhDN button and
Multiple DN hunt group. The wizard does not support changing existing Multiple DN
assignments in this version of Strata eManager.

5-54 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Station
Setup Wizards

1. Select Station > DN SetUp > Multiple DN.

2. Click Start. Strata eManager automatically assigns the:
• Appropriate number of PhDN buttons onto the telephone. These operate as PDN buttons on the
telephone. PhDNs are assigned in sequence starting with the first button above the PDN.

CAUTION! If other buttons were installed in a PhDN location they will be overwritten.

• Appropriate telephone as the owner of the PhDN buttons starting with the PhDN you specified.
• PDN of the telephone as the name of the PhDN buttons.
• PDN and appropriate PhDNs of the telephone to the appropriate Multiple DN Hunt group, starting
with the Hunt group number you specified.
3. Based on your requirements, enter the necessary fields.
4. Click Start to generate the request. The screen will change.
Important!
• This is a report that provides the Multiple DN assignments that will be sent to the CIX.
• Ensure that this information is correct before you click Continue. You can change the assignments by
clicking Back.
5. Click Continue to generate results into the CIX database.
Note To modify these entries later you will have to use the appropriate individual program assignments.
6. Review the configuration screen. This is how the multiple DNs are assigned in the CIX after the wizard
is done.
7. (Optional) To print the configuration results, click Print.
8. To exit, select a command from the Program pane.

VMID Range
This wizard reduces CIX programming time when you need to assign Voice Mail ID (VMID) codes. The
wizard will automatically assign specified VMID codes for a range of Primary DNs, PhDNs, and/or Pilot
DNs.
Specify the range of PDNs, PhDNs, or Pilot DNs that should have VMID code assignments. Then select
the VMID code assignment method.
The three code assignment methods are to assign the VMID to:
• Be the same number as the appropriate DN (PDN, PhDN or Pilot DN).
• Start at a specific number and increment by one for each consecutive DN.
• Be the same number for all DNs.
In addition to the above assignments, specific digits including * and # can be added to the front and/or
back of each VMID. This is not for Stratagy codes 91, 92, etc., they are set in Program 579.
You can program a range of VMID codes for PDNs, PhDNs and/or Pilot DNs.
1. Select Station > DN Setup > VMID Range.
2. Click Start. The input screen of the VMID Range Setup Wizard displays.
3. Select the type of VMID that should be assigned to the PDN, PhDN or Pilot DN. Then select the
assignment method and the digits, if any, to be added to front and/or end of each VMID. DN range is
supported. VMID prefix and/or suffix are supported. Click Start to submit the settings to the CIX
database.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 5-55

 Station
Setup Wizards

User Setup
The User Setup wizard takes you through the process of creating a customer database. The first of the two
screens presents you with the following question: What do you want to do?
• Create Primary Extensions with Mailbox
• Created Primary Extensions sharing the same mailbox
• Create mailboxes and route them to the same extension
• Create Primary Extensions without mailboxes
• Create mailboxes without extensions
The second screen is for advanced users:
• Create Primary Extensions
• Assign Mailbox NUmbers to Extensions
• Create mailboxes and assign extensions for Auto Attendant
• Assign User Names to mailboxes and extension LCD screen.

5-56 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

Trunks 6

This chapter provides trunk programming information for the Strata CIX.

304, 305 Incoming Line Group

Program Number(s): 304
Incoming Line Groups (ILG) is a line selection feature which enables the use of external trunk or private
line groups for incoming service.

1. Select Trunk > ILG.

2. Enter an ILG number or click one of the following buttons:
• List – select from the summary list of ILGs on the right side of the screen.
• Create – Assign a new ILG with default settings.
• Copy – Enter an ILG in the Group Number field and click Copy to make a new ILG assignment with
settings copied from the ILG entered in Group Number.
• Delete – Delete an ILG.
• Get Default - restores all data to factory defaults.
3. Enter Program 304 data.
4. Click Submit.

Trunks

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 11/11 6-1

 Trunks

304 Incoming Line Group Assignment

Prerequisite Program: None
This assignment is used to configure ILGs only, OLGs are configured in the Outgoing Line Group
Assignment 306. The same line can be placed in an ILG and OLG.
FIELD DESCRIPTION

Group Number Enter the group number of the line group that should be configured.
Possible values:0~32 (CIX100), 0~50 (CIX200, 670/1200 Basic),
0~128 (CIX670 Exp, 1200 Exp A), 0~220 (CIX1200 Exp B)
(default = no value)

01 Group Type Select the ILG Type.

Possible values:Analog (default) or ISDN

02 Line Type Select the Trunk Type.

Possible values:CO (default) or Tie

03 CO Service Type Select CO Trunk Service Type.

Possible values:DID or DIT (default)

04 Private Service Type Select the Tie Trunk Service Type. This field is required when Trunk Type is
Tie.
Possible values:Standard (default) or StrataNet

05 GCO Key Number Select ILG GCO Key Group for DIT mode (see Trunk Type above). The same
GCO cannot belong to different ILGs.
Note: If CO keys are assigned in PRG205 to ring lines in this group, GCO
assignments will be ignored and will not ring
Possible values:0~32 (CIX100), 0~50 (CIX200, CIX670/1200 Basic),
0~128 (CIX670 Exp, 1200 Exp A), 0~220 (CIX1200 Exp B)
(default = no value)

06 Pooled Key Number Select ILG Pooled Line Key Group for DIT mode. The same Pooled Line Group
cannot belong to different ILGs.
Note: If GCO or CO keys are assigned to ring lines in this group, Pooled key
assignments will be ignored and will not ring.
Possible values:0~32 (CIX100), 0~50 (CIX200, CIX670/1200 Basic),
0~128 (CIX670 Exp), 0~220 (CIX1200 Exp)
(default = no value)

07 COS Select Class of Service Day 1, Day 2 and Night Values.

Possible values:1~32 (default = 1)

08 DRL Select Destination Restriction Level Day 1, Day 2 and Night Values.
Possible values:1~16 (default = 1)

09 FRL Select Facilities Restriction Level Day 1, Day 2 and Night Values.
Possible values:1~16 (default = 1)

6-2 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 11/11

 Trunks

FIELD DESCRIPTION

10 QPL Select Queuing Priority Level Day 1, Day 2 and Night Values.
Possible values:1~16 (default = 1)

11 DID Digits Select number of DID digits received from CO.

Possible values:0~7 (default = 0)

12 Speech/3.1 KHz Select Bearer Capability 3.1 KHz Audio or Speech.

Possible values:Audio (default) or Speech

13 Delay1 Ringing Timer Select time to ring the Delay 1 destination.

Possible values:1~60 sec. (default = 12)

14 Delay2 Ringing Timer Select time to ring the Delay 2 destination.

Possible values:1~60 sec. (default = 24)

15 Interdigit 1 Timer Select Interdigit 1 timer value.

Possible values:1~180 sec. (default = 15)

16 Interdigit 2 Timer Select Interdigit 2 timer value.

Possible values:1~180 sec. (default = 5)

17 Auto Campon Enable Automatic Camp-on.

Possible values:Enable (default) or Disable.

18 Calling Number ID Select whether the Calling Number Identification is provided by the User side or
Network side.
Possible values:User Provided (default) or Network Provided

19 Intercept Enable Intercept. A call is transferred to a special destination called intercept

position when the destination of a trunk line call is not determined with DID, DIT
or DISA. Intercept is also activated when the destination is determined, but the
call cannot be terminated due to a defect or an incorrect number. If the system
has a simplified attendant console, the attendant console is usually specified to
terminate the call. This function ensures termination of a trunk line call.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)

20 Send Dial Tone Whether or not to send dial tone to the originating system (for Tie trunks).
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)

21 TGAC Override Enable Trunk Group Access Code (TGAC) override.

Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)

22 Network COS Enter the COS to be used in Traveling Classmark for Strata Net.
Possible values:1~32 (default = 1)

23 LCR Group Enter the LCR Group number. Calls from this ILG cannot tandem if this field is
Trunks

not entered.
Possible values:1~16 (default = 1)

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 11/11 6-3

 Trunks

FIELD DESCRIPTION

24 Change COS Override Enable authority to change COS Override Code.

Code
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)

25 Register Speed Dial Enable authority to create system speed dial codes.
Codes
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)

26 Originator Invoke OCA Enable authority for the originator of a call to invoke OCA when encountering a
busy station.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)

27 Senderized Tone Mode Send DTMF tones as a complete number rather than digit-by-digit.
Possible values:Dial Tone (default), Entry Tone or Silence

28 Emergency Call Group Used to enable E911 calling across a Strata Net network. The Strata Net ILG is
assigned to an Emergency Call Group in the same way a station is in Program
200 field 17. Without this assignment, the call will not attempt to complete to
one of the trunks in the Emergency Group and will result in an abandoned call.
See Program 550, Enhanced 911 Emergency Call Group Assignment.
Possible values:1~8 (default = 1)

29 Tenant Number Enter the Tenant number to which this DID number should be assigned.
Possible values:1~8.

30 Call-By-Call Cause Enter the condition for which incoming ISDN calls disconnect when
programmed for Call-By-Call (min./max.).
User Busy: Cause 17
Circuit/Channel congestion: Cause 34

6-4 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 11/11

 Trunks

306, 307 Outgoing Line Groups

Prerequisite Program: None
OLG is a line selection feature which enables the use of external trunk or private line groups for outgoing
service. Assign and configure up to 128 OLGs (the same line can be placed in an OLG and an ILG).

1. Select > Trunk > OLG.

2. Enter an OLG number in the Group Number field for an existing record or click one of the following
buttons:
• List – choose a summary list of programmed OLGs on the right side of the screen.
• Create – Assign a new OLG with default settings.
• Copy – Enter an OLG in the Group Number field and click Copy to make a new OLG assignment
with settings copied from the OLG entered in Group Number.
• Delete – Delete an OLG.
• Get Default - restores all data to factory defaults.
3. Enter Program 306 data.
4. Enter Program 531. See “DR Overview” on page 9-6 for details.
5. Enter Program 514. See “514 SMDR for OLG Assignment” on page 9-45 for details.
6. Click Submit.
FIELD DESCRIPTION

Group Number Enter the OLG Group number.

Possible values:1~6 CTX28, 1~32 CIX40, 1~32 CTX/CIX/100, 1~50 CTX/CIX 670
BCTU only or BBCU only, 1~128 CTX/CIX670 BCTU + BEXU or
BBCU + BECU, 1~50 CIX1200 HCTU only, 1~128 CTX670 HCTU
+ HEXAU, 1~220 CTX670 HCTU + HEXBU
(default = no value)

01 Group Type Select the OLG Type.

Possible values:Analog (default), ISDN, SIP

02 Trunk Type Select the Trunk Type.

Possible values:CO (default) or Tie

03 Service Type Service Type.

Possible values:Standard (default) or StrataNet
Strata Net and IPedge Net are based on IP-QSIG with some differences. Because
vendor implementations of IP-QSIG have differences, Toshiba only supports
interoperability of Strata Net and IPedge Net with CIX and IPedge systems.

04 GCO Key1 Number Select the first GCO Key Group number.
Possible values:1~6 CTX28, 1~32 CIX40, 1~32 CTX/CIX/100, 1~50 CTX/CIX 670
BCTU only or BBCU only, 1~128 CTX/CIX670 BCTU + BEXU or
BBCU + BECU, 1~50 CIX1200 HCTU only, 1~128 CIX1200 HCTU
Trunks

+ HEXAU, 1~220 CIX1200 HCTU + HEXBU

(default = no value)

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 11/11 6-5

 Trunks

FIELD DESCRIPTION

06 Pooled Key1 Number Select first Pooled Line Key Group number.
Possible values:1~6 CTX28, 1~32 CIX40, 1~32 CTX/CIX/100, 1~50 CTX/CIX 670
BCTU only or BBCU only, 1~128 CTX/CIX670 BCTU + BEXU or
BBCU + BECU, 1~50 CIX1200 HCTU only, 1~128 CIX1200 HCTU
+ HEXAU, 1~220 CIX1200 HCTU + HEXBU
(default = no value)

07 Pooled Key2 Number Select second Pooled Line Key Group number.
Possible values:1~6 CTX28, 1~32 CIX40, 1~32 CTX/CIX/100, 1~50 CTX/CIX 670
BCTU only or BBCU only, 1~128 CTX/CIX670 BCTU + BEXU or
BBCU + BECU, 1~50 CIX1200 HCTU only, 1~128 CIX1200 HCTU
+ HEXAU, 1~220 CIX1200 HCTU + HEXBU
(default = no value)

08 COS Select Day 1, Day 2 and Night Values.

Possible values:1~32 (default = 1)

09 FRL Select Day 1, Day 2 and Night Values.

Possible values:1~16 (default = 1)

10 QPL Select Day 1, Day 2 and Night Values.

Possible values:1~16 (default = 1)

11 Speech/3.1 KHz Bearer Capability 3.1 KHz Audio or Speech.

Possible values:Audio (default) or Speech

12 MOH Source Select MOH Source.

Possible values:Silence, External1~15, Internal (default)

13 Account Code Whether or not Forced Account Code is applied when using this OLG.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)

14 Destination Whether or not Destination Restriction is applied when using this OLG.
Restriction
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)

15 Credit Cart Calling Whether or not to enable Credit Card Calling using this OLG.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)

16 Send CESID Whether or not E911 CESID information is sent (enabled) on this OLG.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Disable)

17 QSIG Sending Type Digit sending mode for Strata Net only.
Possible values:Cut Through or Senderized (default = Cut through)

18 Network COS Select Network COS number.

Possible values:1~32 (default = 1)

19 Recall on AC15 This enables or disables the sending and detection of a recall signal on AC15 TIE
lines. (This applies to the PACU PCBs only.)
Possible values: Enable of Disable (default = Disable)

6-6 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 11/11

 Trunks

300, 301 Trunk Assignment

Prerequisite Program: 100 page 4-1
Assigns an analog or T1 trunk (line) and its parameters to the system. Click on each tab to navigate
through the programs. The trunks assigned to the equipment display on the left of the screen. The first
column displays the trunks used and the second column displays the equipment. You can also sort based
on trunks and equipment.
Important! You must have Internet Explorer (IE) 6, or higher, on your PC for the sort to work correctly.

1. Select > Trunk > Trunk Assignments.

2. Enter a Trunk Number or click one of the following buttons:
• List –choose from the summary list of programmed trunks on the right side of the screen.
• Create – Assign a new trunk with default settings.
• Copy – Enter a Trunk Number and click Copy to make a new trunk assignment with settings copied
from the OLG entered in Group Number.
• Delete – Delete a trunk.
• Get Default - restores all data to factory defaults.
3. Enter Trunk Assignment Data.
4. Click Submit.
5. Click the Go Timer/DIT link to view Programs 308 and 310 (see “308 Trunk Timer” on page 6-12 for
details).
Note When assigning CAMA trunks for E911 (R2.22 MH232 and later, or M3.10 MK024 and later
systems) set Release Supervision and Answer Supervision to Enabled.

FIELD DESCRIPTION

Line Number Enter the Line Number.

Possible values:1-6 CTX28, 1-31 CIX40, 1~64 CTX/CIX/100, 1~96 CTX/CIX 670
BCTU only or BBCU only, 1~264 CTX/CIX670 BCTU + BEXU or
BBCU + BECU, 1~96 CIX1200 HCTU only, 1~264 CIX1200
HCTU + HEXAU, 1~440 CIX1200 HCTU + HEXBU
(default = no value)

Trunks

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 11/11 6-7

 Trunks

FIELD DESCRIPTION

01 Line Equipment No. Enter the line equipment number. Equipment numbers are required when
assigning a new line to the system.

Enter data as XXYYZZ:

XX=cabinet 01~12
YY=slot 01~10
ZZ=analog trunk circuit 01~32

Example: If a line should be assigned to an RCOU in cabinet shelf 5, slot 2, circuit

3, enter 050203.

Cabinet numbers:
• CIX/CTX100: Base, Exp.01
• CIX200: Base 01, Exp.02
• CIX670: Base 01, Exp 02~07.
• CIX1200: Base 01, Exp 02~12

Slot numbers:
• CIX/CTX100: Base 01, Exp.05~08
• CIX200: Base/Exp.01~04
• CIX670/1200: Base 01~08
• CIX670/1200: Exp.01~10

CTX28 and CIX40 assignments below are hard coded and cannot be changed.
.
01, 02 - 3 CO lines on motherboard - 28, 40 R1HW, 4 CO lines - 40 R2HW
01, 05 – GVMU - 28, GVPH - 40 R1HW, GIPx, MIPU or GCOCIH - 40 R2HW
01, 06 – GIPx, MIPU16 or GCOCIH - 40 R1HW, no card - 28, 40 R2HW
01, 08 - 3 CO lines on GCDU - 28, 40 R1HW and R2HW.

02 Incoming Line Group Assign the trunk to an Incoming Line Group. Two-way trunks need to be
members of one incoming and one outgoing line group.
Possible values:1~6 CTX28, 1~32 CIX40, 1~32 CTX/CIX/100, 1~50 CTX/CIX
670 BCTU only or BBCU only, 1~128 CTX/CIX670 BCTU +
BEXU or BBCU + BECU, 1~50 CIX1200 HCTU only, 1~128
CIX1200 HCTU + HEXAU, 1~220 CIX1200 HCTU + HEXBU
(default = 0)

03 Outgoing Line Group Assign the trunk to an Outgoing Line Group. Two-way trunks need to be
members of one incoming and one outgoing line group.
Possible values:1~6 CTX28, 1~32 CIX40, 1~32 CTX/CIX/100, 1~50 CIX200,
1~50 CTX/CIX 670 BCTU only or BBCU only, 1~128 CTX/
CIX670 BCTU + BEXU or BBCU + BECU, 1~50 CIX1200 HCTU
only, 1~128 CIX1200 HCTU + HEXAU, 1~220 CIX1200 HCTU +
HEXBU
(default = 0)

6-8 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 11/11

 Trunks

FIELD DESCRIPTION

04 Dial Mode Enter the Dial Mode.

Possible values:DP 10PPS, DP 20PPS or DTMF (default)
• DP 10 PPS = Rotary Dial, 10 PPS
• DP 20 PPS = Rotary Dial, 20 PPS

05 Signaling Enter the signaling type.

Possible values:DID, Loop (default), Ground, Tie, LP (Jpn), SR (Jpn) or ACU (UK)

06 Start Method Enter the Start Method. This setting defines the start protocol method used
between the PSTN and this trunk (for DID/Tie trunks).
Possible values:Immediate Start (default), Timing Start or Wink Start

07 Release Supervision Enable Release Supervision from the CO.

Possible values:Received or Not Received (default)
Note When assigning CAMA trunks for E911 (R2.22 MH232 and later, or
M3.10 MK024 and later systems) set this to Enabled.

08 Answer Supervision Enable Answer Supervision from the CO.

Possible values:Received or Not Received (default)
Note When assigning CAMA trunks for E911 (R2.22 MH232 and later, or
M3.10 MK024 and later systems) set this to Enabled.

09 Trunk Name Enter the trunk name.

Possible values:Up to 14 ASCII characters (default = no value)

10 External Ring Repeat This option determines what ring signal is sent to telephones when a line rings
the telephone. Select Supplied (CO Ring Repeat) to use the ring signal supplied
by the CO or Centrex line. Select Not Supplied (CIX Ring) to use the standard
ring signal supplied by the CIX.
Important! Ring Not Supplied must be used on all DISA lines for proper ringing
operation.
Possible values:Supplied (CO Repeat) - (default) or Not Supplied (CIX Ring)

11 DTMF Back Tone Select DTMF Back Tone type.

Possible values:Padded, DTMF Tone (default) or No Tone

12 Hunt Order The order within the trunks OLG in which the trunk will be seized for outgoing
calls.
Enter 1 for the first trunk seized, 2=next trunk, etc. Enter 999 for the last trunk to
be seized.
Possible values:1~264 or Last One (default = 1)
Trunks

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 11/11 6-9

 Trunks

FIELD DESCRIPTION

13 Immediate Cut- This option should be enabled on a line only if the talk-path must be established
Through immediately after seizing a selected outgoing line.
Example, a line connected to a Central Office Ringdown circuit.
Possible values:Enable, Disable (default)

CAUTION! This option will bypass Destination Restriction and E911 digit
analysis. Do not enable this option on a line where these
functions are required.

This option is available only on Ground and Loop, analog or T1 circuits. It should
not be enabled for Tie, DID, ISDN and StrataNet lines.

14 CO Line Guard Time The interval between the release of a CO line and its eligibility to be seized again.

6-10 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 11/11

 Trunks

313 Caller ID
Prerequisite Program: 300 page 6-7
This program assigns Caller ID circuits to the CO Line to which the circuit is connected. The ANI, DNIS,
DID formats for T1 and analog DID CO Lines are also defined.

1. Select Trunk > Trunk Assignments, then click the Caller ID tab.
2. Enter a Trunk Number in Line No.for an existing record or click one of the following buttons:
• List – choose from the summary list of programmed trunks on the right side of the screen.
• Copy – Enter the Trunk Number in the Trunk Number field and click Copy to make new Caller ID
trunk numbers.
3. Enter Caller ID Assignment data.
4. Get Default - restores all data to factory defaults.
5. Click Submit.

FIELD DESCRIPTION

Line Number Enter the Trunk Number.

Possible values:1-6 CTX28, 1-30 CIX40, 1~64 CTX/CIX/100, 1~96 CTX/CIX 670
BCTU only or BBCU only, 1~264 CTX670 BCTU + BEXU or
BBCU + BECU, 1~96 CIX1200 HCTU only, 1~264 CIX1200
HCTU + HEXAU, 1~440 CIX1200 HCTU + HEXBU
(default = no value)

01 Signaling Method Specify the format for the interface being used.
Possible values:Nothing (default), ANI/DNIS-MCI, ANI/DNIS-Sprint or CLASS
(Caller ID)

02 Signaling Contents Specify the contents of the ANI/DNIS format.

Possible values:ANI and DNIS, ANI only, DNIS only or DID only (default = no
value).

03 CLASS Equipment No. If the CLASS type is chosen, the trunk must be assigned to a Caller ID circuit.
Enter the RCIU/RCIS equipment number as xxyyzz.

Notes
• CLASS equipment numbers are required when assigning a trunk to an RCIU/
RCIS circuit.
• It can also be used to display the equipment location of existing caller ID
circuit to trunk assignments. Example: If the trunk should be connected to a
caller ID circuit (RCIU/RCIS) in cabinet shelf 5, slot 2, circuit 3, enter 050203.

04 Caller ID Ring Start Assigns when an incoming call on an RCOU/RCOS analog line with RCIU/RCIS
Caller ID should start ringing a station.
Note Does not apply to BCOCIU/BCOCIS interface cards.
Possible values:Enable - the call will ring the station as soon as the Caller ID data
Trunks

is sent on the line. Disable - the line will ring the station on the
second ring signal sent from the PSTN. Default=Disable

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 11/11 6-11

 Trunks

308 Trunk Timer

Prerequisite Program: 300 page 6-7
These commands assign Trunk timers.

1. Select Trunk > Trunk Assignments, Timer tab.

2. Enter Trunk equipment number field. Enter Program 308 data.
• List – choose from the summary list of programmed trunks timers on the right side of the screen.
• Copy – to copy to trunk timer ports.
• Get Default - restores data to factory settings.
3. Click Submit.

FIELD DESCRIPTION

Line No. Enter the trunk equipment number. Equipment numbers are required when assigning
a new trunk to the system. It can also be used to display the equipment location of
existing trunks.
Enter data as XXYYZZ:
• XX=cabinet 01~12
• YY=slot 01~10
• ZZ=analog trunk circuit 01~08
or
• ZZ=T1channel 01~24

Example: If a line should be assigned to an RCOU in cabinet shelf 5, slot 2, circuit 3,

enter 050203.
Cabinet numbers:
• CIX100: Base, Exp.01
• CIX200: Base 01, Exp.02
• CIX670: Base 01, Exp 02~07
• CIX1200: Base 01, Exp 02~12
Slot numbers:
• CIX100: Base 01, Exp.05~08
• CIX200: Base/Exp.01~04
• CIX670/1200: Base 01~08
• CIX670/1200: Exp.01~10

CTX28 and CIX40 assignments below are hard coded and cannot be changed.
01, 02 - 3 CO lines on motherboard - 28, 40 R1HW, 4 CO lines - 40 R2HW
01, 05 – GVMU - 28, GVPH - 40 R1HW, GIPx, MIPU or GCOCIH - 40 R2HW
01, 06 – GIPx, MIPU16 or GCOCIH - 40 R1HW, no card - 28, 40 R2HW
01, 08 - 3 CO lines on GCDU - 28, 40 R1HW and R2HW.

6-12 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 11/11

 Trunks

FIELD DESCRIPTION

01 Auto Release The Automatic Release timing: Select Disable if the CO does not send the automatic
release signal on the Loop start line. If the CO does send the auto release signal,
also known as Calling Party Control, set the detect duration time to 95ms or 450ms
depending how long the CO opens the loop to disconnect the line.
Possible values:Disable, Detect 95ms or Detect 450ms (default)

02 Short Flash Select Short Flash Time

Possible values:0~15, where 1 = 100msec. (default = 5, which is .5 seconds)
0 = no flash, 1 = .1 sec., 2 = .2 sec. – 15=1.5 sec. 5 is the most
common duration of a hookflash signal
When a telephone initiates the short flash signal to the CO line (using the short Flash
feature button or access code #450). The duration of a short flash is determined by
this command. Normally this signal is used to hookflash a centrex line. The short
flash range is 0 to 1.5 seconds in increments of 0.1 seconds.

03 Long Flash Select Long Flash Time.

Possible values:0, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25 and 30, where 5 = .5 seconds. (default = 5)
When a telephone initiates the long flash signal to the CO line (using the Long Flash
feature button or access code #451). The duration of a long flash is determined by
this command. Normally this signal is used to disconnect the line. The long flash
range is 0 to 3 seconds in increments of 0.5 seconds. Possible values: 0=no flash,
5=.5 sec., 10=1sec. 15=1.5 sec., 20=2 sec., 25=2.5 sec., 30=3 sec.

04 Pause after Flash Pause time after flash. After a flash signal is sent to a CO line, this timer determines
when the line will start to send the dialed digits to the other end.
Possible values:0~5, 0 = immediately sent, and 1sec.delay to 5 sec.delay
(default = 1 second delay before sending digits)

05 Response Timer The response timer is for analog DID/TIE lines that have the “start method” set for
“Timing” in Prog 300-06. After a line is seized this timer determines when the line will
start to send the dialed digits to the other end.
Possible values:0=immediatly sent, and 50 msec.delay to 500 msec.delay
(default = 500 msec delay before sending digits)

06 Call Abandon Timer The interval after which the CIX stops sending ring tone to stations when an
incoming call is abandoned (caller hangs up before the call is answered).
Possible values: 6 Seconds or 8 Seconds (default)

Trunks

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 11/11 6-13

 Trunks

310 DIT Assignment

Prerequisite Program: 300 page 6-7
This program assigns DIT Number Analysis Table for DIT trunks. DIT trunks are ground and Loop start
trunks.

1. Select Trunk > Trunk Assignments, DIT tab.

2. Enter Trunk equipment number field. Enter Program 310 data.
• List – to view a summary list of programmed trunks timers.
• Copy – to copy to trunk timer ports.
3. Click Submit.
FIELD DESCRIPTION

Line No. Enter the trunk equipment number. Equipment numbers are required when
assigning a new trunk to the system. It can also be used to display the
equipment location of existing trunks.
Enter data as XXYYZZ:

• XX=cabinet 01~12
• YY=slot 01~10
• ZZ=analog trunk circuit 01~08
or
• ZZ=T1channel 01~24.

Example: If a line should be assigned to an RCOU in cabinet shelf 5, slot 2,

circuit 3, enter 050203.

Cabinet numbers:
• CIX100: Base, Exp.01
• CIX200: Base 01, Exp.02
• CIX670: Base 01, Exp 02~07.
• CIX1200: Base 01, Exp 02~12

Slot numbers:
• CIX100: Base 01, Exp.05~08
• CIX200: Base/Exp.01~04
• CIX670/1200: Base 01~08
• CIX670/1200: Exp.01~10

CTX28 and CIX40 assignments below are hard coded and cannot be changed.
01, 02 - 3 CO lines on motherboard - 28, 40 R1HW, 4 CO lines - 40 R2HW
01, 05 – GVMU - 28, GVPH - 40 R1HW, GIPx, MIPU or GCOCIH - 40 R2HW
01, 06 – GIPx, MIPU16 or GCOCIH - 40 R1HW, no card - 28, 40 R2HW
01, 08 - 3 CO lines on GCDU - 28, 40 R1HW and R2HW.

6-14 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 11/11

 Trunks

FIELD DESCRIPTION

01 Day1 Destination Type Select Destination Type for each.

02 Day2 Destination Type
Possible values:No Data (default), Dialing Digits, DISA, Built-in Modem, or Night
03 Night Destination Type
Bell
• No Data – no destination will ring when the line rings into the system.
• Dialing Digits – assigns the line to ring the directory number or access code
defined in the Destination Digits assignment.
• DISA – assigns the line to ring in as a DISA call. DISA dial tone will be
returned to the caller.
• Modem – assigns the line to ring the remote maintenance modem on the CIX
processor. Used to call into the system with an eManager PC and modem.
• Night Bell – Assigns the line to cause the night relay to pulse (one-sec. close
/ 3-sec. open)

Day1 Destination Digits Enter Destination, Directory Number or Access Codes for each, only if Dialing
Day2 Destination Digits Digits is selected as Destination Type.
Night Destination Digits
• If Dialing Digits is the Destination Type, enter the Directory Number that the
line should ring. If the line should ring over external page, enter #31xx, where
xx is the external Page group number.
• If the default page access code #31 was changed, use the new page access
code as the leading digits.
• Line access codes and network routing numbers can also be entered to route
incoming calls back out to a public or private network number.
Possible values:Up to 32 digits (default = no value)

04 MOH Source Select the Music On Hold source for the line. Quiet Tone means no music on
hold for the selected line.
Possible values:Quiet Tone, External1~15, Internal (default)

Trunks

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 11/11 6-15

 Trunks

309, 312 Direct Inward Dialing

This command assigns DID number analysis tables to ILGs.

1. Select > Trunk > DID.

2. Select an ILG Group Number.
3. Enter a DID Number in the 01 DID Number field or click one of the following buttons:
• List – choose from the list of programmed DIDs on the right side of the screen.
• Create – Make a new DID assignment using default settings.
• Copy – Enter a DID Number in 01 DID Number and click Copy to make a new DID assignment with
settings copied from the DID Number entered.
• Delete – Delete a DID.
• Get Default - restores data to factory defaults.
4. Enter DID Assignment data.
5. Click Submit.

FIELD DESCRIPTION

ILG Group Number Select the ILG number.

Possible values:1~32 CIX40, 1~32 CTX/CIX/100, 1~50 CTX/CIX 670 BCTU only or
BBCU only, 1~128 CTX/CIX670 BCTU + BEXU or BBCU + BECU,
1~50 CIX1200 HCTU only, 1~128 CTX670 HCTU + HEXAU, 1~220
CTX670 HCTU + HEXBU (default = 0)

01 DID Number Enter a DID number.

Possible values:1~7 digits may include wild card “?” where “?” = 0~9 (default = no
value).

02 MOH Source Set Music On Hold source for the DID number. Quiet tone means no music on hold
for the selected DID number.
Possible values:Quiet Tone, External 1~15, or Internal (default)

03 GCO Key Group Enter GCO Key Group Number that should ring for this line group.
Note: If CO Key or Dialing Digits are assigned as a ringing destination this
assignment will be ignored and will not ring.
Possible values:1~6 CTX28, 1~32 CIX40, 1~32 CTX/CIX/100, 1~50 CTX/CIX 670
BCTU only or BBCU only, 1~128 CTX/CIX670 BCTU + BEXU or
BBCU + BECU, 1~50 CIX1200 HCTU only, 1~128 CIX1200 HCTU +
HEXAU, 1~220 CIX1200 HCTU + HEXBU
(default = 0)

6-16 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 11/11

 Trunks

FIELD DESCRIPTION

04 Pooled Key Group If this line group is not assigned to ring a CO, GCO, or a Pooled line key, enter the
Destination type that should ring:
No Data - no destination will ring when the line rings into the system.
Dialing Digits - assigns the line to ring the directory number or access code defined
in the Destination Digits assignment.
DISA - assigns the line to ring in as a DISA call - DISA dial tone will be returned to
the caller.
Modem - assigns the line to ring the remote maintenance modem on the CIX
processor. Used to call into the system with an eManager PC and modem.
Night Bell - Assigns the line to cause the night relay to pulse
(one-sec.close/3-sec.open).
Possible values:1~6 CTX28, 1~32 CIX40, 1~32 CTX/CIX/100, 1~50 CTX/CIX 670
BCTU only or BBCU only, 1~128 CTX/CIX670 BCTU + BEXU or
BBCU + BECU, 1~50 CIX1200 HCTU only, 1~128 CIX1200 HCTU +
HEXAU, 1~220 CIX1200 HCTU + HEXBU
(default = 0)

05 Audio Day1 Dst If this line group is not assigned to ring a CO, GCO, or a Pooled line key, enter the
Type Destination type that should ring:
06 Audio Day2 Dst No Data - no destination will ring when the line rings into the system.
Type Dialing Digits - assigns the line to ring the directory number or access code defined
07 Audio Night Dst in the Destination Digits assignment.
Type DISA - assigns the line to ring in as a DISA call - DISA dial tone will be returned to
the caller.
Modem - assigns the line to ring the remote maintenance modem on the CIX
processor. Used to call into the system with an eManager PC and modem.
Night Bell - Assigns the line to cause the night relay to pulse (one-sec.close/3-
sec.open).
Possible values:No Data (default), Dialing Digits, DISA, Built-in Modem or Night Bell

Audio Day1 Dest Enter the Destination Directory Number or Access Code.
Audio Day2 Dest
Possible values:Up to 32 digits (default = no value)
Audio Night Dest
If Dialing Digits is the Destination Type enter the Directory Number that the line
should ring. If the line should ring over external page, enter #31xx, where xx is the
external page group number. If the default page access code #31 was changed, use
the new page access code as the leading digits.
Line access codes and network routing numbers can also be entered to route
incoming calls back out to a public or private network number.

08 Data Day1 Dst Type Select the Destination Type for data calls.
09 Data Day2 Dst Type
Possible values:No Data (default), Dialing Digits, DISA, Built-in Modem or Night Bell
10 Data Night Dst Type
Trunks

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 11/11 6-17

 Trunks

FIELD DESCRIPTION

Data Day1 Destination Enter the Destination Directory Number or Access Code.
Data Day2 Destination
Possible values:Up to 32 digits (default = no value)
Data Night Destination
If Dialing Digits is the Destination Type enter the Directory Number that the line
should ring. If the line should ring over external page, enter #31xx, where xx is the
external page group number. If the default page access code #31 was changed, use
the new page access code as the leading digits.
Line access codes and network routing numbers can also be entered to route
incoming calls back out to a public or private network number.

11 DID/DNIS No. VMID Enter the VM mailbox number which should answer calls for this DID/DNIS number.
Possible values:Up to 10 digits (default = no value)
• This code is only sent if using SMDI VM integration in Program 580, 01. This code
is replaced after voice mail answers by the DTMF code set in Program 309, 15
DID/DNIS DTMF VMID code - if programmed. Therefore, if using Program 309,
15 code, this VMID code is not necessary.
This mailbox number is sent to voice mail on a DID/DNIS call that rings directly to
voice mail and on a direct DID/DNIS call to a DN that forwards to voice mail before it
is answered by the DN.
If a DID/DNIS call is answered by a station and then transferred to a DN that
forwards to voice mail, this mailbox number of the DID/DNIS number or the
forwarding DN's mailbox number will be sent to voice mail per Program 579, 01.
If this VMID code is not set, direct DID/DNIS calls will go to the VM general greeting
and DID/DNIS calls that forward from a DN to VM will go to the DN's VMID mailbox.
This Voice Mailbox number is added to SMDI packets direct and forwarded
DID\DNIS calls to voice mail as explained above.

12 DID/DNIS Name Enter DNIS name. Names are assigned from eManager (not programming phones).
Possible values:Up to 16 ASCII characters (default = no value)

15 VM Application Enter the VM mailbox number which should answer calls for this DID/DNIS number.
Digits
Possible values:Digits 0~9, * and #. For a pause enter Px, where x=0~9 (seconds),
up to 10 characters (default = no value).
This mailbox number will be sent to voice mail on a DID/DNIS call that rings directly
to voice mail and on a direct DID/DNIS call to a DN that forwards to voice mail before
it is answered by the DN.
If a DID/DNIS call is answered by a station and then transferred to a DN that
forwards to voice mail, this mailbox number of the DID/DNIS number or the
forwarding DN's mailbox number will be sent to voice mail per Program 579, 01.
If this VMID code is not set, direct DID/DNIS calls will go to the VM general greeting
and DID/DNIS calls that forward from a DN to VM will go to the DN's VMID mailbox.
This voice mailbox number is sent to the VM port as DTMF digits after the VM port
answers a DID/DNIS call as explained above. These digits are sent to the VM port if
the CIX is set for SMDI or DTMF integration in Program 580, 01.

16 Tenant Number Enter the Tenant number to which this DID number should be assigned.
Possible values:1(default)~8.

6-18 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 11/11

 Trunks

318 DID Intercept Assignments

Prerequisite Program: 304 page 6-2
This command assigns the DID Routing table when DID numbers are undefined or not received.

1. Select > Trunk > DID Intercept.

2. Enter an ILG Number or choose from the list of programmed ILGs on the right side of the screen.
3. Enter DID Type in the 01 Type field.
4. Enter DID Intercept Assignment data.
5. Get Default - restores data to factory defaults.
6. Click Submit.
FIELD DESCRIPTION

ILG Number Enter ILG number.

Possible values:1~6 CTX28, 1~32 CIX40, 1~32 CTX/CIX/100, 1~50 CIX200,
1~50 CTX/CIX 670 BCTU only or BBCU only, 1~128 CTX/
CIX670 BCTU + BEXU or BBCU + BECU, 1~50 CIX1200 HCTU
only, 1~128 CIX1200 HCTU + HEXAU, 1~220 CIX1200 HCTU +
HEXBU
(default = 0)

01 Type No DID - set destination that should ring when the received DID number does not
match DID numbers in this group's DID table.
Not Determined - set the destination that should ring when the normal
programmed ringing destination is disconnected.
Possible values:No DID (default) or Not Determined

02 MOH Source Select Music On Hold.

Possible values:Quiet Tone, External 1~15, or Internal (default)

03 Group CO Destination GCO Key Group number.

Possible values:0~32 (CIX100), 0~50 (CIX200, CIX670/CIX1200 Basic),
0~128 (CIX670 Exp, CIX1200 Exp A), 0~220 (CIX1200 Exp B)
(default = 0)

04 Pooled Line Group POOL Line Key Group Number.

Possible values:0~32 (CIX100), 0~50 (CIX200, CIX670/CIX1200 Basic),
0~128 (CIX670 Exp, CIX1200 Exp A), 0~220 (CIX1200 Exp B)
(default = 0) Trunks

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 11/11 6-19

 Trunks

FIELD DESCRIPTION

05 Audio Day1 Dst Type Select the Audio/Speech call Day1 destination type.
06 Audio Day2 Dst Type
Possible values:No Data (default), Dialing Digits, DISA, Built-in Modem or Night
07 Audio Night Dst Type
Bell
• No Data – no destination will ring when the line rings into the system.
• Dialing Digits – assigns the line to ring the directory number or access code
defined in the Destination Digits assignment.
• DISA – assigns the line to ring in as a DISA call. DISA dial tone will be
returned to the caller.
• Modem – assigns the line to ring the remote maintenance modem on the CIX
processor. Used to call into the system with an eManager PC and modem.
• Night Bell – Assigns the line to cause the night relay to pulse (one-sec.close/3-
sec.open)

Audio Day1 Dst. DN Enter the Destination Directory Number. Destination DN is only required if the
Audio Day2 Dst DN destination type is Dialing Digits.
Audio Night Dst DN
Possible values:Up to 32 ASCII characters (default = no value)

08 Data Day1 Dst Type Select the data call Day1 destination type.
09 Data Day2 Dst Type Possible values:No Data (default), Dialing Digits, DISA, Built-in Modem or Night
10 Data Night Dst Type Bell
• No Data – no destination will ring when the line rings into the system.
• Dialing Digits – assigns the line to ring the directory number or access code
defined in the Destination Digits assignment.
• DISA – assigns the line to ring in as a DISA call. DISA dial tone will be
returned to the caller.
• Modem – assigns the line to ring the remote maintenance modem on the CIX
processor. Used to call into the system with an eManager PC and modem.
• Night Bell – Assigns the line to cause the night relay to pulse (one-sec. close /
3-sec. open).

Data Day1 Dst DN Enter the Destination Directory Number. Destination DN is only required if the
Data Day2 Dst DN destination type is Dialing Digits.
Data Night Dst DN
Possible values:Up to 32 ASCII characters (default = no value)

6-20 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 11/11

 Trunks

FIELD DESCRIPTION

11 DID/DNIS No. VMID Enter the VM mailbox number which should answer calls for this DID/DNIS
number.
Possible values:Up to 10 digits (default = no value)
Note This code is only sent if using SMDI VM integration in Program 580, 01. This code
will be replaced after voice mail answers by the DTMF code set in Program 318,
15 DID/DNIS DTMF VMID code - if programmed. Therefore, if using Program
318, 15 code, this VMID code is not necessary.
This mailbox number will be sent to voice mail on a DID/DNIS call that rings
directly to voice mail and on a direct DID/DNIS call to a DN that forwards to voice
mail before it is answered by the DN.
If a DID/DNIS call is answered by a station and then transferred to a DN that
forwards to voice mail, this mailbox number of the DID/DNIS number, or the
forwarding DN's mailbox number will be sent to voice mail per Program 579, 01.
If this VMID code is not set, direct DID/DNIS calls will go to the VM general
greeting. DID/DNIS calls that forward from a DN to VM will go to the DN's VMID
mailbox.
This Voice Mailbox number is added to SMDI packets of direct and forwarded
DID\DNIS calls to voice mail as explained above.

12 DID/DNIS Name Enter DNIS Name. DNIS names can be assigned from eManager (not from
programming phones).
Possible values:Up to 16 ASCII characters (default = no value)

15 DID/DNIS No. DTMF Enter the VM mailbox number which should answer calls for this DID/DNIS
VMID number.
Possible values:Digits 0~9, * and #. For a pause enter Px, where x=0~9
(seconds), up to 10 characters (default = no value).
This mailbox number will be sent to voice mail on a DID/DNIS call that rings
directly to voice mail and on a direct DID/DNIS call to a DN that forwards to voice
mail before it is answered by the DN.
If a DID/DNIS call is answered by a station and then transferred to a DN that
forwards to voice mail, the mailbox number of the DID/DNIS number or the
forwarding DN's mail box number will be sent to voice mail per Program 579, 01.
If this VMID code is not set, direct DID/DNIS calls will go to the VM general
greeting and DID/DNIS calls that forward from a DN to VM will go to the DN's
VMID mailbox.
This voice mailbox number is sent to the VM port as DTMF digits after the VM port
answers a DID/DNIS call as explained above. These digits are sent to the VM port
if the CIX is set for SMDI or DTMF integration in Program 580, 01.
Trunks

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 11/11 6-21

 Trunks
Service

Service
Program Number(s): 311 and 319
These commands assign Direct Inward System Access (DISA) properties.

1. Select > Trunk > Service.

2. Enter Program 311 data.
3. Enter Program 319 data.
4. Get Default - restores data to factory defaults.
5. Click Submit.

311 DISA Security Code

Prerequisite Program: None
Assigns DISA parameters.
FIELD DESCRIPTION

01 DISA Enabled Enable DISA security code.

Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)

02 DISA Code Enter DISA security code. Only required if DISA Security Code is marked
as necessary.
Possible values:Up to 15 digits (default = no value)

03 Response Timer Choose the time, in seconds, the CIX will wait before answering an
incoming DISA call.
Possible values:0~30 (default = 5)

04 Idle Timer Choose the time, in seconds, the CIX will wait for the first DTMF tones after
answering a DISA call.
Possible values:0~60 (default = 10)

05 Tie Line Access Enable this feature to allow DISA callers to access Tie lines when they call
into the system.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)

6-22 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 11/11

 Trunks
Service

319 Intercept Treatment

Prerequisite Program: None
This command assigns Intercept positions for Strata CIX Day/Night schedules. Intercept positions are used
when the destination of a trunk line call is not determined with DID or DIT.
Get Default - restores data to factory defaults.
Copy -Use this button to copy the entries to another tenant.
FIELD DESCRIPTION

Tenant Number Select the Tenant number for which the Intercept Destinations should
be assigned.
Possible values:1~8.

01 Day1 Destination Select Destination Type for each.

Type Possible values:None (default), Dialing Digits, or Night Bell
02 Day2 Destination
Type
03 Night Destination
Type

Day1 Destination Enter Destination for each.

Day2 Destination
Possible values:Up to 32 ASCII characters (default = no value)
Night Destination
• To intercept with a DN use 0~99999
• To intercept with a Network DN use 1~32
• To intercept with Dial Digits Paging 1~16

Trunks

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 11/11 6-23

 Trunks
Service

315 T1 Trunk Card

Prerequisite Program: 100 page 4-1
This command assigns T1 Trunk Card Data to the system.

1. Select > Trunk > T1.

2. Enter T1 card location in Shelf/Slot field (xxyy). The selected slot requires an RDTU Card.
• xx = Cabinet 01~07
• yy = Slot 01~10 or click the following buttons:
• List – choose from the list of programmed trunks on the right side of the screen.
• Copy – to T1 trunk equipment.
• Get Default - sets all data to factory defaults.
3. Enter values for Program 315.
4. Click Submit.
FIELD DESCRIPTION

T1 Equipment Location Enter the RDTU equipment location.

Enter data as XXYYZZ:
• XX=cabinet 01~12
• YY=slot 01~10
• ZZ=analog trunk circuit 01~08
or
• ZZ=T1channel 01~24.

Example: If a line should be assigned to an RCOU in cabinet shelf 5, slot 2, circuit

3, enter 050203.

Cabinet numbers:
• CIX100: Base, Exp.01
• CIX200: Base 01, Exp.02
• CIX670: Base 01, Exp 02~07.
• CIX1200: Base 01, Exp 02~12

Slot numbers:
• CIX100: Base 01, Exp.05~08
• CIX200: Base/Exp.01~04
• CIX670/1200: Base 01~08
• CIX670/1200: Exp.01~10

01 Coding Format Select the Coding Format.

Possible values:None, PZC, B8ZS (default), or ZCS

02 Frame Format Select the Frame Format.

Possible values:SF Mode or ESF Mode (default)

6-24 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 11/11

 Trunks
Service

FIELD DESCRIPTION

04 Receive PAD Select the Receive PAD values.

Possible values:None, Plus 6 dB, Plus 3 dB, Zero dB (default), Minus 3 dB, Minus
6 dB, Minus 9 dB, Minus 12 dB or Minus 15 dB

05 Send PAD Select the Send PAD values.

Possible values:None, Plus 6 dB, Plus 3 dB, Zero dB (default), Minus 3 dB, Minus
6 dB, Minus 9 dB, Minus 12 dB or Minus 15 dB

DID/DNIS Table View

This screen provides the DID/DNIS Table View on the DID command page or directly from Trunk > DID/
DNIS Table View.
Important! To avoid any errors, you must first set the digit length under Trunk > ILG.
To access DID/DNIS table view
Click Trunk > DID/DNIS Table View or use Program 309.
See Table Views in Chapter 2 for table functionality.
Note You can navigate this table using the ILG and the DID/DNIS which are the first and second drop-
downs between the Previous and Next buttons.

Trunks

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 11/11 6-25

 Trunks
ISDN

ISDN
The following program enables set up for ISDN-related system settings.

317 ISDN BRI Trunk

Prerequisite Program: 100 page 4-1
This command assigns ISDN BRI Trunks.

1. Select > Trunk > ISDN BRI.

2. Enter Channel Group number or click one of the following buttons:
• List – choose from a list of programmed trunks on the right side of the screen.
• Create – Assign a new trunk with default settings.
• Copy – Enter a Channel Group number and click Copy to make a new trunk assignment with
settings copied from the Channel Group you entered.
• Delete – Delete a trunk.
• Get Default - restores data to factory defaults.
3. Enter data.
4. Click Submit.

FIELD DESCRIPTION

Channel Group Enter the BRI channel Group Number.

Possible values:1~32 (CIX40), 1~32 (CTX100), 1~48 (CTX670 Basic & CIX200),
1~128 (CTX670 Exp), 1~48 (CIX1200 HCTU only), 1-128
(CIX1200 HCTU+HEXAU), 1~220 (CIX1200 HCTU +HEXBU)
(default = 0)

6-26 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 11/11

 Trunks
ISDN

FIELD DESCRIPTION

01 BRI Equipment Enter the BRI equipment number assigned to this channel group.
Number
Enter data as XXYYZZ:
• XX=cabinet 01~12
• YY=slot 01~10
• ZZ=analog trunk circuit 01~08
or
• ZZ=T1channel 01~24.

Example: If a line should be assigned to an RBSU in cabinet shelf 5, slot 2, circuit 3,

enter 050203.

Cabinet numbers:
CIX100: Base, Exp.01
CIX200: Base 01, Exp.02
CIX670: Base 01, Exp 02~07.
CIX1200: Base 01, Exp 02~12

Slot numbers:
CIX100: Base 01, Exp.05~08
CIX200: Base/Exp.01~04
CIX670/1200: Base 01~08
CIX670/1200: Exp.01~10

02 Protocol Select the ISDN protocol. Only Bearer capabilities specified by the protocol can be
entered in this field. The Initial value for ISDN Protocol corresponds to information
set in the hardware level.
Possible values:Nat’l ISDN (default), ETSI, TTC or Nat’l ISDN Nortel
National ISDN = North America, ETSI = England and TTC = Japan.

03 Incoming Line Group ILG assignments must be made for basic ISDNs to process the calls being
received.
Possible values:1~32 CTX/CIX/100, 1~50 CTX/CIX 670 BCTU only or BBCU only,
1~128 CTX/CIX670 BCTU + BEXU or BBCU + BECU, 1~50
CIX1200 HCTU only, 1~128 CTX670 HCTU + HEXAU, 1~220
CTX670 HCTU + HEXBU
(default = 0)

04 Outgoing Line Group OLG assignments must be made for basic ISDNs to process the calls being
originated.
Possible values:1~32 CTX/CIX/100, 1~50 CTX/CIX 670 BCTU only or BBCU only,
1~128 CTX/CIX670 BCTU + BEXU or BBCU + BECU, 1~50
CIX1200 HCTU only, 1~128 CIX1200 HCTU + HEXAU, 1~220
CIX1200 HCTU + HEXBU
Trunks

(default = 0)

06 Bearer Svc - Speech Enable speech capability. See Table 6-1, “Bearer Capability Table” on page 29.
Possible values:Enable (default) or Disable

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 11/11 6-27

 Trunks
ISDN

FIELD DESCRIPTION

07 Bearer Svc - 3.1 KHz Enable 3.1 KHz audio capability. See Table 6-1, “Bearer Capability Table” on page
Audio 29.
Possible values:Enable (default) or Disable

08 Bearer Svc - 7 KHz Enable 7 KHz audio capability. See Table 6-1, “Bearer Capability Table” on page 29.
Audio
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)

09 Bearer Svc - Enable one of the unrestricted capabilities. See Table 6-1, “Bearer Capability Table”
Unrestricted 64K on page 29.

10 Bearer Svc - Possible values:Enable (default) or Disable bearer capabilities for the channel
Unrestricted 56K group.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
11 Bearer Svc -
Unrestricted 2x64K

12 Outgoing B Ch Select originating B Channel method.

Select
Possible values:
• Explicit – Channel is indicated and no alternative is acceptable.
• Preferred – (default) Channel is indicated and any alternative is acceptable.
• Any Channel – Channel is indicated and any channel is acceptable.

13 B Ch Selection Choose Idle B Channel selection method.

Possible values:Forward Cyclic, Backward Cyclic, Forward Terminal or Backward
Terminal (default = Backward Terminal)
• Select Forward Cyclic (from lowest number to highest number of B-channel).
• Select Backward Cyclic (from highest number to lowest number of B-channel).
• Select Forward Terminal for the lowest numbered B-channel.
Select Backward Terminal for the oldest number B-channel. (The High-High B-
channel selection)

14 Initialize Type Enter the Service Profile Identifier (SPID) type of initialization.
Possible values:User Entry (Auto SPID On), User Entry (Auto SPID Off), Auto SPID
or None (default)

15 Initialization Display Enter the text to be displayed for SPID Initialization.

Possible values:Up to 4 ASCII characters (default = User)

16 SPID #1 Enter the SPID value. These fields are required if you selected National ISDN in
Protocol. When no data is entered any previously entered information is
17 SPID #2 overwritten.
Possible values:Up to 20 ASCII characters (default = No Value)

18 T-Wait Timer Enable the T-Wait Timer. This field is needed if you selected National ISDN in
Protocol above. This timer, used along with the SPID, assigns random initializing
SPID times to prevent BRI interfaces from re-initializing at the same time after a
reset or power outage.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)

6-28 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 11/11

 Trunks
ISDN

FIELD DESCRIPTION

19 Voice Calls Select the number of simultaneous voice (speech) calls that can exist at the same
time on this interface.
Possible values:One or Two (default)

20 Subscriber 1 No. Enter the telephone number for subscriber 1. Telephone number should be
consistent with D channel data. If no data is entered in this field any previously
programmed information is lost.
Possible values:Up to 10 digits (default = no value)

21 Subscriber 2 No. Enter the telephone number for subscriber number 2. If no data is entered in this
field any previously programmed information is lost.
Possible values:Up to 10 digits (default = no value)

22 Layer 1 Short Break If layer 1 is interrupted for a short period of time the CIX will ignore it.
Tolerant
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default = Enable)

23 TEI assignment TEI (Terminal Endpoint Identifier) assignment for ISDN CO Trunk. Leave in default.
Possible values:TEI FIXED, SINGLE TEI or 3:TWO TEI (default)

24 Malicious Call ID Not supported by Strata CIX software.

25 BRI Trunk De-active

Mode

Table 6-1 Bearer Capability Table

Bearer Services Bellcore National ISDN ETSI TTC
Speech X X X
3.1 KHz X X X
7 KHz X X
64 Kbps X X X
Circuit Mode
Rate adaptation from 56 Kbps X
Unrestricted
Digital
Information

2x64 Kbps X X
Trunks

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 11/11 6-29

 Trunks
ISDN

302, 303 Strata Net (PRI) and Strata Net IP (QSIG)

Prerequisite Program: 100 page 4-1
The PRI (RPTU, BPTU) and Strata Net IP (BIPU-Q) interface cards need to have a number of assignments
for defining operation. These include assigning which channels are available for use and the location of the
D-channel or signaling channel. The D-channel exists on the circuit assigned in this command. Also, a
number of optional functional capabilities also need to be enabled or disabled.
For BIPU-Q channel groups, parameters 01~04 must be configured; all other parameters should remain at
default. All parameters should be configured for ISDN. Many of these are normally set to default.
Note PRI ILGs and OLGs are assigned using “ISDN Call-by-Call” on page 6-35. Therefore, ILG and OLG
must be set to 0.

1. Select Trunk > ISDN PRI.

2. Enter Channel Group number or click one of the following buttons:
• List – choose from the list of programmed trunks on the right side of the screen.
• Create – Assign a new trunk with default settings.
• Copy – Enter a Channel Group number and click Copy to make a new trunk assignment with
settings copied from the Channel Group entered.
• Delete – Delete a trunk
• Get Default - sets data to factory defaults.
3. Enter data.
4. Click Submit.
FIELD DESCRIPTION

Channel Group Channel Group Number.

Assign the proper PAD levels to channel groups in Programs 107, 108 and 114.
These levels are critical for ISDN and Strata Net IP speech levels as well as
Quality Of Service.
Possible values:1~32 (CIX40), 1~32 (CTX100), 1~48 (CTX670 Basic &
CIX200), 1~128 (CTX670 Exp), 1~48 (CIX1200 HCTU only), 1-
128 (CIX1200 HCTU+HEXAU), 1~220 (CIX1200 HCTU
+HEXBU)
(default = 0)

6-30 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 11/11

 Trunks
ISDN

FIELD DESCRIPTION

01 Equipment No. Enter the RPTU, BPTU or BIPU-Q equipment number as xxyyzz.
Enter data as XXYYZZ:
• XX=cabinet 01~12
• YY=slot 01~10
• ZZ=T1channel 01~24
or
• ZZ=analog trunk circuit 01~32
Example: If a line should be assigned to an RCOU in cabinet shelf 5, slot 2,
circuit 3, enter 050203.

Cabinet numbers:
• CIX100: Base, Exp.01
• CIX200: Base 01, Exp.02
• CIX670: Base 01, Exp 02~07
• CIX1200: Base 01, Exp 02~12
Slot numbers:
• CIX100: Base 01, Exp.05~08
• CIX200: Base/Exp.01~04
• CIX670/1200: Base 01~08
• CIX670/1200: Exp.01~10

02 Protocol The Protocol to be followed defines the type of interface expected based upon
the equipment type at the distant end of the connection.
In North America, the choices are 1-Bellcore National ISDN; 4-Bellcore National
ISDN NT; or 5-QSIG (Strata Net).
Use IP for BIUP-Q, IP QSIG (Strata Net).
Use QSIG for RPTU/BPTU, PRI QSIG (Strata Net)
Possible values:National ISDN, ETSI, TTC, National ISDN Nortel or QSIG
(default = None)

03 Incoming Line Group ISDN and Strata Net need to have trunk group assignments to process the calls
being received. If multiple trunk groups are used within the channel group, then
Call-by-Call Services must be used.
Possible values:0~32 (CIX100), 0~50 (CIX200, CIX670/CIX1200 Basic),
0~128 (CIX670 Exp, CIX1200 Exp A), 0~220 (CIX1200 Exp B)
(default = 0)
Trunks

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 11/11 6-31

 Trunks
ISDN

FIELD DESCRIPTION

04 Outgoing Line Group ISDN and Strata Net needs to have trunk group assignments to process the
calls being originated. If multiple trunk groups are used within the channel
group, then Call-by-Call Services must be used.
Possible values:1-31 CIX40, 1~64 CTX/CIX/100, 1~96 CTX/CIX 670 BCTU only
or BBCU only, 1~264 CTX670 BCTU + BEXU or BBCU +
BECU, 1~96 CIX1200 HCTU only, 1~264 CIX1200 HCTU +
HEXAU, 1~440 CIX1200 HCTU + HEXBU
(default = 0)

05 Trunk ID Type Identify whether the communication with the PSTN requires an identifier. Select
Explicit to require an identifier. Use Implicit for Strata Net IP.
Possible values:Implicit (default) or Explicit

06 Trunk ID An identifier must be used as part of the addressing when an “explicit” identified
is used to communicate with the PSTN which channel on which link is used for
the given call. This identifier is assigned by the connected PSTN. Use the
default for Strata Net.
Possible values:0 ~ 126 (default = 0)

07 D Ch Position PRI includes a 64-kbps D-channel (for transfer of signal information). Select the
channel position to be used for D channel signaling.
Note This field is used only when the span interface speed is 1.5M. If the
span interface speed is 2M the value is fixed at 16.
Possible values:0 ~ 24 (default = 24)

08~13 Bearer Services: Enable the Bearer Capabilities allowed for this PRI Trunk channel group.
• Speech Possible values:Enable (default) or Disable
• 3.1 KHz Audio Select the Channel Method (map) to identify the channels.
• 7 KHz Audio Note In North America, only Channel Number map is used (Channel
• Unrestr. 64K Number). See Table 6-2.

• Unrestr. 56K Possible values:Channel Number (default) or Slot Number

• Unrestr. 2x64K

14~18 Bearer Services: The Bearer Capabilities (384k Unrestricted (H0), 1536k Unrestricted (H11),
1920k Unrestricted, Restricted Digital Info, Trunk Video, and Unrestricted
• Unrestr. 384K
Multirate) are not used and should remain disabled.
• Unrestr. 1536K
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)
• Unrestr. 1920K
Select the Channel Method (map) to identify the channels.
• Restr. Digital
Note In North America only Channel Number B map is used. See Table 6-2.
• Video
Possible values:Channel Number B (default), Channel Number H, Slot Map B or
Slot Map H

19 Bearer Svc Multirate The Bearer Capabilities 384k Unrestricted (H0), 1536k Unrestricted (H11),
Unrestricted 1920k Unrestricted, Restricted Digital Info, Trunk Video and Unrestricted
Multirate are not used and should remain disabled. See Table 6-2.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)

6-32 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 11/11

 Trunks
ISDN

FIELD DESCRIPTION

20 B Ch Selection Method The method used for selecting an idle ‘B’ channel and the reaction if the PSTN
indicates the channel is not available needs to be chosen to originate a call from
CIX.
Possible values:Explicit (default), Preferred or Any Channel
Preferred option is recommended unless PSTN needs other choice.

21 B-Ch Selection The search method for choosing an idle ‘B’ channel shall also be specified.
Backward Terminal is the normal method with the PSTN following a Forward
Terminal method.
Possible values:Forward Cyclic, Backward Cyclic, Forward Terminal or
Backward Terminal (default)

22 T1 Time Slot Pattern 1544 Time Slot Pattern.

Possible values:Fixed1 (default), Flexible or Floating

23 E1 Time Slot Pattern 2048 Time Slot Pattern

Possible values:Fixed1 (default), Fixed2 or Flexible

24 T-Wait Timer Specify whether the T-Wait timer is to be enabled or disabled. This field is only
valid for Nat’l ISDN. This should not be enabled for PRI, it is only for BRI.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)

25 RBT on Incoming Call Enable Ringback Tone when terminating a call. This field is only valid for Nat’l
ISDN.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)

26 Network Mode Set this span as Master or Slave for Layer 2 of a Strata Net PRI. The opposite
value must be set for the node in which this Strata Net PRI terminates. This
governs call setup activity and is not related to clock synchronization.
Possible values:Master (default) or Slave

27 Negotiation Priority Sets this span as Side A or Side B for Layer 3 of a Strata Net PRI. The opposite
value must be set for the node in which this Strata Net PRI terminates.
Possible values:Side A (default) or Side B

28 Layer 1 short break If layer 1 is interrupted for less than 90 seconds CIX will keep the current calls
tolerant open.
Possible values:Enable (default) or Disable

29 2-B channel Transfer Enable this option to allow 2-B channel conference on PRI calls. This allows two
PRI channels to be connected in the same Conference or Tandem call.
Note This option must also be enabled by PRI provider to allow it to
work.

30 Q931 Protocol Timer Sets the Q931 Protocol Timer. If Long is set, T303 is 8s and T301 is 300s.
Trunks

31 Send Malicious Call ID

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 11/11 6-33

 Trunks
ISDN

Table 6-2 Bearer Services Table

Nat’l
Bearer Services ETSI TTC
ISDN
Speech X X X
3.1 KHz Audio X X X
7 KHz Audio X X
Unrestricted digital information 64 kbps X X X
Rate adaptation from 56 kbps X

Circuit 2x64 X X
Mode 384kbp (H0) X X X
1536kbps (H11) X X X
1920kbps (H12) X
Multirate (n x 64 kbps) X
Restricted digital Information X X
Video X X
Packet
Shelf/Slot/Circuit
Mode

6-34 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 11/11

 Trunks
ISDN

ISDN Call-by-Call
Program Number(s): 324 and 323
Call-by-Call service allows multiple facilities to share a PRI channel group. Traffic requirements of different
facilities vary at different times and sharing B channels on a Call-by-Call basis makes it possible to use
fewer B channels to perform an equivalent service to the discrete counterpart.

1. Complete the “324 CBC Time Zones” on page 6-37.

2. Select Trunk > ISDN Call by Call.
3. Enter Channel Group number.
4. Enter Program 323 data.
5. Enter Program 324 data.
6. Click Submit.

323 CBC Service

Prerequisite Program: 302 page 6-30
Call-by-Call service allows multiple facilities to share the PRI channel group. Since the traffic requirements
of each facility may vary at different times, it becomes possible to use fewer ‘B’ channels to perform the
equivalent services of the discrete counterpart. This sharing the ‘B’ channels on a call-by-call basis can
save the user money. To accomplish CBC services, each facility needs to be defined, its related Line
Group assigned and minimum and maximum values for the services provided. These service parameters
may be set for three different time zones thus allowing fewer or more services of different types at different
times of the day.
FIELD DESCRIPTION

Channel Group Enter the Channel Group Number.

Possible values:1~32 (CTX100), 1~ 48 (CTX670 Basic & CIX200), 1~128 (CTX670
Exp), 1~ 48 (CIX1200 HCTU only), 1~128 (CIX1200
HCTU+HEXAU), 1~220 (CIX1200 HCTU +HEXBU)
(default = 0)

01 Index Enter the CBC Service Index or click one of the following buttons:
• List – View a summary list of programmed trunks.
• Create – Assign a new trunk with default settings.
• Copy - Copy assignments to another tenant.
Possible values:1~32 (CTX100), 1~48 (CTX670 Basic & CIX200), 1~128 (CTX670
Exp), 1~ 48 (CIX1200 HCTU only), 1~128 (CIX1200
HCTU+HEXAU), 1~220 (CIX1200 HCTU+HEXBU)
(default = 0)

02 Type of Service Select the CBC Service Type.

Note To delete CBC set this field to 1: No Data.
Trunks

Possible values:No data (default), POTS, FX, Tie Line (Enbloc), Tie Line (Cut
through), Intra LATA Out WATS, Banded Out WATTS, Inter LATA
Out WATS or INWATS

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 11/11 6-35

 Trunks
ISDN

FIELD DESCRIPTION

03 Facility Code Enter the supplied Facility code value from the PSTN. If no data is entered in this
field any previously entered data is deleted.
Possible values:00~31(default = no value)

04 Service Parameters Enter the service parameters supplied from PSTN. If no data is entered in this field
any previously entered data is deleted.
Possible values:Up to 5 digits (default = no value)

05 Network ID Enter the Network ID code supplied from PSTN (this field is required if you selected
Inter LATA Out WATS type of service). If no data is entered in this field any
previously entered data is deleted.
Possible values:3 to 4 digits (default = no value)

06 Incoming Line Specify the ILG for this facility.

Group
Possible values:1~32 CTX/CIX/100, 1~50 CIX200, 1~50 CTX/CIX 670 BCTU only
or BBCU only, 1~50 CIX200, 1~128 CTX/CIX670 BCTU + BEXU or
BBCU + BECU, 1~50 CIX1200 HCTU only, 1~128 CIX1200 HCTU
+ HEXAU, 1~220 CIX1200 HCTU + HEXBU
(default = 0)

07 Outgoing Line Specify the OLG for this facility.

Group Possible values:1~32 CTX/CIX/100, 1~50 CIX200, 1~50 CTX/CIX 670 BCTU only
or BBCU only, 1~50 CIX200, 1~128 CTX/CIX670 BCTU + BEXU or
BBCU + BECU, 1~50 CIX1200 HCTU only, 1~128 CIX1200 HCTU
+ HEXAU, 1~220 CIX1200 HCTU + HEXBU
(default = 0)

08 Min Calls Zone 1 Select the minimum number of Bch in Time Zone 1.
Possible values:0~47 (default = 0)

09 Max Calls Zone 1 Select the maximum number of Bch in Time Zone 1.
Possible values:0~47 (default = 47)

10 Min Calls Zone 2 Select the minimum number of Bch in Time Zone 2.
Possible values:0~47 (default = 0)

11 Max Calls Zone 2 Select the maximum number of Bch in Time Zone 2.
Possible values:0~47 (default = 47)

12 Min Calls Zone 3 Select the minimum number of Bch in Time Zone 3.
Possible values:0~47 (default = 0)

13 Max Calls Zone 3 Select the maximum number of Bch in Time Zone 3.
Possible values:0~47 (default = 47)

6-36 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 11/11

 Trunks
ISDN

324 CBC Time Zones

This command assigns Call-by-Call Time Zone.
FIELD DESCRIPTION

Channel Group Channel Group Number

Possible values:1~32 (CIX40), 1~32 (CTX100), 1~48 (CTX670 Basic & CIX200),
1~128 (CTX670 Exp), 1~ 48 (CIX1200 HCTU only), 1~128
(CIX1200 HCTU+HEXAU), 1~220 (CIX1200 HCTU +HEXBU)
(default = 0)

01 Start Zone 1 Enter the Time Zone Starting Time (hhmm).

02 Start Zone 2 Possible values:hh = 00~23, 99 (hour); mm = 00~59, 99 (minutes); 9999 = delete
time zone, (default = no value)
03 Start Zone 3

320 PRI B Channels

Prerequisite Program: 302 page 6-30
PRI interfaces are purchased on per interface and channel basis. The ‘B’ channel assignments allow for a
flexible activation of channels to match the subscribed services from the PSTN.This command allows you
to enable or disable each B channel on selected RPTUs.

1. Select Trunk > PRI B Channels.

2. Enter the Equipment Number or click List to see a summary of progammed circuits.
3. Click the B Channel numbers that you want to activate (see Table 6-3 below for T1 and E1 B Channel
default settings).
4. Get Default - restores data to factory defaults.
5. Copy - Copy assignments to another tenant.
6. Click Submit.

Table 6-3 B Channel Defaults

B Channel Position
01~15 16 17~23 24 25~31
Span Interface Speed
1.5M (T1) ON ON ON OFF (Dch Pos)
2.0M (E1) ON OFF (Dch Pos) ON ON ON
Trunks

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 11/11 6-37

 Trunks
ISDN

FIELD DESCRIPTION

00 PRI Card Equipment Enter the ISDN RPTU equipment number:

Number Enter data as XXYYZZ:
XX=cabinet 01~12
YY=slot 01~10
ZZ=PRI channel 01~24 (USA and Canada)
ZZ=E1/ETSI PRI channel 01~31 (other countries)
Example: If a line should be assigned to an RCOU in cabinet shelf 5, slot 2, circuit
3, enter 050203.
Cabinet numbers:
• CIX/CTX100: Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
• CIX200: Select 01 for Base and 02 for Expansion cabinet.
• CIX/CTX670: Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each
Expansion cabinet.
• CIX1200: Select 01 for Base and 02~12 respectively for each
Expansion cabinet.
Slot numbers:
• CIX/CTX100: Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion
slots.
• CIX/CTX100: Virtual Slot for ACTU Relay = Cabinet 02, Slot 05.
• CIX200: Select 01~04 for either cabinet.
• CIX/CTX670: Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion
slots.
• CXI1200:Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.

01~31 B Channel ID Assign each ‘B’ channel as enabled or disabled for each channel on the interface.
The assignments must match exactly to the subscription from the PSTN.
Possible values:1 = Enable, 2 = Disable (default = 1)

6-38 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 11/11

 Trunks
ISDN

316 Shared D Channel

Prerequisite Program: 302 page 6-30
The PRI Interface can be extended to include an additional PRI card to expand the total number of
channels to 47 on a channel group. This second PRI may optionally offer a backup D channel.

1. Select Trunk > D Channel.

2. Enter the channel group number (1~128, default = no value), or click the List button to view a summary
list of programmed channel groups.
3. Enter data.
4. Copy - Copy assignment to another tenant.
5. Get Default - restores data to factory defaults.
6. Click Submit.

FIELD DESCRIPTION

Channel Group Channel Group Number.

Possible values:1~32 (CIX40), 1~32 (CTX100), 1~48 (CTX670 Basic & CIX200),
1~128 (CTX670 Exp), 1~48 (CIX1200 HCTU only), 1-128
(CIX1200 HCTU+HEXAU), 1~220 (CIX1200 HCTU +HEXBU)
(default = 0)

Trunks

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 11/11 6-39

 Trunks
ISDN

FIELD DESCRIPTION

01 PRI Equipment Enter the ISDN RPTU equipment number:

Number Enter data as XXYYZZ:
• XX=cabinet 01
• YY=03, 05, or 07
• ZZ=Channel 01 is always used to assign RPTU parameters
or
• XX=cabinet 02~10
• YY=01, 03, or 05
• ZZ=Channel 01 is always used to assign RPTU parameters

Example: If the RPTU is installed in cabinet shelf 5, slot 3, enter 050301.

Cabinet numbers:
• CIX/CTX100: Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
• CIX200: Select 01 for Base and 02 for Expansion cabinet.
• CIX/CTX670: Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each
Expansion cabinet.
• CIX1200: Select 01 for Base and 02~12 respectively for each
Expansion cabinet.
Slot numbers:
• CIX/CTX100: Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion
slots.
• CIX/CTX100: Virtual Slot for ACTU Relay = Cabinet 02, Slot 05.
• CIX200: Select 01~04 for either cabinet.
• CIX/CTX670: Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion
slots.
• CIX1200:Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.

02 Channel ID An identifier must be used as part of the addressing to communicate with the PSTN
which channel on which link is used on the given call. This identifier is assigned by
the connected PSTN.
Possible values:1~ 126 (default = 1)

03 D-Ch Provided If a backup ‘D’ Channel is to be used it needs to be enabled.

Possible values:D-channel or No D-channel (default)

6-40 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 11/11

 Trunks
ISDN

Calling Number
Program Number(s): 321 and 322
When calls are made using ISDN services the telephone number from which the call originates must be
identified to the PSTN.

1. Select Trunk > Calling Number.

2. Enter the OLG Number, or click the List button to view a summary list of programmed OLGs.
3. Enter Program 321 data.
4. Enter Program 322 data.
5. Click Submit.

321 Calling Number Identification

Prerequisite Program: 306 page 6-5
The calling number ID is what is defined as the user supplied calling number. This number may be
optionally screened by the PSTN to ensure only calls from valid billable telephone numbers are allowed to
originate calls.
FIELD DESCRIPTION

OLG Number Enter the OLG Number.

Possible values:1~6 CTX28, 1~32 CIX40, 1~32 CTX/CIX/100, 1~50 CIX200, 1~50
CTX/CIX 670 BCTU only or BBCU only, 1~128 CTX/CIX670 BCTU
+ BEXU or BBCU + BECU, 1~50 CIX1200 HCTU only, 1~128
CIX1200 HCTU + HEXAU, 1~220 CIX1200 HCTU + HEXBU
(default = 0)

01 Default Number Enter the telephone number to use by default when originating a call. This is the
number that the PSTN has registered for billing purposes.
Possible values:Up to 10 ASCII characters (default = no value)

02 Number Prefix Enter the prefix telephone number for which a DID number will be appended to
create a user identified telephone number.
Possible values:Up to 10 ASCII characters (default = no value)
This number may or may not be a billed number but is used for Caller ID at the
distant end and could be used for returning your call.

03 Number Verification Specify whether the number provided should be screened by the PSTN before the
call is to proceed.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)

04 Default Number 2 Enter the second telephone number to use by default when originating a call.
Possible values:Up to 10 ASCII characters (default = no value)
This is the number that the PSTN has registered for billing purposes. The second
Trunks

number is for BRI only.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 11/11 6-41

 Trunks
ISDN

322 Called Number Table

Prerequisite Program: 306 page 6-5
When calls are sent to the PSTN with Calling Number Identification Service (CNIS), the CIX can supply
special CNIS information as part of the Setup Message. This program may be used for sending a unique
number based on the source directing the call to the Strata CIX PRI.
FIELD DESCRIPTION

OLG Number OLG Number.

Possible values:1~32 CTX/CIX/100, 1~50 CTX/CIX 670 BCTU only or BBCU only,
1~50 CIX200, 1~128 CTX/CIX670 BCTU + BEXU or BBCU +
BECU, 1~50 CIX1200 HCTU only, 1~128 CIX1200 HCTU +
HEXAU, 1~220 CIX1200 HCTU + HEXBU
(default = 0)

01 Source Type Specify the type of circuit used for outgoing calls: 1- PDN; 2- GCO; 3- Pooled Line.
Possible values:Primary DN (0~99999), Group CO (1~128) or Pool Line Group
(1~128); (default = no value)

02 Source Number Specify the number of the source type selected: PDN 0~9999
GCO or Pooled Line Possible Values: 0~32 (CIX100), 0~50 (CIX200, CIX670/
CIX1200 Basic), 0~128 (CIX670 Exp, CIX1200 Exp A), 0~220 (CIX1200 Exp B)
(default = 0)

03 Special Number Specify the number to be sent when calling out from the source (max. seven digits).
Assignments This number is appended to Program 321 field 02
Possible values:Up to 7 digits (default = no value)
Note Destination type and destination must be entered before a DID number can
be assigned.

6-42 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 11/11

 Trunks
Trunk DID/DNIS Setup Wizard

Trunk DID/DNIS Setup Wizard

This wizard enables you to assign Direct Inward Dialing / Dialed Number Identification Service (DID/DNIS)
to ILGs quickly and easily. The wizard automatically takes you through the different programs and
parameters required.
Follow the steps below to start using the DID/DNIS Wizard.

Step 1: Select or Create DID/DNIS ILG

1. Select Trunk > DID/DNIS Setup
2. After reading the instructions on the screen, click Start. The Step 1: 304 Select or Create DID/DNIS ILG
screen displays.
3. In the 00 DID/DNIS Incoming Line Group (ILG) field, click Create or from the drop-down menu, select a
DID/DNIS ILG to edit.
Note Only DID/DNIS ILGs appear in the drop-down box. See table below for screen fields and field
descriptions.

FIELD DESCRIPTION

01 ILG Type Select analog for RDDU or RDTU interface, ISDN for RPTU interface, SIP for SIP
trunks.

11 DID/DNIS Digit Length Select the number of digits (1~7) that compose each DID number for this DID/
DNIS ILG. This is the number of DID digits sent from the CO on incoming DID/
DNIS. If ANI digits are sent with DID digits, only set this parameter for the quantity
of DID digits sent.

02 Line Type DID lines should always be set as CO type lines.

03 DID/DIT Service DID lines should always be set as DID service.

04 Std/Strata Net Service DID lines should always be set for “Standard” service.

4. If you clicked Create in Step 3, the Create New DID/DNIS ILG screen displays.
Fill in the three fields on the screen and click Create Now. The DID/DNIS Number Range Wizard
screen displays with the new information.
5. (Optional) Click DID/DNIS Table View to view existing DID/DNIS assignments. This table displays
assignments for all DID/DNIS ILGs currently programmed in the CIX. For more details, see “DID/DNIS
Table View” on page 6-25.
6. After creating or selecting a DID/DNIS ILG, click Next.
Trunks

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 11/11 6-43

 Trunks
Trunk DID/DNIS Setup Wizard

Step 2: Create or Delete DID/DNIS Numbers for ILG 2

1. From Step 2: 309 Create or Delete DID/DNIS Numbers for ILG 2 screen click Create to create a block
of DID/DNIS numbers. The numbers are created in consecutive order.
Create DID/DNIS Numbers screen displays.
• Specify the first number in the DID/DNIS block.
Note The quantity of digits must match the quantity of digits assigned to the selected ILG (refer back to
DID/DNIS Digit Length on the previous screen).
• Specify the DID/DNIS Number block size that should be created. This is the quantity of DID/DNIS
numbers ordered from the DID/DNIS provider.
• Specify “overwrite existing” or “add to existing” DID/DNIS numbers. If no DID/DNIS numbers exist,
add or overwrite is OK or click Delete and the delete DID/DNIS number dialog box displays. Specify
the first and last DID/DNIS number to delete using the drop-down boxes or check mark Delete all
DID/DNIS numbers. Click Delete Now. The numbers are deleted.

CAUTION! Overwrite erases all existing DID/DNIS numbers currently programmed for the
selected ILG.

2. (Optional) Click DID/DNIS Table View to view existing DID/DNIS assignments. For more details see
“DID/DNIS Table View” on page 6-25.
3. When finished click Next.

Step 3: Assign DID/DNIS Number Audio Destinations for ILG 2

1. From Step 3: 309 Assign DID/DNIS Number Audio Destinations for ILG 2 screen set the DID/DNIS
Number range.
Note This step enables you to assign the ringing destinations for all DID/DNIS numbers in the selected
ILG. This assignment applies only to voice (audio) calls—not to data calls.
2. Specify the range of DID/DNIS numbers for which ringing assignments should be made. Use the First
Number/Last Number drop-down arrows.
3. Fill in the appropriate fields on this screen (see field descriptions below).
4. (Optional) Click DID/DNIS Table View to view existing DID/DNIS assignments. For more details, see
“DID/DNIS Table View” on page 6-25.
5. After selecting DID/DNIS ringing destination assignments click Submit to register them in the CIX
database.
6. After creating DID/DNIS ringing destinations click Next to assign DID/DNIS Voice Mail ID codes. These
VM codes are optional and are only used if DID/DNIS numbers have unique VM boxes to “call forward
to” or “ring directly to.”

6-44 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 11/11

 Trunks
Trunk DID/DNIS Setup Wizard

FIELD DESCRIPTION

GCO Key Group If a Group CO Key is selected, all selected DID/DNIS numbers will ring on
telephones that have this key.
Note This selection will override any GCO or Pool Key Group assignment
made in the Program 304, ILG assignments. Day/Day2/Night period
assignments do not apply; GCO or Pool Keys will ring in all periods.

Pool Key Group If a Pool Key Group is selected, all selected DID/DNIS numbers will ring on
telephones that have this key.
Note This selection will override any GCO or Pool Key Group assignment
made in the Program 304, ILG assignments. Day/Day2/Night period
assignments do not apply; GCO or Pool Keys will ring in all periods.

Set for Period DID/DNIS ringing assignments can be unique for each CIX time period: Day,
Day2 and Night. Select the period(s) in which the destinations should ring. Then
select the destination type.

Destination Type Select the type of destination:

DISA - to call in and receive DISA dial tone.
Built-in modem - to call in directly to the CIX modem with eManager.
Night Bell - to call in and close the BIOU or ACTU night bell control relay.
Dialing Digits - to call in and:
• Ring PDNs, PhDNs, and/or Pilot Numbers.
• Night Ring over External Page - feature access code must be included in the
dialing digits.
• Access outgoing CO lines, Network Nodes and/or LCR to set up tandem calls
- line access codes must be included in the dialing digits.
Note When Dialing Digits is the selected Destination Type you must set the
Dialing Digit Range below.

This selection will override any GCO or Pool Key Group assignment
made in this Program or Program 304, ILG assignments.

Set the Dialing Digits Select the method in which dialing digit ringing destinations should be created:
Range
Use DNIS as Destination - the destination digits for each DID/DNIS number will
be the same as the DID/DNIS number. This option is normally used when the
DID/DNIS numbers match the telephone PDNs, PhDNs etc.
Start with - enter the number to which the first selected DID/DNIS number should
ring. Ringing destinations will be assigned consecutively, starting with this
number, to each consecutive DID/DNIS number.
Only Use - all selected DID/DNIS numbers will be assigned to the dialing digits
entered here.
Trunks

Add to front - these digits will be added in front of each dialing digit number.
Add to end - these digits will be added to the end of each dialing digit number.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 11/11 6-45

 Trunks
Trunk DID/DNIS Setup Wizard

Step 4: Assign DID/DNIS VMID Codes for ILG

1. From Step 4: Assign DID/DNIS Number VMID Codes for ILG 2 screen, assign VMID codes for all DID/
DNIS numbers in the selected ILG. See field descriptions below.
2. (Optional) Click DID/DNIS Table View to view existing DID/DNIS assignments. For more details
see “DID/DNIS Table View” on page 6-25.
3. After selecting VMID code assignments click Submit to register them in the CIX database.

FIELD DESCRIPTION

Set for DID/DNIS Number Specify the range of DID/DNIS numbers for which VMID code assignments should
Range: be made. Use the First Number/Last Number drop down arrows.

Set for: The codes can be set independently for DTMF in band or SMDI Voice Mail
integration.

DTMF VMID Select to set VMID code assignments for DTMF voice mail integration.

SMDI VMID Select to set VMID code assignments for SMDI voice mail integration.

All Select to set VMID code assignments for DTMF and SMDI voice mail integration.
Note DTMF and SMDI Voice Mail integration will not function simultaneously on the
CIX.

Set the VMID Range Select the method in which VMID codes should be created:
Use DNIS as VMID - the VMID code for each DID/DNIS number will be the same
as the DID/DNIS number.
Start with - enter the VMID that should be assigned to the first selected DID/DNIS
number. VMID codes will be assigned consecutively, starting with this code, to
each consecutive DID/DNIS number.
Only Use - all selected DID/DNIS numbers will be assigned to the VMID code
entered here.
Add to front - these digits will be added in front of each VMID code.
Add to end - these digits will be added to the end of each VMID code.

6-46 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 11/11

 Trunks
Trunk DID/DNIS Setup Wizard

325 Strata Net Full IP Trunk Assignment

Prerequisite Program: 100 page 4-1; 304 on page 6-1; 306 on page 6-5
This command assigns Strata Net IP trunks.

1. Select Trunk> Full IP Strata Net.

2. Setup the Channel Group by adding values to the remaining fields.
3. Click Submit.

FIELD DESCRIPTION

Channel Group Enter a channel group number.

Possible values:1~32 (CIX40), 1~32 (CTX100), 1~48 (CTX670 Basic &
CIX200), 1~128 (CTX670 Exp), 1~ 48 (CIX1200 HCTU only),
1~128 (CIX1200 HCTU+HEXAU), 1~220 (CIX1200 HCTU
+HEXBU)

01 Equipment Assign the Equipment Number of the LIPU/LIPS MIPU and/or GIPx card.

CIX40 GIPx/MIPU card in R1 CHSU40A Cabinet is 01/Slot 06 (0106).

CIX40 GIPx/MIPU card in R2 CHSU40A2 Cabinet is 01/Slot 05 (0105).
Cabinet numbers:
• CIX100: Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
• CIX670: Select 01 for Base and 02 ~ 07 respectively for each
Expansion cabinet.
• CIX200: Select 01 for Base and 02 for Expansion cabinet.
• CIX1200: Select 01 for Base and 02 ~ 12 respectively for each
Expansion cabinet.
Slot numbers:
• CIX100: Select 01 or 03 for Base slots and 05 or 07 for Expansion
slots
• CIX200: Select 01 ~ 04 for either cabinet.
• CIX670: Select 01, 03, 05 and 07 for Base slots and 01, 03 and 05
for Expansion slots.
• CIX1200: Select 01, 03, 05 and 07 for Base slots and 01, 03 and
05 for Expansion slots.

02 LAN Interface Number Select “1” for an LIPU or “2” for an LIPS. Not used for MIPU/GIPU.
Possible values:1 or 2

03 SIP IP Channels Enter the number of GIPU, MIPU, LIPU or LIPS channels to be assigned as
Strata Net IP resources
Possible values:(GIPU) 1 ~ 8, (MIPU16, LIPU, LIPS) 1 ~ 16, (MIPU24) 1 ~ 32
Trunks

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 11/11 6-47

 Trunks
Trunk DID/DNIS Setup Wizard

FIELD DESCRIPTION

04 ILG ISDN and Strata Net IP need to have trunk group assignments to process the
calls being received.
If multiple trunk groups are used within the channel group, then Call-by-Call
Services must be used.
Possible values:1~32 CTX/CIX/100, 1~50 CIX200, 1~50 CTX/CIX 670 BCTU
only or BBCU only, 1~128 CTX/CIX670 BCTU + BEXU or
BBCU + BECU, 1~50 CIX1200 HCTU only, 1~128 CIX1200
HCTU + HEXAU, 1~220 CIX1200 HCTU + HEXBU

05 OLG ISDN and Strata Net IP needs to have trunk group assignments to process the
calls being originated.
If multiple trunk groups are used within the channel group, then Call-by-Call
Services must be used.
Possible values:1~32 CTX/CIX/100, 1~50 CIX200, 1~50 CTX/CIX 670 BCTU
only or BBCU only, 1~128 CTX/CIX670 BCTU + BEXU or
BBCU + BECU, 1~50 CIX1200 HCTU only, 1~128 CIX1200
HCTU + HEXAU, 1~220 CIX1200 HCTU + HEXBU

06 Bearer Svc - Speech The Bearer Capabilities (Speech, 3.1k Audio, 7k Audio, Unrestricted 64k,
Unrestricted 56k, and 2x64k Unrestricted) allowed need to be enabled/
disabled for the channel group. Also the type of map to be used to identify the
channels. Note: In North America, only Channel Number B map is used (1-
Channel Number B).
Possible values:Enable (Default) or Disable

07 Bearer Svc - 3.1KHz The Bearer Capabilities (Speech, 3.1k Audio, 7k Audio, Unrestricted 64k,
Audio Unrestricted 56k, and 2x64k Unrestricted) allowed need to be enabled/
disabled for the channel group. Also the type of map to be used to identify the
channels. Note: In North America, only Channel Number B map is used (1-
Channel Number B).
Possible values:Enable (Default) or Disable

08 RBT on Incoming Call Enable Ringback Tone to be returned on terminating the call.
Possible values:Enable (Default) or Disable

09 Q931 Protocol Timer Set Q931 Protocol Timer. If Long is set, T303 is 8s and T301 is 300s.
Possible values:Normal (Default) or Long

6-48 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 11/11

 Trunks
Trunk DID/DNIS Setup Wizard

326 SIP Trunk Assignment

Prerequisite Program: 100; 304; 309; 306
This command assigns SIP trunks.

1. Select IP-Telephony > SIP Trunking - Channel Group Setting tab.

2. Setup the SIP Channel Group by adding values to the remaining fields.
3. List - View a list of the programmed SIP Trunk Channel Groups.
4. Get Default - restores data to factory defaults.
5. Click Submit.
FIELD DESCRIPTION

00 SIP Trunk Channel Enter a channel group number.

Group
Possible values:1~32 (CIX40), 1~32 (CTX100), 1~48 (CTX670 Basic &
CIX200), 1~128 (CTX670 Exp), 1~ 48 (CIX1200 HCTU only),
1~128 (CIX1200 HCTU+HEXAU), 1~220 (CIX1200 HCTU
+HEXBU)

01 Equipment Assign the Equipment Number of the LIPU/LIPS MIPU and/or GIPx card.

CIX40 GIPx/MIPU card in R1 CHSU40A Cabinet is 01/Slot 06 (0106).

CIX40 GIPx/MIPU card in R2 CHSU40A2 Cabinet is 01/Slot 05 (0105).
Cabinet numbers:
• CTX100: Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
• CTX670: Select 01 for Base and 02 ~ 07 respectively for each
Expansion cabinet.
• CIX200: Select 01 for Base and 02 for Expansion cabinet.
• CIX1200: Select 01 for Base and 02 ~ 12 respectively for each
Expansion cabinet.
Slot numbers:
• CIX100: Select 01 or 03 for Base slots and 05 or 07 for Expansion
slots
• CIX200: Select 01 ~ 04 for either cabinet.
• CIX670: Select 01, 03, 05 and 07 for Base slots and 01, 03 and 05
for Expansion slots.
• CIX1200: Select 01, 03, 05 and 07 for Base slots and 01, 03 and
05 for Expansion slots.

02 LAN Interface Number There is only one LAN interface on an MIPU/GIPU.

Possible values:1

03SIP Trunk Channels Enter the number of GIPU, MIPU, LIPU or LIPS channels to be assigned as
SIP trunk resources
Trunks

Possible values:(GIPU) 1 ~ 8, (MIPU16, LIPU, LIPS) 1 ~ 16, (MIPU24) 1 ~ 32

04 RBT on Incoming Call Enable ringback tone to be returned to the caller.

Possible values:Enable (Default) or Disable

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 11/11 6-49

 Trunks
Trunk DID/DNIS Setup Wizard

327 SIP Trunk Service Kind Assignment

Prerequisite Program: 100; 304; 309; 306; 326
This tab is where the SIP trunk provider is defined. There may be several SIP trunk providers per channel
Group.

1. Select IP-Telephony > SIP Trunking - Service Definition tab.

2. Setup the SIP trunk service kind table index by adding values to the remaining fields.
3. Click Submit.

FIELD DESCRIPTION

00 SIP Trunk Service Kind Create a SIP Trunk Service Kind Table Index by selecting.
Table Index
Possible values:1~32 (CIX40), 1~32 (CIX100), 1~48 (CIX200, CIX670 Basic &
CIX1200 Basic), 1~128 (CIX200, CIX670 Exp, CIX1200 Exp)

01 Registration Mode Only Client or None can be assigned.

02 ILG The incoming line group number for this service. Note that the ILG number can
only be assigned to one service.
Possible values:1~32 (CIX40), 1~32 (CTX/CIX/100) 1~50 (CIX200) 1~50 (CTX/
CIX 670 BCTU only or BBCU only) 1~128 (CTX/CIX670 BCTU
+ BEXU or BBCU + BECU) 1~50 (CIX1200 HCTU only) 1~128
(CIX1200 HCTU + HEXAU) 1~220 (CIX1200 HCTU + HEXBU)

03 OLG The outgoing line group number for this service. Note that the OLG number can
only be assigned to one service.
Possible values:1~32 (CIX40) 1~32 (CTX/CIX/100) 1~50 (CIX200) 1~50 (CTX/
CIX 670 BCTU only or BBCU only) 1~128 (CTX/CIX670 BCTU
+ BEXU or BBCU + BECU) 1~50 (CIX1200 HCTU only) 1~128
(CIX1200 HCTU + HEXAU) 1~220 (CIX1200 HCTU + HEXBU)

04 Effective Channel Sets the number of channels that will be used with this service. Setting this value
Number to 0 will delete the SIP Trunk service index.
Possible values:0~96 (CIX40) 0~96 (CTX/CIX/100) 0~176 (CIX200) 0~176
(CTX/CIX 670 BCTU only or BBCU only) 0~264 (CTX/CIX670
BCTU + BEXU or BBCU + BECU) 1~176 (CIX1200 HCTU only)
1~264 (CIX1200 HCTU + HEXAU) 1~440 (CIX1200 HCTU +
HEXBU)

05 Domain Name Domain name for the service provider. Maximum of 64 characters.

06 SIP Server SIP Server Domain Name or IP address. (Used for registration and outbound
proxy).

07 Primary Voice Packet Primary Voice packet configuration table (Prog 152) index.
Configuration

08 Secondary Voice Packet Secondary Voice packet configuration table (Prog 152) index.
Configuration

09 Registration Period After successful registration, re-registration will occur after this many seconds.
Possible values:700~99999

6-50 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 11/11

 Trunks
Trunk DID/DNIS Setup Wizard

FIELD DESCRIPTION

10 TimerB SIP Timer B value.

11 Recovery Timer This is how many seconds to wait after an invite registration failure before
retrying.
Possible values:0~1440

12 Network Transfer Enable to use REFER to transfer calls on the SIP trunk, if supported. Otherwise,
transfer loops through the CIX

13 User Agent Header Enable to send software version in User Agent Header.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (Default)

14 Server Header Enable to send software version in Server Header

Possible values:Enable or Disable (Default)

15 Protocol Option SIP Refer, Notify, and Replaces headers cannot be accepted. (In the future this
can be enabled to allow those messages to be accepted).

16 Session Timer Not used. Range is 90~99999

17 Primary Audio Codec First choice for Audio Codec.

Possible values:G.711u (Default), G711a, G729a

18 Secondary Audio Codec Second choice for Audio Codec.

Possible values:G.711u (Default), G711a, G729a

19 DTMF Transmission For DTMF digits, you can choose to use INBAND or RFC2833 (Default).
Method

20 RTCP Support Enable to allow RTCP packets to be sent (this helps to detect QoS errors during
calls).
Possible values:Enable (Default) or Disable

21 T.38 Support In the future, this can be enabled to allow FAX by T.38.

22 SIP Server Caches The maximum number of DNS entries that will be cached.

23 Diffserv for Media Not supported in this release-see Prog 150. Enable Diffserv (Differentiated
Services) priority control if voice packets on an IP (internal) Network should be
prioritized with priority tagging. Higher priority, time-critical BIPU/IPT voice traffic
can have preferential treatment when other traffic is running at best effort. If
Diffserv is enabled you must set field 24 TOS Field Type for Media as DSCP or
TOS.
Note Diffserv is usually not a standard feature with most ISPs. Contact your
ISP to make arrangements to provide Diffserv or this feature will not
work correctly.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (Default)
Trunks

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 11/11 6-51

 Trunks
Trunk DID/DNIS Setup Wizard

FIELD DESCRIPTION

24 TOS Field Type for Not supported in this release - see Prog 150. MIPU global settings are used. If
Media field 23 Diffserv is enabled, select DSCP (Differentiated Services Code Point
format) or TOS (Type Of Service format). If TOS is selected, set the packet
priority level in field 25 TOS Precedence Type for Media; if DSCP is selected,
set the packet priority level in field 26 DSCP for Media.
Possible values:TOS or DSCP (Default)

25 TOS Precedence Type Not supported in this release - see Prog 150. If TOS is selected in TB24 TOS
for Media Field Type for Media, select a packet priority level - where Critical/ESP provides
the highest and Routine provides the lowest priority. If TOS is selected in field
24, make selections in TOS Delay, TOS Throughput Delay, and TOS Reliability
Type.
Possible values:Routine, Priority, Immediate, Flash, Flash Overd, or Critical/
ESP (Default)

TOS Delay Type for Media Not supported in this release - see Prog 150. If TOS is selected in field 24 TOS
Field Type for Media, select 'Normal' for most cases
Possible values:Normal (Default) or Low

TOS Throughput Type for Not supported in this release - see Prog 150. If TOS is selected in field 24 TOS
Media Field Type for Media, select 'Normal' for most cases
Possible values:Normal (Default) or High

TOS Reliability Type for Not supported in this release - see Prog 150. If TOS is selected in field 24 TOS
Media Field Type for Media, select 'Normal' for most cases
Possible values:Normal (Default) or High

26 DSCP for Media Not supported in this release - see Prog 150. If DSCP is selected in field 24 TOS
Field Type for Media, select a priority level
Possible values:0 ~ 63 (Default = 0)

27 Diffserv for Signaling Not supported in this release - see Prog 150. Enable Diffserv (Differentiated
Services) priority control if voice packets on an IP (internal) Network should be
prioritized with priority tagging. Higher priority, time-critical BIPU/IPT voice traffic
can have preferential treatment when other traffic is running at best effort. If
Diffserv is enabled you must set field 28 TOS Field Type for Signaling as DSCP
or TOS.
Note Diffserv is usually not a standard feature with most ISPs; contact your
ISP to make arrangements to provide Diffserv or this feature will not
work correctly.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (Default)

28 TOS Field Type for Not supported in this release - see Prog 150. If field 27 Diffserv for Signaling is
Signaling enabled, select DSCP (Differentiated Services Code Point Format) or TOS
(Type Of Service format). If TOS is selected, set the packet priority level in field
25 TOS Precedence Type for Media. If DSCP is selected, set the packet priority
level in field 26 DSCP for Media.
Possible values:TOS or DSCP (Default)

6-52 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 11/11

 Trunks
Trunk DID/DNIS Setup Wizard

FIELD DESCRIPTION

29 TOS Precedence for Not supported in this release - see Prog 150. If TOS is selected in field 28 TOS
Signaling Field Type for Signaling select a packet priority level - where Critical/ESP
provides the highest and Routine provides the lowest priority. If TOS is selected
in field 28, make selections in TOS Delay, TOS Throughput Delay, and TOS
Reliability Type.
Possible values:Routine, Priority, Immediate, Flash, Flash Overd, or Critical/
ESP (Default)

TOS Delay Type for Not supported in this release - see Prog 150. If TOS is selected in field 28 TOS
Signaling Field Type for Signaling, select Normal for most cases
Possible values:Normal (Default) or Low

TOS Throughput Type for Not supported in this release - see Prog 150. If TOS is selected in field 28 TOS
Signaling Field Type for Signaling, select Normal for most cases
Possible values:Normal (Default) or High

TOS Reliability Type for Not supported in this release - see Prog 150. If TOS is selected in field 28 TOS
Signaling Field Type for Signaling, select Normal for most cases
Possible values:Normal (Default) or High

30 DSCP for Signaling Not supported in this release - see Prog 150. If DSCP is selected in field 28 TOS
Field Type for Signaling, select a priority level
Possible values:0 ~ 63 (Default = 0)

31 Call Release On QoS Enable to have calls disconnected when poor QoS is detected.
Failure
Possible values:Enable or Disable (Default)

32 QoS Failure Notification Interval to log QoS errors

Timer

33 SIP Trunk Service After registration of a SIP trunk fails (e.g., internet connection is down),
Recovery Time registration will be attempted again after this many seconds
Possible values:2~3600 (Default = 60)

34 SIP Trunk Options This field defines the interval by which option messages are sent for the purpose
Interval of verifying that the SIP trunk is still active and available.
Possible values:0~3600

35 SIP Trunk Message This field determines whether the MIPU's IP address or the Domain name will be
Option set to the host portion of the To: header. Ex. (sip:[email protected]) or
(sip:[email protected]

36 SIP Trunk Message to This field determines the value after the @ symbol of the To: field of the SIP
Header Option invite message. This value can either be the fully qualified domain name or the
SIP server IP Address.

37 SIP Trunk Register This field determines the value after the @ symbol of the From: field of the SIP
Trunks

Message From Header register message. This value can either be the fully qualified domain name or
Option the SIP server IP Address or the MIPU IP address.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 11/11 6-53

 Trunks
Trunk DID/DNIS Setup Wizard

FIELD DESCRIPTION

38 SIP Trunk Register This field determines the value after the @ symbol of the To: field of the SIP
Message to Header register message. This value can either be the fully qualified domain name or
Option the SIP server IP Address.

39 Assert Identity This field determines whether Assert Identity is used or not. This field is used
by the service provider for anonymous caller ID.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (Default)

6-54 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 11/11

 Trunks
Trunk DID/DNIS Setup Wizard

328 SIP Trunk Service Assignment

Prerequisite Program: 100; 304; 309; 306; 326, 327
This tab must be completed before entries can be made for the URI tab. If this tab is not completed, entries
attempted in the URI tab will not be saved.

1. Select IP-Telephony > SIP Trunking, Service Assignment tab.

Important! After URI entries are made in the next tab (URI), changes to this program (Prog 328), will
DELETE all the URIs programmed. Once this is set, do not change it.
2. Make the required entries for Channel Groups.
3. Click Set.

FIELD DESCRIPTION

00 SIP Trunk Channel Select a Channel Group Number:

Group
Possible values:1~32 (CIX40), 1~32 (CTX100), 1~48 (CTX670 Basic & CIX200),
1~128 (CTX670 Exp), 1~ 48 (CIX1200 HCTU only), 1~128
(CIX1200 HCTU+HEXAU), 1~220 (CIX1200 HCTU +HEXBU),
(default = no value)

02 Service Index Assign a SIP Trunk Service by selecting its SIP Trunk Service Kind (PRG327)
Table Index.
Possible values:1~32 (CIX40), 1~32 (CIX100), 1~48 (CIX200/CIX/670 Basic/
CIX1200 Basic), 1~128 (CIX200/CIX/670 Exp/CIX1200 Exp).

Trunks

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 11/11 6-55

 Trunks
Trunk DID/DNIS Setup Wizard

329 SIP URI Assignment

Prerequisite Program: 100; 304; 309; 306; 326, 327, 328
The SIP URI is the telephone number provided by the SIP service provider. When the number is dialed
from the outside, the provider sends a SIP INVITE just as if it were a call to a SIP station.

1. Select IP-Telephony > SIP Trunking, URI tab.

2. Enter the information required as specified in the table below.
3. Click the action to perform: Add, Modify, or Remove.

FIELD DESCRIPTION

00 SIP URI Trunk Service The Prog 327 index for the service kind associated to this SIP URI.
Index
Possible values:1~32 (CIX40), 1~32 (CIX100), 1~48 (CIX200/CIX/670 Basic/
CIX1200 Basic), 1~128 (CIX/670 Exp./CIX1200 Exp)

01 URI Index The Index into the table of URIs There are a maximum of 160 per card.
Possible values:1~72 (CIX40), 1~72 (CIX100), 1~160 (CIX200/CIX/670 Basic/
CIX1200 Basic), 1~160 (CIX/670 Exp./CIX1200 Exp).

02 SIP URI The user portion of the SIP URI. The host portion is assigned by Prog 327 field 5.

03 SIP URI User Name The user name used for authentication of this URI.

04 SIP URI Password The password used for authentication of this URI

05 SIP URI Channel 0 (recommended) means the channel group is picked out from Prog 328.
Group Otherwise, this SIP URI is registered through the specifically set channel group.

06 SIP URI Attribution MAIN specifies that this URI will be registered with the service provider. SUB
indicates that this URI will not be registered.

6-56 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 11/11

Attendant 7

Attendant
This chapter provides programming information for Strata CIX Attendants.

404 Attendant Group Assignment

Prerequisite Program: None
This program establishes Attendant Groups, distribution methods and alternate destinations.

1. Select Station > Attendant Group. The Attendant Group Assignment screen displays.
2. Select the Attendant Group Member or click one of the following buttons:
• List – to view data list window.
• Copy – to Attendant group numbers.
3. Enter Program 404 data.
4. Get Default - sets all data to factory defaults.
5. Click Submit.

FIELD DESCRIPTION

00 Attendant Group Select the Attendant Group Member Number.

Member
Possible values:1 (CIX100, CIX200, CIX670, CIX1200)
(default = no value)

01 Call Distribution Select the Call Distribution Method for attendant console.
Method
Possible values:Most Idle First (default), or Broadcast

02 Alternate Destination Enter the Alternate Attendant Destination (DN, Network DN or Group Pilot
Number). If no data is entered in this field, any previous entries are
overwritten.
Possible values:Up to 32 digits (default = no value)

03 Overflow Time Select the Attendant Overflow Time in minutes.

Possible values:0~180 (default = 30)

04 Group Overflow Enter the overflow destination for this attendant group. If no data is entered
Destination in this field any previous entries are overwritten.
Possible values:Up to 32 digits (default = no value)

05 VMID Code SMDI Enter the Attendant’s Voice Mail ID code. If no data is entered in this field
any previous entries are overwritten.
Possible values:Up to 10 digits (default = no value)

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 7-1

 Attendant

FIELD DESCRIPTION

07 ICI1~16 ICI10 For 07 ICI1~16 ICI10, select ILG Assignments for ICI Groups.
• ILG1 • Assign the 1st ILG to ICI Groups 1~10.
• ILG2 • Assign the 2nd ILG to ICI Groups 1~10.
• ILG3 • Assign the 3rd ILG to ICI Groups 1~10.
• ILG4 • Assign the 4th ILG to ICI Groups 1~10.
Note Each ILG can only be assigned once in any of the ICI Groups.
Possible values:1~6 CTX28, 1~32 CIX40, 1~32 CTX/CIX/100, 1~50
CIX200, 1~50 CTX/CIX 670 BCTU only or BBCU only,
1~128 CTX/CIX670 BCTU + BEXU or BBCU + BECU,
1~50 CIX1200 HCTU only, 1~128 CIX1200 HCTU +
HEXAU, 1~220 CIX1200 HCTU + HEXBU
(default = 0)

7-2 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Attendant

400 Emergency Call Destination Assignment

Prerequisite Program: None

Attendant
This command assigns Emergency Call destinations to Emergency Call groups. There is one group for
each Day mode (Day1, Day2 and Night).

1. Select Station > Emergency Call.

2. Enter Program 400 data or click one of the following buttons:
• Insert – assigns the destination for the selected index.
• Modify – assigns a new destination to the selected index.
• Remove – removes the assigned destination from the table.
• Get Default - sets all data to factory defaults.
3. Click Submit.

FIELD DESCRIPTION

01 Day/Night Mode Select the time of day mode (Day1,Day2,Night) from the table below.
Possible values:Day1, Day2, Night (default = no value)

02 Called Number Index Emergency call group number (1~4). The system will hunt through
these in numerical order to find an available emergency destination.
Possible values:1~4 (default = no value)

03 Emergency Call Enter the DN, pilot number or private number to be associated with the
Destination called number index.
Possible values:Up to 32 ASCII characters (default = no value)

04 Action Choose whether you are replacing an existing emergency number

index or inserting one in the list. if inserting, the new entry will assume
the specified index. The remaining indexes will be increased by one
and the last one, 4, will be deleted.
Possible values: Modify or Insert (default = Modify)

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 7-3

This page is intentionally left blank.
IP Telephone Programming 8

IP Telephone Setup

Programming
IP Telephone
This chapter contains information on system setup for IP telephones, IP telephone programming, IP
interface card and IP software updates.

CIX IP Telephone Programming

The following is an outline of the Basic CIX system IP setup. This process covers the basic IP telephone
programming. Each network is unique and may require additional special assignments.

Card Assignments
System > Card Assignment— Assign the xIPU IP card; refer to the program guidelines for appropriate
slot assignments.

MIPU, GIPU, and LIPU Configuration

IP-Telephony > L/M/G IPU Configuration — Assign the xIPU IP Address, subnet mask and gateway.

Cabinet/Slot Select the GIPU/MIPU/LIPU card from the list

field 01 Enter the GIPU/MIPU/LIPU IP Address (default = 192.168.254.200)
field 02 Enter the GIPU/MIPU/LIPU Subnet Address
field 03 Enter the GIPU/MIPU/LIPU Default Gateway Address

BIPU Configuration
IP-Telephony > BIPU Configuration — Assign the BIPU-M IP Address, subnet mask and gateway.

Station Programming
Assigning PDNs to IP telephones using IP resources — This can be completed by using the Network
eManager PDN Range wizard or manually created, IP-Telephony > IPT Data — Program 200 (station
basic).
• IP telephones assigned to xIPU-M cards are programmed in the same manner as DKTs. Any
programmed (FB) used to program a DKT can be used to program an IP.
• Continue station programming in the same manner as a DKT set, including:
- DKT Parameters
- Key Strips

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 8-1

 IP Telephone Programming
IP Telephone Setup

IP Telephone Data
IP-Telephony > IPT Data (250 IPT Data Assignment)

field 00 Prime DN - Select the station from the list on the right
Station ID (will display automatically) - This will be the same as the PDN assigned in the Station
field 01
Data program.
field 02 Station IP Address type. Contact the network administrator for the type. ANY = DCHP, FIX = Static
Station IP Address
field 03 If FIXED enter the IP address
If ANY make no entry. (After the IP telephone is configured this will populate.)
field 04 Auto Assign Station ID - Set preference
Set Station Termination Authentication Mode
field 05
See note below
Station MAC Address
field 06
See note below
field 07 Voice Packet Table - default = 1
Audio Codec - Set to: G.711 or G.729
field 08
Note: SoftIPT 2.2 can only support G.711. SoftIPT 3.x supports both G.711 and G.729
Display Software Version Number of the IP telephone - This will display automatically if the IP
field 09
telephone is connected.

Note When using Station Terminal Authentication Mode it is recommended that the IP telephone be
plugged in and configured prior to executing this program. If the IP telephone is not configured and
present on the network the MAC Address must be entered manually. If the IP telephone is
configured and present on the network the MAC Address will be entered automatically.

8-2 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 IP Telephone Programming
VLAN Setup

VLAN Setup
The following steps setup the VLAN tagging options and parameters.

Using the VLAN Wizard

The wizard sets the VLAN parameters on the selected IP telephones. When complete, the MIPU, GIPU, or
LIPU/LIPS must be configured for VLAN.
In Network eManager select IP-Telephony > IPT VLAN Setup.

VLAN Range Options

Programming
IP Telephone
The IP telephones to be setup can be selected by Primary Directory Number (PDN) or by the VLAN
Identification (VID) of either the PC Port or Phone Port.
• Enter PDN Range - Click on the Select button. This shows the list of IP PDNs - select one or more IP
telephones from the list.
• Enter VID of target IP telephones - enter either the IP telephone PC Port VID or Phone VID. This will
select every IP telephone with the specified port VID. If both PC Port and Phone Port VID is set to Any,
all IP telephones will be selected.

VLAN Setting Options

These options will set the selected IP telephones the parameters specified below or Resets the IP
telephones selected above to the default values.
• Set VLAN settings of IP telephones - Set the IP telephones selected above to the parameters
specified below.
• Reset VLAN setting of IP telephones - Reset the IP telephones selected above to the default value
(VLAN tagging disabled, VID = 1 for the phone port and the PC port).

VLAN Parameters
These options will set the selected IP telephones the parameters specified below or Resets the IP
telephones selected above to the default values.
• VLAN Feature - Enable or disable VLAN tagging for the selected IP telephones.
• PC port type - Set the PC port on the selected IP telephones to:
- Trunk - the port is connected to a VLAN enabled device or
- Access - the port is connected to a non-compliant device, a device that does not support VLAN
tagging.

Enable VLAN on the xIPU

This program sets the VLAN parameters on the GIPU/MIPU/LIPU cards. VLAN is enabled or disabled on a
per card basis. Refer to “161 LIPU/MIPU/GIPU Configuration” on Page 8-13.
Setup the Packet Prioritization (IEEE802.1P) and VLAN ID (IEEE802.1Q).

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 8-3

 IP Telephone Programming
CIX IP Telephone Programming Guidelines

CIX IP Telephone Programming Guidelines

Use the following guidelines to program your CIX IP Telephone.

Basic CIX IP Setup

1. Select System > Card Assignment (Program 100) to set the xIPU cards in the appropriate slots.
CIX100 slots 1~8; CIX670/CIX1200 Base slots 1~8; and CIX670/CIX1200 Expansion slots 1~6
Note If the CIX is initialized (Program 900-01) after the BIPU-M is installed, the CIX assigns the BIPU-M
to the appropriate card slots automatically.
2. Select IP Telephony > BIPU Configuration (Program 151) to set BIPU-M IP address (check with the
network administrator for IP address, subnet mask, etc.). The BIPU version number will be displayed
when the BIPU is operating and is connected on the same network as the Network eManager PC.
Note If the CIX is initialized (Program 900-01) after the BIPU-M is installed, the CIX assigns the BIPU-M
default parameters as shown in Table 1-6 on page 1-6.
3. Select Station > Station Assignments, Basic tab, to assign PDNs to IP telephones (BIPU equipment
numbers) if this was not done during CIX system initialization. The PDN Range wizard can also be used
to assign PDNs to the BIPU channels.
4. Select IP-Telephony > IPT Data (Program 250). Set field 05 Station Terminal Authentication Mode to
apply if the PDN assigned to a particular IP Telephone should be linked (reserved for) to that
telephone’s MAC address. Each telephone has a unique hard-coded MAC address. This prevents other
IP telephones from using the reserved PDN when an IP telephone is moved.
Note If IP telephone Authentication is applied/not applied in Program 250-05 it will override the IP
telephone Authentication setting in Program 150-02.
5. If multiple CIX systems with BIPU-Ms are connected to the IP network Select IP-Telephony > System IP
Data (Program 150), and set 09 IP CTX Identifier.

Enter a CIX Node identifier if more than one CIX Node is on the IP Network. This can be the same as
the Strata Net Network Node ID used for this system if it is in a CIX Strata Net Network - but the two IDs
are not related in software logic.
This ID must match the node number programmed in the IP telephone using 369Hold-2, FB06.
6. Run all other CIX programs necessary to customize the features required for each IP telephone. All
programs used to program digital telephones also apply to IP telephones (Program 205 keystrips, 213
Add-on-Modules, Program 204 DKT Parameters, etc.).

8-4 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 IP Telephone Programming
IP Telephone Installation and Network Connection Setup

IP Telephone Installation and Network Connection

Setup
1. Install the IP telephones using instructions in the IP telephone chapter of the CIX and MAS Installation
and Maintenance Manual.
2. From each IP Telephone, set its network connection parameters using the 369Hold program mode
(refer to the instructions that follow).
Notes
• Some IP telephones parameters must be set from each individual IP telephone using 369Hold

Programming
IP Telephone
programming. These parameters remain stored in the IP telephone even if the telephone is unplugged.
This allows the telephone to be moved to different locations without reprogramming.
• Other IP telephone parameters must be set in IP-Telephony > IPT Data (Program 250). Initially, the
parameters are normally kept at defaults.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 8-5

 IP Telephone Programming
IP Telephone Installation and Network Connection Setup

150 System IP Data

Prerequisite Program: Assign the MIPU, GIPU, LIPU and BIPU cards in Program 100. Create Stations
using Programs 200 and 260. Set IP telephone data assignments with Program
250.
This command assigns system-wide IP parameters.

1. Select IP-Telephony > System IP Data.

2. Enter values in the appropriate fields.
3. Get Default sets all values to factory defaults.
4. Click Submit.

FIELD DESCRIPTION

01 Automatic Enable Automatic Assignment of Station ID when the IP telephone has no station
Assignment of Station ID. In program 250, field 04 is the same parameter and is per terminal.
ID
When IP telephone searches to connect a CIX with no station ID, the CIX looks for
a PDN which is set with this parameter as “automatic,” and sends the PDN to the
IP telephone and sets it in the setting of IP telephone.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Disable)

02 Terminal Enable this parameter if you want to set the PDN of an IP telephone.
Authentication
When enable is set, terminal authentication by MAC address of IP telephone is
valid. If another IP telephone which has the same PDN is connected to the
network, the CIX rejects the registration of this IP telephone because the MAC
address of IP telephone is different.
When disable is set, you can move the PDN from an IP telephone to another IP
telephone and another IP telephone can be connected to the CIX.
In program 250, field 05 is the same parameter for the terminal.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = Disable)

03 Diffserv Enable Diffserv (Differentiated Services) priority control if voice packets on an IP

(internal) network should be prioritized with priority tagging. Higher priority, time-
critical BIPU/IPT voice traffic can have preferential treatment when other traffic is
running at best effort. If Diffserv is enabled you must set the 04 TOS Field Type as
DSCP or TOS. Note: Diffserv is usually not a standard feature with most ISPs.
Contact your ISP to make arrangements to provide Diffserv or this feature will not
work correctly.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (Default)

04 TOS Field Type If 03 Diffserv is enabled, select DSCP (Differentiated Services Code Point format)
or TOS (Type Of Service format).
Then, if TOS is selected, set the packet priority level in 05 TOS Precedence Type.
Then, if DSCP is selected, set the packet priority level in 06 DSCP.
Possible values:TOS or DSCP (Default)

8-6 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 IP Telephone Programming
IP Telephone Installation and Network Connection Setup

FIELD DESCRIPTION

05 TOS Precedence Type If TOS is selected in 04 TOS Field Type select a packet priority level - where
Critical/ESP provides the highest and Routine provides the lowest priority.
If TOS is selected in 04 TOS Field Type make selections in TOS Delay, TOS
Throughput Delay, and TOS Reliability Type.
Possible values:Routine, Priority, Immediate, Flash, Flash Override, or Critical/
ESP (Default)

TOS Delay Type If TOS is selected in 04 TOS Field Type select Normal for most cases
Possible values:Normal (Default) or Low

Programming
IP Telephone
TOS Throughput Type If TOS is selected in 04 TOS Field Type select Normal for most cases
Possible values:Normal (Default) or High

TOS Reliability Type If TOS is selected in 04 TOS Field Type select Normal for most cases
Possible values:Normal (Default) or High

06 DSCP If DSCP is selected in 04 TOS Field Type select a priority level from 0~63.
Possible values:0~63 (Default = 0)

07 IEEE802.1p Enable IEEE802.1p priority control if voice packets on an Ethernet LAN should be
prioritized with priority tagging. Higher priority, time-critical BIPU\IPT voice traffic
can have preferential treatment when other traffic is running at best effort. If you
enable IEEE802.1p, select which priority level to use (Voice or Best Effort) in 08
IEEE802.1p Configuration on this screen. All Ethernet devices on the LAN
(routers, switches, etc., must support IEEE802.1p for this feature to work correctly.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (Default)

08 IEEE802.1p If 07 IEEE802.1p is enabled, select Voice priority for BIUP\IPT voice packets to be
Configuration tagged with the highest priority level.
Possible values:Best Effort or Voice (Default)

09 IP-CTX Identifier Enter a CIX node ID if more than one CIX node is on the IP network. This can be
the same as the Strata Net node ID used for this system if it is in a Strata Net
network - but the two IDs are not related in software logic. This ID must match the
node 'number' programmed in the IP telephone.
Possible values:Up to 5 ASCII characters

10 Tail Length of Echo Enter 16ms if any IP telephone is set for a G729A codec (Prog 250-08) or if the
Canceller Strata Net IP network is set for G729A codecs (Prog 672-06). If all codecs are
G711, then 16ms or 32ms can be used - 32ms may reduce echo on a network that
only utilizes G711 codecs. Never set this parameter to 64ms.
Note Setting G729A codec and 32 msec will reduce the number of channels
available from 16 to 12 or 32 to 24.
Possible values:16 (Default), 32 or 64MS

11 Gain Control of IPT Set the Voice Quality Mode to control gain of IPTs and BIPUs.
and BIPU
Possible values:High (Default), Middle or Low

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 8-7

 IP Telephone Programming
IP Telephone Installation and Network Connection Setup

FIELD DESCRIPTION

12 System IP CED Whether the echo canceller is stopped by the detection of Cancel Error Detection
Control (CED) tone (2100Hz).
Possible values:Enable (Default) or Disable

13 System IP RAS Start RAS (Registration Admission Status) start port number for IP telephone.
Port
Possible values:1 ~ 65535 (Default = 1718)

14 System IP RAS RAS (Registration Admission Status) register port number for IP telephone.
Register Port
Possible values:1 ~ 65535 (Default = 1719)

15 System IP Paging Max Limit the number of simultaneous pages to IP telephones.

IP telephone
Possible values:0 ~ 160 (Default = 4)

16 System IP BGM Max Limit the number of IP phones to simultaneously receive background music.
IP telephone
Possible values:0 ~ 160 (Default = 0)

17 LIPU/GIPx BIPU-Q Sets BIPU-Q mode to allow the MIPU/GIPU/LIPU to communicate with BIPU-Q in
Mode a Strata Net IP network.
Enable - MIPU/GIPU/LIPU is in BIPU-Q mode. Strata Net IP operation in a
network with one or more BIPU-Q is allowed.
Disable - MIPU/GIPU/LIPU is in MIPU/GIPU/LIPU mode. Strata Net IP operation
in networks with LIPUs only, no BIPU-Q, is possible.
This applies only to Strata Net IP operation. This parameter has no effect on BIPU-
M cards used for IP Telephones.
Possible values:Disable (Default), Enable

19 Tail Length of Echo This applies only to the MIPU and the GIPU (BIPU, GIPH, LIPU use FK10).
Canceller for MIPU
Possible values:1 - 16 ms echo cancel
2 - 32 ms echo cancel
3 - 64 ms echo cancel

20 SIP Trunk Diffserv Enable to use Diffserv for SIP signalling on SIP trunk.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (Default)

21 SIP Trunk TOS Field If field 20 above is enabled, select DSCP (Differentiated Services Code Point)
Type format or TOS (Type Of Service) format. If TOS is selected, set the packet priority
level in 22 SIP Trunk TOS Precedence Type; if DSCP is selected, set the packet
priority level in field 23 SIP Trunk DSCP
Possible values:DSCP or TOS (Default)

22 SIP Trunk TOS If TOS is selected in field 21 above, select a packet priority level where Critical/
Precedence Type ESP provides the highest, and Routine provides the lowest, priority. If TOS is
selected in field 21, make selections in TOS Delay, TOS Throughput Delay, and
TOS Reliability Type.
Possible values:Routine, Priority, Immediate, Flash, Flash Overd, Critical/ESP
(Default)

SIP Trunk TOS Delay If TOS is selected in field 21above, select Normal for most cases
Type
Possible values:Normal (Default) or Low

8-8 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 IP Telephone Programming
IP Telephone Installation and Network Connection Setup

FIELD DESCRIPTION

SIP Trunk TOS If TOS is selected in field 21above, select Normal for most cases.
Throughput Type
Possible values:Normal (Default) or High

SIP Trunk TOS If TOS is selected in field 21above, select Normal for most cases.
Reliability Type
Possible values:Normal (Default) or High

23 SIP Trunk DSCP If DSCP is selected in field 21 above, select a priority level.
Possible values:0~63 (Default = 0)

Programming
IP Telephone

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 8-9

 IP Telephone Programming
IP Telephone Installation and Network Connection Setup

151 BIPU Configuration

This program is used to set up the IP address of the specific BIPU card to support the IP-Telephone. BIPU
card must be assigned before configuring the specific BIPU card.

1. Select IP-Telephony > BIPU Configuration.

2. Enter Program 151 data.
3. Click Submit.

Note Refer to Program 161 - IP-Telephony > L/M/G IPU Configuration.

FIELD DESCRIPTION

Cabinet & Slot Number Enter the cabinet and slot number of the BIPU to be configured.
Note: BIPU cards must first be installed using PRG100 - System\Card
Assignment.
BIPU cards can be installed in the slots listed:
Cabinet
• CIX/CTX100: Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
• CIX200: Select 01 for Base and 02 for Expansion cabinet.
• CIX/CTX670: Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each
Expansion cabinet.
CIX1200: Select 01 for Base and 02~12 respectively for each
•
Expansion cabinet.
Slot numbers:
• CIX/CTX100: Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~09 for Expansion
slots.
• CIX/CTX100: Virtual Slot for ACTU Relay = Cabinet 02, Slot 05.
• CIX200: Select 01~04 for either cabinet.
• CIX/CTX670: Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion
slots.
• CXI1200:Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.

01 IP Address Enter the BIPU IP Address.

02 Subnet Address Enter the Subnet Address of the BIPU.

03 Default Gateway Enter the Default Gateway Address of the BIPU card.
Address

04 Version Number of This is a read-only field. The version number will automatically appear when the
BIPU card is configured correctly.

05 IP Strata Net RTP Base The base of the 32-port range which can be used by BIPU card to assign port
Port (BIPU) numbers for the IP Strata Net RTP protocol.
Possible values:16384~65504 (default = 20992). Only even numbers can be
assigned.

8-10 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 IP Telephone Programming
IP Telephone Installation and Network Connection Setup

152 Voice Packet Configuration Table Assignment

This program assigns timing parameters to Prime DNs.

1. Select IP-Telephony > Voice Packet Configuration. The Voice Packet Configuration Table Assignment
screen displays.
2. Enter Program 152 data.
3. Click Submit.
Note When setting Voice Packet Configuration Tables on an Strata Net IP network, the packet table
settings for each node on an end-to-end connection must be the same.

Programming
IP Telephone
Note Whenever Voice Packet Configuration Table changes are made for IP telephones on Strata Net IP
nodes, Toshiba recommends pressing the reset button on the LIPU/BIPU to assure the changes
take effect.

FIELD DESCRIPTION

Voice Packet Table Enter the Voice Packet Configuration Table Number (1-256).
Number
Important! The default values in Voice Packet Table 1 are the recommended
values for G.711 codecs. The default values in Voice Packet Table
2 are the recommended values for G.729A codecs. If the codec
selected for an IP telephone in Program 250-08 is switched from
the default G.711 to G.729A, the table used for the IP telephone is
automatically switched from Table 1 to Table 2 in Program 250-07.
However switching back to G.711 requires that you manually switch
back to the Table 1 default parameter settings.
Possible values:1~128 (CIX100, CIX670 and CIX1200 Basic); 1~256 (CIX670
and CIX1200 Exp.)

01 Voice Packet Trans. Int. Voice Packet Transmission Interval – This depends on the encoding method
G711 or G729A. The default setting are G711: 20msec., G729A: 40msec. Note
that 10msec. is only used to test - do not use 10ms. Normally, the default settings
provide the best quality.
If LAN bandwidth is not enough for these parameters and the problem is resolved
to extend the interval according to the LAN requirement, you can change to
G711:40msec. and G729a: 80msec.
Note 30msec. need not be used.
Possible values:10 msec (available for testing only up to release 200MF008), 20
msec (default), 30 msec, 40 msec or 80 msec

02 Jitter Buffer Type The default values for the selected codec is recommended. If the voice quality is
not as expected you can change the jitter buffer type of DSP on LIPU/BIPU.
Possible values:Fixed, Sequential, or Adaptive
The default values are: G.711 = Adaptive, G.729A = Sequential (recommended).

03 Jitter Buffer Length The default values for the selected codec is recommended. If the voice quality is
not as expected you can change the jitter buffer length.
Possible values: 0~250
The default values are: G.711= 100msec., G.729A=40msec.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 8-11

 IP Telephone Programming
IP Telephone Installation and Network Connection Setup

FIELD DESCRIPTION

07 Packet Loss Threshold If packet loss is more than 10, an error is recorded in the CIX error log and you
cannot talk by IP telephone. The default value 5 is recommended.
Possible values:0, 5, 10

08 Transmission Interval 10 ms
for MIPU/GIPU 20 ms (default)
30 ms
40 ms
80 ms (only when G.729A is assigned; 40ms when G.711 assigned)

09 Jitter Buffer Type for Fixed

MIPU/GIPU Adaptive (default)
Relative to FK02.

10 Jitter Buffer Length for 0 to 200 ms (default = 100 ms)

MIPU/GIPU Corresponding to FK03

11 Maximum Acceptable 10 to 400 ms (default = 200 ms)

Jitter Buffer for MIPU/
Corresponding to FK04
GIPU

12 Packet Loss Ratio for 0 to 10% (default = 5%)

MIPU/GIPU
Corresponding to FK06

13 Packet Loss Threshold 0 to 10% (default = 1%)

for MIPU/GIPU
Corresponding to FK07

8-12 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 IP Telephone Programming
IP Telephone Installation and Network Connection Setup

161 LIPU/MIPU/GIPU Configuration

Prerequisite Program: None
This command defines the network configuration of an MIPU/LIPU/GIPU.

1. Select IP-Telephony > L/M/G IPU Configuration.

2. Select Cabinet and Card slot from list on right side, or enter a location and setup the MIPU/LIPU/GIPU
by adding values to the remaining fields.
3. Click Submit.
FIELD DESCRIPTION

Programming
IP Telephone
00 Cabinet & Slot Enter the cabinet and slot number of the MIPU/LIPU/GIPx to be configured.
Number
Cabinet numbers:
• CIX/CTX100: Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
• CIX200: Select 01 for Base and 02 for Expansion cabinet.
• CIX/CTX670: Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each
Expansion cabinet.
• CIX1200: Select 01 for Base and 02~12 respectively for each
Expansion cabinet.
Slot numbers:
• CIX/CTX100: Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~09 for Expansion
slots.
• CIX/CTX100: Virtual Slot for ACTU Relay = Cabinet 02, Slot 05.
• CIX200: Select 01~04 for either cabinet.
• CIX/CTX670: Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion
slots.
• CXI1200:Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.
• CTX28 and CIX40 assignments are hard coded and cannot be
changed.
• Virtual Slot for GCTU Relay = Cabinet 02, Slot 05.
01, 01 - 8 digital telephones on motherboard (CTX28, CIX40 R1HW and R2HW).
01, 02 - 3 CO lines on motherboard (CTX28, CIX40 R1HW), 4 CO lines (CIX40
R2HW)
01, 03 - no card (CTX28, CIX40 R1HW), GVPH (CIX40 R2HW)
01, 04 - 1 (Base) or 2 (GSTU) analog station ports (CTX28, CIX40 R1HW and
R2HW)
01, 05 - GVMU (CTX28), GVPH (CIX40 R1HW), GIPx, MIPU or GCOCIH (CIX40
R2HW)
01, 06 - GIPx, MIPU16 or GCOCIH (CIX40 R1HW), no card (CTX28, CIX40
R2HW)
01, 07 - 8 digital telephones on GCDU (CTX28, CIX40 R1HW and R2HW).
01, 08 - 3 CO lines on GCDU (CTX28, CIX40 R1HW and R2HW).

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 8-13

 IP Telephone Programming
IP Telephone Installation and Network Connection Setup

FIELD DESCRIPTION

01 IPU IP Address Enter the MIPU/LIPU/GIPx IP Address.

Possible values:XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX where XXX = 0 ~ 255

02 IPU Subnet Address Enter the Subnet Mask of the MIPU/LIPU/GIPx.

Possible values:XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX where XXX = 0 ~ 255

03 IPU Default Gateway Enter the Default Gateway Address of the MIPU/LIPU/GIPx card.
Address
Possible values:XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX where XXX = 0 ~ 255

04 LIPS IP Address Enter the second LIPU IP Address. The second LIPU IP address must be within
the subnet address. Not used for MIPU/GIPx.
Possible values:XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX where XXX = 0 ~ 255

05 LIPS Subnet Enter the Subnet Mask of the second LIPU. Not used for MIPU/GIPx.
Address Possible values:XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX where XXX = 0 ~ 255

06 LIPS Default Enter the Default Gateway Address of the second LIPU. Not used for MIPU/GIPx.
Gateway Address
Possible values:XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX where XXX = 0 ~ 255

07 Version of IPU/IPH Firmware version of MIPU/GIPx/LIPU is displayed.

Possible values:Max 16 characters
Possible values:For IPU 15 digits:
IPUXX_XXY_AZXX
IPUXX_XX: firmware version
Y: Boot loader version
AZXX: DSP Configuration File
A= Country
Z=Major version 0~ 9
XX=Minor version 00 ~ 99

08 Version of LIPS Firmware version of LIPS-X is shown.

Possible values:Max 16 characters

09 Available IPU/IPH IP Number of available IP ports in MIPU/GIPU/LIPU-X is shown. When speaker OCA
Ports is assigned to an IP telephone an additional IP port is assigned to the IP telephone.
If there is no available IP port in the LIPU-X, no more IP telephone/SIP/Strata Net
IPs can be assigned.
Possible values:0~24 (MIPU24), 0~16 (MIPU16, LIPU, LIPS), 0~8 (GIPx)

10 Available LIPS IP Number of available IP ports in LIPS is shown. When speaker OCA is assigned to
Ports an IP telephone an additional IP port is assigned to the IP telephone. If there is no
available IP port in the LIPS, no more IP telephone/SIP/Strata Net IPs can be
assigned.
Possible values:0 ~ 16

11 IPU/IPH Packet Enable or Disable Packet Prioritization

Prioritization Possible values:Enable, Disable
The default value is: Disable

8-14 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 IP Telephone Programming
IP Telephone Installation and Network Connection Setup

FIELD DESCRIPTION

12 IPU/IPH Packet When Packet Prioritization is enabled select the type of prioritization.
Prioritization Type
Possible values:Best Effort, Voice
The default value is: Voice

13 IPU/IPH VLAN Enable or Disable VLAN tagging

Possible values:Enable, Disable
The default value is: Disable

14 IPU/IPH VLAN ID Set the VLAN ID

Programming
IP Telephone
Possible values:1 ~ 4094
The default value is: 1

15 LIPS Packet Enable or Disable Packet Prioritization

Prioritization
Possible values:Enable, Disable
The default value is: Disable

16 LIPS Packet When Packet Prioritization is enabled, select the type of prioritization.
Prioritization Type
Possible values:Best Effort, Voice
The default value is: Voice

17 LIPS VLAN Enable or Disable VLAN tagging

Possible values:Enable, Disable
The default value is: Disable

18 LIPS VLAN ID Set the VLAN ID

Possible values:1 ~ 4094
The default value is: 1

19 IP Strata Net RTP The base port number of the 32 port range for IP Strata Net RTP protocol can be
Base Port (IPU/IPH) set for individual MIPU, LIPU, or GIPx cards.
Possible values:16384 ~ 16511
Note Only even port numbers can be assigned.

20 Strata Net RTP Base The base port number of the 32 port range for IP Strata Net RTP protocol can be
Port (LIPS) set for individual MIPU, LIPU, or GIPx cards.
Possible values:16384 ~ 16511
Note Only even port numbers can be assigned.

21 DHCP for MIPU/GIPU Enable: MIPU/GIPx can get an IP Address via DHCP.
Disable: IP Address must be assigned.
Note MIPU/GIPU only. LIPU, LIPS, and BIPU do not support DHCP.

22 MIPU Primary DNS Domain Name System (DNS) server that translates IP address to the
corresponding computer or domain name. The IP address consists of four octets.
Enter the first octet address from 0-255. This feature only pertains to the IP card.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 8-15

 IP Telephone Programming
IP Telephone Installation and Network Connection Setup

FIELD DESCRIPTION

23 MIPU Secondary In the event that the primary DNS is not available, the MIU will attempt to reach the
DNS Server secondary DNS server. The IP address consists of four octets. Enter the first octet
address from 0-255 for the MIPU. This feature only pertains to the MIPU card.

24 MIPU Hostname A hostname is a unique network name by which a host device on the network can
be identified. Enter a hostname for the IP card with a max. 32 characters.

25 MIPU Primary DNS A DNS suffix is a name appended after the computer name to form a fully qualified
Suffix domain name. For example, in mipu1.toshiba.com, toshiba.com would be the DNS
suffix. Enter a DNS suffix for the MIPU - 32 char. max.

8-16 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 IP Telephone Programming
IP Telephone Installation and Network Connection Setup

250 IP Telephone (Station) Data Assignment

Prerequisite Program: None
This command configures IP stations in the system.

1. Select IP-Telephony > IPT Data.

2. Enter a DN number in the Prime DN field or select a DN from the list displayed on the right.
3. Setup the DN by adding values to the remaining fields.
4. Click Submit.

Programming
FIELD DESCRIPTION

IP Telephone
00 Prime DN Enter the IP telephone Prime Directory Number (PDN)

01 Station ID Station ID is set from the IP telephone to match its PDN in station programming.
The station ID is the same as the station PDN unless there is more than one
CTX/CIX system with BIPU-M, GIPx, MIPU, LIPU/LIPS on the same network. In
this case the station ID for each IP telephone must contain the CTX/CIX Node
ID+PDN.
Possible values:Up to 5 ASCII characters

02 Station IP Address Type Select the Station IP Address to be static 'fixed' or dynamic in which case it
obtains an IP address from a DHCP server.
Possible values:Fixed or Any (Default)

03 Station IP Address Enter the Station static IP Address if a static address is needed per Station IP
Address Type set in 02 above.
Possible values:XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX where XXX = 0 ~ 255

04 Auto Assign Station ID Use Automatic when the IP telephone has no Station ID. Use Not Automatic
when IP telephone has station ID in the IP telephone setting. In Program 150,
field 01 is the same parameter for system.
When Don't Care is set, program 150-01 precedes in Program 250-04.
Enabling Program 150-01 is equal to using automatic in Program 250-04.
Disabling in Program 150-01 is equal to not automatic in Program 250-04. When
the IP telephone requests to connect to a Strata CIX with no station ID, the CIX
searches for a PDN that is set in this parameter as automatic and sends the
PDN to the IP telephone. The IP telephone records it in the IP telephone setting.
Possible values:Permitted, Not Permitted or Don’t Care (Default)

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 8-17

 IP Telephone Programming
IP Telephone Installation and Network Connection Setup

FIELD DESCRIPTION

05 Station Terminal Apply this parameter if you want to reserve a PDN for the IP telephone
Authentication Mode connected at the present time. When apply is set, terminal authentication by
MAC address of the IP telephone is valid. So if another IP telephone which has
the same PDN is connected to the network, the CIX rejects the registration of
this IP telephone because the MAC address of the IP telephone is different.
When not apply is set, you can move the PDN from an IP telephone to another
IP telephone and another IP telephone can be connected to the CIX. When don't
care is set, terminal authentication for this telephone is determined by Program
150-02.
The Terminal Authentication setting Apply or Not Apply in this program overrides
the Terminal Authentication setting in Program 150-02
Possible values:Apply, Not Apply or Don’t Care (Default)

06 Station MAC Address Station Media Access Control (MAC) Address. This address is hard coded
uniquely in each IP telephone. The MAC will only display if the IP telephone is
connected to the BIPU-M and is operating properly.
Possible values:Max 12 ASCII characters

07 Voice Packet Table Select the Voice Packet configuration table that should be assigned to this IP
telephone (voice tables are configured in Program 152). When the G711 Audio
Codec is selected in 08 codec below, the default values in Program 152-01,
Table 1 should be used. When the G.729A codec is selected in 08 Audio Codec
below, the default values in Program 152-01 Table 2 should be used.
Important: When switching the IP telephone from the G.711 to the G.729 codec
(the first time), the CIX will automatically switch the Voice Packet table from
Table 1 to Table 2.
Possible values:1 ~ 128

08 Audio Codec IP telephones have two built-in codecs. Select the audio codec that should be
used in this IP telephone.
The G.711codec - provides the highest voice quality but uses the most network
bandwidth (about 115kbps per IP telephone when in use).
The G.729A codec - provides less voice quality but uses the least amount of
network bandwidth (about 29kbps per IP telephone when in use).
High traffic or low speed networks may require the IP Telephones to use G729A.
Example:
Installing remote IP telephones connected to Cable or DSL lines, the upstream
rate is usually restricted and may not provide a consistent upstream bandwidth
(advertised as 128kbs but is normally less because of traffic) so the G729a
codec would probable be the best choice for this situation.
The Voice Packet Table 'Prog 250-07' and the VP Table's voice packet
parameters Prog 152 must be set properly for the codec assigned.
Possible values:G711 (Default) or G729A
Note IP Attendant Console supports G.711 only.

8-18 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 IP Telephone Programming
IP Telephone Installation and Network Connection Setup

FIELD DESCRIPTION

09 Display Software This is read-only. If any problem occurs it is useful to analyze the problem with
Version Number of IP this version. A sample software version is DIP11NA. DIP1 represents the IP
Telephone telephone model; 1NA represents software version of the IP telephone; 1N
represents the version of updatable software and A means the version of not-
updatable software (BootROM).
Possible values:Max. 16 ASCII characters

10 SIP Terminal URI Set the Uniform Resource Identifier of the SIP terminal. URI is to identify the IP
telephone in the system. You can use A-Z, a-z and 0-9 up to 32 characters as

Programming
IP Telephone
the URI. It has to be unique in the system.
Possible values:Max 32 ASCII characters

11 SIP Terminal Password Set password for terminal authentication of the SIP terminal. This password is
checked for terminal authentication when registration is performed from the SIP
terminal. You can use A-Z, a-z and 0-9 up to 64 characters. It doesn't have to be
unique in the system, and same password can be assigned to plural SIP
terminals.

12 IP Sta KeepAlive Timer Keep-alive timer for station for full IP station.
Possible values:0 ~ 60 seconds

13 Station IP DTMF DTMF translation mode for full IP station.

Translation Mode
Possible values:Tone (Default), Outband or Inband
Note This parameter is not supported in CIX.

14 Secondary Audio Codec IP telephones have two built-in codecs. Select the audio codec that should be
for Full IP station used in this IP telephone.
The G.711codec - provides the highest voice quality but uses the most network
bandwidth (about 115kbps per IP telephone when in use).
The G.729A codec - provides less voice quality but uses the least amount of
network bandwidth (about 29kbps per IP telephone when in use).
High traffic or low speed networks may require the IP Telephones to use G729A.
Example:
If installing remote IP telephones connected to Cable or DSL lines, the upstream
rate is usually restricted and may not provide a consistent upstream bandwidth
(advertised as 128kbs but is normally less because of traffic) so the G729a
codec would probable be the best choice for this situation.
The Voice Packet Table Prog 250-07 and the VP Table's voice packet
parameters Prog 152 must be set properly for the codec assigned.
Possible values:G711, G729A (Default), None

15 Secondary Voice Packet CIX provides peer to peer connection when an IP telephone directly
Index communicates with another IP telephone. A negotiation method is required to
resolve differing audio codec settings on the IP telephones. When a call is
established between IP telephones, the CIX will check the assignment of
secondary audio codecs. If there is matching assignment, it will be applied. If
there is not, the user will hear reorder tone.
Possible values:1 ~ 128

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 8-19

 IP Telephone Programming
IP Telephone Installation and Network Connection Setup

FIELD DESCRIPTION

16 IP NAT/No Peer to Peer Enable if the IP telephone is in a NAT (Network Address Translation)
environment.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (Default)
Refer to Figure 8-1.

17 Base UDP Port for IP The base UDP port for the IP telephone media channel can be set to
Telephone Media accommodate a particular network configuration.
Channel
Possible values:1026 ~ 65532 (Default = 49154)
Note Only even port numbers can be assigned.

Prog 250-FK16 = Enabled for IPTs on this LIPU (no peer-to-peer)

Public IP Address
NAT
LIPU (2) Gateway Global Network Router

CIX IPT (2)

Private IP
LIPU (1) NAT Address
Private Router
IPT (1)
IP Address
Private IP
Address

Prog 250-FK16 = Disabled for IPTs on this LIPU (Peer-to-peer mode)

NOTE: If the NAT router is a inconsistent/symmetric type, the IPTs

on LIPU (1) should have Prog 250-FK16 set to Enabled.
When a system has LIPUs with private IP addresses and LIPUs with public IP addresses set
Prog. 250 - FK16 as shown here to prevent one way speech path between IPT (1) and IPT (2).

Figure 8-1 Station IP NAT Example

8-20 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 IP Telephone Programming
IP Telephone Installation and Network Connection Setup

260 Full IP Station Assignment

Prerequisite Program: CABINET SLOT PCB ASSIGNMENTS
This command assigns IP station and MAS HMP resources to the GIPx, MIPU and LIPU/LIPS interfaces.

1. Select Station > Station Assignments, and click on the Basic tab.
2. Enter a DN number in the Primary DN field or click one of the following buttons:
• List – view a summary list of programmed DNs.
• Extended List – view a detailed list of programmed DNs.
• Create – Assign a new DN with custom settings by entering a DN value. Press OK, assign the PDN

Programming
IP Telephone
Equipment No. and click Submit.
• Selective Copy – Enter a DN in the Primary DN field and click Selective Copy to make a new DN
assignment with settings copied from the DN entered in the Primary DN field.
• Delete – Enter a Primary DN or a range of Primary DNs to delete and click OK.
• Change DN – Enter a DN in the Primary DN field and click Change DN. Enter the new DN
assignment and click OK.
3. Setup the DN by adding values to the remaining fields.
4. Click Submit.
Note The max. number of IP telephones programmed on one MIPU (MIPU24) is 24; the GIPU8 is 8.

FIELD DESCRIPTION

00 Prime DN Prime DN (enter an existing PDN or enter a PDN you wish to create for a new station).

01 Type Assign device types to GIPx, MIPU, LIPU/LIPS ports.

• IPT2000 series, IP5000 series telephones, and IP Softphones are IPT

(require End Point License).
• SIP telephones are SIP (require End Point license).
• IP Attendant Consoles are ATTENDANT (require Basic Port License).
• VM Ports are VOICE MAIL (require Basic Port License and MAS HMP
resource).
• ACD Announcers are ACD ANNOUNCE (require Basic Port License and
MAS HMP resource).

Note IPT1020 telephones cannot be assigned to GIPx, MIPU, LIPU/LIPS -

they must be assigned to a BIPU-M using Prog 200.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 8-21

 IP Telephone Programming
IP Telephone Installation and Network Connection Setup

FIELD DESCRIPTION

02 PDN Equipment Enter the PDN equipment number. This is the cabinet and slot number of the GIPx,
Number MIPU, LIPU/LIPS card (0000 means auto assignment).
Notes:
• IPT1020s must be installed on BIPU-M; cannot be installed on LIPU/LIPS,
MIPU or GIPx.
• SIP phones must be installed on LIPU/LIPS, MIPU or GIPx; cannot be
installed on BIPU-M
• IPT2000 series, IP5000-series, and IP Softphones can be installed on
LIPU/LIPS, MIPU, GIPx or BIPU-M (in BIPU-M the IP5000-series telephone
acts as an IPT2000-series telephone).
• MIPU and GIPU require R5.0 software or higher.
Cabinet numbers:
• CIX/CTX100: Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
• CIX200: Select 01 for Base and 02 for Expansion cabinet.
• CIX/CTX670: Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each
Expansion cabinet.
• CIX1200: Select 01 for Base and 02~12 respectively for each Expansion
cabinet.
Slot numbers:
• CIX/CTX100: Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots.
• CIX/CTX100: Virtual Slot for ACTU Relay = Cabinet 02, Slot 05.
• CIX200: Select 01~04 for either cabinet.
• CIX/CTX670: Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.
• CIX1200:Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.
• CTX28 and CIX40 assignments are hard coded and cannot be changed.

Virtual Slot for GCTU Relay = Cabinet 02, Slot 05.

01, 01 - 8 digital telephones on motherboard (CTX28, CIX40 R1HW and R2HW).
01, 02 - 3 CO lines on motherboard (CTX28, CIX40 R1HW), 4 CO lines (CIX40 R2HW)
01, 03 - no card (CTX28, CIX40 R1HW), GVPH (CIX40 R2HW)
01, 04 - 1 (Base) or 2 (GSTU) analog station ports (CTX28, CIX40 R1HW and R2HW)
01, 05 - GVMU (CTX28), GVPH (CIX40 R1HW), GIPx, MIPU or GCOCIH (CIX40
R2HW)
01, 06 - GIPx, MIPU16 or GCOCIH (CIX40 R1HW), no card (CTX28, CIX40 R2HW)
01, 07 - 8 digital telephones on GCDU (CTX28, CIX40 R1HW and R2HW).
01, 08 - 3 CO lines on GCDU (CTX28, CIX40 R1HW and R2HW).

03 LAN Interface Enter 1 for a GIPx, MIPU and LIPU, 2 for an LIPS
Number
Possible values:1 (Default) or 2.

8-22 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 IP Telephone Programming
IP Telephone Installation and Network Connection Setup

FIELD DESCRIPTION

04 Not Used

05 COS Day1 Class of Service for Day1 mode

Possible values:1~32
• Day2 Class of Service for Day 2 mode.
Possible values:1~32
• Night Class of Service for Night mode.

Programming
IP Telephone
Possible values:1~32.

06 DRL Day1 Destination Restriction Level for Day1 Mode (used for credit card calling)
Possible values:1~16
• Day 2 Destination Restriction Level for Day2 Mode.
Possible values:1~16
• Night Destination Restriction Level for Night Mode.
Possible values:1~16

07 FRL Day1 Facilities Restriction Level for Day 1 Mode.

Possible values:1~16s
• Day 2 Facilities Restriction Level for Day 2 Mode.
Possible values:1~16s
• Night Facilities Restriction Level for Night Mode.
Possible values:1~16

08 LCR Group Least Cost Routing Group Number

Possible values:1~16

09 QPL Day1 Queuing Priority Level for Day 1 Mode.

Possible values:1~16
• QPL Day 2 Queuing Priority Level for Day 2 Mode.
Possible values:1~16

• QPL Night Queuing Priority Level for Night Mode.

Possible values:1~16

10 Name to Display Enter the name that should be displayed on telephone LCDs for this PDN.
Possible values:16 ASCII characters

11 Dialing Progress Type of tone to hear after dialing LCR access code.
Tone
Possible values:Dial Tone (Default), Entry Tone, or Silence

12 System Call System Call Forward group number.

Forward
Possible values:0~4 (CIX100), 0~10 (CIX200, CIX670/1200 Basic),
0~32 (CIX670 Exp), 0~48 (CIX1200 Exp)

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 8-23

 IP Telephone Programming
IP Telephone Installation and Network Connection Setup

FIELD DESCRIPTION

13 Call Pickup The station privilege to activate Call Pickup.

Possible values:Permitted (Default), Group Only, or Not Permitted

14 Bearer Capability ISDN Bearer Capability the PSTN is expecting from non-ISDN stations. 3.1kHzAudio
(data and speech) or Speech.
Important Notes:
Standard telephone type data devices (modems, G3-Fax signals) must be set for
3.1KHz audio on ISDN lines.
The Strata Net IP network does not support 3.1KHz (data and speech). All standard
telephone equipment must be set to Speech if making calls over Strata Net IP.
Possible values:Audio (Default) or Speech

15 Display DN If this station is a member of a hunt group that has a pilot number and Pilot Display
Number set in Prog 209-02 and Prog 209-04 respectively, enter the HG Pilot Display
Number in this field. This number will display on the LCD of telephones when calling, or
when called by, this station or VM port.
This is necessary for proper operation of hunt groups, including centralized voice mail,
over Strata Net.
Possible values:Dial string of 1~ 5 digits

16 CESID E911 Calling Party Information identifier for this station (CESID). Should be a valid
NANP telephone number.
Possible values: Up to 16 digits

17 Emergency Call The Emergency call group that this station belongs to.
Group
Possible values:1~8 (Default ~ 1)

18 Remote CF/DND Password to remotely set or cancel DND or station Call Forward from another CIX
Password station, or for Call Forward only from an external DISA line.
Note: DND can not be set/canceled remotely from a DISA line.
Possible values:1 ~ 4 digits

19 VMID Code Enter the voice mailbox number that should answer calls when this PDN calls voice
mail or, when this PDN is called and then forwards to voice mail (this number is
prefixed by codes in Prog 579, 11~16).
Valid entries: digits 0~9, * and #, maximum 10 characters.
This VMID code is sent to the voice mail device in SMDI packets or DTMF tones on
direct calls to voice mail from the PDN and on calls to the PDN that forward to voice
mail.
Note: See Prog 580 for SMDI or DTMF choice.
Possible values:1 ~ 10 digits

20 VM MW Center Message Waiting Center DN.

Port Enter the VM PDN or Pilot DN number that should display on telephone LCDs when
calling voice mail or receiving calls from voice mail.
Possible values:Valid DN

8-24 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 IP Telephone Programming
IP Telephone Installation and Network Connection Setup

FIELD DESCRIPTION

21 Travel COS Privilege Change the Travelling Class of Service Override Code.
Change
Possible values:Enabled or Disabled (Default)

22 TGAC Override Trunk Group Access Code Override for attendant console.
Possible values:Enabled or Disabled (Default)

23 Service Tones Disable Services Tone for Data Privacy. Service tone, such as Call Waiting Tone,
should be disabled for modems, FAXes, and similar devices.
Possible values:Enabled (Default) or Disabled

Programming
IP Telephone
24 Call Waiting Tone Enable/Disable the station to receive Call Waiting (Camp-on) and Ring Over Busy
(ROB) Tone.
CW tone is always two beeps.
ROB tone can be two beeps or continuous as set in PRG 204, 27.
Possible values:Enabled (Default) or Disabled

25 Dial Directory The telephone User Name will appear in the display of large LCD (Directory
Assistance).
Possible values:Enabled (Default) or Disabled

26 Door Over DND Enable DND to be overridden by a door phone.

Possible values:Override or Not Override (Default)

27 Set System Speed Privilege to set System Speed Dial numbers.

Dial
Possible values:Enabled or Disabled (Default)

28 Network COS Network Class Of Service number.

Possible values:1 (Default) ~ 32

29 Auto OCA OCA occurs automatically when making a call to a busy station that allows OCA calls to
be received.
Possible values:Enabled (Default) or Disabled

30 Originate OCA The privilege to make OCA calls to other stations.

Important Note: This privilege must be disabled for all voice mail and auto attendant
ports.
Possible Values: Enabled (Default) or Disabled

31 RSTU Devices connected to RSTU circuits that do not automatically hang up, and connect to
Supervision CO lines that do not provide disconnect supervision should be set with Not Received.
This enables the auto disconnect Tandem timer in PRG 104, PB06 for these types of
connections.
Possible Values: Received (Default) or Not Received

32 Station SpDial The number of station speed dial bins allocated to this station.
Bins Possible values:0 ~ 100 (maximum=100 per station).

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 8-25

 IP Telephone Programming
IP Telephone Installation and Network Connection Setup

FIELD DESCRIPTION

33 Call Forward Dial When the handset is picked up the user will hear stutter dial tone if Station Call Forward
Tone is set on the telephone.
Possible values:Enabled (Default) or Disabled

34 Dialing Digit After the extension has made a call it can be prevented from dialing any subsequent
Restriction digits.
Possible values:Enabled or Disabled (Default)

35 CO Park & Hold Enabled: When this station parks a line call, CO or GCO buttons of the parked line that
appear on other stations will be on hold. This will allow the other stations to press the
CO or GCO button to pickup the parked call.
Disabled: When this station parks a line call, CO or GCO buttons of the parked line that
appear on other stations will appear busy. This will prevent the other stations to press
the CO or GCO button to pickup the parked call.
Possible values:Enabled or Disabled (Default)

36 MW & DND Dial Enable: When this station goes off hook, the station will receive stuttered dial tone
Tone when it has a message waiting indication and the station will receive a busy tone burst
before dial tone when in the DND mode.
Disable: This station will receive normal dial tone when it has a message waiting or
when it is in the DND mode.
Possible values:Enabled (Default) or Disabled

37 Activate Message Enable: This station is allowed to activate station-to-station message waiting on other
Waiting stations by dialing the other station number plus 7, 8, or 9, or by pressing the Msg key.
Disable: This station cannot activate station-to-station message waiting on other
stations by dialing the station number plus 7, 8, 9, or by pressing the Msg key.
Note: This parameter does not apply to voice mail ports, they use the special message
waiting access codes.
Possible values:Enabled (Default) or Disabled

38 Tenant Number Enter the Tenant number to which this PDN should be assigned.
Possible values:1(default) ~ 8

39 Hook-Switch 1: Enable Recall for Digital Telephones for normal operation.

Recall 2: Disable Recall on Standard Telephones that produce hook-switch bounce when they
are hung-up. This prevents annoying ring recalls when the user hangs up on a call.
Possible values:Enabled (Default) or Disabled

8-26 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 IP Telephone Programming
IP Telephone Installation and Network Connection Setup

FIELD DESCRIPTION

40 Auto-Campon to Enable - to allow auto-campon to this PDN when busy and called by a CO line even if
PDN the CO line group has auto camp-on disabled in Program 304-17.
Disable - to not allow auto camp-on to this PDN when called by a CO line if the CO line
group has auto camp-on disabled in Program 304-17.
Notes
1. Auto camp-on will always occur on the PDN if the calling CO line group has auto
camp-on enabled in Program 304-17 regardless of how this option is set.
2. Auto camp-on will be applied or not to PhDNs according to the PhDN owner PDN

Programming
IP Telephone
setting for this option.
Possible values:Enabled (Default) or Disabled

41 LCR PDN Code Enter the number of digits that determine when to send the LCR PDN code. The PDN
code is registered in the LCR Modified Digits Table.
Possible values:G711, G729A (Default), None

42 Network Calling Enter the CLID telephone number that should be sent for this station when making
Number external calls through the Strata Net ISDN network (32 digits max.). When this station
makes outgoing calls through the Strata Net network this number will be sent over the
Strata Net to the terminating PSTN connected to the far-end node (providing this is
allowed by the PSTN). This number will be displayed as the Caller ID number. This
number is not sent to local PSTNs connected to the node from which the call is
originated, nor is it sent when making conventional Tie line calls that terminate on a
PSTN at a far-end node.
Possible values:32 Digits max.

43 Security Code Used for log in to My Phone manger when Voice Mail does not exist. This Security
Code is also used for IP User Mobility. If #49 is set to Enable, this field must be given a
value.
Possible values:16 Characters Max

44 My Phone Enter the Personal Admin user privilege level for this station.
Manager Level
Possible values:Normal (Default), Super1 or Super2.

45 Speaker OCA Enable or disable Speaker OCA on an IP telephone. When speaker OCA is assigned to
an IP telephone, an additional IP port is assigned to the IP telephone. If there is no
available IP port, S-OCA cannot be assigned and an eManager error will occur.
Possible values:Enabled or Disabled (Default)

49 IP Phone Login Determines whether a password is required for phone login. Used for both MyPhyone
Password Manger and for IP User Mobility, as well. If set to Enable, a password is required in #43.
Possible values:Enable (applies a phone login password) or Disabled (Default)

50 Use Transfer Whether or not apply Transfer Reg. - Set to Enable to allow IP Mobility for this DN.
Registration
Possible values:Enabled or Disabled (Default)
Note Assign a Phone Logout feature key on this DN.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 8-27

 IP Telephone Programming
IP Telephone Installation and Network Connection Setup

FIELD DESCRIPTION

51 Connecting This field shows which LIPU/MIPU/GIPx (Cabinet #/ Slot#/ Port#) the IP station is
Equipment connected to. This value enables the Admin to determine which LIPU/MIPU/GIPx was
Number used to host the IP station if the IP station was created using dynamic (0000) port
creation.
MIPU and GIPU require R5.0 software or higher.

Cabinet numbers:
• CIX/CTX100: Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
• CIX200: Select 01 for Base and 02 for Expansion cabinet.
• CIX/CTX670: Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each
Expansion cabinet.
•CIX1200: Select 01 for Base and 02~12 respectively for each Expansion
cabinet.
Slot numbers:
• CIX/CTX100: Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots.
• CIX/CTX100: Virtual Slot for ACTU Relay = Cabinet 02, Slot 05.
• CIX200: Select 01~04 for either cabinet.
• CIX/CTX670: Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.
• CIX1200:Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.
• CTX28 and CIX40 assignments are hard coded and cannot be changed.
Virtual Slot for GCTU Relay = Cabinet 02, Slot 05.
01, 01 - 8 digital telephones on motherboard (CTX28, CIX40 R1HW and R2HW).
01, 02 - 3 CO lines on motherboard (CTX28, CIX40 R1HW), 4 CO lines (CIX40 R2HW)
01, 03 - no card (CTX28, CIX40 R1HW), GVPH (CIX40 R2HW)
01, 04 - 1 (Base) or 2 (GSTU) analog station ports (CTX28, CIX40 R1HW and R2HW)
01, 05 - GVMU (CTX28), GVPH (CIX40 R1HW), GIPx, MIPU or GCOCIH (CIX40
R2HW)
01, 06 - GIPx, MIPU16 or GCOCIH (CIX40 R1HW), no card (CTX28, CIX40 R2HW)
01, 07 - 8 digital telephones on GCDU (CTX28, CIX40 R1HW and R2HW).
01, 08 - 3 CO lines on GCDU (CTX28, CIX40 R1HW and R2HW).

52 Station Calling Enter the type of Calling Name for Outgoing Name Delivery. This field is only valid for
Name Type Outgoing Call for “Nat’l ISDN Nortel” or “Nat’l ISDN Nortel” (NI1 Protocol) ISDN-PRI
Trunks.
1:None - Not send the Calling Name to ISDN-PRI Trunk
2:LCD - Send the station name assigned by PRG200 FK10 to ISDN-PRI Trunk.
3.SPECIAL - Send the Special Name assigned by PRG322 FK4 to ISDN-PRI Trunk.
4.DEFAULT - Send the Default Calling Name assigned by PRG321 FK5 to ISDN-PRI
Trunk.

8-28 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 IP Telephone Programming
IP Telephone Installation and Network Connection Setup

FIELD DESCRIPTION

53 Station Specified Enabled - Station Name is displayed after the call is answered on an internal call.
Caller ID
Disabled - Station Name is changed to DN after the call is answered on an internal call.

54 Simple System Whether or not to system speed dial supplement is allowed.

SpeedDial
Possible values:Enabled or Disabled (Default)

55 SIP Inband Mode Whether or not SIP extensions can transmit DTMF to a trunk while ringing the called
party.
Possible values:Enabled or Disabled (Default)

Programming
IP Telephone
674 Remote Node IPU IP Address Assignment
Note Release 5.00 MR14 and later only.
Prerequisite Program: none
This command assigns a node ID to an MIPU/GIPU/LIPU IP Address. This is used by the IP Mobility
feature to identify the home MIPU/GIPU/LIPU IP Address of a DN.

1. Select Strata Net > Remote Node IPU Address.

2. Enter the Remote Node ID.
3. Enter the IP Address of the MIPU/GIPU/LIPU in that remote node.
4. Click Add.
5. To Remove or Modify a node, double-click the Node ID.

FIELD DESCRIPTION

00 Remote Node ID The Node ID of the CIX system to connect to over Strata Net.

01 Remote Node IPU IP Address IP Address of the MIPU/GIPU/LIPU in the remote node.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 8-29

 IP Telephone Programming
IP Mobility Programming

IP Mobility Programming
Requirements
• CIX Software: R5.10 or higher
• SoftIPT: 02.00.0000 or higher
• MIPU: MIPU_01_01 or higher
• GIPH: GIPH_02_03 or higher
• GIPU8
• LIPU: LIPU_02_03 or higher
• Network eManager
• IPT20X0-SD: DIP2T2K
• IPT2008: DIP2M2K
• IPT2010: DIP2T2KX-A06
• IP5000

Note IP User Mobility will run on an MIPU/GIPU and an LIPU version LIPU_02_03 or higher. IP Mobility is
not supported on the BIPU.

More IP Telephone DNs than xIPU ports

In R5 and later, software administrators are able to create more IP telephones in Program 260 than the
number of xIPU ports.

When an IP telephone DN is programmed (Prog. 260) as Fixed Assignment it is registered to an available

xIPU resource. The xIPU resource must be available when the DN is programmed. When the IP telephone
DN is in use it will use that xIPU port. When logged out the xIPU port is held for that IP telephone DN. If an
xIPU resource is not available the IP telephone DN cannot be programmed. IP licenses are not checked
when the DN is programmed.

When an IP telephone DN is registered by Program 260, field 02 as Auto Assignment there is no specific
xIPU resource assigned and the number of licenses is not checked. This means there can be more IP
telephone DNs programmed into the CIX data base than there are xIPU resources. Also, there can be
more IP telephone DNs than IP port licenses.

8-30 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 IP Telephone Programming
Feature Administration/Programming

Feature Administration/Programming
New programming is as follows.

Table 8-1 CIX Programming Notes

Program FK/Feature Parameter Name/ Programming Used

Range Default
Number Code Name Function
102 545 Logout Feature Access Code 5 Digits Max No Data Logout
Feature Key
205 545 Logout Feature Key No Data Logout

Programming
Number

IP Telephone
Feature Key
213 545 Logout Feature Key No Data Logout
Number
Feature Key
215 545 Logout Feature Key No Data Logout
Number
Whether or not apply the Login
260 field 49 Enabled/Disabled Disabled Login
Password Authentication
260 field 50 Whether or not apply Transfer Reg Enabled/Disabled Disabled Transfer Reg
Displays the PDN Equipment XXYYZZ
260 field 51 Number of the MIPU/GIPU/LIPU XX=Cab, YY=Slot, — Login
the IP telephone is connecting with ZZ=LAN IF No.
Other Node MIPU/GIPU/LIPU IP Login to
674 — — —
Address Assignment Multi-Node

Table 8-2 IP Telephone Feature And Programming Notes

Upper: IPT2010, 2020, IP5122-

SD, 5122-SDC, 5132-SD Used
Parameter Name Range Default
Function
Lower: IPT2008, IP5131-SDL
Network Setting Mode
SELECT=2, field 25 Whether or not to apply Auto-Login
Auto/Manual Auto
Auto-Login on power up on power up
Network Setting (Basic) Network
Network Setting Mode The password for
SELECT = 2, field 26 Auto-Login
authentication when Auto- 16 digits Max No Data
on power up
Network Setting (Basic) Network Login on power up is set
Network Setting Mode
SELECT = 2, field 13 XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX Secondary
Secondary IPU address 0.0.0.0
XXX = 0 - 255 IPU address
Network Setting (Basic) Network
Terminal Information The display of MIPU/
SELECT=1, field 04 GIPU/LIPU IP address the XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX Primary IPU
—
IP telephone is connecting XXX = 0 - 255 address
Terminal Information with

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 8-31

 IP Telephone Programming
Feature Administration/Programming

Upper: IPT2010, 2020, IP5122-

SD, 5122-SDC, 5132-SD Used
Parameter Name Range Default
Function
Lower: IPT2008, IP5131-SDL
Terminal Information
SELECT=2, field 27 US English, UK
US
The IPT2008-SDL and IP5131- Language Mode English, French/
English
SDL have language change Spanish
capability

IP Mobility Programming Steps

The basics of IP Mobility setup are done in the station assignment programming. The IP Mobility features
are assigned to directory numbers (DN). The steps below outline the process.

1. Assign the MIPU/GIPU/LIPU card.

2. Assign the DN that will use IP Mobility as an IPT. In program 260:
• field 01 –set to IPT
• field 49 – is a password required?
Disable (default) - no password required
Enable - a password is required to login. Set the password in field 43
• field 43 – The security code entered here is the IP Mobility login password when field 49 = Enable
• field 50 – Use Transfer Registration
Enable = IP Mobility
Disable = This DN does not have IP Mobility
• field 51–Read-Only field. Displays the MIPU/GIPU/LIPU equipment number for this DN.

3. For multi-node systems, assign the IP Address of the MIPU/GIPU/LIPU card in each node. Use
Network eManager Strata Net > Remote Node IPU Address. These assignments must be made in all
nodes.

Compatibility
IP User Mobility is compatible with the following:
• LIPU/LIPS (LIPU_02_03 and later)
• GIPH
• GIPU8
• MIPU16
• MIPU24
IP Mobility is not supported on the BIPU.

8-32 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 IP Telephone Programming
xIPU and IPT Program Update

xIPU and IPT Program Update

To start updating the xIPU or IPT firmware, the update firmware files must be stored on FTP Server (see
Appendix B – Software and Firmware Updates on page B-1). You can update the xIPU using Network
eManager. You cannot update a BIPU-Q. If you need to update a BIPU-Q, return it to Toshiba.
Network eManager automatically disables the xIPU before any xIPU/IPT program update and preserves
the initial state of the xIPU (idle or disable) after program update is done.
The xIPU program update has two processing options: sequential and simultaneous. If the FTP server is a
CIX (SmartMedia) sequential processing must be used.
The IPT program update is performed sequentially only. A table sorted by xIPU shows a summary of the

Programming
IP Telephone
IPT selection. You can select multiple IPTs. You can change the selection at any time before the update
process starts. The process flow is as follows:
• The xIPU corresponding to the first group of IPTs is automatically disabled (if its current status is idle)
• IPTs are updated one by one. Up to maximum 128 IPTs can be selected for one updating process.
• xIPU is re-enabled (if its initial state was idle)
These steps are repeated automatically until the entire user selection is processed.
Both the xIPU and IPT update pages have an Abort and Abort All button. The Abort button is available
per item (xIPU, IPT), only when the current processing status allows the abort operation. Aborting the
update process is allowed only in two phases “Getting the update file” and “Resetting.”
The Abort All button is available when an update is in progress. You can click on Abort All to abort all
updates starting with the one currently processing. If abort operation is not allowed at the time, the
message “Please wait while system has a chance to abort…” appears. All program update processes will
be aborted when this is allowed by the CIX.
The synchronization between Network eManager and the CIX is not perfect during this process. Network
eManager sends a command, then checks for the completion of the command. If you click on Abort at the
end of the “Getting the update file” phase, Network eManager will abort in the next phase that abort is
allowed, which is resetting.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 8-33

 IP Telephone Programming
xIPU and IPT Program Update

FTP Server Information

CIX SmartMedia
When FTP server is CIX-SmartMedia, the files for xIPU/IPT program update must be stored in the
PROGRAM folder on SmartMedia. xIPU/IPT screens will automatically fill the Directory field in the FTP
information group using the name PROGRAM, and will provide a list box with the files that exist in this
directory on Smart Media.

Network eManager Machine

When the FTP server is a Network eManager machine, the installation will create a physical directory
under \Strata eManager named CTXIPUPDATE. This is the physical path you should indicate when
creating CTXIPUPDATE virtual directory on the default FTP Site. The files for xIPU/IPT program update
will be stored in CTXIPUPDATE directory on the Network eManager machine. xIPU/IPT pages will
automatically fill the directory field in the FTP Server information group using the name CTXIPUPDATE
and will provide a list box with the files that exist in this directory on the Network eManager machine.

External FTP
When FTP server is External FTP, not CIX - Smart Media, nor the Network eManager machine, users will
have to provide all the information in the FTP information group.
Important! The External FTP Server must be used if IPT, BIPUs and/or Network eManager do not have
the same subnet address.
Network eManager provides an External FTP list page to manage FTP information for External FTP
servers. This page can be used to add, modify and remove FTP server information (user, password, IP
address, directory and file) for External FTP servers or the Network eManager local machine. The
information will be stored in a file on the Network eManager machine and will be provided in a selection
window when the user clicks on External FTP on the xIPU/IPT pages. This eliminates the need to enter the
same FTP information for External FTP servers each time the xIPU/IPT program update is run.

xIPU Program Update

Prerequisites

1. Make sure that the networking devices between xIPU and the FTP server meet the requirements for
IP-CIX (min 100Mb/s switching hub(s).
2. Create an account on the machine designated to be the FTP server.
3. Create an FTP virtual directory on the FTP server machine and specify the physical location of the
updated file on the FTP server machine.
4. The FTP server machine IP address should be configured such that it is visible by the IPT IP address.

CAUTION! Do not run other updates simultaneously.

Programming

1. Select Maintenance > IP Firmware Update > L/M/B IPU Update.

2. Select card slot to be updated
3. Enter the FTP information.
4. Select xIPU Update option.
5. Click Start to begin the xIPU update.

8-34 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 IP Telephone Programming
xIPU and IPT Program Update

FIELD DESCRIPTION

User Name Enter the name of a valid user account on the FTP server you select: Smart
Media (CIX), Local eManager or external FTP server.

Password Enter the password of a valid user account on the FTP server you select:
Smart Media (CIX), Local eManager or external FTP server.

IP Address Enter the IP address of a valid user account on the FTP server you select.
For Smart Media, this is the IP address of the CIX. For Local eManager, this
is the IP address of the Network eManager computer. For external FTP, this
is the IP address of the computer used as the external FTP server.

Data Directory This is the folder on the Smart Media card where the update file is stored. If
the FTP Server is Local eManager or External Server this is a virtual FTP
directory. The virtual directory path property indicates the physical location
where the update file is stored.

File Name Enter the name of the updated file (vmlinus).

External FTP List – Clicking the External FTP List button enables users to store external FTP server
information.

FIELD DESCRIPTION

FTP Account

User Name Enter the name of a valid user account on the external FTP server.

Password Enter the name of a valid user account on the external FTP server.

Update File Location

IP Address Enter the IP address of the computer used as the external FTP server.

Data Directory This is the folder on the Smart Media card where the update file is
stored. If the FTP Server is Local eManager or External Server, this is a
virtual FTP directory. The virtual directory path property indicates the
physical location where the update file is stored.

File Name Enter the name of the updated file.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 8-35

 IP Telephone Programming
xIPU and IPT Program Update

IPT Program Update

The IPT program update function consists of retrieving the updated file from an FTP server, updating and
rebooting the selected IPT.

CAUTION! Do not run other updates simultaneously.

Prerequisites

1. Make sure that the networking devices between xIPU, IPT and the FTP server meet the requirements
for IP-CIX (min 100Mb/s switching hub(s)).
2. Create an account on the machine designated to be the FTP server.
3. Create an FTP virtual directory on the FTP server machine and specify the physical location of the
updated file on the FTP server machine.
4. The FTP server machine IP address should be configured such that it is visible by the xIPU IP address.

Note Use the IP-B Prog. to update IP telephone sets connected to BIPU cards.
Use the IP-L Prog. to update the later IP telephone sets connected to MIPU/GIPU/LIPU cards.

Programming

1. Select Maintenance > IP Firmware Update > IPT B Update. Then select the BIPU card slot.
— OR —
Select Maintenance > IP Firmware Update > IPT_L/M/G Update. Then select xIPU card slot
2. Select IPTs to be updated.
3. Repeat step 2 and 3 for multiple updates.
4. Enter the FTP information.
5. Click Start to begin the IPT Program update.
Notes
• All selected IPTs are updated sequentially.
• Maximum of 128 IPTs can be selected in one IPT update process.

FIELD DESCRIPTION

User Name Enter the user name of the account created on the FTP server.

Password Enter the password for the account created on the FTP server.

IP Address Enter the IP address of the FTP server machine.

Data Directory Enter the name of the FTP virtual directory on the FTP server.

File Name Enter the name of the updated file (apph248.out).

8-36 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

Services 9

This chapter covers a variety of services offered by Strata CIX. Automatic Call Distribution (ACD), Voice
Mail, Destination Restriction (DR), Least Cost Routing (LCR), Networking, Station Message Detail
Reporting (SMDR), External Devices, System Parameters and other miscellaneous services are
discussed.

Important!
• Advanced Strata CIX programming topics are covered in this chapter. Programmers should make sure
each section is thoroughly understood before proceeding to programming.
• Networking programs found in this chapter are not available with the Strata CTX28.

540, 541 Pilot DN Assignment

Services
Prerequisite Program: None
Pilot DNs are directory numbers that have no physical appearance, they are true virtual numbers. They
can be used in CTI and Voice Mail applications. In ACD, Pilot Numbers are used as ACD group numbers.
In Voice Mail applications, Pilot DNs are used to call directly, or transfer calls directly to specific voice mail
boxes – this is done by setting VM as the alternate destination and using the VMID to send the call to a
specific VM box.
On Multi-Node, CIX Strata Net Networks, Pilot DNs must be unique throughout the entire network. A Pilot
DN of a CIX Node must not be a duplicate of any other type of DN in any other CIX Node - DN types
include PDN, PhDN, Hunt Group Pilot DN or other Pilot DN.

Maximum Pilot DNs

CIX40 = 90
CIX100, CIX200 and CIX670 Basic = 100; CIX 200 and CIX670 Expanded = 256.
CIX1200 Basic = 100; CIX1200 Expanded = 256

1. Select Station > Pilot DN.

2. Enter a Pilot DN Number or click one of the following buttons:
- List – view a summary list of programmed Pilot DNs.
- Create – Assign a new Pilot DN with default settings.
- Copy – Enter a Pilot DN number and click Copy to make a new Pilot DN assignment with settings
copied from the Pilot DN entered.
- Delete – Enter a Pilot DN and click OK.
- Get Default - sets all data to factory defaults.
3. Enter Program 540 data.
4. Click Submit.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 9-1

 Services

Field DESCRIPTION

Pilot DN Pilot DNs are directory numbers that have no physical appearance -
they are true virtual numbers. They can be used in CTI and Voice Mail
applications. In ACD, Pilot Numbers are used as ACD group numbers.
In Voice Mail applications, Pilot DNs are used to call directly, or transfer
calls directly to specific voice mail boxes – this is done by setting VM as
the alternate destination and using the VMID to send the call to a
specific VM box.
Possible values:Maximum characters for Pilot DNs:
CIX40 = 90
CIX100, CIX200 and CIX670 Basic: = 100, Exp: = 256
CIX1200 Basic = 100, Exp = 256

01 Alternate Destination Calls to the Pilot DN will be routed to the alternate destination if the
Pilot DN is not available (example: ACD after shift). If Dialing Digits is
selected, enter the appropriate DN in the Alternate DN assignment.
Possible values:No Data (default), Dialing Digits or Night Bell

Alternate DN If Dialing Digits is selected as the alternate destination, enter the PDN,
PhDN or hunt group pilot number to which the call should be routed.
Possible values:Up to 32 ASCII characters (default = no value)

02 Voice Mail ID If the alternate destination is voice mail, enter the voice mail ID that
should be sent.
Possible values:Up to 16 ASCII characters (default = no value)

9-2 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Services

579 System Voice Mail Data

Prerequisite Program: None
This command assigns DTMF/SMDI Voice Mail interface parameters for the system.

1. Select > System > Voice Mail Data.

2. Enter Program 579 data.
3. Get Default - sets all values to factory defaults.
4. Click Submit.

FIELD DESCRIPTION

01 DID/DNIS or DN VMID Select DN VMID to send the DN's VMID to voice mail on DID/DNIS calls that are
Option answered and then transferred to a DN which then forwards to voice mail.
Select DID/DNIS VMID to send the DID/DNIS number's VMID to voice mail on DID/
DNIS calls that are answered and then transferred to a DN which then forwards to
voice mail.
Possible values: Before Answer Only (default), Before and After.
If a DID/DNIS call is answered by a station and then transferred to a DN which then

Services
forwards to voice mail, the VMID of the DID/DNIS number (Program 309, field 11 or
field 15) or the VMID of the forwarding DN (Program 200, field 19 or 206, field 06) will
be sent to voice mail per this option.
Note The DID/DNIS number's VMID (Prog 309, 11 or 15) is always sent to
voice mail on DID/DNIS calls that ring directly to voice mail or ring a
DN which then forwards to voice mail before it is ever answered.

02 Cancellation Method Select the method used to cancel voice mail message waiting indication.
for VM MW
Possible values:Auto and Access Code Cancel or Access Code Cancel (default)

03 Message Desk Enable sending of the SMDI Message Desk Number (001) in the SMDI packet;
Number otherwise 000 for a station call or the 3-digit CO line number is sent.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)

04 Output of CLASS / Enable including Caller ID/ANI numbers in SMDR records.

ANI and DNIS
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)

05 Calling Number Digits Choose how many calling number digits are sent to VM unit.
Sent to VM
Possible values:2~10 digits (default = 10)
Note If 04 Output of CLASS / ANI and DNIS is enabled this value must be 10.

06 Blank Digits Sent to Select SMDI-Bellcore Standard VM Interface.

VM
Possible values:1 or 2 (default) - 1 = 1985 (single space), 2 = 1991 (two spaces)

07 Auto Cancel of VM Setting of auto cancel of VM and MW (this function is not currently supported).
and MW
Possible values:Enable (default) or Disable

08 DTMF Duration Select VM ID Code and System DTMF Signal Time.

Possible values:80 ms (default) or 160 ms

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 9-3

 Services

FIELD DESCRIPTION

09 Voice Mail Soft Keys Enables CIX Proprietary Integration for Soft Key Control of VM. CIX Proprietary
Integration and Soft Key Control of Voice Mail requires an iES32 or Stratagy
Enterprise Server Release 3.x or higher.
Possible values:Enable (default) or Disable

10 Central VM Callback Enter the pilot DN for the centralized voice mail system. If this field is left blank the
previously stored number will be deleted.
Possible values:Up to 7 ASCII characters (default = no value)

11 CF - All Call Record Enter DTMF VMID prefix string for calls arriving to voice mail via “Call Fwd All Calls.”
Possible values:Up to 4 ASCII characters (default = 91)

12 CF - Busy Record Enter DTMF VMID prefix string for calls arriving to voice mail via “Call Fwd Busy.”
Possible values:Up to 4 ASCII characters (default = 91)

13 CF - No Answer Enter DTMF VMID prefix string for calls arriving via “Call Fwd No Answer.”
Record Possible values:Up to 4 ASCII characters (default = 91)

14 Direct Call Enter DTMF VMID string for a call arriving at the voice mail as a Direct Call.
Possible values:Up to 4 ASCII characters (default = 91)

15 Retrieve Messages Enter DTMF VMID string for calls arriving at the voice mail to retrieve messages.
Possible values:Up to 4 ASCII characters (default = 92)

16 Transfer Direct to VM Pilot DN of the VM as a direct transfer destination.

DN Possible values:Up to 7 ASCII characters (default = no value)

17 Length of VM ID Select the number of characters in VMID string.

Possible values:1~10 (default = 10)

18 SMDI Call ID Packet Enable - to send SMDI Call ID DC packet on Voice mail calls.
Disable - do not send SMDI Call ID DC packet on Voice mail calls.
This feature requires Stratagy R5 or higher. It should be enabled when using multi-
language VM (French, Spanish, English, etc.) or other VM adaptability features.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)

19 SMDI ANI/CLID Digit Enter the number of digits to be sent to on the SMDI packet for Class, CLID, ANI, and
Length DNIS numbers.
Possible values:2~20 (default = 10)

20 Voice Mail Support on Enable for support of voicemail on DP5000 softkeys. Disable for DKT3000 and 2000
DP5000 Softkey telephones.
Possible values:Enable, Disable (default)

21 SMDI Time Stamp When enabled, the CIX sends a timestamp packet through the SMDI link to the voice
Packet mail system. Used to keep the clock in the CIX and the Toshiba voice mail system in
synch. Disable when using SMDI with non-Toshiba voice mail systems.
Possible values: Enable/Disable
Default value: Enable

9-4 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Services

580 Voice Mail Port Data

Prerequisite Program: None
Assign characteristics of individual voice mail ports.

1. Select System > Voice Mail Port Data.

2. Enter a VM Port DN or click one of the following buttons:
- List – view a summary list of programmed VM Port DNs.
- Copy – Enter an VM Port DN value in the field with the same name. Click Copy to make a new VM
Port DN assignment with settings copied from the port entered in VM Port DN.
3. Enter Program 580 data.
4. Get Default - sets all values to factory defaults.
5. Click Submit.

FIELD DESCRIPTION

00 VM Port DN Enter the DN of an individual VM port. For direct transfer to voice mail
enter the remote Node ID and Pilot DN.
Possible values:Up to 5 digits (default = no value)

Services
01 Control Method Specify In-band or SMDI integration. Select SMDI for remote voice mail.
Possible values:Inband or SMDI (default = no value)

02 Send A/D Tone Select whether Strata CIX sends A or D tone when a station connecting to
voice mail answers or disconnects respectively.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = no value)

03 Send B Tone Enable Strata CIX to send B tones in the event of a Blind Transfer Recall.
Possible values:B Tone, No Tone or B Tone and Extension Number
(default = no value)

04 End-to-end Enable Strata CIX to send DTMF tones to voice mail in response to key
presses from a digital telephone.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default = no value)

07 VM to VM Call Set to blocking to prevent Voice Mail Auto Attendant, supervised

Blocking transferred, calls from forwarding back into Voice Mail.
Possible values:Blocking or Non-blocking (default)

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 9-5

 Services
Destination Restriction/Least Cost Routing

Destination Restriction/Least Cost Routing

Programming DR/LCR features in Strata CIX requires an advanced knowledge of telephone programming.
Make sure you have a thorough understanding of the discussion that follows before attempting to program
these features. For details on LCR, see “LCR Overview” on page 9-12.

DR Overview
Strata CIX offers DR as a major expansion of traditional Toll Restriction. Toll Restriction is used to prevent the
unauthorized use of toll prefixes to the PSTN as follows:
• 1 – long distance
• 0 – operator assistance
• 011 – international
Strata CIX has expanded this to include restriction based on any string of dialed digits. Strata CIX can restrict
any string of up to 13 dialed digits including * and #.
Thirteen-digit screening allows control of access to individual telephone numbers in remote area codes.
Restriction of *, # controls access to vertical service codes from the CO such as camp-on and call forwarding.
DR is always applied to calls originated through LCR and may be applied to calls originated through Trunk
Group Access, Individual Trunk Access, CO Key, Group CO Key, Pooled Line Key, and Strata Net private
networking. Special screening tables allow restriction of calls placed through Centrex or PBXs to which the
Strata CIX may be connected.
Each OLG can be programmed to require or not require DR in “306, 307 Outgoing Line Groups” on page 6-5.
If a trunk group requires DR, a table must then be established using “531 DR Screening Table for OLG” on
page 9-25.
DR is controlled by a DR Level (DRL) that is assigned to any station or trunk capable of making an outside
call. Each of the 16 DRLs relate to a DR Table. A DR Table may be an Allow or Deny table and may be
associated with an Exception Table. A Deny Toll Restriction Table contains a list of dial strings that are
prohibited. Its associated Exception Table lists the dial strings within the Deny Table ranges that would be
allowed. For example, a Deny table might deny access to all of Area Code 1-800. Its exception table could
permit access to specific office codes within that area such as 1-800-234.

9-6 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Services
Destination Restriction/Least Cost Routing

Basic Operation
The flow chart below describes the basic logic by which calls are connected or rejected as a result of DR.

Services

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 9-7

 Services
Destination Restriction/Least Cost Routing

Tables
Strata CIX uses two or three tables to apply DR:
• Screening Tables. There are two types of screening tables as follows:
- LCR Screening Tables.
- OLG-Specific Screening Tables.
• DR Table or Exception Table to the DR Table.
Screening tables are used in Behind Centrex/PBX operations to detect access codes required by the
Centrex/PBX and processes them appropriately in a way that is transparent to end users.

DR/LCR Screening

DR is applied to all LCR calls using “530 DR LCR Screening Table Assignment” on page 9-24. It analyzes
the digits dialed after the LCR access code (typically 9).
Example: A station user dials 9 *72 1-617-234-5678. The outgoing line will serve as an incoming line that
this user is attempting to forward to his home. The system administrator has created an LCR/Screening
entry to prevent the forwarding of this line to the user’s home. With Skip & Apply under DR action and a
Skip Length of 0, the call will be forced to present *72 to the DR table where the call will be rejected. Apply
under LCR Action ensures that the entire string will be processed by LCR. In this case, Digit Modification is
irrelevant.

DR Screening for OLG Table

An OLG-specific DR Screening Table is used when a call is originated through a Line Key, Pooled Line
Key, Group CO Key, Trunk Group Access Code or Direct Trunk Access Code and a CO line is chosen that
requires DR. The decision to apply DR to an OLG is made in “306, 307 Outgoing Line Groups” on
page 6-5. If the OLG does not require DR, the call is connected to the desired line and all dialed digits,
minus the Strata CIX access code, are sent.
The OLG-specific table performs two functions:
• It manipulates the digits that will be screened by the DR table.
• It creates a Pause Value that ensures that the Centrex or PBX which is the source of the trunk will
receive and interpret the digits correctly. This is used to compensate for older, slower equipment.
Example: A station user dials 81-9-1-617-234-5678 where 81 is the Trunk Group Access Code for a
Centrex trunk group. 9 is the Centrex LCR access code. The Skip Length of 1 tells the system how many
of the first digits constitute an access code or other digits that may be ignored. The DR Action of Skip &
Apply tells the system to ignore the 9 and present 16172345678 to the DR Table used in the next step in
the process. The Pause Value of two seconds tells the system that, if it passes the DR Tables and is
connected to a trunk, it is to pause two seconds after outdialing the 9 and before outdialing 16172345678.

9-8 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Services
Destination Restriction/Least Cost Routing

DR Table

Each DRL is associated with a DR Table that defines the destinations to which a holder of that DRL is
entitled to place a call. Permission may be expressed in Allow or Deny tables. The DR Table is activated by
defining the table as Allow or Deny through “523 LCR Route Plan Schedule Assignments” on page 9-21.
The table is then populated one string at a time through “533 DRL Table Assignment” on page 9-26. The
table may have up to 100 entries. Entries may include any DTMF character including * and #.
As soon as Strata CIX finds a match in the table, it acts upon it. Therefore, entering 1 in a Deny table will
deny all 1+ calling to users with that DRL whereas entering 1-888 denies calls to the 888 Area Code.
Exceptions can be created in the DRL Exception Table.
DRL Exception Table Assignment – Once a DR Table has been established for a DRL, its exception
table can be created using “534 DRL Exception Table Assignment” on page 9-27. Exceptional DR Tables
are optional. Dial strings in Exception tables may be as long as 11 digits. If it was desired to deny access to
every office code in the 617 area code except Directory Assistance, one would first create a deny table that
included 617 and then create an associated exception table that allowed 617-555-1212.

Interaction With Other Features

Behind Centrex Operation

Behind Centrex operation for OLGs is defined in “650 Behind Centrex Assignment” on page 9-46. The CIX

Services
will use the values stored here to strip local and Centrex access codes from the dial string and determine
the external number being dialed. This external number will then be processed according to the DR rules
described above.
Note The Centrex to which the OLG is attached may impose its own DRs.

Credit Card Calling

If a valid credit card number is detected, the CIX will not apply DR to a call because the charges for such a
call are applied to the credit card rather than the outgoing line used.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 9-9

 Services
Destination Restriction/Least Cost Routing

Destination Restriction Guide Page

Use the Destination Restriction (DR) guide pages to program Destination Restriction.

1. Click LCR/DR > DR Guide Page.

The Destination Restriction Guide Page opening screen displays.
2. Click on any Program number to start using the Guide page.
Note Every Guide Page has Back and Next buttons to help you navigate to the previous and next
programs in a group.

The Program at the end of a group has a Guide Page button instead of a Next button to take you to
the main Destination Restriction Guide Page.

DR Dialing Setup
Program 530 – DR/LCR Screening table.
Use this program to define special dialing codes that are normally dialed in front of telephone numbers
(example *82, *67). It defines what DR and LCR action should be applied after users dial the special
code (Bypass or Skip and Apply DR).

Programs 531 / 650 – Centrex/PBX DR Screening table.

Use this program to define Centrex/PBX line access codes. It defines what DR action should be applied
after users dial the Centrex/PBX line access code (Bypass” or Skip and Apply DR). It is also used to
assign OLG to this table and/or enable Centrex assume 9 dialing.

Program 117 – Public Dial Plan Digit Analysis.

Use this program to prevent standard telephone users from avoiding DR by sending DTMF tones to the
PSTN before DR analysis is complete. In LCR applications, it allows calls to cut through to the PSTN
immediately so users do not have to wait for a pause timer to cut through after dialing a number.

DR Digit Table Setup

Programs 111 / 532 / 533 / 534 – DRL Assignments.
Use this screen to define Destination Restriction tables for each DRL. It combines the following
programs into a single screen for viewing, editing and copying DR tables.
111 - Used to define if the DRL allows credit card calling or not.
532 - Used to define each DR table as an Allow or Deny table.
533 - Used to add or delete digit strings from DR Exception Tables and copy selected digit strings from
one DR Exception table to another DR Exception table.
534 - Used to add or delete digit strings from DR Exception Tables and copy selected digit strings from
one DR Exception table to another DR Exception Table.

9-10 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Services
Destination Restriction/Least Cost Routing

Table 9-1 DRL Dial String Template

DRL Allow/Deny/Exception Dial String Comments
DRL1 Deny Nothing Deny nothing so all calling is allowed
DRL10 Allow Nothing Allow nothing so all outbound calls are
restricted
DRL11 Deny 1, 809, 900, 976, Denies long distance calls, pay per
NXX976 service toll calls, except for toll free
calls and allows local calls
Exception 1800, 1877, 1888
DRL12 Deny 011, 1809, 1900,1976, Allows local and long distance calls,
809,900, 976, restricts pay per service toll calls, and
1NXX976, NXX976 restricts international calls

DR Class of Service Setup

Program 103 – Class of Service (COS).
Use this screen to set COS options that are related to DR and other outgoing call features.

Services
Program 200 / 260 – Station Data.
Set the COS options that are related to DR and other outgoing call features.

Program 105 – System Parameters.

Set the system parameters related to DR and other outgoing call options.

Program 510 – Class of Service.

Setup override codes for DRLs and other related features. Override code digit length must be defined in
Program 105-15, System Parameters. This feature is described as Traveling Class Override in the
telephone user guide.

Program 509 – System Speed Dial DRL level.

Set the DRL, COS, FRL and OPL level that should be applied when users dial outgoing calls using
system speed. This must be enabled in 105-09, system parameters.

Program 306 – Outgoing Line Groups.

Set Station options that are related to DR and other outgoing call features.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 9-11

 Services
LCR Overview

LCR Overview
LCR Analysis Process
The flowchart below represents the process by which the Strata CIX analyzes dialed digits and makes LCR
decisions. The graphic is divided into four areas each described below. DR and call connection are
described elsewhere in this document and are shown here only for their roles in the LCR process.

Figure 1 LCR Analysis Process Flow

9-12 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Services
LCR Overview

DR
LCR begins with the receipt of a dial string from a facility capable of originating an outgoing call: station,
automated attendant, Tie trunk, DISA trunk, DID trunk, etc. The dial string is identified as an LCR call by
the presence of the LCR feature access code—typically 9. The LCR access code is removed and the
remaining external digits are processed.

Route Analysis
Route Analysis chooses a route plan based on the dialed digits. The Routing Analysis Plan becomes the
index into the time/date calculations described in the next section. If the Strata CIX is unable to match the
dial string, it uses the default route plan which assures a route out of the system. If a match is found, the
CIX determines if an exception table is associated with the dial string. If the dial string appears in the
exception table, the call is assigned to the route plan stored in the exception table. Otherwise, the route
plan stored in the initial table is used.

Time of Day
The Strata CIX maintains time and day values for LCR separate from those for the general system. One
day can be divided into three zones, and each day can be categorized as a Weekday, Weekend, or
Holiday.

Connection

Services
Selection of a Route Choice Table begins the process of actually connecting the call to an outgoing trunk.
Each Route Choice Table consists of six route definitions which operate in terminal hunt fashion to select
an OLG and to apply a digit modification treatment.

LCR Guide Page

1. Click LCR/DR > LCR Guide Page.
The Least Cost Routing Guide Page screen displays.
2. Click on any Program Number to start using the guide pages.
Note Every Guide Page has Back and Next buttons to help you navigate to the previous and next
programs in a group.

The Program at the end of a group has a Guide Page button instead of a Next button to take you to
the main Least Cost Routing Guide Page.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 9-13

 Services
LCR Overview

LCR Dialing Setup

Program 102 – Flexible Access Codes
Use this program to change the LCR access code. The default LCR access code is 9. You can change the
default access code to any number from 0~9, *, and/or #. Enter an access code number that does not
conflict with the existing numbering plan.

Program 530 – DR/LCR Screening Table

Use this program to define special dialing codes that are normally dialed in front of telephone numbers
(example *82, *67). It defines what DR and LCR action should be applied after users dial the special code
(Bypass or Skip and Apply DR).

Program 117 – Public Dial Plan Digit Analysis

Use this program to prevent standard telephone users from circumventing DR by sending DTMF tones to
the PSTN before DR analysis is complete. In LCR applications, it allows calls to cut through to the PSTN
immediately so users do not have to wait for a pause timer to cut through after dialing a number.

LCR Route Plan Setup

Program 520 – LCR Local Route Plan Assignments
Use this program to select which LCR route plan is used for local calls.

Programs 521/ 522– Route Plan Digit Analysis Table

Use this program to assign Analysis and Exception digits (digit strings) to route plan tables.
This screen enables you to view, add and delete Analysis Digits and Exception Digits.

Programs 526 / 525 – Route Definition and Modified Digits Assignments

Use these programs to assign OLG groups and modified digit tables to Route Definitions.

Program 524 – Route Choice Table Assignments

Use this program to assign Route Definitions to Route Choice Tables.
Note Double click a row to activate the Add, Modify and Delete buttons.

Program 523 – LCR Route Schedule Assignments

Use this program to define the Route Schedule for each Route Plan.

9-14 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Services
LCR Overview

Table Buttons on the LCR Route Schedule Screen

Notes

• Clicking table buttons display exclusive and dynamic tables. You can move these tables anywhere on
the screen by clicking the blue title bar and dragging it to a desired location.
• The tables are dynamic because you can click on any route plan on the 523 LCR Route Schedule
Assignment screen and notice the table information change to pertain to that route plan.
• Route/Plan Choice – Click this button to view route plans and route choice. This table combines all
information found in the Route Plan Analysis Digits table and Route Choice Definition table on a per
Route Plan basis.
• Route Plan Analysis Digits – Click this button to view the Route Plan Analysis table.
• Route Choice Definition – Click this button to view the Route Choice Table view.
• Station LCR Group – Click this button to view the Station LCR Group table.

LCR Day of Week and Time Zone Setup

Program 528 – LCR Days of the Week Assignments
Use this program to assign each day of the week as a Weekday, Weekend or Holiday.

Services
Program 529 – LCR Route Time Zone Assignments
Use this program to define Route Plan day types and time zones.

Program 527 – LCR Holiday Assignments

Use this program to assign which days of the year should follow LCR Holiday routing assignments.

LCR COS and Station Setup

Program 103 – Class of Service
Use this program to enable or disable LCR in COS feature sets.

Program 200 / 260– Station Data

Use this program to assign stations to COS feature sets and LCR station groups.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 9-15

 Services
LCR/DR

LCR/DR
LCR Assignment
Program Number(s): 520, 521 and 522
User access to LCR is determined by programming the following:
• 103 COS Assignment – 29 LCR Feature (see page 4-9) enables access to LCR COS.
• 200 Station Assignment – 07 LCR Group (see page 5-1) assigns a station to an LCR Group.
• 304 ILG Assignment – 23 LCR Group (see page 6-1) assigns an LCR Group to an ILG.
Note Appropriate COS, DRL and FRL assignments must be made to all LCR stations and trunks.

1. Click Advanced Configuration > LCR/DR > Assignment.

2. Enter Program 520 data.
3. Enter Program 521 data.
4. Enter Program 522 data.
5. Get Default - sets all data to factory defaults.
6. Click Submit.

520 LCR Local Route Plan Assignment

Prerequisite Program: None
This assignment is used to select which of 64 LCR Route Plans should be used to route local calls. The
Local Route Plan, which must be defined in the route definition assignment, determines which CO line
group is used for local outgoing calls.

FIELD DESCRIPTION

01 Local Area Code Enter the 3-digit area code for the dialing area where the system is installed.
This is the area code of the CO that provides local CO lines to the system. If no
data is entered in this field, any previously programmed data is lost.
Possible values:3 digits (default = no value)

02 Local Route Plan Enter the LCR route plan number to be used to route local calls. Local calls are
made by dialing 7-digit public telephone numbers not requiring an Area Code.
Total Route Plans available for CTX28, CIX40, CIX200 and CIX670 basic or
expanded is 64.
Total Route Plans available for CIX1200 Basic or expanded is 128

03 LCR Campon Enable - to camp-on to a line group when all lines in the group selected by LCR
are busy - this will send ringback tone to the user and the user will be camped-
on to the busy line group until a line becomes available to make the outgoing
call.
Disabled - to not camp-on to a busy line group when using LCR. Will send busy
tone to the user when using LCR and all lines in the selected line group are
busy. The user does not camp-on to the line group and will have to try to make
the call again.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)

9-16 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Services
LCR/DR

521 LCR Route Plan Digit Analysis Assignment

Prerequisite Program: 520 page 9-16
This command assigns number to the Route Plan Analysis Table.

FIELD DESCRIPTION

00 Analysis Digits Enter the external digit strings (area codes, toll prefixes, service codes, etc.)
to be assigned to a Route Plan.
A Route Plan Analysis Table may have up to 1280 members in CTX28,
CIX40, CIX100, CIX200 and CIX/670 basic and expanded.
A Route Plan Analysis Table may have up to 2500 members in CTX28,
CIX40, CIX100, CIX200 and CIX/670 basic and expanded.
A digit string can only be in one table at a time.
Digits may include wild cards 'X' and 'N' where X = 0~9 and N = 2~9.
A digit string may be up to 7 digits for CTX28, CIX40, CIX100, CIX200 and
CIX/670 basic and expanded.
A digit string may be up to 19 digits for CIX1200 basic and expanded.
(default = no value)

Services
01 Route Plan Number Enter the LCR route plan number that should be used.
Total Route Plans available for CTX28, CIX40, CIX200 and CIX670 basic or
expanded is 64.
Total Route Plans available for CIX1200 Basic or expanded is 128.
Entering Remove deletes the Analysis Digits from the table where they had
been assigned.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 9-17

 Services
LCR/DR

522 LCR Exception Number Route Plans

Prerequisite Program: 521 page 9-17
This command assigns up to 1280 dialed external digit strings to the LCR Route Plan Exception Analysis
Table which assigns each string to 1 of 64 Route Choice Tables. The values expressed here are
exceptions to the values established in Program 521.

FIELD DESCRIPTION

00 Exception Digits Enter the external digit strings (area codes, toll prefixes, service codes, etc.)
to be assigned to a Exception Plan Analysis Table.
Strings may be up to 19 digits long.
An Exception Plan Analysis Table may have up to 1280 members in CTX28,
CIX40, CIX100, CIX200 and CIX/670 basic and expanded.
An Exception Plan Analysis Table may have up to 2500 members in
CIX1200 basic and expanded.
A digit string can only be in one table at a time.
Digits may include wild cards 'X' and 'N' where X = 0~9 and N = 2~9.
(default = no value).

01 Exception Route Plan Enter the LCR route plan number that should be used.
Total Route Plans available for CTX28, CIX40, CIX200 and CIX670 basic or
expanded is 64. Total Route Plans available for CIX1200 Basic or expanded
is 128.
Entering Remove deletes the Exception Digits from the table.

9-18 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Services
Route Define

Route Define
Program Number(s): 524, 525 and 526
Define the participants in the LCR Route Plan.

1. Select LCR/DR > Route Define.

2. Enter Program 524 data.
3. Enter Program 525 data.
4. Enter Program 526 data.
5. Get Default - sets all data to factory defaults.
6. Click Submit.

524 Route Table to Route Definition Assignment

Prerequisite Program: 525 below
This command defines up to six possible Route Definitions for a given Route Table.

Services
FIELD DESCRIPTION

00 Route Choice Table Enter the Route Choice Table to be defined.

Possible values:1~128(default = no data)

01 Route Definition 1 Enter Route Definitions to be assigned to this Route Table.

02 Route Definition 2 Possible values:1~128, 0 = Delete (default = no data)

03 Route Definition 3

04 Route Definition 4

05 Route Definition 5

06 Route Definition 6

Notes For Field 01 Route Definition 1 enter the First Choice Route.
For Field 02 Route Definition 2 enter the Second Choice Route.
For Field 03 Route Definition 3 enter the Third Choice Route.
For Field 04 Route Definition 4 enter the Fourth Choice Route.
For Field 05 Route Definition 5 enter the Fifth Choice Route.
For Field 06 Route Definition 6 enter the Sixth Choice Route.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 9-19

 Services
Route Define

525 LCR Route Definition Assignment

Prerequisite Program: 520 page 9-16
This command assigns Route Definitions for LCR. A Route Definition consists of an OLG and a Digit
Modification index.

FIELD DESCRIPTION

00 Route Definition Select the Route Definition number.

Possible values:1~128 (default = no data)

01 OLG Number Select the OLG Number associated with this Route Definition. “0” means no
data.
Possible values:1~6 CTX28, 1~32 CIX40, 1~32 CTX/CIX/100, 1~50 CIX200,
1~50 CTX/CIX 670 BCTU only or BBCU only, 1~128 CTX/
CIX670 BCTU + BEXU or BBCU + BECU, 1~50 CIX1200
HCTU only, 1~128 CIX1200 HCTU + HEXAU, 1~220 CIX1200
HCTU + HEXBU
(default = no data)

02 Digit Modification Select the Digit Modification Index associated with this Route Definition.
Index Possible values: 1~128 (default = no data) “0” means no data.

526 Modified Digits Table Assignments

Prerequisite Program: 521 page 9-17
This command modifies LCR dialed numbers by deleting digits from, and adding digits to, the dialed
numbers.

FIELD DESCRIPTION

00 Digit Modification Select the Digit Modification Index used by the LCR Route Choice table to
Index determine the digit modification treatment to be applied. Leading digits of a
dialed number may be deleted; leading and trailing digits may be added to
the dialed number.
Possible values:1~128 (default = no value)

01 Delete Digits Select the quantity of digits to be deleted from the beginning of dialed
number.
Possible values:0~20 (default = 0)

02 Add Leading Digits Enter the digit string (up to 23 characters) to be inserted at the beginning of
the number. This can include pauses, and links to a maximum of 8
authorization codes.
Possible values:Up to 23 ASCII characters (default = no value)

03 Add Trailing Digits Enter the digit string (up to 23 characters) to be inserted at the end of the
number. This can include pauses, and links to a maximum of 8 authorization
codes.
Possible values:Up to 23 ASCII characters (default = no value)

9-20 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Services
Route Schedule

Route Schedule
Program Number(s): 523 and 528

1. Select LCR/DR > Route Schedule.

2. Enter Program 523 data.
3. Enter Program 528 data.
4. Get Default - restores all data to factory defaults.
5. Click Submit.

523 LCR Route Plan Schedule Assignments

Prerequisite Program: None
This command assigns Route Plan Schedule Tables for LCR. Each table is a 3-dimensional array of 144
values (3 Types of Day x 3 Times of Day x 16 LCR Groups).

FIELD DESCRIPTION

Services
00 Route Plan Enter the Route Plan Number for which to build a schedule indexed by Time
of Day, Type of Day and LCR Group. Enter the LCR route plan number that
should be used. Total Route Plans available for CTX28, CIX40, CIX200 and
CIX670 basic or expanded is 64. Total Route Plans available for CIX1200
Basic or expanded is 128. Entering “0” deletes the Exception Digits from the
table. (default = no value)

01 Type of Day Select the Type of Day.

Possible values:Weekday (default), Weekend or Holiday

02 LCR Time of Day Select the Time Zone.

Possible values:Time Zone 1, Time Zone 2 or Time Zone 3 (default = no
value)

03 Station LCR Group Select the Station LCR Group.

Possible values:1~16 (default = 1)

04 Route Choice Table Enter the Route Choice Table Number to be used with this combination of
time, type and LCR group.
Possible values:1~128, delete (default = 1)

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 9-21

 Services
Route Schedule

528 LCR Public Day of Week Mapping Table

Prerequisite Program: 520 page 9-16
This command defines the days of the week as weekdays, weekend days or holidays for LCR.

FIELD DESCRIPTION

01 Monday Select the Day Type to assign to this day.

02 Tuesday Possible values:Weekday (default), Weekend or Holiday

03 Wednesday

04 Thursday

05 Friday

06 Saturday Select the Day Type to assign to this day.

Weekday, Weekend (default) or Holiday

07 Sunday Select the Day Type to assign to this day.

Weekday, Weekend (default) or Holiday

9-22 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Services
Public Holidays and LCR Time Zones

Public Holidays and LCR Time Zones

Program Number(s): 527 and 529

1. Select LCR/DR > LCR/Holiday Time.

2. Enter Program 527 data.
3. Enter Program 529 data.
4. Click Submit.

527 LCR Holiday Table

Prerequisite Program: None
This command assigns up to 128 holidays for LCR processing. These assignments are related to the day
assignments established in Program 523.
FIELD DESCRIPTION

00 Holiday Enter Date (YYYYMMDD). A maximum of 128 dates is allowed.

Possible values:YYYY = Year, MM = Month and DD = Day (default = no
value)

Services
01 Add/Delete Choose to add or delete this date from the holiday table. Expired dates
remain in the table unless deleted.
Possible values:Add or Delete (default)

529 LCR Route Plan Time Zone Assignment

Prerequisite Program: 520 page 9-16
Defines the time zones used by each route plan for each day type.
FIELD DESCRIPTION

00 Route Plan Select the LCR route plan number to assign to this time zone.
Possible values:Total Route Plans available for CTX28, CIX40, CIX200
and CIX670 basic or expanded is 64.Total Route Plans
available for CIX1200 Basic or expanded is 128. Entering
“0” deletes the Exception Digits from the table.(default =
no value)

01 LCR Day Type Select a day type for which to define a time zone.
Possible values:Weekday, Weekend or Holiday (default = no value)

02 LCR Time Zone Select a time zone.

Possible values:Zone 1, Zone 2 or Zone 3 (default = no value)

03 Start Time Enter the start time for the selected time zone (hhmm).
Note Enter your day type and time zone selections before entering data
into this field.
Possible values:hh = hour (0-23) and mm = minutes (0-59)
(default = 0000)

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 9-23

 Services
LCR/DR Screening

LCR/DR Screening
Program Number(s): 530 and 531
These programs enable and set up screening for DR and LCR.

1. Select LCR/DR > LCR/Holiday Time.

2. Enter Program 530 and 531 data or click one of the following buttons:
- List – view a summary list of programmed Screened Dial Strings or Behind Centrex Access Codes.
- Copy – Enter a Screened Dial String or Behind Centrex Access Code in the field with the
corresponding name. Click Copy to make a new assignment.
- Get Default - sets all data to factory defaults.
3. Click Submit.

530 DR LCR Screening Table Assignment

Prerequisite Program: None
This command screens dialed digits for access codes such as Carrier Identification Codes or Behind
Centrex/PBX access codes. Used only in LCR calls.
FIELD DESCRIPTION

00 Screening Dial String Enter the string of external digits to be screened.

Possible values:Up to 7 ASCII characters (default = no value)

01 Add String to Table Add the screening dial string to the DR LCR screening table.
Possible values:Add or Delete (default)

02 Destination Restriction Select DR Action.

Action
Possible values:Bypass (default) or Skip and Apply
• Bypass – Do not apply DR.
• Skip and Apply – Apply DR to the dialed digits excluding the
number of digits specified in skip length.

03 Least Cost Routing Select LCR Action.

Action
Possible values:
• Apply – (default) Apply LCR to all of the external dialed digits.
• Skip and Apply – Apply LCR to the dialed digits excluding the
number of digits specified in skip length.

04 Digit Modification Action Select Digit Modification application.

Possible values:
• Apply – (default) Apply digit modification from the first digit.
• Retain – Retain the skipped digits and apply digit modification
starting from the next digit specified by skip length.
• Discard – Discard the skipped digits and apply digit modification
starting from the next digit specified by skip length.

05 Skip Length Specify the number of digits at the beginning of the dial string to be
ignored before DR, Digit Modification, or LCR is applied.
Possible values:0~5, 0 = delete (default = 0)

9-24 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Services
LCR/DR Screening

531 DR Screening Table for OLG

Prerequisite Program: None
Assigns DR Screening Table for an Outgoing Line Group (OLG). Up to four codes may be assigned per
line group. Used for outgoing calls other than LCR.
FIELD DESCRIPTION

00 Outgoing Line Group Enter the OLG Number.

Possible values:1~6 CTX28, 1~32 CIX40, 1~32 CTX/CIX/100, 1~50
CIX200, 1~50 CTX/CIX 670 BCTU only or BBCU only,
1~128 CTX/CIX670 BCTU + BEXU or BBCU + BECU,
1~50 CIX1200 HCTU only, 1~128 CIX1200 HCTU +
HEXAU, 1~220 CIX1200 HCTU + HEXBU
(default = 0)

01 Behind Centrex Enter the access code expected by an attached Centrex, PBX or Tie line.
Access Code
Possible values:Up to 8 ASCII characters (default = no value)

02 Add or Delete Code Add or Delete the code entered above. Leaving the field empty removes an
existing code. Activation requires entries in OLG Group number and 01
Behind Centrex Access Code above.

Services
Possible values:Add or Delete (default)

03 DR Action for Apply DR to the dialed digits.

Centrex Possible values:
• Bypass (default) – does not apply DR.
• Skip and Apply– applies DR to the dialed digits excluding the number of
digits specified in Skip Length.

04 Skip Length Enter the number of leading digits to be ignored by DR.

Possible values:0~8 (default = 0)

05 Pause Length Enter the length of the pause to be inserted between dialing digits.
Possible values:0~10 (default = 0)

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 9-25

 Services
Destination Restriction

Destination Restriction
Program Number(s): 532, 533, 534 and 111
Assign Destination Restriction (DR) features for the Strata CIX.

1. Select LCR/DR > Destination Restriction.

2. Enter 00 DR Level (DRL).
3. Enter Program 532 data.
4. Enter Program 533 data. Click List to view a summary list of programmed Dial Strings.
5. Enter Program 534 data. Click List to view a summary list of programmed Dial Strings.
6. Enter Program 111 data.
7. Click Submit.

532 DRL Table Allow/Deny Definition

Prerequisite Program: 533 below.
Specify the Destination Restriction (DR) Table Type using this command.
FIELD DESCRIPTION

00 Destination Select the DRL Number.

Restriction Level
Possible values:1 ~ 16 (default = no value)
(DRL)

01 Type of Table Specify whether this DR Table is an allow table or deny table.
Possible values:Allow or Deny (default)

533 DRL Table Assignment

Prerequisite Program: None
This program adds or deletes entries in the DR Table associated with the DRL entered in Step 2 above.
FIELD DESCRIPTION

00 Destination Choose the DRL.

Restriction Level
Possible values:1 ~ 16 (default = no value)
(DRL)

01 Dial String Enter the string of dialed digits to be allowed or denied. Wild cards (X and
N) can only be assigned through Network eManager, not the programming
phones.
Possible values:1~7 digits (default = no value)

02 Add/Delete Add or delete the string entered in 01 Dial String above to the DR Table.
Possible values:Add or Delete (default)

9-26 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Services
Destination Restriction

534 DRL Exception Table Assignment

Prerequisite Program: 533 above
Note In CTX software R1 ~ R1.2 this table only allows 11 digits. Starting with R1.3 and up 13 digits are
allowed.
This program assigns a DRL Exception Table to an existing DRL table. If the DRL table is an allow table, its
Exception Table must be a deny table and vice versa.
FIELD DESCRIPTION

00 Destination Enter the DRL for which you want to populate an exception table.
Restriction Level
Possible values:1~16 (default = no value)
(DRL)

01 Exception Dial String Add the dial string you wish to be treated as an exception.
Possible values: 1~ 7 digits may include wild cards “X” and “N” where X =
0~9 and N = 2~9.(default = no value)

02 Add/Delete Add or delete the string entered in 01 DR exception table above to the DR
exception table.
Possible values:Add or Delete (default)

Services
111 DR Level (DRL)
Prerequisite Program: None
This program enables credit card calling for a DRL.
FIELD DESCRIPTION

00 Destination Enter the DRL number.

Restriction Level
Possible values:1~16 (default = no value)
(DRL)

01 Credit Card Calling Enable Credit Card Calling for this DRL.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)

DRL Table View

The DRL table view enables you to view all programmed DRLs. This table is a read only table. To access
the DRL table view, select > LCR/DR > DRL Table View.
See Table Views in Chapter 2 for table functionality.

Centrex/PBX Screening Table View

The Centrex/PBX Screening Table View enables you to the Centrex/PBX Screening table.
To access the Centrex/PBX Screening Table View, select LCR/DR > OLG Screening Table View.
See Table Views in Chapter 2 for table functionality.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 9-27

 Services
Account Codes

Account Codes
Program Number(s): 570, 506 and 571
Assign Account Code data to Strata CIX.

Account Codes can be verified or unverified. Verified Account Codes simultaneously function as
Authorization Codes. This is achieved by restricting a telephone’s calling privileges so that it cannot
complete a call without entering a code. The Strata CIX compares that code to entries in the table created
below and raises the telephone’s restrictions to permit the call. If the dialed code cannot be found in the
table, the call will be rejected. The requirement to enter an account code is established in the telephone’s
Class of Service.
Unverified account codes do not affect restriction levels and simply report the account code dialed in the
SMDR record for further processing by call accounting equipment.
All account codes in a CIX (verified or not) must have the same number of digits (Registered Digit Length,
parameter 02, in Program 570 below).
The system can be programmed to verify only a portion of an account code (Verified Program Length,
parameter 01, in Program 570 below). For example, a company may choose to identify its customers with
four digit numbers but have an overall account code length of eight digits. Registered Digit Length would
be eight and Verified Program Length would be four. Upon entry of the first four verifiable digits and then
four random digits to fill out the required length, the call would be processed.

1. Complete the data sheet.

2. Select > LCR/DR > Account Codes.
3. Enter Program 570 data.
4. Enter Program 506 data. Click List to view a summary list of programmed Account Codes.
5. Enter Program 571 data.
6. Get Default - sets all data to factory defaults.
7. Click Submit.

9-28 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Services
Account Codes

570 Account Code Digit Length

Prerequisite Program: None.
Accounting Codes need to be specified for the number of digits that are expected to be used for registering
a number. This allows dialing within Strata CIX to proceed automatically once the correct account code is
dialed. The following numbers are then dialed digits used for making the phone call.
A second length is provided to allow the number of digits to be used for verification of the code to be less
than the total code entered, thus the code may contain two parts, one required and one part optional to the
user.
FIELD DESCRIPTION

01 Verified Digit Length The Verified Digit Length sets the number of leading digits within an
account code to be verified against the table built in 506 Verified Account
Codes. The Verified Digit Length may be shorter than, or as long as, the
Registered Digit Length.
Note This field is not changed, when “506 Verified Account Codes” on
page 9-30 are registered.
Possible values:4~15 (default = 4)

02 Registered Digit The Registered Digit Length sets the number of digits in all account codes

Services
Length whether voluntary, forced and/or verified.
Note The Registered Digit Length (field 02) must be greater than or
equal to the Verified Digit Length (field 01).
Possible values:4~15 (default = 6)

03 Call Forward External Override Forced Account Code to allow Call Forwarding to an external
Override FAC destination. This applies to R2.22 MH233 and later software.
Possible values:Enable - Allows calls to a Forced Account Code station to
forward without entering an Account Code.
Disable - Requires the caller to enter an Account Code
before the call will forward. If a valid Account Code is not
entered the call will disconnect.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 9-29

 Services
Account Codes

506 Verified Account Codes

Prerequisite Program: 570 page 9-29
This program adds or deletes entries in the DR Table associated with the DRL entered in Step 2 on 9-26.
FIELD DESCRIPTION

Verified Account Code Enter the code to be used as a valid accounting code that the user is
expected to dial. The Registered Digit Length (field 02) must be greater
than or equal to the Verified Digit Length (field 01).
Number of Verified Account Codes per system:
135 (CIX/CTX100 & CTX28 & CIX40)
300 (CIX/CTX670 & CIX200 Basic)
1000 (CIX/CTX670 Exp)
300 (CIX200 Basic HCTU only)
4000 (CIX1200 Exp. HEXAU or HEXBU)
Possible values:4~15 digits (default = 6)

01 Verified Flag The Account Code Flag determines whether the number entered is used
as a verified account code or not. Some applications may allow users to
dial an account code which changes the restriction level for the call
allowing it to be placed.
Possible values:Set or No Set (default)
Note To delete a Verified Account Code set this field to No Set.

02 DRL This DRL is applied to a call when this Verified Account Code is entered.
Possible values:0~16 (default = 0)

03 FRL This FRLis applied when this Verified Account Code is entered.
Possible values:0~16 (default = 0)

04 Network COS This Network COS is applied when this Verified Account Code is entered.
Possible values:1~32 (default = 1)

571 Exception Numbers for Forced Account Codes

Prerequisite Program: 506 page 9-30
Up to four telephone numbers can be programmed as exceptions to the forced and /or verified account
code entries (including 911). These special codes enable numbers to bypass the verification process and
proceed unhindered.
FIELD DESCRIPTION

01 Exception Number 1 Enter a Forced Account Code Exception.

02 Exception Number 2 Possible values:Up to 4 digits.

Exception 1 default = 911
03 Exception Number 3 Exception 2~4 default = no value
04 Exception Number 4 Note One of the assigned exception numbers should be 911.
Exception numbers for forced account code fields cannot be
duplicated.

9-30 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Services
Account Codes

509 DR Override by System Speed Dial

Prerequisite Program: 105 System Data
This command assigns the service class components that are used by Destination Restriction Override By
Speed Dial. DR Override must first be enabled in Program 105, System Data.

1. Select > LCR/DR > DR Override by System Speed Dial.

2. Select the COS, DRL, FRL and QPL override values.
3. Get Default - sets all data to factory defaults.
4. Click Submit.

FIELD DESCRIPTION

01 Override COS Select the override COS value.

Possible values:1~32 (default =1)

02 Override DRL Select the override DRL value.

Possible values:1~16 (default =1)

03 Override FRL Select the override FRL value.

Services
Possible values:1~16 (default =1)

04 Override QPL Select the override QPL value.

Possible values:1~16 (default =1)

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 9-31

 Services
Account Codes

510 COS Override Assignment

Prerequisite Program: 105 System Data
Assigns the COS, FRL, DRL and QPL to be used by COS Override. If a COS parameter has been
assigned in either the original or the override COS, it will be applied.

1. Select > LCR/DR > COS Override.

2. Enter Program 510 data or select a COS Override Index and click Copy to copy settings from the
selected COS Override Index.
3. Get Default - sets all data to factory defaults.
4. Click Submit.

FIELD DESCRIPTION

00 COS Override Index Select the COS Override index.

Possible values:1~16 (default = no value)

01 COS Override Code Select the COS Override Code as entered by users. If no data is
entered in this field any previously entered data is erased.
Possible values:Up to 8 ASCII characters (default = no value)

02 Set COS Select COS number for this override code.

Possible values:1~32 (default = 1)

03 Set DRL Select DRL number for this override code.

Possible values:1~16 (default = 1)

04 Set FRL Select FRL number for this override code.

Possible values:1~16 (default = 1)

05 Set QPL Select QPL number for this override code.

Possible values:1~16 (default = 1)

06 Set Network COS Select Network COS index for this override code.
Possible values:1~32 (default = 1)

9-32 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Services
Account Codes

656 Node ID Assignment

System Availability: Not available with CTX28
Prerequisite Program: 102 page 4-3
This program assigns up to four network node IDs to process incoming network calls. Each node ID has an
overlap code. Strata CIX will substitute the overlap code for the node ID before processing the call further.
A network directory number consists of a node ID and the desired node.

1. Select > Strata Net > Node ID.

2. Enter Program 656 data.
3. Click Submit.

FIELD DESCRIPTION

01 Primary Node ID Enter the primary node ID for this node. This node ID identifies the
node used for administering Strata Net.
Possible values:Up to 6 digits (default = no value)

Primary Overlap Code Enter the overlap code associated with the primary node ID. An
overlap code is the string of digits that replaces the node ID to

Services
continue call processing.
Possible values:Up to 4 digits (default = no value)

02 Local Node ID 2 Enter node ID 2 for this node.

Possible values:Up to 6 digits (default = no value)

Overlap Code 2 Enter overlap code for node ID 2.

Possible values:Up to 4 digits (default = no value)

03 Local Node ID 3 Enter node ID 3 for this node.

Possible values:Up to 6 digits (default = no value)

Overlap Code 3 Enter overlap code for node ID 3.

Possible values:Up to 4 digits (default = no value)

04 Local Node ID 4 Enter node ID 4 for this node.

Possible values:Up to 6 digits (default = no value)

Overlap Code 4 Enter overlap code for node ID 4.

Possible values:Up to 4 digits (default = no value)

Note The node ID can be one to six digits in length. The system uses most significant digit matching. The
node ID leading digits must not conflict. For example if node ID 15 is assigned node ID 150 to 159
cannot be used. If node ID 135 is assigned node IDs 13 or 13xx cannot be used. See examples
below:

Node ID 27xxx - IDs 27000 to 27999 - 1000 IDs Starting with the digits 27 are possible.
Node ID 27xx - IDs 2700 to 2799 - 100 IDs Starting with the digits 27 are possible.
Node ID 27x - IDs 270 to 279 - 10 IDs Starting with the digits 27 are possible.
Node ID 27 - ID 27 - 1 ID Starting with the digits 27 is possible.
Note Node ID digits + DN digits must be seven digits or less.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 9-33

 Services
Account Codes

670 Remote Node Data Assignment

System Availability: Not available with CTX28
This command assigns the Remote node data (requires R1.3 and higher).

1. Select > Strata Net > Remote Node Data.

2. Enter Program 670 data.
3. Get Default - sets all data to factory defaults.
4. Click Submit.

FIELD DESCRIPTION

00 Remote Node ID Enter the Remote Node ID for this node.

Possible values:Up to 6 digits (default = no value)

01 Remote Node IP Enter the remote node IP address.

Address
Possible values:Up to 15 digits (default = no value)

02 Remote Node Port Enter the Remote Node port number for this node.
Number
Possible values:0~65535 (default = no value)

651 Private Routing Plan Analysis

System Availability: Not available with CTX28
Prerequisite Program: 656 page 9-33 and 306 page 6-5
Assigns the Node IDs to Route Choice Tables for Private Networking.

1. Select > Strata Net > Route Plan Analysis.

2. Enter the node ID number (six digit numeral) to add to the Private Routing Plan Analysis Table.
Click List to see a summary list of programmed Node IDs or click Copy to copy data from an existing
node ID. Get Default sets all data to factory defaults.
3. Select the Private Route Choice Table in which to add the node ID entered in Step 2 above. Possible
values are 1~64, 0 = Delete and default = 0.
4. Click Submit.

FIELD DESCRIPTION

00 Node ID Enter the node ID to be associated with a private route choice table
number.
Possible values:1~64 (default = no value)

01 Pvt Ntwk Route Enter the private route choice table number to be associated with this node
Choice Table ID. Entering 0 deletes the node ID.
Numbers Possible values:1~64, 0 = delete (default)

9-34 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Services
Private Route Choice Definition

Private Route Choice Definition

System Availability: Not available with CTX28
Program Number(s): 653, 654 and 655
Use these command to define Private Network Routing parameters.

1. Select > Strata Net > Route Choice.

2. Enter Program 653, 654 and 655 data.
3. Select the Private Network.
4. Get Default - sets all data to factory defaults.
5. Click Submit.

653 Private Route Choice Table Assignment

Prerequisite Program: None
Use this command to define a Private Route Choice Table. A Private Route Choice Table contains up to six
Route Definitions. The system will step through these route definitions in terminating hunt fashion to find a

Services
route to the desired private networking node. There may be up to 64 Route Choice Tables.
FIELD DESCRIPTION

00 Pvt Ntwk Route Select the private network route choice table number.
Choice Table Number
Possible values:1~64 (default = no value)

01~06 Route Definition Select route definition tables 1~6 to be used for this private network route
Tables choice.
Possible values:1~64, 0 = delete (default)

654 Private Route Definition Table Assignment

System Availability: Not available with CTX28
Prerequisite Program: None
Use this command to define a Private Route Definition. A Private Route Definition consists of an OLG and
a pointer to the private digit modification table that contains the dialed digits to be deleted and/or inserted
before being communicated to the distant node.
FIELD DESCRIPTION

00 Private Network Select the number of the Private Route Definition to be defined or deleted.
Route Definition
Possible values:1~64 (default = no value)

01 Outgoing Line Group Select the OLG to be used by this route definition.
Possible values:0~32 (CIX100), 0~50 (CIX200, CIX670/CIX1200 Basic),
0~128 (CIX670 Exp, CIX1200 Exp A), 0~220 (CIX1200
Exp B)
(default = 0)

02 Digit Modification Select the Digit Modification Table to be used by this route definition.
Table
Possible values:1~64, 0 = delete (default)

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 9-35

 Services
Private Route Choice Definition

655 Private Network Digit Modification Table Assignment

System Availability: Not available with CTX28
Prerequisite Program: None
This command assigns Digit Modification Tables for Private Networking.
FIELD DESCRIPTION

00 Private Network Digit Select the private network digit modification table to be defined.
Modification Table
Possible values:1~64 (default = no value)

01 Deleted Digits Select the number of leading digits to be deleted.

Possible values:1~10, 0 = delete (default)

02 Insert Leading Digits Select the leading digits to be inserted.

Possible values:Up to 23 digits (default = no value)

9-36 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Services
Mapping

Mapping
System Availability: Not available with CTX28
Program Number(s): 657, 658, 659 and 660
The following programs map network and primary COS, DRL, FRL and QPL settings to each other.

1. Select > Strata Net > Mapping.

2. Enter Program 657 data.
3. Enter Program 658 data.
4. Enter Program 659 data.
5. Enter Program 660 data.
6. Get Default - sets all data to factory defaults.
7. Click Submit.

657 Network COS Mapping Table

System Availability: Not available with CTX28

Services
Prerequisite Program: None
This table maps a network COS received as part of a Traveling Class Mark to a local Class of Service for
access to local services. There is no translation of outgoing network COS.
FIELD DESCRIPTION

Ntwk COS Enter the network COS to be mapped.

Possible values:1~32 (default = no value)

Local COS Enter the Local COS to be used in place of the received network COS.
Possible values:1~32 (default = no value)

02 Off-hook Call Choose whether an incoming call with this network COS can activate OCA.
Announce Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)

03 System Speed Dial Choose whether an incoming call with this network COS can use a system
speed dial number to make an outgoing call.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)

04 COS Override Choose whether an incoming call with this network COS can use Class of
Service Override.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)

05 TGAC Override Choose whether an incoming call with this network COS can override local
trunk group access control. Typically an attendant function.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 9-37

 Services
Mapping

658 / 659 / 660 Network DRL/FRL/QPL Mapping Tables

System Availability: Not available with CTX28
Prerequisite Program: None
These commands are used to establish two mapping tables to equate local DRLs, FRLs and QPLs with
network DRLs, FRLs and QPLs for both outbound and inbound network calls.
FIELD DESCRIPTION

Type Select the network DRL/FRL/QPL type.

Possible values:Outbound or Inbound (default = no value)
• Outbound – maps a local DRL/FRL/QPL to a network DRL/FRL/QPL.
• Inbound – maps a Network DRL/FRL/QPL to a local DRL/FRL/QPL.

Network DRL/FRL/QPL Enter the network DRL/FRL/QPL (for outbound) you want to map to a local
DRL/FRL/QPL.
Possible values:DRL/FRL/QPL1~DRL/FRL/QPL16 (1~16 (default = 1))

Local DRL/FRL/QPL Enter the Local DRL/FRL/QPL (for inbound) you want to map to the
network DRL/FRL/QPL selected in the network DRL/FRL/QPL field above.
Possible values:1~16 (default = 1)

661 Network DN Table Assignment

System Availability: Not available with CTX28
Prerequisite Program: None
This program assigns the PDN, PhDN or Pilot DNs to a CIX node ID. This includes all DNs in all CIX nodes
on the CIX network except the DNs in the node you are currently programming.
This enables someone in one node to call an extension in another node without having to dial the node ID
number. The caller dials the extension and the system appends the node ID. This function is transparent to
the caller and the dialed party. (See example following.)
Capacity: CITX100, CIX200, CIX670 - 3000; CIX1200 - 6000

1. Select Strata Net > Network DN Setup > Network DN Assignment (Prog. 661), and enter a network DN
followed by its node ID. Repeat this process for each DN.
FIELD DESCRIPTION

00 Network DN Enter the PDN, PhDN or Pilot DNs that should be assigned to a CIX node
ID. This include all DNs in all CIX nodes on the CIX network except the
DNs in the node you are currently programming.
6000 (CIX1200), 3000 (CIX200 and CIX670), 1000 (CIX100) Five digits
max. (Default = No Data)

01 Node ID Enter the CIX node ID that should be assigned to the DN.
Possible values:Six digits max. (Default = No Data)

9-38 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Services
Mapping

Example
Refer to the illustration below and this example: When programming the DNs for telephones in node 10,
enter the DNs and their node ID numbers for DNs in nodes 11 and 12 into the network DN table,
Program 661.

Services
Notes
• If the same DN exists in more than one node (i.e., DN 400), it should not be placed in the node ID tables
of any node. The user must dial the node ID where the DN is located plus the DN to call the DN.
• When using network DN tables for CIX networking assign the primary node ID in Program 656, but do
not assign overlap codes.
The networking tables show the DN numbers and node ID that have been assigned.

219 Network DSS Notify Data Delete

System Availability: Not available with CTX28
This program lets you disable the DSS function for the node ID entered in this screen.
Important! Do not use this program unless requested by Toshiba Technical Support.
1. Select > Strata Net > Delete DSS Node ID.
2. Enter the node ID of the Network DSS key Notify Data to be deleted.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 9-39

 Services
Strata Net Over IP

Strata Net Over IP

System Availability: Not available with CTX28
To use programs 671 and 672, refer to “Strata Net over IP Programming Guidelines” on page A-21.

671 IP Address Convert Table

1. Select > Strata Net > Network Over IP. Go to the IP Route tab.
2. Enter Program 671 data.
3. Get Default - sets all data to factory defaults.
4. Click Submit.

FIELD DESCRIPTION

Remote Node ID Enter the node ID of the remote CIX that the primary CIX should route to
in the IP private network.
Possible values:Up to six digits (default = no data)

01 IP Address Route 1 Enter the IP address of the remote xIPU that should be routed to first.
Possible values:Valid IP address

02 IP Address Route 2 Enter the IP address of the remote xIUP that should be used if all
channels in the first xIUP route is busy or disabled.
Possible values:Valid IP address

03 IP Address Route 3 Enter the IP address of the remote xIUP that should be used if all
channels in xIUP Route 1 and 2 are busy or disabled.
Possible values:Valid IP address

04IP Address Route 4 Enter the IP address of the remote xIUP that should be used if all
channels in xIUP Route 1, 2 and 3 are busy or disabled.
Possible values:Valid IP address

05 IP Address Route 5 Enter the IP address of the remote xIUP that should be used if all
channels in xIUP Route 1, 2, 3 and 4 are busy or disabled.
Possible values:Valid IP address

06 IP Address Route 6 Enter the IP address of the remote xIUP that should be used if all
channels in xIUP Route 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 are busy or disabled.
Possible values:Valid IP address

9-40 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Services
Strata Net Over IP

672, 673 Node ID Detail Information

System Availability: Not available with CTX28
This command assigns the parameters to be used by MIPU, GIPU, LIPU or BIPU-Q1As at the remote
nodes connecting to the MIPU, GIPU, LIPU or BIPU-Q1A in the local node over IP Private Networking.

Important!
• These parameters must match all nodes on the IP network.
• When setting node ID assignments on an Strata Net IP network, the node ID assignment settings for
each node on an end-to-end connection must be the same.
• Whenever node ID assignment changes are made for IP telephones or Strata Net IP Node IDs, Toshiba
recommends pressing the RESET button on the BIPU to assure the changes take effect.

1. Select > Strata Net > Network Over IP - Detail Info tab.
2. Enter Program 672 data.
3. Get Default - sets all data to factory defaults.
4. Click Submit.

Services
FIELD DESCRIPTION

Remote Node ID Node ID of remote CIX connected to this CIX with xIUP, IP networking. Refer
to Program 152.
Possible values:Up to six digits (default = no data)

01 IP Protocol Type Select the desired IP protocol to be used by the xIUP at the remote node. This
parameter must match on both nodes of an end-to-end connection on the IP
network.
Possible values:Strata Net IP (default), H.323 (do not use; H.323 is not
available)

02 Voice Packet Table Select the desired voice packet configuration table number (programmed in
this CIX) to be used by the BIUP-Q1A at the remote node. Voice Packet tables
are configured in Program 152.
Possible values:1~128 (CIX100, CIX200, CIX670/CIX1200 Basic) 1~256
(CIX670/CIX1200 Exp.) (default = 1)

03 TCP Connection Select whether to release TCP connection when the call was released. TCP
Release release should be enabled for normal IP calling operation.
This parameter must match on both nodes of an end-to-end connection on the
IP network.
Possible values:Enable (default) or disable

Notes
• If disabled, the TCP connection is connected continually.
• This parameter is normally used with its default, which means TCP
connection is established and released for each call. If there are only two
nodes on Strata Net over IP network, this parameter should be set to
Disable which means TCP connection is always established.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 9-41

 Services
Strata Net Over IP

FIELD DESCRIPTION

04 H.323 Fast Fast connection should be enabled for H.323 protocol only when the remote
Connection end has this option enabled. This should be disabled for Strata Net IP
Protocol.
Possible values:Enable (default) or disable

05 Channel Negotiation Select whether channel negotiation for Call Control is applied or not. This
parameter must match on both nodes of an end-to-end connection on the IP
network. This programming is applied only to H.323 protocol.
Possible values:Enable or disable (default)

06 Audio Codec Select the desired audio codec type.

Important! G.711 must be used for transmission of end-to-end
DTMF signaling. G.711 provides the highest voice
quality but requires the most bandwidth.
This parameter must match on both nodes of an end-to-end connection on the
IP network.
Possible values:G711(default), G.711MU, G.711A, or G729A

07 DTMF Translation Select of whether DTMF translation by the control channel is enabled or not.
This parameter should be enabled when using G.729A codecs and disabled if
using G.711 codecs for end-to-end DTMF signaling.
This parameter must match on both nodes of an end-to-end connection on the
IP network.
Possible values:Enable or disable (default)

08 E911 Priority If E911 calls originated from this CIX should be sent over the IP network to the
selected remote node, enter the E911 priority assignment that should be used
for the selected remote node. Assign 0 or 1~5.
Assign 1, the highest priority, to the remote node that has the main CAMA or
ISDN E911 connection; 2~5 reduces the E911 priority with 5 providing the
lowest priority - these priorities should be used for alternate network routing of
E911 calls.
If E911calls should not be sent over the IP network to the selected node,
assign 0 as the E911 priority.
Note If two or more remote nodes have the same priority, E911calls
will route to the CIX with the lowest node number.
Possible values:0 (default) ~5

9-42 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Services
Miscellaneous

Miscellaneous
The Strata CIX system can monitor SMDR, Call History and Behind Centrex. Use the following programs
to set up these services.

SMDR
The following enables programming for SMDR, Call History and Behind Connection settings.
Program Number(s): 512, 513 and 514
The following programs assigns system-wide SMDR parameters.

1. Select System > SMDR.

2. Enter Program 512 data.
3. Enter Program 513 data.
4. Enter Program 514 data.
5. Get Default - sets all data to factory defaults.
6. Click Submit.

Services
512 SMDR for System Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
Assigns system-wide SMDR parameters.

FIELD DESCRIPTION

01 Caller ID Field Include Caller ID records in SMDR.

Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)

02 Record for Generate B Record for an abandoned call.

Abandoned Call
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)

03 Record ANI Include ANI in SMDR record.

Possible values:Enable (default) or Disable

04 Record Authorization Include authorization codes in SMDR records.

Code
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)

05 End-of-Record CR Include a Carriage Return (CR) at the end of an SMDR record.

Possible values:Enable (default) or Disable

06 Abandoned Call Ring Enable - to output an SMDR call record of the ringing time of abandoned
Time calls.
Disable - to not output an SMDR call record of the ringing time of abandoned
calls.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 9-43

 Services
SMDR

FIELD DESCRIPTION

07 Global Call ID Number Enable - allow the Global Call ID Number to be generated in the SMDR data.
Disable - the Global Call ID Number will not be generated in the SMDR data.
Note The Global Call ID data (15-digit hex characters) is located in
columns 70-84 of the SMDR data stream in the following format:
ZXXXXXXYYYYYYYY
Z represents the direction of the call (S=originate or source node in
network call, D=destination node in network call, L=single node or
non-Network call.)
X represents the CIX node ID (6-digit hex characters)
Y represents the call number (8-digit hex characters)

513 SMDR for ILG Assignment

Prerequisite Program: None
This program assigns SMDR parameters for ILGs.

FIELD DESCRIPTION

00 Incoming Line Group Specify the ILG for which to set SMDR parameters.
(ILG)
Possible values:1~6 CTX28, 1~32 CIX40, 1~32 CTX/CIX/100, 1~50 CIX200,
1~50 CTX/CIX 670 BCTU only or BBCU only, 1~128 CTX/
CIX670 BCTU + BEXU or BBCU + BECU, 1~50 CIX1200
HCTU only, 1~128 CIX1200 HCTU + HEXAU, 1~220
CIX1200 HCTU + HEXBU (default = 0)

01 Generate SMDR Enable to generate records for this ILG.

Records
Possible values:Enable (default) or Disable

02 DNIS Field Indication Check to include DNIS information in records for this ILG.
Possible values:Enable (default) or Disable

03 Record Incoming Enable record generation for incoming calls with or without incoming SMDR
Call being enabled.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)

04 Record Abandoned Enable record generation for abandoned calls. Incoming SMDR must be
Calls turned on. Abandoned call records are generated whether or not incoming
SMDR has been set.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)

05 Display Transferred Select whether to charge a transferred call to the source or destination party.
Call Records
Possible values:Source (default) or Destination

06 Record QoS Enabling this options allows QoS information including delay, jitter and packet
Information loss output to SMDR for incoming VoIP calls. Incoming SMDR must be
turned on.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)

9-44 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Services
SMDR

514 SMDR for OLG Assignment

Prerequisite Program: None
This command assigns SMDR parameters for OLGs.
FIELD DESCRIPTION

00 Outgoing Line Group Specify the OLG for which to set SMDR parameters.
(OLG)
Possible values:1~6 CTX28, 1~32 CIX40, 1~32 CTX/CIX/100,1~50
CIX200, 1~50 CTX/CIX 670 BCTU only or BBCU only,
1~128 CTX/CIX670 BCTU + BEXU or BBCU + BECU,
1~50 CIX1200 HCTU only, 1~128 CIX1200 HCTU +
HEXAU, 1~220 CIX1200 HCTU + HEXBU
(default = 0)

02 Outgoing Records Generate records for outgoing calls. SMDR Record Display must be
enabled.
Possible values:Enable (default) or Disable

03 Charged Station Apply the SMDR record of a transferred call to its source or its destination.
Possible values:Source (default) or Destination

Services
04 Abandoned Record abandoned outbound calls
Outbound Call
Enable or Disable (default)

05 Record QoS Enable this option to allows QoS information including delay, jitter and
Information packet loss output to the SMDR for outgoing VoIP calls. Outgoing SMDR
must be turned on.
Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 9-45

 Services
SMDR

577 Caller History

Prerequisite Program: None
This command assigns which station stores Caller ID information for PDN,CO,GCO and POOL line
buttons.

1. Select Station > Call History Store Terminal.

2. Get Default - sets all data to factory defaults.
3. Click Submit.

FIELD DESCRIPTION

Ckt Type/Number Enter the Circuit Type and number. See the Table 9-2 below.
Possible values:Up to 6 digits (default = no value)

01 Primary DN Enter Station DN for which to store call history data.

Possible values:Up to 5 digits (default = no value)

Table 9-2 Circuit Type Code Definitions

Circuit Name Circuit Type Circuit Number Example

DN 1 0~99999 (DN) if DN is 200, value is 1200
CO 2 1~264 (Trunk Number) if CO is 30, value is 230
GCO 3 1~128 (GCO Key Group Number) if GCO is 50, value is 350
POOL 4 1~128 (POOL Key Group Number) if POOL is 80, value data is 480

650 Behind Centrex Assignment

Prerequisite Program: None
This feature allows Strata CIX to connect to the station side of a PBX or Centrex using a physical loop
trunk interface. DR and Least Cost Routing may need to account for access codes required by the PBX or
Centrex before connecting to the public network.

1. Click Advanced Configuration > Miscellaneous > Behind Centrex Assignment.

2. Get Default - sets all data to factory defaults.
3. Click Submit.
FIELD DESCRIPTION

00 OLG Number Select OLG that is attached to a Centrex (or other PBX).
Possible values:0~32 (CIX100), 0~50 (CIX200, CIX670/CIX1200 Basic),
0~128 (CIX670 Exp/CIX1200 ExpA), 0~220 (CIX1200
ExpB) (default = 0)

01 Behind Centrex Enable Behind Centrex Operation for this OLG.

Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)

02 Assume 9 Enable the Assume 9 feature.

Possible values:Enable or Disable (default)

03 Pause Timer Enter the number of seconds (0~5) the CIX will wait for second dial tone
from Centrex/PBX. Possible Value: 0~5 (default = 0

9-46 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Services
External Devices

External Devices
Door Phones
Program Number(s): 507, 576, 573 and 508
This command assigns Door Phone parameters.

1. Select Station > Door Phones.

2. Enter Door Phone Number or click one of the following buttons:
- List – View a summary list of programmed Door Phones.
- Create – Assigns a new Door Phone with default settings.
- Copy – Copies settings from an existing Door Phone.
- Delete – Deletes a Door Phone.
- Get Default - sets all data to factory defaults.
3. Enter remaining Program 507 data.
4. Enter Program 576 data.
5. Enter Program 508 data.
6. Click Submit.

Services
507, 573 Door Phone Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
This assignment configures Door Phone Control Boxes (DDCBs) and Door Phones (MDFBs). DDCBs can
be connected to ADKU, PDKU and/or BDKU interface PCBs. Up to three MDFBs can be connected to one
DDCB. A door lock control relay may be assigned to the B output of the DDCB in place of a MDFB door
phone (see “508 Door Lock Control Assignment” on page 9-50).
FIELD DESCRIPTION

00 Door Phone Number Enter the door phone number.

Possible values:1~6 (CIX40, CIX100), 1~9 (CIX200, CIX670/CIX1200
Basic),
1~24 (CIX670/CIX1200 Exp.), (default = no value)
Door phone numbering for the CIX40, CIX100, CIX670 and CIX1200is as
follows:
• DDCB 1 provides door phone numbers 1~3, 2 can be a door phone or
door lock.
• DDCB 2 provides door phone numbers 4~6, 5 can be a door phone or
door lock.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 9-47

 Services
External Devices

FIELD DESCRIPTION

Door phone numbering for CIX200, CIX670/CIX1200 Basic is as follows:

• DDCB 3 provides door phone numbers 7~9, 8 can be a door phone or
door lock.
Door phone numbering for CIX670/CIX1200 Exp. only is as follows:
• DDCB 4 provides door phones 10~12, 11can be a door phone or door
lock.
• DDCB 5 provides door phones 13~15, 14 can be a door phone or door
lock.
• DDCB 6 provides door phones 16~18, 17 can be a door phone or door
lock.
• DDCB 7 provides door phones 19~21, 20 can be a door phone or door
lock.
• DDCB 8 provides door phones 22~24, 23 can be a door phone or door
lock.
DDCBs are numbered by the system automatically by DDCB Equipment
(Shelf/Slot/Circuit). DDCB1 is assigned to the lowest DDCB Equipment
and DDCB2 to the next lowest, etc.
If DDCB Circuit B is set to door lock, a door phone cannot be set.

01 DDCB Equipment No. Enter the DDCB equipment number to which the door phone should be
assigned.
Enter data as XXYYZZ:
XX = cabinet 01~07
YY = slot 01~10
ZZ = analog trunk circuit 01~08, or ZZ = T1 channel 01~24.

Example: If a line should be assigned to an RCOU in cabinet shelf 5, slot 2,

circuit 3, enter 050203.

Cabinet numbers:
CIX100: Select 01 for Base and Exp cabinet.
CIX200: Select 01 for Base and 02 for Exp cabinet.
CIX670: Select 01 for Base and 02~07 for each Exp cabinet.
CIX1200: Select 01 for Base and 02~12 for each Exp cabinet.

Slot numbers:
CIX100: Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Exp slots.
CIX200: Select 01 ~ 04 for either cabinet.
CIX670: Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Exp slots.
CIX1200: Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Exp slots.

9-48 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Services
External Devices

FIELD DESCRIPTION

02 Tenant Number Enter the Tenant Number (1~8) for which the door phone should ring over
external page in the system Night mode. All CIX systems provide up to 8
tenants. CTX Release 1.0 only supports Tenant 1).
(default = 1)

04 Ring Duration Enter the time in seconds that the door phone should ring destination
devices when the door phone button is pressed.
The ring time can be 3 to 30 seconds set in 3 second intervals - each 3
second interval provides one ring to the destination. Destination devices
include selected DNs and page groups.
Possible values: 3~30 (default = 9)

05 LCD Name Display Enter the door phone name that should display on LCD telephones when
the door phone rings the telephones, or when the telephone calls the door
phone.
Possible values:Up to 16 characters (default = no value)

06 Day1 Destination/ Select the type of destination that should ring when the door phone button
Destination Number is pressed during the system Day1, Day2 or Night mode.

Services
07 Day2 Destination/ Possible values:None (default), DN or Paging Group 1~4 (CIX100);
Destination Number 1~8 (CIX200, CIX670/1200 Basic); 1~16 (CIX670 Exp),
1~24 (CIX1200 Exp)
08 Night Destination/
Destination Number Enter the destination number. If the ring destination type is a PDN or
PhDN, enter the directory number. If the ring destination type is page, enter
the page group number.
Possible values:Up to 5 ASCII characters (default = no value)

576 Door Phone Night Ring Over External Page

This assignment sets the Page Group that should ring during the system Night Mode when a door phone
button is pressed. The assignment can be made for Tenant 1 only.
FIELD DESCRIPTION

00 Tenant Number Select the system tenant number to be assigned door phone to page
group/night ringing.
Possible values:1(default)~8

01 Page Group Number Select the system page group number that should ring for the selected
tenant when a door phone button is pressed during the system night mode.
Possible values:0~4 (CIX100), 0~8 (CIX200, CIX670, C1200 Basic),
0~16 (CIX670 Exp), 0~24 (CIX1200 Exp) (default = 0)

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 9-49

 Services
External Devices

508 Door Lock Control Assignment

This assignment is used to configure up to 10 door lock control relays. The contacts of these relays are
used to control electrical door locks. One door lock relay can be assigned to each of the eight door phone
control boxs (DDCB, Port -B) and/or one to each of the two BIOU PCBs (any one of the four control
relays).
Note If a door lock is assigned to a DDCB, the second jack (Port B) will provide the door lock relay
contacts. This jack can not be used to connect an MDFB door phone.
FIELD DESCRIPTION

00 Door Lock Number Enter the door lock control number to configure.
Possible values:1~3 CTX28, CIX40, 1~4 CIX100, 1~5 CIX670 Basic, 1~10 CIX670
and CIX1200 Expanded (default = no value)

01 Interface Type Door lock control relay contacts are provided by the DDCB (Port - B) and BIOU
interface control relays.
Possible values:None (default), BIOU or DDCB

02 BIOU Relay Number Assign BIOU control relay as a door lock relay. This relay activates when the door
lock button is pressed or a door lock access code is dialed.
Possible values:0~8 (default = 0) BIOU1 provides control relays 1~4; BIOU2
provides control relays 5~8.
Note Assign BIOU control relay (1~8) as a door lock relay - this relay activates
when a door lock button is pressed or a door lock access code is dialed.
BIUO1 provides control relays 1 to 4. BIUO2 provides control relays 5 to 8.
The CIX100 ACTU and CIX200 built-in relays are programmed as relay 5.

9-50 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Services
External Devices

FIELD DESCRIPTION

03 DDCB Equipment No. Enter the DDCB equipment number to which the door lock should be assigned.
This is the cabinet, slot, and circuit number of the BDKU/BDKS or PDKU interface
PCB to which the DDCB is to be connected.
Enter data as XXYYZZ:
XX=cabinet 01~12
YY=slot 01~10
ZZ=circuit 01~16

Example: If the DDCB interface should be connected to a ADKU, PDKU, BEDKU,

or BDKU/BDKS in cabinet shelf 5, slot 2, circuit 3, enter 050203.
Note Note: If a PDN is assigned to the DDCB equipment number it must
be deleted, using PRG201, before attempting to assign the DDCB
console.
Cabinet numbers:
• CIX/CTX100: Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.

Services
• CIX200: Select 01 for Base and 02 for Expansion cabinet.
• CIX/CTX670: Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each
Expansion cabinet.
• CIX1200: Select 01 for Base and 02~12 respectively for each
Expansion cabinet.
Slot numbers:
• CIX/CTX100: Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion
slots.
• CIX/CTX100: Virtual Slot for ACTU Relay = Cabinet 02, Slot 05.
• CIX200: Select 01~04 for either cabinet.
• CIX/CTX670: Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion
slots.
• CXI1200:Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.
• CTX28 and CIX40 assignments are hard coded cannot be changed.
• Virtual Slot for GCTU Relay = Cabinet 02, Slot 05.
01, 01 - 8 digital telephones on motherboard (CTX28, CIX40 R1HW and R2HW).
01, 02 - 3 CO lines on motherboard (CTX28, CIX40 R1HW), 4 CO lines (CIX40
R2HW)
01, 03 - no card (CTX28, CIX40 R1HW), GVPH (CIX40 R2HW)
01, 04 - 1 (Base) or 2 (GSTU) analog station ports (CTX28, CIX40 R1HW and
R2HW)
01, 05 - GVMU (CTX28), GVPH (CIX40 R1HW), GIPx, MIPU or GCOCIH (CIX40
R2HW)
01, 06 - GIPx, MIPU16 or GCOCIH (CIX40 R1HW), no card (CTX28, CIX40 R2HW)
01, 07 - 8 digital telephones on GCDU (CTX28, CIX40 R1HW and R2HW).
01, 08 - 3 CO lines on GCDU (CTX28, CIX40 R1HW and R2HW).

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 9-51

 Services
External Devices

515 View BIOU Control Relay Assignments

Prerequisite Program: 100 page 4-1, and 105 page 4-15
This assignment is used to view functions of the four control relays on each BIOU set in Program 105 12
Night Relay and 18 Night Bell Relay; Program 508 Door Lock Control Assignment; and Program 503 19
BGM Mute Relay. The system allows up to two BIOUs to provide a total of eight control relays. The control
relays can be configured as an external BGM mute control, Night Bell control, Night Mode Control, and
Door Lock Control.
Notes

• BIOU-1 relays are identified as Control Relays 1~4.

• BIOU-2 relays are identified as Control Relays 5~8.

1. Select System > BIOU Relay Type.

2. Enter Program 515 data.
3. Get Default - sets all data to factory defaults.
4. Click Submit.

FIELD DESCRIPTION

00 BIOU (1 or 2) Enter the BOIU number.

Possible values:1 or 2 (default = no value)
Note BIOU 1 and BIOU 2 are assigned in Program 100 - Card Assignment.

01 BIOU Relay 1 or 5; View the function of BIOU1, control relay 1 or BIOU2, control relay 5:
or CIX100
View the function of BIOU1, control relay 2 or BIOU2, control relay 6:
02 BIOU Relay 2 or 6
View the function of BIOU1, control relay 3 or BIOU2, control relay 7:
03 BIOU Relay 3 or 7
View the function of BIOU1, control relay 4 or BIOU2, control relay 8:
04 BIOU Relay 4 or 8
Possible values:Not Use, Ext Paging, Night Bell, Night Relay or Door Lock
(default = no value)
• NOT USE – if the relay is not used.
• PAGE MUTE – External BGM mute control activates during an external
page (see “503 Paging Devices Group Assignments” on page 9-53).
• NIGHT BELL – Night bell control activates during the system night mode
only when incoming CO lines ring (see “102 Flexible Access Codes” on
page 4-3).
• NIGHT RELAY – Night mode control activates continuously during the
system night mode (see “105 System Data” on page 4-15).
• DOOR LOCK – Door lock control activates when a telephone's door unlock
button is pressed (see “508 Door Lock Control Assignment” on page 9-50).

9-52 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Services
External Devices

503 Paging Devices Group Assignments

Prerequisite Program: 502 page 5-33
Assigns BIOU Page Zone Relays to Page Groups.

1. Select Station > Paging Devices.

2. Enter 00 Page Zone Relay Number.
3. Check the Paging Groups that you wish to activate.
4. Select the external generic relay number.
5. Click Submit.

FIELD DESCRIPTION

00 Zone Relay Number Select the BIOU page zone relay that should be assigned to the page
groups below. This relay activates whenever the selected page group is
paged.
• BIOU1 = Zone Relays 1~4.
• BIOU2 = Zone Relays 5~8.
Possible values:1~8 (default = no value)

01-16 Page Groups Check the box if the selected BIOU page zone relay should activate with
17 All Page Group this page group.
18 All Call Possible values:On or Off (default)
Emergency Page
Group

19 BGM Mute Relay Assign BIOU generic relay as the BGM mute relay. This relay activates
20-27 PG17~24 (CIX1200 whenever the external page is in use
Exp) • BIOU1 = Generic Relays 1~4.
• BIOU2 = Generic Relays 5~8.
Possible values:1~8 (default = 0)
Note The CIX100 ACTU or CIX built-in relay is programmed as relay 5.
For this relay operation, BIOU2 is installed, as default, in a virtual
equipment position - Cabinet 2, Slot 5, PCB code 20, in Program
100. To install an actual BIOU2 and disable the ACTU built-in
relay, use the programming telephone to remove the virtual BIOU2
and then install the actual BIOU2 in Cabinet 01 Slot 01~08 in the
normal manner.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 9-53

 Services
External Devices

550 Enhanced 911 Emergency Call Group

Prerequisite Program: Program 105
This command assigns OLGs to the Enhanced 911 Emergency Call Group.

1. Select Trunk > Enhanced 911.

2. Select Program 550 data.
3. Click Submit.

FIELD DESCRIPTION

00 Emergency Call Specify the Emergency Call Group.

Group Number
Possible values:1~8 (default = no value)

01-08 OLG1~8 Specify the first through eighth OLG to be chosen for an E911 call.
Possible values:0~32 (CIX100), 0~50 (CIX200, CIX670/CIX1200 Basic),
0~128 (CIX670 Exp, CIX1200 Exp A), 0~220 (CIX1200
Exp B)
(default = 0)

9-54 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

Operation 10

This chapter discusses Strata eManager operational programming functions.

System Setup
Program Number(s): 900, 901 and 915
These programs enable programmers to initialize Strata CIX, check software versions and set the region
(for built-in parameters not changeable by jumper or switch - unique for each region and affect system
operation).
1. Select Maintenance > Hardware Info. and Control - CIX Processor.
2. Click Restart to reset Strata CIX or click Initialize CIX to delete programmed data and revert to default
settings.
3. 901 CIX Version data is for viewing only.
4. Get Default - sets all data to factory defaults.
5. Click Submit.

Operation

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 10-1

 Operation
System Setup

900 CTX/CIX Restart

Prerequisite Program: None
Select Maintenance > Hardware Info. and Control - CIX Processor.
This program enables you to reset hardware and initializes or restores programmed data.

CAUTION! Both commands will drop all existing calls.

FIELD DESCRIPTION

Restart CIX/CTX Clicking on this button initializes a System Power Off/Power On sequence to
reset hardware. All calls in progress are dropped. This is also known as an
Initialize Level 2.

Initialize CIX/CTX Clicking on this button invokes an Initialize Level 1 sequence which drops all
calls in progress, erases programmed data and enters default data into the
Strata CIX System.
If a Toshiba SM/SD is installed in the available slot, using this option restores
data from backed up from the SM/SD (see Restoring Data from SM/SD below).

Important! Choosing Initialize CIX without installing an SM/SD Card deletes all programmed data and
returns your Strata CIX to factory default settings. All previously programmed data is lost.

Restoring Data from SM/SD

When initializing with Initialize CIX, you can restore custom data that was previously programmed and
stored on an SM/SD card. To do so, follow the steps below:
1. Insert an SM/SD card that contains the Progdata folder with the default.dat file. The default.dat file
contains your custom settings and can be created by running Data Backup. See “910 Data Backup” on
page 10-9.
2. Run System Initialization by clicking Initialize CIX/CTX.
Notes
• Restoring data from the SM/SD card may take an hour or more.
• During the restore process the telephone LCD may display date and time. This does not necessarily
indicate completion of the restore process.
• To verify completion of the restore process, access the programming mode from a telephone and enter
your password. If the system enables you to continue, the data restore process is complete.
3. Remove the SM/SD card and restart the CIX again after restoring system data. This is necessary to
reset xIPUs, Strata Net, ISDN and other advanced features.

10-2 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Operation
System Setup

901 CTX/CIX Version And Processor Hardware

Prerequisite Program: None
Select Maintenance > Hardware Info. and Control - CIX Processor.
This program enables you to view the Active and Standby software versions installed on the Strata CIX
system processor.
FIELD DESCRIPTION

System Type Displays the system type that is connected.

Possible values:CIX1200, CIX670, CIX200, CIX100 (Active only).

Active Software Displays the software versions.

Standby Software These fields indicate the following:

A = Indicates software for USA, Canada or Mexico.
Rx.xx = Indicates the CIX release level.
M0011.00 = The software version number.
Note The Active software does not always have to be the same as the
Standby software, although the Active and Standby software versions
may be the same when you receive it from Toshiba.

DTMF, BBMS, BEXS, The check marks in these boxes indicate the hardware that is installed on the
BSIS, Ethernet, Strata CIX processor.
Modem, DREC On the CIX100:
Version, IPL Version
• Ethernet means AETS is installed on ACTU.
• Modem means AMDS is installed on ACTU.
• DTMF means ARCS is installed on ACTU.
• Indicates the DTMF/ABR software.

Operation
• Indicates basic boot-up software version.

915 Regional Selection

Prerequisite Program: None - Perform this program before doing any database programming.
1. Select Maintenance > Hardware Info. and Control - CIX Processor.
This program enables you to select the region for specific parameter operation.
FIELD DESCRIPTION

Region Select Region.

Possible values:
USA Singapore
Canada Malaysia
Mexico Indonesia
Taiwan Sri Lanka
Hong Kong Thailand
China Japan
UK Australia
Important! The region change does not take affect until the system has been initialized. This Level-
1initialize (Prog 900) will disable any database programming already in place.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 10-3

 Operation
System Setup

Set Time and Date

Prerequisite Program: None
This program enables you to change the system clock in Strata CIX.
Select System > Date and Time

FIELD DESCRIPTION

Date Set Strata CIX current date or select it from the date picker at right.
• Select current date (YYYYMMDD).
Possible values:YYYY = Year, MM = Month and DD = Day
• Current day of week will display once the year, month and day parameters
have been entered.
Possible values:Sunday ~ Saturday (Read only) (default = no value).
• Leap year will display based on the year entered.
Possible values:Leap, Leap Next x, where x = 1, 2 or 3. X. is the number of
years since the previous leap year (read only) (default = no
value).

Time Set Strata CIXs current time (hhmmss).

Possible values:hh = hour, mm = minutes and ss = seconds (default = no
value).

121 Automatic Day Light Savings Time Change

Prerequisite Program: None
This program enables the CIX to automatically change the system clock according to local day light
savings time (DST) changes.
Select System > Daylight Saving

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Enable Automatic This field is not set by default. This field must be set to allow automatic DST
Day Light Savings change.
Time Change
Change Based On The method used to set the day and time of day the DST change occurs.
Month, Week and Day
Possible values:Day of week (recommended) set the day, the week and the
of the Week
time for the change. For example: Sunday, The first week of
April at 2AM

Date (not recommended in the USA) The the date and time
for the change. Example Oct. 31, 2:00 AM
Begin Daylight Default is Sunday, first week of April, 2:00 am
Saving Time
End Daylight Saving Default is Sunday, last week of October, 2:00 am
Time

10-4 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Operation
System Setup

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Time Adjustment Defines the exact amount of time change. Default is one hour. The time
adjustment should not be long enough to cause a date change.
Change based on DST change can be set two ways:
Date and Time 1. Day of the week: time will change based on the Month, Time and Day of the
week set in this program
2. Date: time will change base on the Date and Time set in this program
Default: Day of the week

908 Secure Digital and SmartMedia

This program enables you to format and perform file management tasks on a Secure Digital or SmartMedia
card while it is installed in the CIX processor. Secure Digital (SD) cards are required for ACTU3A (CIX100),
BCTU2A (CIX670) and HCTU1A (CIX1200) processor cards.
Select Maintenance > SM/DS Card.

Secure Digital or SmartMedia Card

The SD card is replacing the SmartMedia (SM) card for use as a removable, portable memory device. The
SD is physically smaller than the SM card while storage capacity is the same or greater.
Notes
• 32MB or 64MB must be used for Strata CIX maintenance functions.
• The Strata CIX does not use Compact Flash or other similar types of small storage devices.

Functions

Operation
An SD or SM Card(s) is required for most of the important Strata CIX maintenance functions such as:
• Saving (Backup) and re-loading the programmed database of a particular Strata CIX system.
• Saving Event trace data files for troubleshooting problems.
• Updating or upgrading the Strata CIX operating software version.

Note The procedure below will refer to the SM/SD card. The same procedures are used for both the
SmartMedia and Secure Digital card.

Administration and Use

• When the SM/SD card is used to perform one of its functions, it is installed in the SM/SD slot of the
Strata CIX processor. It must be first formatted for Strata CIX operation by running Forced Format
(Program 908). Using the PC to format the SM/SD card is not recommended.
• The Strata CIX format will create five special folders. These folders and how to use them are explained
below and in Chapter 14–Data Backup and Restore.
1. Install the SM/SD Card into the SM/SD slot of the Strata CIX processor.
2. Select Maintenance > SM/SD Card.
3. Click one of the following:
• Normal Format – creates any CIX SM/SD folder that does not exist already. Existing folders are not
overwritten by this procedure.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 10-5

 Operation
System Setup

• Forced Format – erases any existing folders and files. All existing data is overwritten. It then creates
the five Strata CIX folders. See “CIX SM/SD Folders” on page 10-7 for more information.
• Unmount – copies the CIX event and alarm log files from the CIX processor buffers (RAM) to the
SM/SD card and then clears the buffers. It then stops CIX from writing to the SM/SD card so it can
be removed without damaging it.

CAUTION! Always run unmount before removing the SM/SD card. Failure to do so can cause
damage to the card.

• Transfer – copies the CIX event and alarm log files from the CIX processor buffers (RAM) to the SM/
SD card and then clears the buffers.

FIELD DESCRIPTION

Operation Displays the procedure selected.

Possible values:Normal Format, Forced Format, Unmount and Transfer.

Completion Displays the progress and status of the procedure selected.

Possible values:Processing or Complete

CTX/CIX SM/SD Contains files in the CIX SM/SD Folder.

Media Card
Possible values:Files listed under Admlog, Errlog, Evnttrce, Progdata, Program and
Folder
Traffic folders.

Local Folder You must manually create a new folder on your PC under CIX folder > WinAdmin >
Ctmc > Ctmc_Local > SM/SD Card > New Folder
The created folders will be available in the Local Folder drop-down box. You can
store CIX SM/SD files on these folders (See details below).

SM/SD Card FTP File Management

1. The Smart card files can be copied from the SM/SD card to your Network eManager PC and vice versa
using the Network eManager SM/SD FTP function. The SM/SD card must be installed in the CIX
processor and formatted using Program 908 before it can be used. After it is installed and formatted the
CIX will automatically store files under the Admlog, Errlog and Evnttrce folder of the SM/SD card - see
CIX SM/SD folders below for details.
2. New folders must be created (with your own chosen names) on the Network eManager PC using
Windows Explorer before you can use the SM/SD FTP screen. The folders must be created under the
following path which already exists on the Network eManager PC:
CIX>WinAdmin>Ctmc_Local>SM/SDCard >Your Folder Name.
3. After the SM card has been formatted and your folders have been created on the Network eManager
PC you can manage files as described below:
• Download: Copy files from the CIX SM/SD Card to the Network eManager PC.
• From the CIX SM/SD drop down, select the CIX SM/SD folder and file(s) that should be copied to
the Network eManager PC.
• From the Local Folder drop down, select the Network eManager PC folder to which the files should
be copied to - then click on Download.
• Upload: Copy files from the Network eManager PC to the CIX SM/SD card.

10-6 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Operation
System Setup

• From the Local Folder drop down, select the Network eManager PC SM/SD folder and file(s) that
should be copied to the CIX SM/SD card.
• From the CIX SM/SD Folder drop down, select the CIX SM/SD folder to which the files should be
copied to - then click on Upload.
• Delete SM File: Delete files stored on the CIX SM/SD card.
• From the CIX SM/SD drop down, select the CIX SM/SD folder and file(s) that should be deleted -
them click Delete SM file.

CIX SM/SD Folders

Running the Normal and Forced options of this program creates five folders on the SM/SD card as follows:
• Admlog – The Admlog folder saves a history of CIX Administration (programming) command entries in
xxx.SNP and xxx.DKT files. SNP files provide a log of Network eManager entries and DKT files provide
a log of programming telephone entries.
• Errlog – System error logs are saved into this folder. See Maintenance chapter, Event Trace Control
Programs 903, 904 and 905 to set up trace.
• Evnttrce – Network eManager Event Trace files are saved into this folder.
• Progdata – Your Strata CIX programmed settings are all saved in this folder. When a backup is
performed, Strata CIX saves programmed data to the Progdata folder as a default.dat file.

Note To perform the backup function you must first delete any existing default.dat files to allow CIX to
create a new default.dat file.

• Program – The operating software of the Strata CIX is saved in this folder as a nhs.prg file.

SM/SD Errors
Any error causes the SM/SD LED to flash (0.25sec ON – 0.25sec OFF continuous) except when the SM/
SD Volume Label is UPDATE; in this case the SM/SD LED will always flash.

Operation
SM/SD LED Specification
SM/SD LED, located near the SM/SD slot on the CIX processor, is lit when the following occurs:
• The SM/SD is accessed for read and write.
• Errors are detected. See above for the detail of errors.
• The SM/SD is inserted into the slot, SM/SD LED blinks once. This is because the system accesses the
media to read the housekeeping data. When it does not blink, it means that the SM/SD is not detected
by the system at all. If the blink does not stop, it means that any of above error is detected or the SM/
SD volume label is UPDATE.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 10-7

 Operation
System Setup

Remote Program Update

Important! Before beginning the Remote Update process:
• The SM/SD card must be formatted and installed in the system.
• Backup the existing database (***.dat) BEFORE starting the Remote Update process.
• Activation of the new software requires a clear-reboot operation that will drop all existing calls and will
take the system out of service from 10 minutes to an hour or more, depending on the system size.

1. Download the correct file for your system from the Toshiba FYI site:
- CIXYYYR5.20MT0xx file (current)
- CIXYYYR3.10MK0xx
(YYY=CIX system type; xx=version number)

2. DO NOT UNCOMPRESS the zip file. Copy the zip file to a folder on your PC.
3. In Network eManager, select Maintenance > CIX Software Update.

The first screen presents the option of backing up the CIX data before beginning the update process. If
you click Yes, the database backup screen displays allowing you to selet the database to backup. Once
the backup procedure has been completed, click the Browse to find the corresponding CIX software
update for each CIX system to be updated (the udpate software must match the corresponding system
or the update procedure will fail).
4. Click on Step 2 - Upload file(s) to eManager server. The update software is copied to a designated
folder in the Network eManager server
5. When all the CIX software updates have been uploaded, press the Start button to complete the update
process.

CIX Software Identification

Refer to the table below to identify CIX software release and builds in software file names or when verifying
CIX software versions. For example, if the software ID is ML029, this means ML0 is equal to CIX Release
4.0 and nn is the software build number 29.

CIX Release Software ID

R3.0 = MJ0nn
R3.1 = MK0nn
R4.0 = ML0nn
R4.1 = MN0nn
R4.2 = MP0nn
R5.0 = MR0nn
R5.1 = MS0nn
R5.2 = MT0nn
nn = Software build level/number

Remote Update for Release 4

The remote program update is administered in the same manner as previous releases. In previous
releases however, the remote update transferred approximately 200 small files. In R4 the remote update is
done with one large file, the same file used for local update.

10-8 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Operation
System Setup

It should be noted that the Network eManager screen will ‘freeze’ while modem updates are in progress.
This freeze, when using a dial-up modem connection, can last up to 60 minutes. You can check the status
of the file transfer when using a dial-up modem by right clicking on the connection icon that appears in the
tool tray at the bottom of the screen. (The Remote Update file size is about 9MB). Over a LAN connection
remote update takes approximately 15 seconds.

CAUTION! When updating a CIX200 R3 system with the existing LCTU1A card to R4, it will be
necessary to perform the update locally (remote update will not work). After the
system has been updated to R4 the Remote Update function will be available.

System Turn-on and Start-up Time

When a Release 4 system is turned on it takes about 30-90 seconds to operate. CIX Release 2.x and 3.x
take about 15 seconds.

910 Data Backup

Prerequisite Program: 908 page 10-5
This program enables you to backup programmed data from Strata CIX to an SM/SD Card.
1. Install the SM/SD Card into the designated slot of the Strata CIX processor.

Note The SM/SD card must be formatted by Strata CIX and the “Progdata” folder must be empty (no
Default.dat file)

2. Select Maintenance > Data Backup.

3. Select the system(s) to backup. Click Cancel to interrupt the selected function.
4. Click Backup.

Operation
5. The Progress field displays the progress of the selected function.

FIELD DESCRIPTION

Backup Select one of the following buttons. When performing a Backup, you must use
a formatted SM/SD card.
• Backup – Backup Strata CIX data to SM/SD card. This creates a Default.dat
file under the Progdata folder of the SM/SD card.
Notes
• Default.dat is the name of the file that is created and it contains all Strata
CIX programmed data. It is not default data. It is data that is currently
programmed in the Strata CIX.
• The Progdata folder on the SM/SD card must be empty before trying to
backup data. You can use FTP to copy and delete an existing default.dat
file.
• Cancel – Cancel the Backup/Restore function.

Completion Current Status of Backup.

Possible values:Completed successfully, Not completed.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 10-9

 Operation
System Setup

916 IP Configuration
Prerequisite Program: None
This program displays Network Communication IP address configuration. This program applies to the
Strata CIX Network (NIC) jack connection only. It does not apply to the CIX maintenance modem. To
change TCP/IP settings see “CIX Processor NIC Interface TCP/IP Auto-programming” on page 1-9.
1. Select Maintenance > CIX Processor IP Address.
2. The following Strata CIX default address displays:
• IP Address – a.b.c.d
where a.b.c.d = 0~255. This IP address is for the NIC/Ethernet only.
• Subnet Mask – e.f.g.h
where e.f.g.h = 0~255 (default = 255.255.255.0). Octet “h” in SubNet Mask cannot be the same as
octet “d” in the IP address.
• Default Gateway (default = 0.0.0.0).

10-10 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Operation
FTP User Accounts

FTP User Accounts

Prerequisite Program: None
This program establishes up to four FTP users for the built-in Strata CIX FTP server function located on the
CIX processor. These Strata CIX FTP accounts allow FTP access to the CIX SM/SD card. This allows
administration of the CIX SM/SD folders and files.
1. Select Maintenance > SM/SD FTP User Account.
2. Select the FTP Index. Up to four FTP users can be established.
3. Assign the FTP user’s Account Name.
4. Assign the FTP user a Password.
5. Enter the default folder that this FTP account is to access. This should be /0/ which is the root folder of
the Strata CIX SM/SD card.
6. Click Submit.
Note FTP User Accounts are stored in memory on the Strata CIX processor and are intentionally
deleted for security when the Strata CIX is powered off/on or initialized.

File Information
Prerequisite Program: None
This program enables you to view lists of Alarm and Administration files stored on the Strata CIX SM/SD
card. See “Set Time and Date” on page 10-4 for more information about these files.
1. Select Maintenance > Log/Trace Rile Setup > File Setup.
2. Select from one of the following options or click List to see a summary list of files already programmed
into the system. View the file name index, number, name, and creation and modification dates under
each of the categories listed below.

Operation
• Error Alarm Files.
• Error Alarm Expansion Files.
• SNMP Administrator Files (Network eManager log).
• DKT Administrator Files (programming telephone log).

Note For a detailed description on Trace function go to “Event Trace Control” on page 11-2.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 10-11

 Operation
Community Name

Community Name
Prerequisite Program: None
This program enables you to create and set up a Community Name (or passwords) to allow access to
specific Strata CIX systems.
1. Select Maintenance > SNMP Community Name.
2. Select the Index Number to assign to the Community or click one of the following buttons:
• Remove – highlight an existing community from the table and click this button to remove the
selected community from the index.
• Modify – highlight an existing community from the table and click this button to modify the IP
Address, Privileges and Administrator Level settings for this community.
3. Enter the remaining fields.
4. Click Submit.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Community Enter the Community name. The community name is a password that is stored in the
Name Strata CIX. To communicate with a Strata CIX, the Network eManager PC must send a
legal community name to the CIX when attempting to connect. The default community
name stored in the CIX is communityName (case sensitive). The CIX can store up to 10
community names.
IP Address Enter the IP address of the community name. Each community name is associated with an
IP address. This IP address is stored in the CIX with its associated community name.
Possible values:a.b.c.d.; a = 0~255, b = 0~255, c = 0~255, d = 0~255

Notes
• To allow any Network eManager PC to connect to the CIX with a particular community
name, enter 0.0.0.0 as the IP address for that community name.
• To allow only a specific Network eManager PC to connect to the CIX with a particular
community name, enter the static IP address of that PC for that community name.
Privileges Select User Privilege Levels. These privileges are to assign the community name or IP
address to an internal Strata CIX level.
Possible values:Read (default) or Write
Note Read – The user cannot modify Strata CIX data regardless of the Strata eManager
User level 1~4.
Write – The user can modify Strata CIX data according to the Strata eManager
user level 1~4.
Administrator Select Administrator Level. This level is to assign the community name or IP address to an
Level internal Strata CIX access level.
Possible values:Super User (default) or Ordinary User

Notes
• Super User – Strata CIX allows the user access to all CIX commands. Super Users can
only view ordinary user community names and their own community name but not
other Super User community names.
• Ordinary User – Strata CIX allows the user access to all CIX programs except 900
Initialization/Restart and 911 Update. Ordinary users can only view their own
community name.

10-12 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Operation
Community Name

909 MAC Address

Prerequisite Program: None
This program enables you to view the Media Access Control (MAC) Address assigned to your Strata CIX
System processor PCB. The MAC address is a unique serial number that is electronically coded in the CIX
processor memory at the factory – it cannot be changed. The MAC Address is also printed on the back of
the processor card that is used for the CIX1200 (Processor Part Number HCTU1A), CIX670 (Processor
PN BBCU1A) and CIX100 (Processor PN ACTU1A). A MAC Address must be converted to the applicable
serial number utilized in Internet FYI for License code generation.
1. Select Maintenance > CIX Processor MAC.
2. Serial Number - review your system serial number.

Note The serial number is printed on the invoice and bar code of the product shipment.

3. MAC Address displays as shown to the right. AABBCCDDEEFF = 0~9, A~F (hexadecimal values).
4. MAC Address Status - Network eManager verifies whether the MAC address retrieved from the CIX/
CTX is valid or not.

Operation

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 10-13

 Operation
License Control

License Control
The following programs enable you to issue and maintain License Activation settings for Strata Network
eManager users.
Prerequisite Program: None
This program enables you to issue new licenses.
1. Select Maintenance > Licensing > License Control.
2. Issue a License by cutting and pasting or manually entering the 60-character string in the License Code
text box.

Note If you are not adding the License Code to Network eManager immediately, copy and save the
code in Notepad -using Fixedsys font - onto a disk.

3. Click one of the following buttons:

• Issue – to issue the License Code.
• Cancel Issue – to cancel the License Code issue.
4. Activate the License entered above by selecting the delay timer.
5. Click one of the following buttons:
• Activate – for license activation.
• Cancel Activate – to cancel license activation.

Note Cancel Issue (step 3) and Cancel Activate buttons work only in Standby mode.

License Issue
Prerequisite Program: None
This program enables System Administrators to issue Licenses for Network eManager users.
FIELD DESCRIPTION

Status Status applies to both License issue and License Activate. Displays Licensing
Status.
Possible values:Not yet, Issue Stand by, Issue Finished, Cancel Issue, Activate
Stand by, Activate Finished or Cancel Activate

License Code Cut and paste the License Code text string or manually enter the License Code
(four characters per box).
Possible values:60 characters.
Note The License Code will have to be generated from Toshiba’s FYI website
(http://fyi.tsd.toshiba.com). After obtaining the License code from FYI
save it as a Text file. Cut and paste the License code obtained from
Toshiba’s FYI website. The License Code is made up of the MAC
Address and the number of ports. The License Code that is generated
for a particular MAC Address is only good for the processor that
contains that MAC Address.

10-14 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Operation
License Control

License Activate
Prerequisite Program: License Issue, above
This program enables activation of Network eManager licenses issued in License Issue.
FIELD DESCRIPTION

Delay Timer Select Activation Delay Timer in hours.

Possible values:0~24 (default = 0)

Notes
• Enter 0 to issue or activate the license immediately or 1~24 to set the
automatic delay activation feature, where 1 = 1 hour delay; 2 = 2 hour delay,
etc.
• After the license is activated, use the License Information screen below to
check that all ports and features have been activated properly.

License Information
The following programs enable you to set up Licensing details for Network eManager users.
Prerequisite Program: None
1. Select Mainteance > Licensing > License Information.
2. View Equipped License Information details for this Strata CIX account.
This view is read-only information.

Operation
FIELD DESCRIPTION

CIX/CTX Release This is the Basic Release Number of CIX software. To view the Active Software
Number Version, go to Operations/System Setup.

System Type This identifies the type of CIX system to which Strata eManager is currently
connected.

Maximum Number This identifies the maximum number of cabinets. The total of base plus
of Cabinets expansion cabinets.

Number of Serial This identifies the number of serial ports licensed on the BSIS.
Ports
One license is needed for each SMDR and SMDI device connected to BSIS.
(Programs 803 and 804 assigns BSIS ports).

Number Of DTMF This identifies the number of DTMF receivers licensed. The ARCS
Receivers Subassembly is required on the CIX100 processor, no additional hardware is
required for CIX670 or CIX1200.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 10-15

 Operation
License Control

FIELD DESCRIPTION

Number of Basic This identifies the number of Line circuits, Station circuits and ISDN B channels
Ports licensed, and shows the number of licenses in use (or programmed).
Station circuits use a license only when a PDN, DDS, BATI or door phone is
assigned to the circuit.
Analog and T1 line circuits use a license only when a line number is assigned to
the circuit or B-channel.
ISDN B-Channels use a license when assigned in PRI and BRI assignments.

Strata Net Channels This identifies the number of Strata Net channels licensed, and shows the
number of licenses in use (or programmed). This license must be enabled on
each CIX in a Strata Net network.

Number of CTI This identifies the number of licensed CTI sessions. Each Attendant Console,
Sessions the ACD or OAISYS Sever and each third party CTI application requires one
CTI session license. (Command 803 assigns CTI sessions).

Number Of This identifies the number of Attendant Consoles licensed. One license is
Attendant Consoles required for each Attendant Console. A CTI Session License is also required for
each Attendant Console (see Number of CTI Sessions).

Number of The number of Soft IP Phones licenses. Each phone requires one license.
Softphones

CIX IP Telephony Shows CIX IP Telephony is Enabled or Disabled.

Number Of IP The number of IP Endpoints licensed, and shows the number of licenses in use
Endpoints (or programmed).

Number Of LVMU Shows how many of the licensed LVMU channels are used.
Channels

SIP Trunk Channels Shows how many of the licensed SIP trunks are used.

Number of DP5022- Identifies the available number of licensed DP5022-SDM.

SDM

10-16 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Operation
Alarm Control

Alarm Control
System Availability: Not available with CTX28
Program Number(s): 919 and 920
Alarm Notification (AN) sends a notification of a system alarm condition. The notification can be sent over
a network connection to an eMonitor system, other application and, optionally, to a feature button on a
telephone. The alarm notification is SNMP trap data that can be sent to as many as 11 different IP
addresses. Up to eight stations can have a button programmed as an Alarm Indicator. There are three
categories of alarms: ISDN, T1, and System Resources.
There are two types of SNMP messages sent to the external, eMonitor, PC or Server; (1) Alarm
Notification when an error condition occurs. (2) Current Alarm Condition Summary sent every 10 minutes
whether an alarm has occurred or not.
The following programs enable you to control the alarm settings for a system or slot(s) for Network
eManager users.

System Alarm Control (Program 919)

Select Alarm/Traffic > Alarm Setup > System Alarm.
Prerequisite Program: None
This program resets all alarms and enables/disables the Current Alarm Summary notification.
FIELD DESCRIPTION

01 Clear Alarm The Clear command resets all current alarms. This command is used to
Buffer manually clear the buffer. Set to Invoke and Submit to clear the buffer.
When the clear command is invoked the system will not re-send a
persisting T1 or PRI alarm condition.

Operation
When an alarm condition is clear for several seconds, the system will clear
the buffer without the need to manually clear the buffer.
Possible values:Idle, Invoke (default = idle)

02 Alarm Buffer This command when enabled sends the alarm status to the Alarm Monitor
Status device periodically (approx. 10 minutes).
Possible values:Enable/Disable.

System ID This number is sent in the SNMP Alarm Trap data stream to the CIX Alarm
Monitor application, or any other SNMP trap monitor. It can be used as the
System ID of a CIX node or the same System ID can be assigned to
multiple nodes to identify a group of systems (max. 8-characters, alpha-
numeric).

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 10-17

 Operation
Alarm Control

Alarm Control for Slot (Program 920)

Select Alarm/Traffic > Alarm Setup > Alarm Slot.
Prerequisite Program: None
This program resets all alarms and enables/disables the Current Alarm Summary notification.
FIELD DESCRIPTION

00 Equipment Enter the cabinet and slot number of the equipment to be monitored.
Number
Notes
• If you want to monitor expansion cabinet power, you must set the
appropriate cabinet number (02~07) and slot number to “00.”

01 Alarm Enable/ Set this parameter to enable to monitor the selected equipment. Set this
Disable parameter to disable to not monitor the selected equipment.
Possible values:Enable/Disable.

Enable/Disable in Prog 920 Enable/Disable in Prog 919

10 minutes 10 minutes
Alarm Occurs
Current Alarm Summary

10-18 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Operation
Traffic Measurement

Traffic Measurement
Program 921 Control Setup
Prerequisite Program: None
Traffic Measurement (TM), when ON, sends data each hour. The data is stored in the SD/SM card on the
processor in a TRAFFIC folder or it can be sent to an external device via LAN or RS-232. Each file is
named: MMDDHHNN.trf.
MM = Month (01 - 12)
DD = Day (01 - 31)
HH = Hour (01 - 24)
NN = Sequence Number
1. Select Alarm/Traffic > Traffic Measure > Control Setup
2. Enter data.
3. Click Submit.
FIELD DESCRIPTION

01 Traffic Measurement On/ Select Enable to run Traffic Measurement. Select Disable to stop
Off Traffic Measurement.

02 Send TM Data to SM/SD Enable To send data to the SM/SD card (TRAFFIC
Card folder) and, if setup in I/O Device configuration,
to an external device (RS232c or LAN).
Disable To send data only to the external device. The
external device must be set (refer to the I/O
Device configuration Program 803).

03 Select Tenant to Measure Select the System Day/Night Table to be used for the work day and

Operation
non-work day and holiday definitions. This does not select TM by
tenant.

04 ~ 12 Time Zones Set the time zone (report hours) in each category.

13 Traffic Measurement Traffic intensity units

Units Possible values: Erlang or CCS (default)

ILG tab - 14 Select ILG Select which Incoming Line Group should have traffic measurment
enabled/disabled

OLG tab - 15 Select OLG Select which Outgoing Line Group should have traffic measurment
enabled/disabled

DID-Numbers Select which Incoming DID Line Group should have traffic
measurement enbled/disabled for selected DID numbers
16 Select DID ILG
The DID number in the selected DID Incoming Line Group that should
Select DID Number
have traffic measurement enabled/disabled. Use “?” to assign wild
cards.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 10-19

 Operation
Traffic Measurement

FIELD DESCRIPTION

DID Intercept Select which Incoming DID Line Group should have traffic
measurement enbaled/disabled for intercepted calls. Intercept occurs
17 Select DID ILG-Intercept
on DID calls when a received DID number does not match any DID
DID Intercept Call Type number programmed in the database, or a destination assignment
match was not found because a destination was not programmed in
the database or the destination was not operating properly.
Select No DID to measure DID calls that come to the system that are
not assigned as a DID number in the CIX database. Select Not
Determined to measure DID calls that come to the system that are not
assigned to a destination in the CIX database, or the destination is not
operating properly.

18 Measure DTMF Receivers Measure DTMF Receiver traffic

Possible values: Enable or Disable

19 Measure Conf. Circuits Measure Conference Circuit Receiver traffic

Possible values: Enable or Disable

20 Station Hunt Group No. Enter the Station Hunt Group number that should be included in Traffic
Measurement reports.
Possible values: Enable or Disable

10-20 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Operation
Traffic Measurement

Program 922 Specified Traffic Reports

Prerequisite Program: 921 Traffic Measurement
Traffic Reports are a summary of the traffic measurement data. Traffic Reports are stored as a file named
TRAFFIC.TRF, written to the SD/SM card. The SD/SM card must be inserted in the processor before
executing this program. The SD/SM card can store one traffic report. If a report is on the SD/SM card when
another report is started, the new report will overwrite the old report. The TRAFFIC.trf file will be mixed in
with the YYMMDDHHNN.trf files.
1. Select Alarm/Traffic > Traffic Measure > Traffic Report.
2. Enter data.
3. Click Submit.
FIELD DESCRIPTION

01 Start Traffic Report Start To start a report.

Cancel To stop a report that is running.

02 First Date in Traffic The first day of TM data to be included in the report. Traffic Report
Report Start Time - The first hour of the first day of TM data to be included in
the report.

03 Last Date in Traffic The last day of TM data to be included in the report. Traffic Report
Report Stop Time - The last hour of the first day of TM data to be included in
the report.

04 Traffic Report Status No entry. This is a status display.

Operation

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 10-21

 Operation
Trap Destinations (IP Trap Setup)

Trap Destinations (IP Trap Setup)

Prerequisite Program: None
This program enables you to setup Trap IP Destination.
1. Select Alarm/Traffic > Alarm Setup > IP Trap Destination.
2. Select a Trap IP Index number or click Add to add a Trap IP index.
3. Click Submit.

FIELD DESCRIPTION

IP Address Enter the IP address for remote connection. This is the IP address of the CIX
eMonitor PC or server or other trap monitor device.
Possible values:a.b.c.d.; a = 0~255, b = 0~255, c = 0~255, d = 0~255

Community Name Enter the Name of the Community.

This is the name assigned to the trap monitor PC or server. This is not a
password. It is only used to identify the location of the trap monitor device. The
default name for eMonitor is ‘eMonitor’ however any name can be used, such
as a location name (i.e.; Aledo).
Possible values:Alpha characters (default = no value).

10-22 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

Maintenance 11

This chapter discusses Strata CIX maintenance functions.

Trace Function
To analyze Strata CIX problems efficiently, Toshiba needs to get the event trace data and ISDN trace data.
These data sets enable analysis of the problems Strata CIX may experience. It is helpful for
troubleshooting problems that are difficult to duplicate.
Please contact Toshiba Technical Support to coordinate the running of the procedures that appear in this
section. Technical Support will walk you through the required steps.

Trace Data
By running traces when tests are conducted on your Strata CIX system, you ensure that data are being
kept in the event your system encounters a problem. This data can be sent to Toshiba Tech Support for
analysis and troubleshooting.
Strata CIX can collect the following trace data:
• Error Log (including crash dump)
• Event Trace
• ISDN L3 trace
Error Log
When Strata CIX detects an error the information is stored automatically without executing a program.
However, if the system locks up, you must restart the system to save the data to the Secure Digital (SD) or
SmartMedia (SM) card.

Start/Stop/Store Trace Data

Maintenance
When you execute a test, start recording the trace data by enabling the Event Trace Control (Program
903). See page 11-2. If you use ISDN extensions or trunks, please record ISDN trace data by starting “904
ISDN Trace Location” on page 11-3.
To test and retrieve trace data
Note This procedure requires use of optional SD/SM reading hardware and software or FTP management
with a personal computer. See “908 Secure Digital and SmartMedia” on page 10-5.
1. Start your test. If a problem occurs, stop the trace (please refer to the Event Trace Control and 904
ISDN Trace Location program instructions in this manual).
2. Verify the results by running the same test(s) again. If the problem can be duplicated the information
contained in the trace data becomes more useful.
3. Unmount data to the SD/SM using “Set Time and Date” on page 10-4.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 11-1

 Maintenance
Event Trace Control

4. Remove the SmartMedia card from the Strata CIX. Use caution - the SD/SM device can be damaged if
removed incorrectly.
5. Insert the SD/SM card into your SD/SM reader.
6. Locate the Evnttrce folder and save all files ending with .sdt and .mdt to your PC hard drive.
7. Locate the Crash Dump in the errlog folder. File extensions are .exp and .mnl and append to your hard
drive.
8. E-mail the files to your Toshiba support person.
If you start recording trace data after a problem occurs, the previous data is overwritten. Make sure the
required data files are stored to the SD/SM and saved to disk prior to starting another trace.
The following table shows you how much SD/SM card memory is allocated to each directory. System
traffic load will determine how much data is stored in the Evnttrace log.

Table 11-1 SD/SM card file allocation size in Mega Bytes

SmartMedia Type 16MB 32MB 64MB 128MB
Errlog 2MB 4MB 8MB 24MB
Evnttrce 4MB 12MB 32MB 64MB
Admlog 2MB 8MB 16MB 32MB
Progdata 8MB 8MB 8MB 8MB
Program 0MB 0MB 0MB 0MB
Total 16MB 32MB 64MB 128MB

Event Trace Control

Program Number(s): 903, 904, 905 and 906
Prerequisite Program: None
This program enables you to trace message events occurring in the Strata CIX. Program Numbers 903,
904, 905 and 906 are consolidated in one Network eManager screen.
1. Install the SmartMedia Card into the designated slot of the Strata CIX processor.
2. Select Maintenance > Log/Trace File Setup > Trace Start/Stop.
3. Enter Program 903 data.
4. Enter Program 904 data
5. Enter Program 905 data.
6. Enter Program 906 data.
7. Trace data displays in the dialog boxes.

11-2 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Maintenance
Event Trace Control

903 Start/Stop Trace

FIELD DESCRIPTION

Start/Stop Trace Click in the appropriate button to start or stop Message Trace. Start Trace
indicates that the system’s trace data collection process has begun. Stop
indicates the trace data collection process is terminated
Before removing the SmartMedia card run Program 908. See “908 Secure
Digital and SmartMedia” on page 10-5.
Possible values:Start Trace or Stop Trace (default)

Current Function Displays the last command sent to the CIX.

Completion Displays the progress of the current function.

Size [x16 Bytes] Set the trace data size. Toshiba recommends leaving this parameter at the
default setting which provides approximately 15 minutes of trace data.
Possible values:1~256 bytes with 1 unit = 16 bytes (default = 2)

Category Select Trace data type to be stored.

Possible values:Call Processing, Maintenance, and Call Processing and
Maintenance (default)

904 ISDN Trace Location

ISDN protocol event trace collection conditions are established using this program.
Note This trace can be performed on BSU and PTU cards only.
FIELD DESCRIPTION

Cabinet/Slot/Circuit Enter the Equipment Location to be traced (xxyyzz).

Possible values:xx = Cabinet 01~11; yy = Slot 01~10; zz = Circuit 01~04

Trace Kind Select the trace collection level.

Possible values:LLCI Trace, Layer 3, Layer 2 & 3, State Transitions, Errors,
Layer 2 States.

Trace Level Select the extent to which the trace collects information.
Possible values:No Trace (default), Brief or Extensive

Maintenance

905 All ISDN Lines Trace Level Selection

FIELD DESCRIPTION

Trace Level For All Select whether to trace all ISDN PRI and BRI trunks.
ISDN Lines Possible values:Set Extensive (default) or Set No Trace

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 11-3

 Maintenance
Memory Access Operation

906 Change Trace Selection

FIELD DESCRIPTION

Set Message Trace Select Message Trace only.

Possible values:Message Trace (default), ISDN Trace or Both

Set ISDN Trace Select ISDN Trace only

Set Both Select Message Trace and ISDN Trace

Current Trace Displays the last command sent to the CIX.

Selection

Completion Displays the progress of the current function.

Memory Access Operation

Prerequisite Program: None
This program enables you to manipulate memory settings.
1. Select Maintenance > Memory Access.
2. Click the Read Memory or Write Memory button to access memory.
3. Enter the memory Address to be accessed.
4. Select size of memory to access (1~256, default = no value).
5. Click one of the following buttons:
• New – click this button to create a new Memory Access filename.
• Open – click this button to open an existing Memory Access file.
6. Click Submit.
7. Click Save to save Memory Access file.
Note The Content box displays the contents of the memory address selected.

Components
Prerequisite Program: None
The following programs enable you to monitor the status of individual Strata CIX slots and ports.
This is the main system slot/port monitor. The Components screen allows each cabinet card slot and each
card slot port to be monitored, enabled or disabled.
Select Maintenance > Hardware Info. and Control - Exp Cabinets 1~7.

Auto Fault Detection/Disable

When an error occurs in hardware resources used for a station or line, the Strata CIX system will make
them busy. In this case the Strata CIX system will automatically disable the card slot or card port (circuit or
channel). The Component Status/Control screen will indicate the card or port failure status with “Disabled
by Fault xx” where xx is the status code in the table below. When a digital telephone is disabled the
telephone’s LCD will display Make Busy. The station or line card can be disabled temporarily to perform
maintenance or parts replacements as well.

11-4 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Maintenance
Components

Note The port or slot to which your programming phone is connected cannot be set to Make Busy.
The figure on the next page displays the status of Exp. Cabinet 1 from a demo system.

Manual Disable/Enable
The components screen allows you to enable or disable any card slot or port.
• When disabled by Disable or Forced Disable, line or stations are made busy and the status will display
“disable by cmd” on the screen. On the telephone LCD, it will display Make busy.
• Disable will disable an idle port or slot and cause ports/slots that are in use to go to Pending Disable
– which go to Make Busy after they go idle. Disable waits until a call clears to disable it.
• Forced Disable will disable an idle port or a port that is in-use (the call will be disconnected).

Maintenance
• Enable – removes the Make Busy condition if the slot or port is manually disabled.
Note You cannot enable a slot or port if the system automatically disabled it. The status on the screen will
display Disabled by Fault.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 11-5

This page is intentionally left blank.
Tools and Profile 12

This chapter discusses Tools and Profile to customize and manage your Strata CIX System.

Tools
The download tool provided in Network eManager enables you to download databases stored in system
memory into a Network eManager folder named Download. These downloaded databases can then be
viewed in your PC to check for errors or other anomalies. The downloaded files are saved as files on the
same drive that Network eManager is installed on (often the C: drive) in this path:
eManager\userdata\login name\mac address
Note that the file name will include the name you logged on to Network eManager with, and the MAC
address of the system you logged into.
They may be opened and viewed using Excel, Word or some other application.

Download
Prerequisite Program: None
1. Select > Maintenance > CIX Data Download.
2. A list of all Strata Network eManager programs displays.
3. Click on the program to be downloaded. Selected programs are highlighted in yellow and the word
Selected displays to the right. The following buttons are also available:
• Clear All – click this button to clear all previously selected files.
• Select All – click this button to select all programs for downloading.
4. Click the Start Downloading button in the top right corner of the display.
5. The system notifies you when the download is complete.

Tools and Profile

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 12-1

This page is intentionally left blank.
Telephone Button Programming 13

Telephone Button
Programming
This chapter provides a subset of the button programming interface provided with the Strata CIX. This
chapter includes Button Programming for the 900 series programs. For the other programs refer to the
Telephone Button Programming document.

Telephone Button Overview

Strata CIX programmers can access the programming mode from any IP, IPT, or DKT LCD telephone
except DKTs connected to an RDSU. A 20-button telephone (shown below) is required to ensure full
access to all programming parameters. The telephone button programming interface enables limited
programming capabilities over ranges of stations or trunks.
Note Telephones connected to an RDSU cannot be used to program the Strata CIX.
The figure below shows the telephone button pad for a 20-button DP5000-series Digital Telephone or
IP5000-series IP telephone.

Buttons 1-10 beginning Buttons 11-20 beginning

with FB1 at the bottom with FB11 at the bottom

Speaker

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 13-1

 Telephone Button Programming
Telephone Button Overview

Telephone Button Commands

1. Use the following buttons to execute the commands:
• Hold – Enter.
• Page/Scroll – Scroll up or down.
• Speaker – This delimiter moves cursors between sub-parameter values.
• Volup – Escape. Vols displays as & on the LCD. Press Volup to program # or * in dialing
sequences.
• Voldown – Back space for line editing.
• # # Hold – Cancel.
• * – Use this button between values to specify a range of objects to be programmed (e.g., 1001*1005
enables programming of stations 1001 through 1005).
• ** – Use this button between values to specify a set of objects to be programmed (e.g.,
1001**1005**1012 enables programming of stations 1001, 1005 and 1012).
• Off-hook – lift and replace the handset to immediately exit programming mode.
2. Keep the following in mind as you maneuver through Strata CIX programs.
• Default and/or current settings are displayed on the telephone LCD with an asterisk.
• Some Strata CIX programs have more than 20 programmable parameters. To toggle from
parameters FB01~FB20 and FB21~FB40 press the Scroll or Page button after entering Program
Mode.
• To view parameter options on your telephone LCD press the desired FB button and press the Scroll
or Page button.
• Each parameter shows a number to the left (e.g., 2:DISABLE). Program the desired parameter by
pressing the number button (in this example 2) that corresponds to your desired parameter.
• To enter data, use the number keys.
• To submit your program entry press Hold. To confirm a submitted entry, press Hold again.
• To exit a program press # # Hold.
• To enter the # character in your data string press the Volup and the # button simultaneously. An &
sign appears in your LCD. Press the # button, then enter the remaining data.
• If you get an error code, press Hold (twice) to continue programming. See System Error Codes in
the Error Code document for error code details.

Programming Parameters
Programs can have between one and 40 programmable parameters, each represented by the FBnn
buttons. The LEDs light up for each FBnn button that features a programmable parameter. Each
parameter is programmed by entering values into the LCD from the telephone button pad.
1. At the SELECT PARAM prompt, press the appropriate FBnn button.
2. Enter the appropriate value from the telephone button pad using the Parameter Fields tables supplied
with each program.
3. Press Hold to submit.
4. Press another FBnn button to program more parameters
… or press Hold again to program.

13-2 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Telephone Button Programming
Telephone Button Overview

Programming Sub-parameters

Telephone Button
Some commands enable programming of Sub-parameters to further refine Strata CIX settings. Internet or

Programming
Network IP addresses are entered using sub-parameter data. IP addresses are displayed as four three-
digit values, or Octets, separated by “periods” (e.g., 192.168.255.253). (If your programming telephone’s
LCD is only capable of displaying the IP information three digits, or one Octet, at a time, selecting FB01 in
Program 916 displays the first Octet, 192, on the LCD. To view or change the next Octet (in this example
168) in the IP Address, press the Speaker button. Pressing Speaker again, displays the following Octet (in
this example 255)).
The following is an example from Program 200, FB04. FB04 is broken down into three sub-parameters as
follows COS DAY1, COS DAY2 and COS NIGHT.
1. At the SELECT PARAM prompt, press FB04.
2. At the COS DAY1= prompt, enter a value from 1~32.
3. Press Speaker.
4. At the COS DAY2= prompt, enter a value from 1~32.
5. Press Speaker.
6. At the COS NIGHT= prompt, enter a value from 1~32.
7. Press Hold to submit.
8. Press another FBnn button to program more parameters
… or press Hold again to program a new DN.
Note To change one of the sub-parameters, you must proceed through all three sub-parameters before
pressing Hold. For example, to change the value of COS DAY1, you must change the COS DAY1
value, then press Speaker twice, and finally, press Hold.

Button Programming Procedure

Step 1: Enter Program Mode
Enter the button sequence displayed below to enter the CIX1200/CIX670 programming interface from a
station.
1. Log in by pressing: Hold *#*#1*2*3*.
2. At the PASSWORD= prompt, enter your password. Default is 0000.
3. Press Hold.

Step 2: Enter Program Number

1. At the PROG= prompt enter the three digit program code (e.g., 200) and press Hold.
2. Programmable parameters are identified by the FB LEDs that are illuminated on the DKT. Go to
“Choose a Button Sequence” on page 13-4 Press on the related FBnn button to program a parameter
or if there are no illuminated FB LEDs, continue to Step 3.

Step 3: Enter FB00 Parameters

FB00 parameters designate a specific station, trunk, or circuit to be programmed. The FB00 prompt (e.g.,
EQUIP=, DN=, INDEX=, etc.) appears automatically in the LCD screen.
1. At the FB00 prompt, enter the desired value using the telephone number pad.
2. Press Hold.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 13-3

 Telephone Button Programming
Telephone Button Overview

Step 4: Choose a Button Sequence

Select the button sequences based on the programs required for programming the Strata CIX from the
Telephone.

Program Listings
This table is a list of programs found in this chapter.

Program
Program Name
Number
900 System Initialize
901 Display Version
902 Set Time and Date
903 Event Trace Control
904 ISDN Trace Location
905 All ISDN Trunk Trace
906 Event Trace Side Change
907 System Admin Log
908 Format/Unmount SmartMedia
909 MAC Address (System Serial Number)
910 Data Backup
911 Program Update
912 Make Busy Control
915 Regional Selection
916 IP Configuration

13-4 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Telephone Button Programming
900 Series Programs

900 Series Programs

Telephone Button
Programming
These programs are organized based on functions versus program numbers.

System Initialize
This program enables you to reset hardware and initializes, or restores, programmed data.
Program Number(s): 900
Prerequisite Program: None
Reference: None
Access Sequence: Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
Hold Q#Q#1Q2Q3Q.
At the PASSWORD= prompt, enter your password and press Hold.
At the PROG= prompt enter 900 and press Hold.

FB Name FB Summary Value LCD Prompt

Initialize Level 01 Press 1 or 2 to select the initialize level. 1. Initialize Level 1 1:Restart with
2. Initialize Level 2 Clear Data
Level 1 – Erases programmed data and
enters default data or backed up data if a 2:Restart
SmartMedia Card is installed (see Note).
Level 2 – Simulates System Power Off/Power
On operation to reset hardware.

To access programming parameters

1. Press FB01 to choose Initialize Level 1 or 2.
2. Press Hold twice to initialize.
Important! Choosing Initialize Level 1 without installing a SmartMedia Card deletes all programmed
data and returns your Strata CIX to factory default settings. All previously programmed data
is lost.

Restoring Data from SmartMedia

When initializing with Level 1 you can restore custom data that was previously programmed and stored on
a SmartMedia card. To do so, follow the steps below.
1. Install a SmartMedia card that contains the Prog data directory with the default.dat file. The default.dat
file contains your custom settings and can be created by running Data Backup. See Data Backup.
Important! A CIX/CTX default.dat database can only be restored to a CIX/CTX software version that is
the same or higher than the CIX/CTX software version on which the default.dat file was
created. For example, a default.dat created on CTXR2.0 MF029 can be restored on an R2.0
MF030, MF031 and higher R2.1MG0XX, R2.2 MF0XX (XX = 01~99, but it cannot be
restored on R2.0 MF012, MF011 and lower, or R1.X ME0XX, MD0XX, etc.
2. After installing the SmartMedia card, run System Initialization using Initialize Level 1.
Restoring data from the SmartMedia card may take an hour or more. To verify completion of the restore
process access, the Programming Mode from a telephone and enter your password. If the system
enables you to continue, the data restore process is complete.
Note During the restore process the telephone LCD may display date and time data. This does not
necessarily indicate completion of the restore process.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 13-5

 Telephone Button Programming
900 Series Programs

Display Version
This program enables you to view current software versions for the Strata CIX system and installed
options.
• Active – As the name implies, this is the current active software operating the Strata CIX system.
• Standby – This is a software version released prior to the active version. It acts as a backup in the event
problems are experienced by the Active version.
Program Number(s): 901
Prerequisite Program: None
Reference: None
Access Sequence: Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
Hold Q#Q#1Q2Q3Q.
At the PASSWORD= prompt enter your password and press Hold.
At the PROG= prompt enter 901 and press Hold.

FB Name FB Summary Value LCD Prompt

Version Number 01 Display Active side software version and 6~31 Installed Version
Active installed options. digits
As the name implies, this is the current active
software operating the CIX system.
Version Number 02 Display Standby side software version and Installed Version
installed options.
Standby (CIX1200/
CIX670 only). This is a software version released prior to the
active version. It acts as a backup in the event
problems are experienced by the Active version.

1. Press FB01 to view the current Strata CIX software version. Press the Scroll or Page key to move the
display left or right.
2. Press FB02 to view backup Strata CIX software version.
3. Press Hold, then # # Hold to return to the PROG= prompt.
4. Enter another program number to continue programming or press # # Hold again to exit programming
mode.

13-6 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Telephone Button Programming
900 Series Programs

Reading the Version Code

Telephone Button
The figure below is an example of the Strata CIX software version code.

Programming
Position 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Version
A A 520 MTxxx Px Dxxx XSEM.00
Code

• Pos. 1 - Product ID – This is the first character in the version code string. N designates CIX670; S
designates CIX100, A designates CIX1200
• Pos. 2 - Country Code - 2 – “A” identifies the country (USA, Canada, Mexico).
• Pos. 3 - CIX Release Level – This string of numbers identifies the Strata CIX Release level
(NA101=R1.01, NA102=R1.02, NA103=R1.03, etc).
• Pos. 4 - CIX Software Version – This string of characters identifies the current software version. For
the example above, the software is called “M00XX, MA2XX, MA3XX, etc,” where XX is the version
number.
• Pos. 5 - IPL Version
• Pos. 6 - DTMF Version – This three character string identifies the existence of DTMF and ABR circuits
and the version. The “D” designation indicates that DTMF is being applied to the Strata CIX while “12”
indicates the DTMF version number. The CIX1200 DTMF version has 3 digits.
• Pos. 7 - Installed Equipment ID – There are five characters, each referencing a unique equipment
identification value assigned to hardware installed in your Strata CIX system. If the particular hardware
is not installed a “-” displays. The following are the equipment identifier designations.
• B – BBMS is installed (CIX1200 does not use this)
• X – BEXS is installed.
• S – BSIS is installed.
• E – The Ethernet is installed.
• M – The Modem is installed.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 13-7

 Telephone Button Programming
900 Series Programs

Set Time and Date

This program enables you to change the system clock in Strata CIX.
Program Number(s): 902
Prerequisite Program: None
Reference: None
Access Sequence: Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
Hold Q#Q#1Q2Q3Q.
At the PASSWORD= prompt enter your password and press Hold.
At the PROG= prompt enter 902 and press Hold.

FB Name FB Summary Value LCD Prompt

Date 01 Enter current system date in this field. yymmdd format DATE=
yy = current year
mm = current month
dd = current day
Time 02 Enter the current time in this field. hhmmss format TIME=
hh = current hour
mm = current minute
ss = current second

1. Press FB01 to enter current Strata CIX Date. See table above for format.
2. Press Hold to program.
3. Press FB02 to enter current Strata CIX time. See table above for format.
4. Press Hold to program.
5. Press Hold to submit, then # # Hold to return to the PROG= prompt.
6. Enter another program number to continue programming or press # # Hold again to exit programming
mode.

Event Trace Control

This program enables you to trace message events occurring in Strata CIX.
Program Number(s): 903
Prerequisite Program: None
Reference: Install SmartMedia card
Access Sequence: Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
Hold Q#Q#1Q2Q3Q.
At the PASSWORD= prompt, Enter your password and press Hold.
At the PROG= prompt enter 903 and press Hold.

13-8 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Telephone Button Programming
900 Series Programs

Telephone Button
Programming
FB Name FB Summary Value LCD Prompt
Trace State 01 Enter 1 or 2 to Start or Stop Message 1:Start 1:START
Trace. Stopping the trace outputs data to
2:Stop 2:STOP
the SmartMedia card. Wait for the
PROG= prompt on the LCD before
proceeding.
Before removing the SmartMedia card
run Program 908. See Format/Unmount
Secure Digital/SmartMedia on
page 13-14.
Trace Size 02 Set the trace data size. Toshiba 1~256 (in bytes) SIZE=
recommends leaving this parameter at
1 unit = 16 bytes
the default setting which provides
approximately 15 minutes of trace data. Default = 2
Trace 03 Trace data type to be stored. 1:Call Processing 1.CP
Category 2:Maint and Admin 2.M&A
3:Both of the above 3.CP+M&A
(default)

1. Press FB01 to enable Start or Stop trace. Use the number key pad to make your selection.
2. Press Hold.
Notes
• Start indicates the trace was previously started and is currently running.
• Stop indicates the trace is not running and all trace buffer data was transferred to the
SmartMedia.
3. Press FB02 to enter trace file size. To change the setting use the number Dial Pad.
4. Press Hold.
5. Press FB03 to set trace category. To view setting options, press the Scroll or Page button.
6. Press Hold twice to execute. Wait for the PROG= prompt to display before proceeding.
7. Enter another program number to continue programming or press # # Hold again to exit programming
mode.
Note When the CIX1200/CIX670 stops logging data, it automatically sends data to the SmartMedia card.
A new trace file is stored on SmartMedia under the Evnttrace directory. Run the Unmount command
(Program 908) before removing the SmartMedia card to ensure complete data transfer.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 13-9

 Telephone Button Programming
900 Series Programs

ISDN Trace Location

This program enables set up of ISDN protocol event trace collection conditions.
Program Number(s): 904
Prerequisite Program: None
Reference: None
Access Sequence: Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
Hold Q#Q#1Q2Q3Q.
At the PASSWORD= prompt enter your password and press Hold.
At the PROG= prompt enter 904 and press Hold.
At the EQUIP= prompt enter the Shelf, Slot and Port numbers.
Notes
• Shelf, Slot and Circuit number is entered in “XXYYZZ” format where Shelf is a two digit value from
01~07 corresponding to the Strata CIX Cabinet number; slot is a two digit value from 01~10
corresponding to the Strata CIX Cabinet’s PCB slot number; circuit is a two digit value from 01~04
corresponding to the Strata CIX PCB Slot’s circuit number.
• Always use circuit 01 for RPTU.

FB Name FB Summary Value LCD Prompt

LLCI 01 Level of collecting LLCI values. 1:None (no 1:NON
Layer 3 02 Level of collecting Layer 3 messages. information) 2:BRIEF
Layer 2 and 3 Level of collecting Layer 2 and Layer 3 2:Brief 3:DETAILED
03 (important
messages.
State Transitions 04 Level of collecting State Transitions. information)
Errors 05 Level of collecting errors. 3:Detailled (all
information)
Layer 2 States 06 Level of collecting Layer 2 States.

1. Press FB01 to run a LLCI Trace. Press the Scroll or Page button to view Non, Brief, or Detailed
options. Enter 1~3 to determine Trace Level.
2. Press FB02 and set CCL3 Trace Level. Press the Scroll or Page button to view Non, Brief, or Detailed
options. Enter 1~3 to determine Trace Level.
3. Press FB03 and set L2L3 Trace Level. Press the Scroll or Page button to view Non, Brief, or Detailed
options. Enter 1~3 to determine Trace Level.
4. Press FB04 and set STATE Trace Level. Press the Scroll or Page button to view Non, Brief, or Detailed
options. Enter 1~3 to determine Trace Level.
5. Press FB05 and set ERRORS Trace Level. Press the Scroll or Page button to view Non, Brief, or
Detailed options. Enter 1~3 to determine Trace Level.
6. Press FB06 and set L2 Trace Level. Press the Scroll or Page button to view Non, Brief, or Detailed
options. Enter 1~3 to determine Trace Level.
7. Press Hold to execute.
8. Press # # Hold to return to the PROG= prompt.
9. Enter another program number to continue programming or press # # Hold again to exit programming
mode.

13-10 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Telephone Button Programming
900 Series Programs

All ISDN Trunk Trace

Telephone Button
Program start/stop of packaged detailed collection of event trace functions. This program is only available

Programming
in the telephone button programming mode.
Program Number(s): 905
Prerequisite Program: Format/Unmount Secure Digital/SmartMedia on page 13-14, ISDN Trace Location
on page 13-11 and Event Trace Control on page 13-9
Reference: Install SmartMedia card
Access Sequence: Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
Hold Q#Q#1Q2Q3Q.
At the PASSWORD= prompt enter your password and press Hold.
At the PROG= prompt enter 905 and press Hold.

FB Name FB Summary Value LCD Prompt

Trace All Output All ISDN Trunk Events to 1:On (default) 1:ON
ISDN Trunks 01 SmartMedia
2:Off 2:OFF
1. Press FB01.
2. Select 1, or 2 to turn on or off.
3. Press Hold twice to execute.
4. Press # # Hold to return to the PROG= prompt.
5. Enter another program number to continue programming or press # # Hold again to exit programming
mode.

Event Trace Side Change

This program enables you to manage your ISDN protocol trace. This program is only available in the
telephone button programming mode.
Program Number(s): 906
Prerequisite Program: Format/Unmount Secure Digital/SmartMedia on page 13-14
Reference: Install SmartMedia card
Access Sequence: Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
Hold Q#Q#1Q2Q3Q.
At the PASSWORD= prompt enter your password and press Hold.
At the PROG= prompt enter 906 and press Hold.

FB Name FB Summary Value LCD Prompt

Side Enter desired parameter number 1:Message 1:MESSAGE
Change 01 2:ISDN 2:ISDN
3:Message+ISDN 3:MESSAGE+ISDN
1. Press FB01.
2. Select 1, 2, or 3 to select parameter.
3. Press Hold to execute.
4. Press # # Hold to return to the PROG= prompt.
5. Enter another program number or press # # Hold again to exit programming mode.
Note When the CIX1200/CIX670 stops logging data, it automatically sends data to the Secure Digital or
SmartMedia card. Run the Unmount command (Program 908) before removing the Secure Digital or
SmartMedia card to ensure complete data transfer.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 13-11

 Telephone Button Programming
900 Series Programs

System Admin Log

Use this command to Start/Stop the System Admin Log.
Program Number(s): 907
Prerequisite Program: None
Reference: Install SmartMedia card
Access Sequence: Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
Hold Q#Q#1Q2Q3Q.
At the PASSWORD= prompt enter your password and press Hold.
At the PROG= prompt enter 907 and press Hold.

FB Name FB Summary Value LCD Prompt

Admin Log On/ Enter 1 or 2 to Start or Stop Admin 1:Start 1:START
Off 01 Log. 2:Stop 2:STOP

1. Press FB01. To run System Admin Log press 1 Hold (twice). You are sent to the PROG= prompt.
2. To Stop the log, press FB01 and press 2 on the dial pad.
3. Press Hold twice and wait for the PROG= prompt to appear before proceeding.
Note When the CIX1200/CIX670 stops logging data, it automatically sends data to the SmartMedia card.
Run the Unmount command (Program 908) before removing the Secure Digital or SmartMedia card
to ensure complete data transfer.

Format/Unmount Secure Digital/SmartMedia

This program enables administrators to format a SmartMedia card from the Strata CIX Network eManager
or the telephone button pad.
Note Strata CIX Network eManager cannot view SmartMedia files directly. Additional hardware is required
to view the contents of the SmartMedia card.
Program Number(s): 908
Prerequisite Program: None
Reference: None
Access Sequence: Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
Hold Q#Q#1Q2Q3Q.
At the PASSWORD= prompt enter your password and press Hold.
At the PROG= prompt enter 908 and press Hold.

13-12 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Telephone Button Programming
900 Series Programs

Telephone Button
FB Name FB Summary Value LCD Prompt

Programming
Control 01 Choose SmartMedia card formatting method: 1:Normal 1:NORMAL
Normal – creates any Strata CIX SmartMedia directory 2:Forced 2:FORCED
that does not exist already. Exiting directories are not 3:Unmount 3:UNMOUNT
overwritten by this procedure.
4:Transfer 4:TRANSFER
Forced – erases any existing directories and files. All
existing data is overwritten. See Strata CIX Secure Digital/
SmartMedia Directories below for more information.
Unmount – writes data into SmartMedia Card. Always run
unmount before removing the SmartMedia card to prevent
damage to the card.
Transfer – writes data from static RAM to SmartMedia
Card.

1. Press FB01 to enter parameter. Enter 1~4 as your command choice. Press the Scroll or Page button
to make your selection.
2. Press Hold to confirm and Hold again to execute.
3. Wait for the PROG= prompt to appear before proceeding.
4. Enter another program number to continue programming or press # # Hold again to exit programming
mode.

Strata CIX Secure Digital/SmartMedia Directories

Running the Normal and Forced options of this program creates five directories on the SmartMedia card as
follows:
• Admlog – The Admlog folder saves
• Errlog – System error logs are saved into this folder.
• Evnttrce – Strata CIX eManager Event Trace files are saved into this folder.
• Progdata – Your Strata CIX programmed settings are all saved in this folder.
• Program – The operating software and default data of the Strata CIX is saved in this folder.
When a backup is performed, Strata CIX saves programmed data to the Progdata folder.

MAC Address (System Serial Number)

This program enables you to display your CIX1200 or CIX670 System Serial Number.
Program Number(s): 909
Prerequisite Program: None
Reference: None
Access Sequence: Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
Hold Q#Q#1Q2Q3Q.
At the PASSWORD= prompt enter your password and press Hold.
At the PROG= prompt enter 909 and press Hold.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 13-13

 Telephone Button Programming
900 Series Programs

FB Name FB Summary Value LCD Prompt

MAC Address 01 Display System Serial Number. 12 digits MAC Address

1. Press FB01 to view parameter. The MAC Address is view only and cannot be changed.
2. Press Hold (twice) to exit to the PROG= prompt.
3. Enter another program number to continue programming or press # # Hold again to exit programming
mode.

Data Backup
This program enables you to Back up system data to a SmartMedia card.
Program Number(s): 910
Prerequisite Program: “Format/Unmount Secure Digital/SmartMedia” on page 13-12 must be performed
before running this program.
Reference: None
Access Sequence: Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
Hold Q#Q#1Q2Q3Q.
At the PASSWORD= prompt enter your password and press Hold.
At the PROG= prompt enter 910 and press Hold.

FB Name FB Summary Value LCD Prompt

Backup 01 Start and Stop system backup. 1:Backup 1:BACKUP
Function Restore function is not operational and 2:Restore (Do not 2:RESTORE
should never be executed. Use System use. See Note on
left). 3:CANCEL
Initialize (Program 900) Level 1 to restore
system backup. 3:Cancel
Numbers 02 The number of data blocks. This number Variable ALL NO=
varies depending on the amount of
programming the system contains.
Current 03 This number increments as the backup Variable CUR NO=
Number progresses. When the backup is complete
this number should match the total number of
data blocks displayed in Numbers (FB02).
Backup State 04 All_Ok – Backup completed with no errors. 1:normal end all
Partial_Ok – Backup has completed with 2:normal end part
errors. 3:abnormal end
NG – Backup has failed. 4:cancel
5:importing
Cancel – Cancel Backup. 6:exporting
Importing – Program data is being restored.
Exporting – Program data is being sent out.

1. Press FB01 to enter your Backup choice. Press the Scroll or Page button to view selection options.
2. Press 1. FB01 and FB04 should blink green.
3. Press Hold to execute. Press Hold again to Cancel. This program stops running if you exit
programming mode from your telephone.

13-14 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Telephone Button Programming
900 Series Programs

To view Backup progress

1. While the program is running (FB01 and FB04 blink green), press FB02 to view the total number of files

Telephone Button
Programming
to be transferred.
2. Press FB03 to view the current file number that is being transferred.
3. The Backup is complete when FB04 blinks intermittently.
4. To verify success, push FB04. Your telephone LCD should indicate *1.ALL_OK.
5. Press # # Hold to exit.
Note Do not press the Hold button. Pressing the Hold button restarts the Backup procedure.
To Restore data from the SmartMedia card to Strata CIX, see “System Initialize” on page 13-5.

Program Update
This program enables you to update the Strata CIX programs.
Program Number(s): 911
Prerequisite Program: Format SmartMedia Card. Before running this program make sure the
SmartMedia card is properly formatted. See “Format/Unmount Secure Digital/
SmartMedia” on page 13-12 for more details.
Reference: None
Access Sequence: Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
Hold Q#Q#1Q2Q3Q.
At the PASSWORD= prompt enter your password and press Hold.
At the PROG= prompt enter 911 and press Hold.

FB Name FB Summary Value LCD Prompt

Update Function 01 Enter 1 or 2 to identify the type of Update 1:Update 1:Update
intended.
2:Reboot 2:Reboot
Select 3 to cancel a running update.
3:Cancel 3:Cancel
Total Blocks 02 View total blocks to be updated (total 0~65536 n/a
blocks will vary depending on software (CIX1200/670)
versions). 0~128 (CIX100)
default = 0
Copied Blocks 03 View number of blocks copied. 0~65536 n/a
(CIX1200/670)
0~128 (CIX100)
default = 0
Active Side Status 04 Backup Type Display 1:Normal 1:Normal
2:Trial 2:Trial
3:Fault 3:Fault
4:Don’t Care 4:Don’t Care
5:Error 5:Error
Stand by Side 05 Stand by Backup Type 1:Normal 1:Normal
Status 2:Trial 2:Trial
3:Fault 3:Fault
4:Don’t Care 4:Don’t Care
5:Error 5:Error

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 13-15

 Telephone Button Programming
900 Series Programs

FB Name FB Summary Value LCD Prompt

Active Side 06 Active Side Number. 0 or 1 ACT SIDE=
Number default = 0
Status 07 View Backup Status. 1:Idle 1:Idle
2:Running 2:Running
3:Success 3:Success
4:Error 4:Error

1. Press FB01 to enter your Backup choice. Press the Scroll or Page button to view your selection
options.
2. Press 1. FB01 and FB04 should blink green.
3. Press Hold to execute. Press Hold again to Cancel. This program stops running if you exit
programming mode from your telephone.

Make Busy Control

When an error occurs in hardware resources used for a station or a line fails, this feature makes them
busy. The station or line card can be disabled temporarily to perform maintenance or parts replacements
as well. This program is only available in the telephone button programming mode.
Program Number(s): 912
Prerequisite Program: Format SmartMedia Card
Reference: None
Access Sequence: Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
Hold Q#Q#1Q2Q3Q.
At the PASSWORD= prompt enter your password and press Hold.
At the PROG= prompt enter 912 and press Hold.
At the CABINET= prompt enter the Shelf number.
Note The Shelf number is entered in “XX” format where Shelf is a two digit value from 01~07
corresponding to the Strata CIX Cabinet number. See “Program Button LEDs” below for a
description of the LED display.

FB Name FB Summary Value

Equipment 00 Enter Cabinet Number 01~07 (value=xx)
Slot #1 01 1: Set make busy
Slot #2 02 2: Clear make busy
Slot #3 03
Slot #4 04
Slot #5 05
Enter 1 or 2
Slot #6 06
Slot #7 07
Slot #8 08
Slot #9 09
Slot #10 10

1. Press FB01~FB10 to enter your Make Busy selection for the appropriate Slot in the Cabinet entered in
Access Sequence above.
Note The slot to which your programming phone is connected cannot be set to Make Busy.

13-16 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Telephone Button Programming
900 Series Programs

2. Press Hold to execute.

Telephone Button
3. Press Hold again to return to CABINET= prompt.

Programming
4. Press # # Hold to return to the PROG= prompt.
5. Enter another program number to continue programming or press # # Hold again to exit programming
mode.
Program Button LEDs
The LED blink pattern indicates the following:
• Red continuous blinking – PCB experienced a Make Busy status error.
• Red continuous illumination – PCB Make Busy Status mode is on.
• Green continuous blinking – PCB Make Busy Status mode is stand by.
• Green intermittent blinking – PCB Make Busy Status mode is idle.

Regional Selection
Set Operating region for your Strata CIX. This assignment sets built-in core LSI hardware parameters that
are not changeable with jumpers or switches. These parameters must be set unique for each country and
affect system operation.
Program Number(s): 915
Prerequisite Program: None
Reference: None
Access Sequence: Select Maintenance > Hardware Info. and Control > CIX Processor

Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:

Hold Q#Q#1Q2Q3Q.

At the PASSWORD= prompt enter your password and press Hold.

At the PROG= prompt enter 915 and press Hold.

Field Description Value LCD Prompt

Region Set region number. 0~2 are valid entries for 0~31 (USA = 0, REGION=
North American Operations. Canada = 1, and
Mexico = 2)

1. Press FB01. Enter 0~2. Press Hold.

2. Press Hold (twice).
3. Enter another program number to continue programming or press # # Hold again to exit programming
mode.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 13-17

 Telephone Button Programming
900 Series Programs

IP Configuration
This program enables you to set up Network Communication Protocols.
Program Number(s): 916
Prerequisite Program: None
Reference: None
Access Sequence: Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
Hold Q#Q#1Q2Q3Q.
At the PASSWORD= prompt enter your password and press Hold.
At the PROG= prompt enter 916 and press Hold.

FB Name FB Summary Value

IP Address 01 Enter IP Address 1 0~255
192 = First IP Address Octet default = 192.168.254.253
168 = Second IP Address Octet
254 = Third IP Address Octet
253 = Fourth IP Address Octet
Subnet Mask 02 Enter Subnet Mask Address 1 0~255
default = 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway 03 Enter Default Gateway 1 0~255
default = 0.0.0.0

Notes
• The LCD only displays three of the twelve IP address digits at a time. Press the Speaker button to
view the remaining digits.
• The IP Address is the static IP address of the Strata CIX processor NIC/Ethernet connection only. The
PPP IP address for the Strata CIX processor modem is always 192.168.255.254 and cannot be
changed.
1. Press FB01 to view the current TCP/IP Address 1 (press FB02 to view the current Subnet Mask
Address 1, or press FB03 to view Default Gateway Address 1).
Press Hold.
2. Enter first IP Address Octet. To keep current setting go to Step 3.
3. Press Speaker button and enter second IP Address Octet. To keep current setting go to Step 4.
4. Press Speaker button and enter third IP Address Octet. To keep current setting go to Step 5.
5. Press Speaker button and enter fourth IP Address Octet. To keep current setting go to Step 6.
6. Press Hold.
7. Press FB02 to configure the remaining parameters.
8. Press Hold.
9. After all parameters are entered press Hold to submit the new settings.
10.You are automatically returned to the PROG= prompt.
11. Enter another program number to continue programming or press # # Hold again to exit programming
mode.

13-18 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

Data Backup and Restore 14

Data Backup and Restore

Data Backup and

Restore
Backup Feature
Backing up your files creates a *.dat file. The file is automatically named default.dat (as shown in Case 1
below). If one already exists it is overwritten (as shown in Case 2). If more than two *.dat files exist in the
progdata folder, a file whose name is default.dat is created (shown in Case 3).

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 14-1

 Data Backup and Restore
Data Backup and Restore

CAUTION! Release 4 will overwrite the default.dat file. This is different than previous Strata CIX/
CTX versions that will not overwrite an existing default.dat file.

14-2 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Data Backup and Restore
Data Backup and Restore

Restore Feature
To restore files, you can only have one programming data file whose name is “*.dat” in the progdata folder
(shown in Case 1 below). You can name the file anything you want based on the rules given above. If there
are two or more “Programming data files” in the progdata folder, it cannot be used to restore files (shown in
Case 2 below).

Data Backup and

Restore

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 14-3

 Data Backup and Restore
System Turn-on and Start-up Time

System Turn-on and Start-up Time

When a Release 4.0 or later system is turned on, it takes about 30-90 seconds to operate. CIX Release 2.x
and 3.x take about 15 seconds.

R3.0 and Earlier Data Backup

This section provides Strata CIX maintenance procedures that can be activated from the programming
telephone. These procedures are for R3.0 and earlier systems.For SmartMedia, refer to “Format/Unmount
Secure Digital/SmartMedia” on page 13-12.
1. Format the SmartMedia using “Format/Unmount Secure Digital/SmartMedia” on page 13-12 (Program
908).
2. Insert the formatted SmartMedia into Strata CIX.
3. Backup data using “Data Backup” on page 13-14 (Program 910). LED indicators should show the
following:
• FB01~FB03 solid red light.
• FB04 intermittent green.
4. Press FB01 and choose Backup by pressing 1 on the telephone button pad.

CAUTION! Never use Restore (2). It is not valid for current versions of CIX software and could
result in corrupt databases and system mis-operation.

5. Press Hold. Backup for programmed data starts. The LED indicator FB04 consistently blinks green
during back up. After back up is complete, FB04 will flash inconsistently slower.

CAUTION! Do not press Hold while Backup is being performed.

6. Press Hold twice to exit programming.

Backup Progress and Completion Indicators

You can monitor Backup progress by pressing the FB02 or FB03 buttons as follows. See “IP
Configuration” on page 13-18 for more details.
• If the value displayed in the LCD is increasing each time FB03 is pressed, the Backup is proceeding
successfully.
• When the value displayed in the LCD for FB03 and FB02 are the same, the Backup process is
complete.
• When the FB04 LED returns to an intermittent green, Backup is complete.
• Press FB04 to verify Backup is completed. If the LCD displays *1:ALL_OK the Backup was successful.

14-4 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Data Backup and Restore
Restoring Programmed Data

Restoring Programmed Data

To restore data from a Backup performed onto SmartMedia follow the directions below:
1. Insert the SmartMedia card that has the system’s default.dat file (under the PROGDATA folder) into
the Strata CIX SmartMedia slot.
2. Run Program 900 “System Initialize” on page 13-5, Level 1 (ALL DATA CLEAR). See programming
steps below.
Restoring data takes anywhere from 10 minutes to one hour for completion depending on the size of
the database (default.dat file).

Data Backup and

3. When the programming telephone LCD becomes active, enter the programming mode and enter your
password.

Restore
Restore is complete if the system accepts the password and enables you to enter programming mode.
4. Remove the SmartMedia card and restart the CIX again after restoring system data. This is necessary
to reset xIPU, Strata Net, Strata Net, ISDN and other advanced features.

Local Update
The following procedures are required for Local Update of all CIX systems.

Prerequisites for CIX100, CIX200, CIX670 and CIX1200 Local Update

The following are the prerequisites for Local Update:
• The SmartMedia card must be installed in the system with a Backup of the current database
(default.dat) file.
• Activation of the new software requires a clear-reboot operation that will drop all existing calls and will
take the system out of service from 10 minutes to an hour or more depending on the system size.
• Requires a different system software Update file (provided on the Toshiba FYI site), depending on the
type of CIX system and the type of Update that will be performed.

CIX Software Update Files

Each Strata CIX system type has two Software Update files: one for Network eManager Remote Update
and another file for Local Update (to use with the programming telephone procedure).

CAUTION! Using the wrong file in either case will cause the Update to fail.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 14-5

 Data Backup and Restore
Local Update

CIX Software Identification

Refer to the table below to identify CIX software release and builds in software file names or when verifying
CIX software versions.
Software Release Software ID
R1.00 and R1.01 = M01nn
R1.02 = MA2nn
R1.03 = MA3nn
R1.3 = ME0nn
R2.0 = MF0nn
R2.1 = MG0nn
R3.0 = MJ0nn
R4.0 = ML0nn
R4.1 = MN0nn or =MN2nn
R4.2 = MP0nn
R5.0 = MR0nn
R5.1 = MS0nn
R5.2 = MT0nn
nn = Software build level/number

Step 1: Download and Extract CIX Software

The latest released version of CIX system software Update files are posted on the Toshiba FYI site
http://fyi.tsd.toshiba.com. To download the software files, follow the procedure below.

Step 1A: To Download CIX System Software Files from FYI

1. From the Toshiba FYI website, click on Technical Services > Software (Strata Systems). The files are
located under the appropriate System Software heading.
2. Double-click the appropriate link: System Software: Software (Local Update)
3. When the Toshiba Software License Agreement screen displays, click the Agree button. The File
Download dialog box displays.
4. Select the “Save this program to disk” radio button, then click OK. The Save As screen displays.
5. Save the file to an appropriately named folder that identifies the system type and software version,
then click Save.

Step 1B: Extract Downloaded Files

1. After the download is complete, select the Open or Open Folder button on the Download Complete
screen to extract/open the files now, or select the Close button to extract the files later.
Notes
• The WinZip Self-Extractor screen displays if you selected the Open or Open Folder button.
• If you selected Close, double-clicking the .exe file later will bring up the WinZip Self-Extractor
screen.
These files are the self-extracting .exe files.
2. In the “Unzip to folder:” field, make sure the path leads to the correct folder as shown below. If the path
is incorrect, click the Browse button to navigate to the appropriate path, then click the Unzip button.
3. Verify the unzip folder path for Local Update: SmartMedia Drive:\PROGRAM

14-6 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Data Backup and Restore
Local Update

4. Verify the unzipped files or folders for Local Update of the Strata CIX100, CIX670and CIX1200 the file
name is the same “nhs.prg”.
The files can also be extracted to a temporary folder and then copied to the appropriate SmartMedia
PROGRAM folder or Strata eManager Upload folder. The extracted (decompressed) files will be
approximately 15MB.

Step 2: Choose Strata CIX100, CIX200, CIX670 or CIX1200 for Local

Update
Choose one of the following:

Data Backup and

Strata CIX100 Local Update

Restore
Strata CIX200 Local Update
Strata CIX670 Local Update
Strata CIX1200 Local Update

Strata CIX100 Local Update

The Update process is used to change the Strata CIX software version and restore programmed data. The
new software is first loaded on the SmartMedia card. It is then transferred to the Strata CIX100 processor
flash RAM. The Strata CIX100 programmed data is then restored.

Step 1: Prepare SmartMedia Card with Backup of Customer Database

This SmartMedia card will contain a back up of the Strata CIX programmed data (default.dat).
1. Insert a SmartMedia card into the CIX, format it, and then back up the customer database onto the
SmartMedia card using the Backup Data procedure (see the “R3.0 and Earlier Data Backup” on
page 14-4).
This operation writes the default.dat file under the PROGDATA directory to the SmartMedia card.
2. Remove the SmartMedia card from the CIX and physically label it “Strata CIX Backup data.”

Step 2: Prepare SmartMedia Card with a Copy of New CIX Software

This SmartMedia card will contain the new Strata CIX software file (nhs.prg) used to Update the system
software:
1. Obtain the Strata CIX operating software file (nhs.prg) from Toshiba FYI and store it on an
appropriately named folder on your PC (see the Download and Extract CIX Software procedure on
page 1).
2. Insert a SmartMedia card into Strata CIX processor SmartMedia socket and activate the Forced
Format command using Program 908; then Unmount SmartMedia using Program 908.
3. Remove the formatted SmartMedia card from the CIX and Install the SmartMedia card into a PC
SmartMedia reader/writer.
4. Copy the new Strata CIX software file named “nhs.prg” into SmartMedia card PROGRAM folder.
Note It is not necessary to create a SmartMedia Card Volume label for CIX100 Update. However, if you
create a volume label, do not use PRGUPDATE, PRGRESCUE0, or PRGRESCUE01 as volume
labels.
5. Pull out the SmartMedia card and physically label it “CIX100, MXnnn” or whatever software version
you are updating to.
Note After completing Steps 1 and 2 above you should have two SmartMedia cards:
• One card containing the CIX backed up database file: PROGDATA\default.dat
• One card containing the CIX software update file: PROGRAM\nhs.prg

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 14-7

 Data Backup and Restore
Local Update

Step 3: Update CIX100 Software

CAUTION! This operation will take the system out of service for 10 minutes to an hour or more
depending on the CIX database.

1. Insert the SmartMedia card containing PROGRAM\nhs.prg file into the Strata CIX processor
SmartMedia socket.
2. From the programming telephone enter Program 911, and press Hold. Press FB01 and dial 1
(UPDATE) and then press Hold.

CAUTION! Pressing Hold twice will cause the Update to fail

After a short pause the CIX will begin to upload the software from the SmartMedia card to the processor
flash RAM causing the following:
• If FB07-LED is flashing green, it indicates that the Update process is in progress.
• If FB07-LED is flashing red, it indicates an error. This could be caused by a corrupt or incorrect
nhs.prg file or a defective SmartMedia card. Make sure the file is a CIX100 nhs.prg file and not
CIX670 or CIX1200 file.
• You can now check the Update progress using FB02 (Total) and FB03 (Copied) to view data block
status. Periodically switch between FB02 and FB03 to view the data blocks.
• When all the data blocks are copied the CIX stops normal processing and all telephone LCDs go
blank.
• The processor Heartbeat LED is on steady red.
• The processor SmartMedia LED turns on flashing rapidly at first, then flashes slowly and finally
stops flashing.
• The above will last about five to 10 minutes.
• When the Update is complete the system begins to operate normally with default data.
3. Use Program 901 to check that the new software version of CIX software has been loaded. If you
cannot enter the Program Mode the new software may still be loading.
4. Remove the SmartMedia card (which contains PROGRAM/nhs.prg file) from the CIX processor.

Step 4: Restart and Restore Strata CIX100 Backup Data

1. Insert the SmartMedia labeled “Strata CIX Backup data” which you previously made at the start of this
procedure. This card contains PROGDATA/default.dat file.
2. From the programming telephone enter Program 900. Press FB01 and dial 1 (ALL DATA CLEAR) and
then press Hold (twice). The Strata CIX will restart (initialize) on the new software and restore the
backed up program data. The time required for this operation will vary from a few minutes to 30
minutes or more depending on the size of the database.

14-8 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Data Backup and Restore
Local Update

Step 5: Confirm Software is Updated and Backup Data is Restored

1. When the telephone LCDs display and system dial tone is available, try to log in to the Programming
Mode from digital telephone. (If Update/Restore is finished, you can log in).
2. From the programming telephone check the Strata CIX version number using Program 901.
3. Turn the CIX100 power off for 5 seconds and then back on to reset QISG, ISDN and other advanced
features.
4. Test the system to verify that the new software is running properly by checking dial tone, making
incoming and outgoing calls, internal and external calls and all other peripherals, such as voice mail,
etc., are working correctly.

Data Backup and

5. Toshiba recommends that the SmartMedia card containing the customer data remains installed on the
CIX processor. This enables you to make and back up changes using Network eManager remotely.

Restore
Important! It is your responsibility to verify the system is working correctly after local Update is
complete.

Strata CIX670 or CIX1200 Local Update

The Update process is used to change the Strata CIX software version and restore programmed data. The
new software is first copied from the SmartMedia card to the standby side of the Strata CIX processor flash
RAM. Then the new software on the Standby flash RAM is switched to the active mode and the original
software is switched to the Standby mode for a trial run.
After swapping the software version making the new software “Active,” the Strata CIX restores the
programmed data. If the system functions properly, the trial operation can be set to normal operation; if
there are problems you can switch the original software back to Active.
A CIX default.dat database can only be restored to a CIX software version that is the same or higher than
the CIX software version on which the default.dat file was created.
Examples:
• A default.dat created on CIXR2.0 MF013 can be restored on an R2.0 MF013, MF014 and higher.
• R2.2 MF0XX, R2.1MG0XX (XX = 01~99), cannot be restored on R2.0 MF012, MF011 and lower, or
R1.X ME0XX, MD0XX, etc.

Step 1: Prepare SmartMedia Card with a Backup of the Customer Database

This SmartMedia card will contain a Backup of the Strata CIX programmed data (default.dat).
1. Insert a SmartMedia card into the CIX, format it, and then back up the customer database onto the
SmartMedia card using the Backup Data procedure (see “R3.0 and Earlier Data Backup” on
page 14-4).
This operation writes the default.dat file under the PROGDATA directory to the SmartMedia card.
2. Remove the SmartMedia card from the CIX and physically label it “Strata CIX Backup data.”
Step 2: Prepare SmartMedia Card with a Copy of the New CIX Software
This SmartMedia card will contain the new Strata CIX software file (nhs.prg) used to Update the system
software.
1. Obtain the Strata CIX operating software file (nhs.prg) from Toshiba FYI and store it on an
appropriately named folder on your PC – see “Download and Extract CIX Software” on page 14-6.
2. Insert a SmartMedia card into Strata CIX processor SmartMedia socket and activate the Forced
Format command using Program 908; then Unmount SmartMedia using Program 908.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 14-9

 Data Backup and Restore
Local Update

3. Remove the formatted SmartMedia card from the CIX and install the SmartMedia card into a PC
SmartMedia reader/writer.
4. Copy the new Strata CIX software file named “nhs.prg” into SmartMedia card PROGRAM folder.
5. Create a SmartMedia Card Volume label “PRGUPDATE” on CIX Update SmartMedia card as shown:
• Select and right mouse click the appropriate SmartMedia drive, for example, drive E or G in some
computers.
• Click Properties.
• Under General tab, in the Label field enter label name (in this case PRGUPDATE).
6. Pull out the SmartMedia card and physically label it “CIX670, MXnnn, “CIX1200, MXnnn”” or whatever
software version you are updating to.
Note After completing Steps 1 and 2 above you should have two SmartMedia cards:
• One card containing the CIX backed up database file: PROGDATA\default.dat
• One card having the volume label “PRGUPDATE” and containing the CIX software Update file:
PROGRAM\nhs.prg

Step 3: Update CIX670 or CIX1200 Software

1. Insert the SmartMedia card containing PROGRAM\nhs.prg file into the CIX processor SmartMedia
socket.
2. From the programming telephone enter Program 911, and press Hold. Press FB01 and dial 1
(UPDATE) and then press Hold once. Pressing Hold twice will cause the Update to fail. This will not
interrupt the CIX system operation.
• If FB07-LED is flashing green it indicates that the Update process is in progress.
• If FB07-LED is flashing red it indicates an error. This could be caused by a corrupt or incorrect
nhs.prg file or a defective SmartMedia card. Make sure it is a CIX670 or CIX1200 nhs.prg file and
not a CIX100 file.
• You can now check the Update progress using FB02 (Total) and FB03 (Copied) to view data block
status. Periodically switch between FB02 and FB03 to view the data blocks.
• When FB07-LED is solid green with periodic short blinks, it indicates the first part of Update
completed successfully (2 to 10 minutes).
3. After FB07 is on solid green with a periodic wink, press Hold, while in Program 911. Press FB05 and
dial 2 (TRIAL) and then press Hold. This will change the status of the Standby Flash Memory to trial.
4. Pull out the SmartMedia card labeled PRGUPDATE (which includes PROGRAM/nhs.prg file).
5. Insert the SmartMedia CARD labeled “Strata CIX Backup data” into processor/ SmartMedia socket.
The SmartMedia LED on the processor begins to blink.
The “Strata CIX Backup data” SmartMedia card is the card you previously made that includes the Strata
CIX programmed data in the default.dat file under the PROGDATA folder. If this is not done before
starting Clear-reboot, all programmed data will be lost.
The next operation will take the system out of service for 10 minute to an hour depending on the size of
the CIX database.
6. From the programming telephone enter Program 911 and press Hold; press FB01 and dial 3
(CLRREBOOT) and then press Hold. This will Clear-reboot the system to switch the new software
version from standby to active and restore Backup data.

14-10 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Data Backup and Restore
Local Update

CAUTION! This operation will take the system out of service for 10 minutes to an hour or more
depending on the CIX database. Do not skip any steps or the Update will fail.

Notes
• If CLRREBOOT is activated without the Backup data SmartMedia card installed, the active and
standby software is swapped and the system default program data is restored.
• The Strata CIX processor heartbeat LED stops flashing and all telephones become inactive. After
a few minutes the Strata CIX initializes and starts up with new version of software as active and the
original software as standby, and then restores the backed up program data from the SmartMedia
card default.dat file (the processor SmartMedia LED flashes while it restores the program data to
the processor RAM).
• After CLRREBOOT has completed the new version of CIX System software will be active in Trial
mode.
• If system power is turned off/on while the Active side of flash memory is in the Trial mode, the
original software switches back to active and the new software will switch back to Standby. This is
to provide an automatic method of switching back to the original software version if the new
version is causing problems.
7. Confirm that the software is updated and the Backup data is restored by verifying/doing the following:
• Make sure the processor SmartMedia LED is off.
• Log in to programming mode from a digital telephone. If you cannot log in, it means the data restore
process is not completed.
• From the programming telephone, in Program 901 make sure that the new Strata CIX system
software version number is on the active side. FB01 shows the new system software version
number on the active side, and FB02 shows the original software version number on standby side.
8. Set the Active side of flash RAM from “Trial” to “Normal” as follows:
• From the programming telephone, enter Program 911 and press Hold. Press FB04 and dial 1
(NORMAL), then press Hold. The new software is on the active side running in Normal mode.
• If Strata CIX power is turned off/on before the Active side is switched to “Normal”, the Strata CIX will
automatically perform a CLRREBOOT and make the old software active.
Note The active side switches from “Trial” to “Normal” automatically after 24 hours if it is not done
manually using Program 911.
9. Remove the SmartMedia card and turn the power off for 5 seconds and then back on to reset BIPU-M,
BIPU-Q, QISG, ISDN and other advanced features.
10. Test the system to verify that the new software is running properly by checking dial tone, making
incoming and outgoing calls, internal and external calls and all other peripherals, such as voice mail,
etc., are working correctly.
11. Toshiba recommends that the SmartMedia card containing the customer data remains installed on the
CIX processor. This enables you to make and backup changes using Network eManager remotely.
Important! It is your responsibility to verify the system is working correctly after local Update is
complete.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 14-11

 Data Backup and Restore
Remote (Network eManager) Software Update

Remote (Network eManager) Software Update

A local update starts with the update software loaded on the SD/SM memory card. The update software is
then copied to the processor card RAM. Obviously, the technician must be ‘local’ to the system to plug the
SD/SM card into the processor.
A remote update copies the update software from the Network eManager (NeM) PC to the Strata CIX
system processor card. This process can be performed at a location that is remote from the processor card
or on site.

Update Process
The following procedure details the process.
• Download the Update software
• Backup the Strata CIX system database
• Upload the update software

Download the Update Software

1. Create a software update folder on your PC.
2. Download the update software from the Toshiba FYI website. Ensure that the ‘Remote Update for use
with Network eManager’ file is selected for download.
3. Save the file to an update folder on your PC. Do not unzip the file.

Backup the System

4. Launch Network eManager.
5. Connect to the Strata CIX system to be updated.
6. Select Maintenance > CIX Data Backup.

14-12 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Data Backup and Restore
Remote (Network eManager) Software Update

Update the System Software

7. Use the Browse button to open the folder with update file downloaded from the FYI web site.

8. Click on the Step 2 - Upload file(s) to eManager server button.

9. Click to check-mark the Upgrade and AutoActivate boxes.

4
4

Note Calls will drop during the database restore process. Depending on system size this may that several
minutes.
10. When the Connect to Client screen appears; Wait until the telephones connected to the system reset
(this may take approximately 30 minutes).
11. Connect to the system to verify the equipment version.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 14-13

 Data Backup and Restore
Update from R3 to R5 (or later) SD/SM Cards

Update from R3 to R5 (or later) SD/SM Cards

To update Strata CIX100 and CIX670 R3 systems to R5 software requires new processor cards. The older
processors use SM memory cards, R5 and later processors use SD memory cards.
Note The process requires a SM/SD adapter for your PC.

To backup an R3 database to restore on an R5 processor use the following procedure.

1. Connect the Strata CIX system using Network eManager. Note the MAC address of the processor.
2. Backup the system database to the on-board SM. The backup will be the DEFAULT.DAT file in the
PROGDATA file on the SM card.
3. Download the default.dat file from SM to a file on your PC. The path to the PROGDATA folder on your
PC is: C:\eManager\main\eManager\UserData\Administrator\<MAC address of the processor
card>\SM.SD_CARD
4. Copy the file from your PC to the PROGDATA folder on the SD card.
5. Power down the system and remove the processor card.
6. Insert the new processor card. Insert the SD card into the connector on the processor card.
7. Power up the system.
8. Copy the file from your PC to the PROGDATA folder on the SD card.
9. After the SW update restore the database from the SD card. When using the Network eManager
update procedure this step is automatic. The SD card must be in the processor card for this function to
execute automatically.

Update from R3 to R5 (or later) Local PC

To update Strata CIX100 and CIX670 R3 systems to R5 software requires new processor cards. The older
processors use SM memory cards, R5 and later processors use SD memory cards.
Note This process requires a PC with Network eManager.

To backup an R3 database to restore on an R5 processor use the following procedure.

1. Connect the Strata CIX system. Note the MAC address of the processor.

14-14 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Data Backup and Restore
Update from R3 to R5 (or later) Local PC

2. Backup the system database to the on-board SM. The backup will be the DEFAULT.DAT file in the
PROGDATA file on the SM card.

3. To copy the DEFAULT.DAT file from SM to a file on your PC select the PROGDATA Media Card Folder
on the left side of the screen. Highlight the DEFAULT.DAT file then, click on the Download button.

4. The system will copy the DEFAULT.DAT file to your PC.

5. Power down the system and remove the processor card.
6. Insert the new processor card. Insert the SD card into the connector on the processor card.
7. Power up the system.
8. Connect the Strata CIX system. Note the MAC address of the new processor.
9. The path to the PROGDATA folders on your PC is:
C:\eManager\main\eManager\UserData\Administrator\<MAC address of the processor
card>\SM.SD_CARD
10. Copy the DEFAULT.DAT file from the PC folder of the old processor to the PROGDATA folder on your
PC for the new processor. Note: Network eManager selects the folders to upload to, or download from
by the processor MAC address.
11. Select the DEFAULT.DAT file on the right side of the screen. Highlight the PROGDATA folder on the
left side of the screen. Click on the Upload button.
12. After the file has copied Initialize the processor.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 14-15

This page is intentionally left blank.
Applications Guide A

This appendix contains guides to setup and program specific applications such as Voice Mail, IP
Telephony, StrataNet and others.

Voice Mail Set Up

The following steps/program sequences are provided as a guideline to programming system voice mail
settings.

Analog Ports
1. Program 100 Card Slot Assignment. Assign the PCB for voice mail ports (RSTU).
2. Program 200 Station Data. Verify fields 01~04.
• field 03 Circuit Type – Assigns voice mail to be assigned to PDNs associated with voice mail RSTU
circuits.
• field 15 Display DN – DN to be displayed and assigned to hunt group. Manually assign DNs and
equipment.
3. Program 209 Station Hunting Group. Voice mail group is determined by the hunt group.
4. Program 218 Station Hunt Group Assignment.
5. Program 579 System Voice Mail Data. Complete, fields 01~17.
Notes
• 10 - Central VM Callback – Enter the node ID and hunt group for voice mail. Used for centralized voice
mail SMDI only.
• DTMF – Message Waiting Call Back DN across Strata Net TIE lines. DTMF integration uses the
number that displays in Program 200, field 15.
6. Program 580 Voice Mail Port Data. This is the collection of all ports.
7. Program 803 IO Logical Device Assignment. You can add members to the hunt group. Assign RS-232
port for SMDI.
Note System only provides Code 300 for SMDI. Code 301 is not supported.
8. Program 804 BSIS RS-232 Serial Port setup.
9. Program 309 Direct Inward Dialing.
• field 11 - DID/DNIS No. Code
• field 15 - VM Application Digits
10.Program 318 DID Intercept Assignment.
• field - 11 DID/DNIS No. VMID
• field - 15 DID/DNIS No. DTMF VMID

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 -1

 Voice Mail Set Up

Digital Ports
1. Program the following initial settings:
• Program 100 – Set cabinet slot PCB type to “BDKU/BDKS or BWDKU 16 DKTs without Spkr OCA”.
• Program 200 (Basic tab) – Assign stations to the slot and assign as voice mail. For example,
200~215 (for 16 ports). Set field 15 - Display DN as the pilot number of the voice mail hunt group.
This value should be the same as field 04 - Number to Display in Program 209.
• Program 204 (DKT tab) – Change station’s field 05 to Tone First, 21- Adapter: BPCI, 19 -
Continuous DTMF: Not Continuous. Copy the changes to all voice mail stations.
2. Install and program serial card BSIS in the Strata CIX.
Note CIX Proprietary Integration is required for the iES16 or iES32. A BSIS card must be installed in the
Strata CIX.
3. Install a serial cable between the BSIS card and the Stratagy (see CIX wiring diagrams in the Strata CIX
and MAS Installation and Maintenance Manual, Peripheral Installation chapter).
4. Program 803 - Specify CIX BSIS output port # and set the port type to be “300 SMDI #0” and “RS-232”.
5. Program 804 - Set the port attributes to:
• field 01 - Baud rate: 9600
• field 02 - Parity: none
• field 03 - Data Bits: 8
• field 04 - Flow control: 1
• field 05 - Wait timer: 0
6. Program 579 - System Voice Mail Data. Complete fields 01~17.
7. Program 580 – Set all CIX voice mail ports as SMDI integration.
8. Program Station Hunting Programs 209 and 218

Telephone Station Ports

1. Program 200 Station Data.
• field 19 VMID Code – Voice Mail ID number to send in SMDI and DTMF in-band integration for
forwarded and direct calls.
• field 22 VM MW Center Port – Message Waiting center DN.
2. Program 579 System Voice Mail Data.
• Complete fields 11~15.
3. Program 204 DKT tab.
• field 23 Mailbox Selection – Used for the Voice Recording Feature. Uses the VMID from Program
200 if set to Auto or allows the user to enter any valid mailbox on Stratagy followed by #.
4. Program 206 Phantom DN.
• field 06 VM ID Code – Voice Mail ID number to send in SMDI and DTMF in-band integration for
forwarded and direct calls.
• field 09 Message Center – Message Waiting center DN.

-2 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Networking Multiple Voice Mail Systems

Networking Multiple Voice Mail Systems

More than one voice mail system can be connected to one network node and one or more voice mail
systems can be connected to multiple nodes. Access, integration and message waiting are controlled on a
call-by-call basis according to parameters assigned to individual extensions. There is nothing to prevent a
single DKT from having access to four voice mail systems, each connected to a remote node.
The Primary DN and three PhDNs are each programmed with independent voice mail destinations, voice
mail IDs and record and playback codes. Figure A-1 is an example for networking multiple voice mail
systems to enable Soft Keys. A similar set up can be used for enabling other voice mail features.

Figure A-1 Voice Mail Networking

Call Record and Soft Keys

A station can record conversations with another station or external line in a specific mailbox in voice mail
(VM) using the Record function button. You can replay the recorded conversation using the message
waiting button or using the voice mail menu.
Networking for Call Record and Soft Keys is available only with Stratagy ES/IES R4 or higher.

Step 1: Set up Station Message Desk Interface (SMDI) for Local and Remote CIX
1. Select System > I/O Device, IO Logical Device tab.
2. Enter/Select the following:
• field 00 Logical Device No. = select 300 SMDI #0.
• field 01 Device Connection = LAN.
• Port Index No. = 1~9.
3. Click LAN Device tab -Program 801 - enter the LAN data:
• field 00 LAN Port Index No. = 1~9
• field 01 Protocol = TCP
• field 02 Application Type = Client
• field 03 Data Flow = Asynchronization
• field 04 Server Port No. = 0 (default)

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 -3

 Networking Multiple Voice Mail Systems

• field 05 Client IP 1-4 No. = 192.168.254.250

• field 06 Client Port No. = 5000
• field 07 Read Retry No. = 1
• field 08 Write Retry No. = 1.
• field 09 CallerName Set To CSTA = No
4. Click Submit.

Step 2: Set up Remote CIX

1. Select System > Voice Mail Port Data. Program 580 – VM Port Data displays.
2. Enter the appropriate fields.
3. Select Station > Station Assignments. Program 200 – Station Data screen displays.
4. Enter the Prime DN. For Call Record, enter the Node ID and Pilot number of the local CIX (where the
voice mail is located).
5. In field 20 – VM MW Center Port. For Remote CIX systems, assign message center including Node IP
for CIX Proprietary Integration integration. This parameter enables Call Record function too.
Note Refer to “Voice Mail Set Up” on page A-1 for regular voice mail set up.

Step 3: Set up Strata Net Between All Nodes

Use the following programs to set up Strata Net:
1. “304, 305 Incoming Line Group” on page 6-1.
2. “306, 307 Outgoing Line Groups” on page 6-5.
3. “302, 303 Strata Net (PRI) and Strata Net IP (QSIG)” on page 6-30
4. “102 Flexible Access Codes” on page 4-3
5. “651 Private Routing Plan Analysis” on page 9-34
6. “653 Private Route Choice Table Assignment” on page 9-35
7. “654 Private Route Definition Table Assignment” on page 9-35
8. “655 Private Network Digit Modification Table Assignment” on page 9-36
9. “656 Node ID Assignment” on page 9-33
For all other voice mail set up steps refer to “Voice Mail Set Up” on page A-1.

-4 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Strata CIX BRI Video Conferencing Programming

Strata CIX BRI Video Conferencing Programming

The table below shows the programs required to program a PRI line to ring to a RBSU interface to allow for
Video Conferencing capabilities.
The following may differ in your system: card slot assignments, trunk groups, channel groups and BRI
station numbers.
The following program changes are required once the system has been installed and initialized.

Programs Description
Card Assignment
Program 100
RPTU and RBSU S/T Interface with each two TIE’s
System Data
Program 105
Field 21=RPTU card slot
Incoming Line Groups
Program 304
ILG=n, Field 01=ISDN, Field 02=CO, Field 03=DID, Field 04=Standard
Outgoing Line Groups
Program 306
OLG=n, Field 01=ISDN, Field 02=CO/DID, Field 03=Standard
Direct Inward Dialing
Program 309 ILG=n, Field 01=nxxx, Fields 05 through 10=Dialing Digits Type with Destination
Digits
PRI Trunks
Channel Group=n, Field 01=Equip Nos, Field 02=Nat’l ISDN, Field 03=n, Field
Program 302
04=n, Field 07=n, Field 08=Check, Field 09=Check, Field11=Check,
Field12=Check, Field 19=Check
“B” Channels
Program 320
Field 00=Equip Nos, Field 01 through 23=Check
ISDN BRI Station
Prime DN=nnnn, Field 01=Equip No., Field 02=n, Field 03=Nat’l ISDN, Field
Program 202 04=Point to Multi-Point, Field 13=Check, Field 14=Check
Note Field 02 must be a different channel group for each BRI station and cannot
conflict with PRI channel group.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 -5

 IP Telephone Quality of Service (QoS) Programming

IP Telephone Quality of Service (QoS) Programming

Deploying many IP telephones on a data LAN can have some unexpected pitfalls if the network does not
have the bandwidth and speed required to handle VoIP traffic. To prevent delay, jitter, and data loss for
VoIP traffic and to retain the performance of your other business-critical network applications a network
Voice Readiness Assessment should completed before installing VoIP.
Important! Voice Readiness Assessments are the responsibility of the installing TSD dealer. Toshiba is
not responsible for supporting problems which occur because the network on which the IP
telephones are installed does not meet VoIP packet requirements.
CIX IP provides a number of adjustable tuning parameters dealing with sharing of network resources,
collectively referred to as Quality of Service (QoS). Some CIX IP voice quality and packet priority
parameters that can be adjusted are described below:

General QoS Adjustments

The CIX provides parameters that can be adjusted to improve IP voice quality. These are normally kept at
default but may be adjusted as necessary to modify IP voice quality. Set each item individually and then
test for voice quality improvements each time a parameter is changed.
1. In Network eManager, select IP-Telephony > IPT Data (Program 250), Field 08 Audio Codec, and
select the codec that should be enabled for individual IP telephones.
The G711 provides the best voice quality but requires the most network bandwidth. Usually G.729A is
used when IP telephones are connected remotely.
2. In Network eManager, select IP-Telephony > System IP Data (Program 150), Field 11 Gain Control of
IPT and BIPU and select the desired setting.
3. You can assign a Voice Packet Table to individual IP telephones in IP Telephony > IPT Data (Program
250–Field 07) Voice Packet Table. In Network eManager, select IP Telephony > Voice Packet
Configuration (Program 152) and configure up to 256 different tables (see below).

Voice Packet Configuration Table (Program 152)

Normally the default table settings are used. If experiencing voice quality problems, set each item
individually and then test for voice quality improvements each time a parameter is changed. The default
settings are shown below. The tables in this program must be assigned to individual IP telephones in
IP-Telephony > IPT Data (Program 250) for them to be used by the CIX.

Important!
• When setting voice packet configuration tables on a Strata Net IP network the packet table settings
for each node on an end-to-end connection must be the same.
• Whenever voice packet configuration table changes are made for IP telephones on Strata Net IP
nodes Toshiba recommends pressing the RESET button on the BIPU to ensure the changes take
effect.
Voice Packet Configuration Parameters defaults:
• field 01 - Voice Packet Transmission Interval – 20 msec
• field 02 - Jitter buffer type – adaptive
• field 03 - Jitter buffer length – 100 (smooth out packet playback)
• field 08 - Maximum acceptable delay – 20
• field 07 - Packet loss threshold – 5
• field 13 - Packet loss ratio – 5
• field 10 - Measurement period – 100

-6 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 IP Telephone Quality of Service (QoS) Programming

Priority Control Adjustments

This VoIP feature provides a framework in which voice traffic flowing on the network is prioritized over
other types of traffic. CIX supports two industry standard types of Priority Control: IEEE802.1p and Diffserv
(Differentiated Services). These options should be enabled simultaneously so the voice packets remain
prioritized through the whole network path. IEEE802.1p prioritizes voice packets on the Ethernet (LAN)
level and DiffServ prioritizes voice packets that pass through the internet, intranet, etc.
Important! Priority Control processing has two requirements for it to work accurately. All network
Ethernet equipment connected to the BIPU LAN (routers, switches, etc.) must be in
compliance with IEEE802.1p voice packet prioritization. When going through a network
provider (ISP, etc.), the provider must support the DiffServ feature - contact your ISP for this
service.

To setup priority control from Network eManager

1. Select IP-Telephony > System IP Data.
2. For Ethernet level (LAN) voice packet priority control:
• Enable field 07 IEEE802.1p
• Set field 08 IEEE802.1p. Configuration and set Voice or Best Effort - voice provides a higher level of
priority.
3. For IP level (Internet) voice packet priority control enable field 03 DiffServ.
4. Set field 04 TOS Field Type (TOS -Type Of Service or DSCP - Differentiated Service code point)
Note The most common type used is TOS
• If set to “TOS”
Set field 05 “TOS Precedence type” (CRITIC/ESP ~ Routine) where CRITIC has the highest priority.
Set “TOS Delay type” (Normal or Low) – Low is the best service setting
Set “TOS Throughput” (Normal or High) – High is the best service setting
Set “TOS Reliability” (Normal or High) – High is the best service setting

• IF set to “DSCP”
Set field 06 DSCP from 1~64, Basic setting should be one of the following:
0 = Best effort, The default setting for most IP traffic.
24 = Assured flow (AF) or Controlled Load, intended to classify streaming traffic.
40 = Expedited Flow (EF) or Guaranteed, intended to classify high priority traffic. Used by VoIP
gateways to mark VoIP traffic.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 -7

 Networking

Networking
Strata CIX enables networking of resources using Strata Net Private Networking. Read the following
discussion through before programming Strata CIX networking features.

Strata Net Private Networking

The Strata CIX introduces robust private networking, Strata Net, to the Toshiba family of
telecommunications products. Based on an international standard, QSIG, Strata Net will allow multiple
Strata CIX systems to share voice mail systems and attendants, share features and a coordinated
numbering plan and route calls simply and easily throughout the enterprise. Strata Net is distinguished
from CIX Basic Networking which provides interconnection of nodes through conventional, E&M Tie lines.

QSIG
Toshiba has adopted QSIG as the basis for Strata Net. QSIG is an open, international standard for
networking PBXs. It was begun in 1994 with a memo of understanding between twelve leading PBX
manufacturers. The QSIG Handbook can be found on the web at http://www.QSIG.ie/. The standards were
developed and are maintained by the European Computer Manufacturers Association (ECMA), an
international, Europe-based industry association founded in 1961 and dedicated to the standardization of
information and communication systems. ECMA may be found on the web at
http://www.ecma-international.org.
QSIG is an intelligent and powerful signaling system, providing great flexibility in terms of network
architecture. Any network node can establish routes to 128 other nodes and segmented networks can
grow beyond that. New nodes can be added to the network as business needs dictate. The use of QSIG
does not impose the use of a specific network topology and it can be used with any network configuration:
meshed, star, main and satellite, etc.
Toshiba, like most of its competitors, has chosen to implement QSIG over Primary Rate Interface. Strata
Net supports QSIG Basic Call Control that allows it to interoperate with other PBXs that conform to the
QSIG standard.

Node ID
The basic logical element in Strata Net routing is the node ID. It functions similarly to the address in a
packet data network. As a call is routed through the network, each node examines the leading received
digits for a node ID defined in its flexible numbering plan. After first discerning a node ID, the Strata CIX
then determines whether the node ID is for itself or for a remote node. If it is a remote node ID, the call
goes through a routing process that selects an OLG, manipulates the digits and sends the call to the next
node in the network. If the call contains the local node ID, the Strata CIX manipulates the number
according to the overlap code and delivers the call to a local station, trunk or feature.
The node ID is one to six digits long. The Strata CIX knows that a node ID to which an overlap code has
been assigned is for the local node and that all others are for the remote nodes.
Strata Net bases its routing decisions exclusively on the node ID and makes no attempt to analyze or
restrict the remaining dialed digits. These remaining digits are not processed until delivered to the
destination Strata Net node. This provides a simple, powerful tool because the programmer does not need
to consider local conditions in transit nodes and does not need to fear interference with the call regardless
of the path it takes through the network.

Network Directory Number

A Network Directory number consists of two elements: the node ID and the local directory number. A node
ID is a string of 1 to 6 digits that identifies one node on the network. A network DN may be a simple
concatenation of the two elements in which the complete node ID precedes the complete extension or the

-8 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Networking

two elements may overlap. In the event of an overlap, an overlap code identifies the digits to be substituted
for the received node ID.
The node ID allows a call to route through multiple Strata Net nodes until its destination node recognizes it
as a local call. Local node IDs are programmed using Prog 656 Node ID. Remote node IDs are
programmed in Prog 651 Network Routing Plan Analysis to define the appropriate outgoing route to the
desired destination. Digits received after the node ID are passed on to the distant node without analysis.
One node may have up to four node IDs. A unique overlap code is programmed for each node ID. The
overlap code allows the programmer to control the number of digits to be dialed for network calls and to
create a coordinated dialing scheme across the network. If the network DN is to be a simple concatenation
with no overlap, the overlap code field is left blank. All node IDs, local and remote, must be defined as such
in the flexible numbering plan.
The following are examples of linked and overlapped node IDs.
Linked:
• Node ID = 789
• Extension = 2345
• Overlap Code = BLANK
• Network DN = 7892345
Overlapped:
• Node ID = 789
• Network DN = 789345
• Overlap Code = 2
• Local Extension = 2345
This simple, powerful, logical tool will support large, complex networks. It is the means by which a
coordinated numbering plan can be established across all Strata Net nodes including existing systems with
established numbering plans.

Network Feature Access Code

The Network Feature Access Code is similar to the network DN but is used to access features in a remote
Strata Net node. Features may include routing features, such as Trunk Group Access and Least Cost
Routing, or user features such as Message Waiting and Paging.
The Network FAC format is:
Node ID (1~6 digits) + Local FAC (1~5 digits) + Parameters (unlimited).
For example, 789 9 16175551212 access’ node ID 789 and uses that node’s LCR (9) to dial directory
assistance in Boston.
Given their variability, Network FACs are usually processed without overlap codes. If a node ID with an
overlap code has been established for local extensions, it cannot be used for feature access; a separate
node ID must be established. If no overlap codes are used, one node ID will serve for all purposes.

Digit Manipulation
Digit Manipulation is the term for the altering of an original string of dialed digits in order to re-route a call or
connect it to a specific service. Digit Manipulation is usually applied to the leading digits in the string which
appear left-most in written form. Strata Net uses two forms of manipulation: overlap codes, described
above for inbound calls, and network digit modification tables for outbound calls. The network digit
modification tables contain up to 64 treatments in each of which as many as 10 leading digits may be
deleted and as many as 23 leading digits substituted. These 64 treatments may be applied to any of 64
route definitions.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 -9

 Networking

Traveling Class Mark

Calling privileges, restrictions and priorities may be imposed across Strata Net using the Traveling Class
Mark. The Traveling Class Mark accompanies all calls across the network. When the call reaches its
terminating node, that node uses the Traveling Class Mark to determine whether the originator of the call is
entitled to the dialed facility. The mark is a single information element linked from the following:
• Network Class of Service
• Network DR Level
• Network Facility Restriction Level
• Network Queuing Priority Level
All nodes contain tables to translate between local and network DR Levels, Facility Restriction Levels and
Queuing Priority Levels. DRL, FRL and QPL each require two tables: one to translate from the local level
to the network level for outgoing calls and one to translate from network to local level for incoming calls.
Network Class of Service is an exception for two reasons. First, at the originating node, each station is
assigned a Network Class of Service; there is no translation. The terminating node does contain a table to
translate the received Network Class of Service to a local Class of Service but it adds parameters to the
local Class of Service before determining how to process the call. Those parameters are:
• Permission for Off-Hook Call Announce
• Ability to register System Speed Dial numbers in the terminating node
• Ability to register Class of Service Override in the terminating node and
• Trunk Group Override Access
Time of day considerations are handled at the originating node. If a call originates in a node that is in night
mode and terminates in another node, it will deliver the night mode values regardless of the condition of
the terminating node.

Path Replacement
Known also as Route Optimization and Release Link, Path Replacement makes the most efficient use of
talk paths between network nodes. For example, if a series of transfers around the network results in a
conversation between two stations in the same node, all of the tie line circuits are released and a simple
station-to-station call is established in the one node. This efficiency reduces the number of facilities to be
provided and improves transmission quality by minimizing the number of links over which loss could occur.
Path Replacement applies to:
• Call Transfer
• Ring Transfer
• Station Call Forward
• System Call Forward

Coordinated Numbering Plan

A Coordinated Numbering Plan rationalizes the dialing patterns required of network users and relieves
them of the need to know complicated access codes to navigate the network. The basic mechanism is the
Network Directory Number described above. The combination of node ID and Directory Number appear to
the user as simple extension dialing. The ability to overlap the two components reduces the number of
dialed digits. If it is necessary to preserve legacy extension ranges at individual nodes, a Network Access
Code can be used to resolve numbering conflicts with other nodes.

-10 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Networking

Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

Strata Net generates call records for incoming or outgoing calls from the nodes in which they originated or
terminated. For example, if a station user in node 3 makes an outside call that is routed through transit
node 2 to gateway node 1 for connection to the public network, nodes 1 and 3 generate SMDR records;
node 2 does not.

Node #1 Node #2 Node #3

Private Line Private Line

DN3000

Gateway Node Transit Node Extension Node

The record in node #3 will include the Network DN of the calling station, the dialed digits and the OLG
number and Channel Group number used to access node #2. The record in node #1 will include the ILG
number and Channel Group number of the Strata Net trunk on which the call was received and the PSTN
trunk to which it was connected. The record format and conditions are the same as for a single node
system using the new format adopted for Strata CIX.
Station-to-station calls across Strata Net are considered internal calls and do not generate SMDR records
in any nodes. Abandoned Call SMDR records are only generated for incoming calls over local trunks.
Unforced account codes are generated from the node in which they originated. Forced account codes are
included in the records of the node that required them. Similarly, the node which provides DISA services is
responsible for checking the DISA Security code and for generating the SMDR record. The remote node
and the transit node will not generate the SMDR record.
Plowable buffers are usually attached to each network node and polled by a central call accounting
system. If the buffer is not available, the Strata CIX will buffer records as shown in the table below.
Equipment numbers, time stamps and call type designations assist the call accounting system in
associating records for the same call from different nodes.

Table A-1 SMDR Record Buffer Capacity

System Type Buffer Capacity

CIX1200 (HCTU) Up to 600 records
CIX1200 (HEXAU) Up to 2000 records
CIX1200 (HEXBU) Up to 3000 records
CIX670 (BCTU/BEXU) Up to 1000 records
CIX670 (BCTU) Up to 300 records
CIX200 Up to 300 records
CIX100 Up to 100 records
CIX40 Up to 200 records
CIX28 Up to 200 records

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 -11

 Networking

Centralized Voice Mail

Users in multiple network nodes may use the services of a single voice mail system attached to one node.
The network transmits the voice mail ID (VMID) for remote stations and the calling conditions under which
the call is being directed to voice mail (Call Forward All Calls, Busy, etc.). The centralized voice mail
system can control message waiting indications and provide automated attendant services throughout the
network through its integration with a single node.
Centralized voice mail requires a Coordinated Numbering Plan throughout the network for proper
operation. The Coordinated Numbering Plan allows the voice mail to interact with the entire network as if it
were on a large PBX. Basic operations include:
• Forward to Voice Mail – A forwarded, busy or unanswered extension may forward across the network to
the voice mail unit. Centralized voice mail notifies the voice mail of the source and calling conditions
and the voice mail returns the greeting of the original target extension. Notification of calling conditions
requires SMDI integration.
• Message Retrieval – A user can press the message button on his phone and be directed to a voice mail
system connected to his own or a remote node. The call will be correctly identified as a retrieval for the
correct VMID and the user will be prompted for his security code. The same operation may be
programmed for PhDNs in Station Programming.
• Message Waiting – The voice mail system can control message waiting indications in distant switches
by accessing the remote node via node ID, registering the Message Waiting Feature Access Code and
specifying the desired station.
• Automated Attendant – Automated attendant calls to voice mail may be transferred to stations or
services in distant nodes using the Network Directory Number. If the automated attendant transfers the
call to a busy destination, it can activate Call Transfer with camp-on across the network simply by
hanging up.
Not all Stratagy features available to a single switch are available to remote Strata Net nodes. This is a
result of the local node being directly integrated to the voice mail system. The following table shows the
availability of voice mail features across the Strata Net.

Stratagy Feature Attached Node Remote Node

Message Lamp Control X X
Forward to Voice Mail X X
Message Retrieval X X
Automated Attendant X X
Call Record X X
Soft Keys X X (R1.3 and higher)
Transfer Direct to Voice Mail X X (R1.3 and higher)

Networking Multiple Voice Mail Systems – Refer to “Networking Multiple Voice Mail Systems” on page A-3.

Centralized Attendant
It is possible for one attendant to serve an entire Strata Net. Station users anywhere in the network can
simply dial 0 to reach the centralized attendant. Calls to the attendant are identified with calling number
and name. Incoming trunk calls to any node in the network can be routed to one attendant and then
extended anywhere in the network.

-12 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Network Busy Lamp Field (BLF)

Network Busy Lamp Field (BLF)

Network BLF is an indication on the CIX attendant console and digital telephones that an extension is
Busy, Idle or in DND over different nodes. The Primary CIX can read the BLF information from the remote
CIXs.
In order to use Network BLF, the CIX attendant console and digital telephones must have access to each
CIX by LAN/WAN and requires the IP addresses of each node or CIX. The figure below is a BLF/DSS
networking flow diagram. It shows you the types of connections required between the BLF servers, the
Strata CIXs and the CIX attendant console.

Figure A-2 BLF/DSS Networking

Note The Node ID must be independent of the Station DNs for Network BLF to work.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 -13

 Network Busy Lamp Field (BLF)

Attendant Console BLF

Follow these steps to program Network BLF as shown in Figure 3:

Figure A-3 Network BLF Example

Important! See steps for programming Network BLF from Strata eManager and CIX attendant console
on the following pages.

Step 1: Program Network BLF from Network eManager for CIX Attendant Console
Perform the all of the following steps on the local CIX first, then repeat them on each of the remote CIXs.
1. Create the Node ID in “102 Flexible Access Codes” on page 4-3.
Note If you have already created the node ID using Strata Net, skip Step 1 and go to the next step.
2. Set up the IP address of the primary CIX using Program “916 IP Configuration” on page 10-10.
3. In Network eManager, select Strata Net > Node ID to set the primary node ID. Refer to “656 Node ID
Assignment” on page 9-33.
4. Select System > I/O Device. Refer to Program “803 Application Port Assignments” on page 4-36.
• field 00 Logical Device No. = 400 (BLF)
• field 01 Device Connection = LAN
• Port Index No. = 11
5. Define the LAN Device port number (11 in the example above). Select System > I/O Device and select
the LAN Device tab. Refer to “801 Network Jack LAN Device Assignment” on page 4-39. Make the
following selections:
• 00 LAN Port No. = 11
• 01 Protocol = TCP
• 02 Application Type = Server
• 03 Data Flow = Asynchronization
• 04 Server Port No. = 6000
• 05 Client IP 1-4 No. = Default
• 06 Client Port No. = Default

-14 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Network Busy Lamp Field (BLF)

• 07 Read Retry No. = 1

• 08 Write Retry No. = 1
• 09 CallerName Set To CSTA = No

Step 2: From CIX Attendant Console Set up BLF Network

Important! Complete Step 1:“Program Network BLF from Network eManager for CIX Attendant
Console” on page A-14 before you begin the following steps.
1. Click Administration view.
2. Select the BLF Network Control tab.
3. Enter the IP addresses of primary and remote CIXs.
4. Enter the Port Number (6000).
5. In the Name field, enter the Node Identified. For example, names such as Dallas, Chicago, etc.,
depending on where the remote CIXs are located.
6. Enter the Refresh rate. This is the frequency that the software will poll the remote site.
7. Click Add.
8. Enter the data for the other nodes, then click OK.
Notes
• When you make the directory in the CIX attendant console and when entering user information, add
the node ID as prefix to the extension.
• When you start the CIX attendant console for the first time, a dialog box appears that requires the IP
addresses and port numbers of each CIX.

Network DSS/BLF for Digital Telephones

Follow these steps to program Network BLF/DSS as shown in Figure 4:

Figure A-4 Network BLF Example

Important! See steps for programming Network BLF from Strata eManager on the following pages.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 -15

 Network Busy Lamp Field (BLF)

Programming Network BLF from Network eManager for Digital Telephones

Perform all of the following steps on the local CIX first, then repeat them on each of the remote CIXs.
1. Create the Node ID in “102 Flexible Access Codes” on page 4-3.
Note If you have already created the Node ID using Strata Net, skip Step 1 and go to the next step.
2. Set up the IP address of the primary CIX using Program “916 IP Configuration” on page 10-10.
3. In Network eManager, select Strata Net > Node ID to set the Primary Node ID. Refer to “656 Node ID
Assignment” on page 9-33.
4. In Network eManager, select System > I/O Device. Refer to Program “803 Application Port
Assignments” on page 4-36.
• 00 Logical Device No. = 400 (BLF)
• 01 Device Connection = LAN
• 02 Device Port No. = 11
5. Define the LAN Device port number (11 in the example above). Select System > I/O Device, select the
LAN Device tab. Refer to “801 Network Jack LAN Device Assignment” on page 4-39. Make the
following selections:
• 00 LAN Port No. = 11
• 01 Protocol = TCP
• 02 Application Type = Server
• 03 Data Flow = Asynchronization
• 04 Server Port No. = 6000
• 05 Client IP 1-4 No. = Default
• 06 Client Port No. = Default
• 07 Read Retry No. = 1
• 08 Write Retry No. = 1
• 09 CallerName Set to CSTA = No
6. Verify the DSS refresh time in System > System Timer, field 23 – Network DSS Refresh Timer. Refer to
“104 System Timer” on page 4-12.
7. From each remote CIX, repeat steps 1~6 to set up Network BLF.

-16 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Network Busy Lamp Field (BLF)

Network DSS
When you set up Network DSS, you assign the DSS numbers in the primary CIX first. Then, once you
network the remote CIXs, they will use the DSS numbers set in the primary CIX.
An example of how to set up Network DSS is shown in Figure 5. In this example, if CIX670-1 is the
primary/host site, then CIX670-2 and CIX100 become remote sites.

Figure A-5 Network DSS Example

Program Network DSS from Network eManager

1. Create the Node ID in “102 Flexible Access Codes” on page 4-3.
Note If you have already created the Node ID using Strata Net, skip Step 1 and go to the next step.
2. Set up the IP address of the primary CIX using Program “916 IP Configuration” on page 10-10.
3. In Network eManager, select Strata Net > Node ID to set the Primary Node ID. Refer to “656 Node ID
Assignment” on page 9-33.
4. Program the CTI Port for Network DSS. From the Program menu, select System > I/O Device. Refer to
“803 Application Port Assignments” on page 4-36.
• 00 Logical Device No. = 500 (DSS)
• 01 Device Connection = LAN
• Port Index No. = 12
5. Define the LAN Device port number (12 in the example above). Select System > I/O Device, select the
LAN Device tab. Refer to “801 Network Jack LAN Device Assignment” on page 4-39. Make the
following selections:
• 00 LAN Port Index No. = 12
• 01 Protocol = UDP
• 02 Application Type = Server

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 -17

 Network Busy Lamp Field (BLF)

• 03 Data Flow = Asynchronization

• 04 Server Port No. = 3000
• 05 Client IP 1-4 No. = Default
• 06 Client Port No. = Default
• 07 Read Retry No. = 1
• 08 Write Retry No. = 1
• 09 CallerName Set To CSTA = No
6. Make sure the Remote Node IP address and Network DSS port Number are consistent. Select Strata
Net > Remote Node IPU Address (Program 674).
7. In Program 670, enter the parameters as follows:
• field 00 - Remote Node ID = 17. (This is a Strata Net Node ID. In the example above these Node IDs
are 16, 17 and 18.
• field 01 - Remote Node IP Address = IP address of the remote CIX. Using Node 17 in this example, the
IP address is 192.168.1.43.
• field 02 - Remote Node Port No. = 3000. This port number is the Network DSS port number. The
Network DSS port number can be any available port. All Network DSS ports should also be the same,
i.e; 3000 in the above example.
8. Verify the DSS refresh time in System > System Timer, field 23 – Network DSS Refresh Timer. Refer to
“104 System Timer” on page 4-12.
9. Assign the DSS Remote Node feature key using Station > Station Assignments. Refer to “205 / 213 /
215 Key” on page 5-20. DSS button can have up to seven digits, so Node ID can be included. Before
R1.3 five digits were the maximum allowed in a DSS button.
10. From each remote CIX, repeat steps 1~9 to set up Network DSS.

-18 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Network Feature Content

Network Feature Content

The following is a list of Strata CIX features that operate across multi-node Strata Net connections.

• Account Codes Forced/Voluntary/Verified* • Do Not Disturb *

• Automatic Busy Redial* • Do Not Disturb Override*

• Automatic Camp-on • Door Lock Control

• Automatic Release of CO • E911

• Call Forward • Executive Override*

• Call Park Orbits Park and Page • External Ring Repeat

• Call Transfer • Flexible Numbering

• Call Transfer With Camp-on* • Intercept

• Call Waiting • Least Cost Routing *

• Caller Identification • Message Waiting

• Class Of Service • Offhook Camp-on*

• Conference On Hold • Outgoing Call

• Conferencing • Recall Treatment

• Consultation Hold Manual • Speed Dial System/Station

• Credit Card Calling* • Station CO Line Access

• Day/Night Modes* • Station To Station Connection

• Dial For Quick Launch • System Call Forward

• Dialed Number Identification Service • Tandem CO Line Connection

• Digital PAD • DR

• Direct Inward Dialing • Toll Restriction Override by System

Speed Dial

• Direct Inward System Access • Traveling Class Of Service

• Direct Inward Termination • Trunk Access*

• Directory Number Presentation • Trunk Group Access*

• DISA Security Code Revision*

* Features that can be limited by Network Class of Service.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 -19

 Strata Net Configuration

Strata Net Configuration

RPTU2 PCB
The Strata CIX uses a new Primary Rate Interface PCB that can terminate either a Strata Net connection
or a public PRI: the RPTU-2A. The RPTU-2A is backwardly compatible with the RPTU-1A for standard
ISDN operation. The mode of operation (standard or Strata Net) is controlled by a programming parameter
named “Private Service Type.” This parameter must be chosen in establishing both incoming and OLGs.

Circuits
Two Strata Net nodes are connected to each other by a full or fractional DS1. The Strata Net basic call
convention will select one DS0 to act as the “D” channel and the remainder as “B” channels. This allows
the interconnecting DS1(T-1) to act as a Primary Rate Interface. The appropriate command set is in new
firmware on the card to allow Strata CIX for signal according to CPE-to-CPE rules which differ from CPE-
to-PSTN rules. Fractional DS1s may consist of 8, 12 or 16 channels including the “D” channel.
The most common type of interconnection is a leased DS-1 from a Common Carrier such as the primary
telephone company or long distance provider. DS1s may also be created across fiber optics, Frame Relay
equipment, IP networks or other transport media using dealer-supplied equipment as long as they conform
to the following specifications.
• 1.544 MBPS
• B8ZS
• ESF
Nodes may also be connected directly over two copper pairs to a maximum distance of 738 feet. See the
Strata CIX Installation and Maintenance Manual for pin configurations and other details.

Strata Net Programming Overview

Follow the sequences below to program Strata Net.
Step 1: Basic Incoming Network Calls
1. Establish the Node ID as part of the Flexible Numbering Plan (Program 102).
Note Node ID is located under 01 Feature Name as Node ID (CIX network number prefix).
2. Establish up to four Local Node IDs (Program 656) for the primary node. Each Node ID can have a
unique Overlap Code.
3. Process the digit string as manipulated by the Overlap Code from Flexible Numbering Plan. The
resulting number can be an extension call, feature activation, or tandem call.
Step 2: Basic Outgoing Network Calls
1. Establish the Node ID as part of 102 Flexible Numbering Plan.
2. Use Program 651 Routing Plan Analysis Table Assignment to associate each Remote Node ID with a
Private Route Choice table which will provide up to six routing choices to the desired node.
3. Use Program 653 to define a Private Route Choice table. The table should contain up to six Route
Definitions. The system steps through these Route Definitions in terminating hunt fashion to find a route
to the desired private networking node.
4. Use Program 654 to define a Private Route Definition consisting of an OLG and a pointer into the
Private Digit Modification table.
5. Use Program 655 to set up Private Digit Modification tables containing up to 64 entries. Each entry
specifies the number of leading digits to be deleted from the dialed number and the dial string to be
added as leading digits.

-20 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Strata Net over IP Programming Guidelines

Strata Net over IP Programming Guidelines

Use the following steps/programs to program Strata Net over IP.
1. Assign the xIPU card using Program 100 (System > Card Assignment).
2. Use Program 161 for the LIPU and MIPU/GIPU.Use Program 151 to set up the BIPU.
3. Program ILG using Programs 304 (Trunk > ILG, 01=ISDN, 02=TIE, 03=DIT, 04=Q-SIG).
4. Program OLG using Program 306 (Trunk > OLG, 01=ISDN, 02=TIE/E&M, 03=Q-SIG).
5. Program the Channel group using Program 302 (Trunk > ISDN PRI (IP Protocol).
6. Assign network IDs for all nodes using Program 102 (System > Flexible Access Code).
7. Program networking using Programs 651~656.
8. Setup Strata Net over IP routing using Programs 671 and 672 (Strata Net > Network Over IP). See
example below.
9. Use Program 320 (Trunk > PRI B Channels) to control the number of channels to be used. This may be
necessary to limit the number of simultaneous calls allowed over the IP network. The IP network
bandwidth determines how many simultaneous calls can be supported. As a general guideline one
Strata Net over IP call requires a minimum of 36 kbps bandwidth.
Important! The BIPU IP address must be set in Program 151. The MIPU/GIPU/LIPU IP address must
be set in Program 161. If the MIPU/GIPU/LIPU or BIPU-Q1A has a private IP address,
Strata Net IP communication must be over a Virtual Private Network (VPN) connection. To
avoid needing VPN for this IP connection, assign a Global IP address to the MIPU/GIPU/
LIPU/BIPU-Q1A interface.
10.If voice quality is low on Strata Net over IP calls, change defaults in Program 152 for fields 01~04.
11. After assigning an IP channel group in Program 302, assign the PAD levels to the PAD Groups 1 or 2 in
Program 107 (System > PAD Table) using the “PAD Values” on page 4-28.
12.After assigning the PAD level to the PAD Table in Program 107, assign the IP channel group to the PAD
group in Program 108 (System > PAD Table). Use ISDN trunk as the device type for IP Channel Group
Assignments.

Important! These PAD values in steps 11 and 12 must be set properly to avoid low volume levels.
Important! Stations in different nodes that will maintain tandem connections must have tandem
connection enabled in their class of service.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 -21

 Strata Net over IP Programming Guidelines

Example

Figure A-6 Strata Net over IP Routing

To program the configuration in the above figure using programs 671 and 672
The steps below show you how to setup Node 11 to route to remote Nodes 12 and 13.
1. With Network eManager connected to Node 11, go to Program 672 (Strata Net > Network Over IP,
Detail Info tab).
2. Create Node 12 and verify all parameters are set to defaults.
3. Create Node 13 and verify all parameters are set to defaults.
4. With Network eManager connected to Node 11, go to Program 671 (Strata Net > Network Over IP, IP
Route tab). The IP addresses of BIPU-Qs connected to Node 11 are set in this program.
5. Select Node 12 and enter its BIPU-Q IP address (192.168.12.101) into IP Address Route 1.
6. Select Node 13 and enter its BIPU-Q IP address (192.168.13.102) into IP Address Route 2.
Notes
• The IP addresses used in this example are only examples, check with the facility network
administrator for the IP addresses that should be used in your installation.
• If a remote node has more than one BIPU-Q installed, its IP address would be entered in Route 2.
A maximum of six remote BIPU-Qs can be assigned in each remote node. Route 1 will be used
until all channels are busy, or not working, in which case Routes 2~6 will be used sequentially.
7. Repeat Steps 1~6 with Network eManager connected to Node 12 to set up Remote Nodes 11 and 13.
8. Repeat Steps 1~6 with Network eManager connected to Node 13 to set up Remote Nodes 11 and
12.StrataNet IP Port Ranges
The following ports must be enabled on all routers that pass StrataNet packets.

Protocol
Function Ports Type
Name
Connection Request StrataNet 4029 TCP
Call Control Channel StrataNet 4096 - 8191 TCP
Media Channel RTP, RTCP 16384 - 24575 UDP

-22 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 IP StrataNet Node Setup

IP StrataNet Node Setup

The following outlines the program steps to setup the CIX as a node in an IP StrataNet network.

Program 100 System > Card Assignment — Assign the L/M/G-IPU card.
Program 161 IP-Telephony > L/M/G IPU Configuration — Assign the MIPU/GIPU/LIPU IP Address,
subnet mask and gateway.

Cabinet/Slot Select the MIPU/GIPU/LIPU card from the list

field 01 Enter the MIPU/GIPU/LIPU IP Address
field 02 Enter the MIPU/GIPU/LIPU Subnet Address
field 03 Enter the MIPU/GIPU/LIPU Default Gateway Address

Program 304 Trunk > ILG — Program a new Incoming Trunk Group.

field 00 Create ILG (use any available ILG number)

field 01 Group Type = ISDN
field 02 Trunk Type = TIE
field 04 Private Service Type = QSIG

Program 306Trunk > OLG — Program a new Outgoing Trunk Group.

field 00 Create OLG (use any available OLG number)

field 01 Group Type = ISDN
field 02 Trunk Type = TIE
field 03 Private Service Type = QSIG

Program 325 Trunk > Full IP Strata Net — Program an Strata Net IP span.

field 00 Create Channel Group

field 01 Equipment Number - Cabinet / Slot location of the xIPU
field 02 LAN Interface Number = 1 for L/M/G-IPU, 2 for LIPS
field 03 Select the number of channels to use
field 04 ILG - Enter the ILG create above
field 05 OLG - Enter the OLG create above
field 06 Bearer Service = Speech
field 07 Bearer Service 3.1 KHz = Audio
field 08 RBT on Incoming Call - Enable
field 09 Q931 Protocol Timer - Normal

Program 107 System > PAD Table — Assign PAD levels to PAD group 1.
Program 108 System > PAD Table — Assign IP channel group to PAD group.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 -23

 IP StrataNet Node Setup

Program 102 System > Flexible Access Codes — Program new Node ID Code.

field 00 Create new Feature code for ALL Node IDs

field 01 Select Node ID = Network Access Code for the Remote Node

Program 656 Strata Net > Node ID — Assign local network node ID.

field 00 Primary Node ID = Local Node ID

Program 655 Strata Net > Route Choice > Private Network Digit Modification Table Assignment —
Assign digit modification to table.

Use the default assignment - Table 1 is no digit modification

Program 654 Strata Net > Route Choice > Private Network Route Definition Table Assignment

field 00 Private Network Route Definition

field 01 Outgoing Line Group
field 02 Digit Modification Table

Program 653 Strata Net > Route Choice > Private Network Route Choice Table Assignment

field 00 Private Network Route Choice Table Number

field 01~06 Route Definition Table

Program 651 Strata Net > Route Plan Analysis

field 00 Node ID = All remote node IDs

field 01 Private Route Choice Table Number

Program 672 Strata Net > Network Over IP > Detail Info Tab - Assign Prvt Network Node ID
Assignments

field 01 IP Protocol Type = IPQSIG

field 02 Voice Packet Table
field 03 TCP Connection Release
field 04 H.323 Fast Connection
field 05 Channel Negotiation
field 06 Audio Codec
field 07 DTMF Translation
field 08 E911 Priority

Program 671 Strata Net > Network Over IP > IP Route - IP Address Convert Table Assignments

Node ID Select Node ID from list = All Remote Node IDs

field 01 IPU IP Addrs Rte 1 = IP addrs of local xIPU used for QSIG

-24 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

Software and Firmware Updates B

IP Telephone, MIPU, GIPU, LIPU and BIPU Firmware

Update Procedures
In this section, when a procedure applies only to the MIPU, GIPU, LIPU or BIPU the specific PCB will be
referenced. When the procedure applies to the MIPU, GIPU, and LIPU the term MIPU/GIPU/LIPU will be
used. When the procedure applies to all MIPU, GIPU, LIPU and BIPU the term xIPU will be used.
These procedures provide the steps for updating IP telephones and xIPU firmware. The procedures apply
to IPT1020-SD, IPT2000-series, and IP5000-series telephones and MIPU, LIPU and BIPU-M interface
PCBs.
Note The MIPU/GIPU card does not support IPT1000-series telephones.
Use Network eManager to perform updates. Before you start the update procedure, store the update files
on a File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server. The FTP server can be:
• CIX Secure Digital (SD) or SmartMedia (SM) card
• Network eManager PC using Windows virtual FTP
• An external server (required if IP telephones are not in the same network domain (subnet) as the xIPU
interface)
The methods below are written based on the Network eManager version available at the time of writing. To
perform an update you can use one of the following methods:

CAUTION! Do not unplug the xIPU, press the xIPU reset button, or turn off the CIX power during
the xIPU program update process. Any of these operations will damage the xIPU
kernel software and require the xIPU software restoration process to enable the xIPU
to function. Restoration can only be done at a Toshiba TSD repair facility.

CAUTION! Be sure that you are loading the update firmware to the correct device. Incorrect
firmware can cause the device to be inoperable. For example, BIPU firmware loaded
onto an MIPU, GIPU, or LIPU will cause the MIPU/GIPU/LIPU card to stop functioning.
This caution also applies to IP telephones. For example, loading IPT2000 firmware to
an IPT2008 will cause the IPT2008 to stop functioning. Restoration can only be done
at a Toshiba TSD repair facility.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 -1

 IP Telephone, MIPU, GIPU, LIPU and BIPU Firmware Update Procedures

Download Firmware Update Files

Download the appropriate firmware update files from Toshiba FYI.
To download software for MIPU/GIPU/LIPU and IP telephones go to: FYI > Software (Strata Sys) > CIX
System Software
1. Determine the type of firmware update from the choices displayed.
2. Select the firmware by clicking on the description, and follow the instructions.
3. Save the file (it will have a .zip extension) to a folder on your PC.
Note The firmware files should not be renamed. Use these files “as is” when updating firmware.

Copy the IP Update Files to Network eManager Folders

The downloaded files must be copied to the correct SM/SD Card folder in Network eManager. To locate the
correct folder, you must know the MAC address of the CIX system you are upgrading.

To determine the MAC address

1. Connect to the CIX with Network eManager.
2. Select Utilities > MAC Address
3. The MAC address will be displayed. Write down this number.

To copy the Update file

1. Click “My Computer”
2. Select “Local Disk (C:)” or the drive that contains the Network eManager program.
3. Select eManager > UserData > Administrator
4. Select the folder named for the MAC address of the CIX system (the MAC address will be written
without the “dot notation”).
5. Select SM/SD_CARD > PROGRAM
6. Copy the downloaded update files to this PROGRAM folder.

Copy the IP Update Files to the SM/SD Media Card

The firmware update files must be copied to the SM/SD media card in the CIX.
1. Use Network eManager and select Maintenance > SM/SD Card.
2. In the “Local Folder” section, use the drop down to select “PROGRAM”.
3. Highlight the file to move to the SM/SD card.
4. In the “CTX/CIX SM/SD Media Card Folder” section, use the drop down to select PROGRAM.
5. Click the Upload button to move the files from the “Local Folder” to the “CTX/CIX SM/SD Media Card
Folder.”
6. Now the files will be accessible by Network eManager for updating devices.

-2 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 IP Telephone, MIPU, GIPU, LIPU and BIPU Firmware Update Procedures

Method 1: Update from CIX SM/SD Card

Prerequisites
1. Requires a Network eManager PC and CIX SM/SD card for xIPU and IP telephone program updates.
2. Do not connect the Network eManager PC directly to the Strata CIX processor network jack (see
Figure B-1). All connections must be through the network.
3. The xIPU must have the same subnet address as the Strata CIX and Network eManager – both must
be in the same domain.

Figure B-1 FTP Server (SM/SD card) Network Connection

xIPU Update

CAUTION! Do not unplug the xIPU, press the xIPU reset button, or turn off the CIX power during
the xIPU program update process. Any of these operations will damage the xIPU
kernel software and require the xIPU software restoration process to enable the xIPU
to function. Restoration can only be done at a Toshiba TSD repair facility.

Important! Complete all Prerequisites shown above before you do the following.

From the Network eManager PC connected to the CIX

Format the SM/SD

1. From the eManager PC select Maintenance > SM/SD Card

2. “Force format” a SM (SmartMedia) or SD (Secure Digital) card using Network eManager.
3. Copy the xIPUXXX update file to the SM/SD card PROGRAM file folder (XXX is the xIPU firmware
version level).

Copy The Firmware to the Folder

4. Select Maintenance > SM/SD Card to Make sure the xIPUXXX file is stored on the SD/SM card under
the PROGRAM directory.

Update the xIPU firmware, refer to the cautions on Page B-1.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 -3

 IP Telephone, MIPU, GIPU, LIPU and BIPU Firmware Update Procedures

5. Select Maintenance > IP Firmware Update > L/M/G/B IPU Update

a. Select card type xIPU-X
b. Select Cab/Slot of xIPU-X
c. Select “SM/SD Media Card” as the FTP Server Information
d. The User Name, Password, IP Address, and Data Directory fields will automatically populate with
the correct information.
e. Use the drop down on the File Name field and select the xIPXXX file.
f. Click the Start button
g. The xIPU will be automatically disabled.
h. When the update is completed successfully the xIPU will be reset.

Important! The xIPU must be installed in the system, configured, and connected to the network. The
xIPUs and IP telephones will automatically be disabled while Update takes place and return
to the idle state when Update is complete.

IP Telephone Update
Important! Complete all “Prerequisites” on page B-3 before you do the following.

CAUTION! Be sure that you are loading the update firmware to the correct device. Incorrect
firmware can cause the device to be inoperable. For example, BIPU firmware loaded
onto an LIPU will cause the LIPU card to stop functioning. This caution also applies to
IPTs. For example, loading IPT2000 firmware to an IPT2008 will cause the IPT2008 to
stop functioning. Restoration can only be done at a Toshiba TSD repair facility.

From the Network eManager PC or External SM/SD read\write device

1. Store the update files on the SM/SD card.
2. “Force format” a SM/SD card using Network eManager.
3. Copy the IP5 or DIP update file under the SM/SD card PROGRAM folder.

From the Network eManager PC perform the update

1. Select Maintenance > SM/SD Card. Check that the IPd or DIP file is stored on the SM/SD card under
the PROGRAM directory.
Important! The xIPUs and IP telephones will automatically be disabled while Update takes place and
return to the idle state when Update is complete (if they were in the idle state when the
Update was started).
2. Select Maintenance > IP Firmware > IPT_L/M/G Update. Select the IP telephone PDN to be
updated. Refer to the Cautions on Page B-1.
3. Select CIX Internal (SM/SD) radio button.
4. An ftp Name and Password is inserted automatically.
5. The IP address of the CIX processor (SM/SD card) is inserted automatically.
6. Data Directory box will be: PROGRAM
7. From File Name drop down box select: IP5 file or DIP file
8. Click Start and observe the update status: Getting Updated file\Updating\Finished
Updating\Resetting\idle.

-4 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 IP Telephone, MIPU, GIPU, LIPU and BIPU Firmware Update Procedures

Notes
• It can take from 30 seconds up to two minutes to update the IP telephones.
• If an error occurs, recheck file names, locations, etc., then try again.

To check the IP telephone firmware version directly from an IP telephone

1. Simultaneously press 369Hold buttons on the IP Telephone.
2. At the SELECT = prompt, press 1 then press Hold.
3. At the Select function key prompt, press FB01, the IP telephone will be displayed.

Note The Network eManager PC cannot be connected directly to the CIX processor network jack - all
connections must be through the network.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 -5

 IP Telephone, MIPU, GIPU, LIPU and BIPU Firmware Update Procedures

Method 2: Update from an External FTP Server

Prerequisites
1. An FTP server must be connected on the same network domain as the IP telephones. The Network
eManager PC, CIX processor and xIPU must be in the same domain but it does not have to be the
domain that supports the IP telephones and FTP server.
2. The Network eManager PC cannot be connected directly to the CIX processor network jack. All
connections must be through the network (see Figure 2 below).

CAUTION! Do not unplug the xIPU, press the xIPU reset button or turn off the CIX power during
the xIPU program update process. Any of these operations will damage the xIPU
kernel software and require the xIPU software restoration process to allow the xIPU to
function.

CAUTION! Be sure that you are loading the update firmware to the correct device. Incorrect
firmware can cause the device to be inoperable. For example, BIPU firmware loaded
onto an LIPU will cause the LIPU card to stop functioning. This caution also applies to
IPTs. Restoration can only be done at a Toshiba TSD repair facility.

Figure B-2 FTP Server (External Server) Network Connection

Note The Network eManager PC cannot be connected directly to the CIX processor network jack - all
connections must be through the network.

-6 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 IP Telephone, MIPU, GIPU, LIPU and BIPU Firmware Update Procedures

xIPU Update
Important! Complete all “Prerequisites” on page B-6 before you do the following.

Store the IP update files on the external ftp sever

1. Create an ftp directory and name it CTXIPUPDATE.
2. Copy the xIPUXXX update files to CTXIPUPDATE directory (XXX is the xIPU firmware version level).

From the Network eManager PC perform the xIPU update

Important! The xIPUs and IP telephones will automatically be disabled while Update takes place and
return to the idle state when Update is complete (if they were in the idle state when the
Update was started).
1. Select Maintenance > IP Firmware Update > IPT_L/M/G Update.
2. Select the xIPU card slot (regarding BIPU - only BIPU-M can be updated. Only BIPU-M card slots will
be shown with Network eManager. The BIPU type selection is not required).
3. Select Other (radio button).
4. Enter the ftp user login Name and Password.
5. Enter the IP address external ftp server.
6. From Data Directory box enter: CTXIPUPDATE.
7. From File Name box enter: xIPUXXX.
8. Click Start and observe the update status: Getting Updated file\Updating\Finished
Updating\Resetting\idle.
Notes
• It can take one to five minutes to update the LIPU.
• If an error occurs, recheck file names, locations, etc., then try again.
9. After the update is complete, select IP-Telephony > BIPU Configuration or L/M/G IPU
Configuration. Check the xIUP version numbers to verify they have been updated properly.
10. Press the xIPU reset button for proper initialization.

IP Telephone Update
Important! Complete all “Prerequisites” on page B-6 before you do the following. Refer to the Cautions
on Page B-1.
Store the IP update files on the external ftp sever
1. Create an ftp directory and name it CTXIPUPDATE
2. Copy the IP5 or DIP update files to the CTXIPUPDATE directory (XXX is the IPT firmware version
level).
From the Network eManager PC perform the update
Important! The xIPUs and IP telephones will automatically be disabled while Update takes place and
return to the idle state when Update is complete (if they were in the idle state when the
Update was started).
1. Select Maintenance > IP Firmware Update > IPT_L/M/G Update.
2. Select the IP PDN to be updated.
3. Enter the external server ftp user login Name and Password.
4. Enter the IP address external ftp server.

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 -7

 IP Telephone, MIPU, GIPU, LIPU and BIPU Firmware Update Procedures

5. From Data Directory box enter: CTXIPUPDATE.

6. From File Name box enter the software update file name.
7. Click Start and observe the update status: Getting Updated file\Updating\Finished
Updating\Resetting\idle.
Notes
• It can take one to five minutes to update the IPT.
• If an error occurs, recheck file names, locations, etc., then try again.
To check the IP telephone firmware version directly from an IP telephone
1. Simultaneously press the 369Hold buttons on the IP Telephone.
2. At the SELECT = prompt, press 1 then press Hold
3. At the Select function key prompt, press FB01, the IP telephone will be displayed.
4. To exit this mode, go off and on hook.

Update From an FTP Directory on the Network eManager PC

Prerequisites
1. Install the “File Transfer Protocol (FTP) Service” component under “Internet Information Services” on
the eManager PC. This is not installed by default when installing IIS in Windows XP or 2000. See “To
create a Virtual FTP directory on the Network eManager PC” below.
2. Create an FTP virtual directory and path to C:\CTX\eManager\CTXIPUPDATE. The drive letter must
be the drive on which Network eManager is installed. This can be done automatically by running the
“CreateFTPVdir” executable file provided by Toshiba. See “To create a Virtual FTP directory on the
Network eManager PC” below.

To create a Virtual FTP directory on the Network eManager PC

Setup the Virtual FTP server function on the Network eManager PC for IP Updates. These procedures
were written using Microsoft Windows XP, there may be some variance when using Windows 2000.
1. Install the MS Windows component FTP on your PC.

Using the Windows XP or 2000 professional installation CR-ROM, install the FTP Service on the
Network eManager PC. To verify FTP Service is installed, it should be located under: Control Panel >
Administrative Tools > Internet Information Services (IIS).
2. Go to CTXIpScripts and run “CreateFTPdir.” This creates a virtual directory.

To get the “CreateFTPVdir” file go to C:\ctx\eManager\CTXIpScripts.

Download the IP Firmware files and store them on the Network eManager PC
1. Download the appropriate firmware update files from TSD FYI, click Technical Services > Software
(Strata Systems) > CTX IP Firmware.
2. Copy the firmware update files to the CTXIPUPDATE folder on the eManager PC
(C:\ctx\eManager\CTXIPUPDATE\. These files will be accessed during the IP update processes.
Notes
• Make sure the Network eManager PC is not connected directly to the CIX processor network jack (see
the figure below).

Make all connections through the network (see the figure below).
• Make sure the IP Telephones have the same subnet address as the CIX and Network eManager - both
must be in the same domain.

-8 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 IP Telephone, MIPU, GIPU, LIPU and BIPU Firmware Update Procedures

CAUTION! Do not unplug the xIPU, press the xIPU reset button or turn off the CIX power during
the xIPU program update process. Any of these operations will damage the xIPU
kernel software and require the BIPU software restoration process to allow the xIPU to
function.

Figure B-3 FTP Server (Network eManager PC) Network Connection

Important! Complete all “Prerequisites” on page B-8 before you do the following. Refer to the cautions
“Be sure that you are loading the update firmware to the correct device. Incorrect firmware
can cause the device to be inoperable. For example, BIPU firmware loaded onto an MIPU,
GIPU, or LIPU will cause the MIPU/GIPU/LIPU card to stop functioning. This caution also
applies to IP telephones. For example, loading IPT2000 firmware to an IPT2008 will cause
the IPT2008 to stop functioning. Restoration can only be done at a Toshiba TSD repair
facility.” on page B-1.

Copy the xIPUXXX file into the Network eManager PC CTXIPUPDATE directory.

Notes
• The directory location should be C:\Ctx\WinAdmin\CTXIPUPDATE. The drive letter must be
the drive on which Network eManager is installed.
• (XXX in the xIPU file name is the xIPU firmware version level).
From the Network eManager PC perform the xIPU update
Important! The xIPUs and IP telephones will automatically be disabled while Update takes place and
return to the idle state when Update is complete (if they were in the idle state when the
Update was started).
1. Select Maintenance > IP Firmware Update > L/M/G/B IPU Update.
2. Select the xIPU card slot(s).
3. Select Local eManager (radio button).
4. Enter the Windows User login Name and Password.
Note If in doubt, create a new Window logon User Name and password and use it in Step 5.

5. The IP address of the Network eManager PC is inserted automatically.

6. Select to update xIPUs one at a time or simultaneously.
7. Data Directory will be: CIXIPUPDATE. From File Name drop down box select: xIPUXXX

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 -9

 IP Telephone, MIPU, GIPU, LIPU and BIPU Firmware Update Procedures

IPT20X0 and IPT2008 Update

Important! Complete all “Prerequisites” on page B-1 before you do the following.

From the Network eManager PC

Copy the DIPXXXX update file to the SM/SD card PROGRAM folder (XXXX is the IP Telephone
firmware version level).

From the Network eManager PC perform the update

Important! The MIPU/GIPU/LIPUs and IP telephones will automatically be disabled while Update takes
place and return to the idle state when Update is completed.
1. Select Maintenance > SM/SD Card. Verify that the DIPXXXX file is stored on the SM card under the
PROGRAM directory.
2. Select Maintenance > IP Firmware Update > IPT_L/M/G Update
3. Select Cab / Slot of the LIPU that controls the telephones to be updated.
4. In IPT PDN field highlight the PDN(s) to be updated.
5. Click the Select IPT(s) button.
6. In the FTP Server Information section:
a. Select the SM/SD Media Card.
b. The User Name, Password, IP Address, and Data Directory will automatically populate with the
correct information.
c. Use the File Name drop down to select the file for the IPT type (20X0 or 2008).
d. Click Start.
e. The telephone will automatically disable and you will observe the update status: Getting Updated
file\Updating\Finished Updating\Resetting\idle.
f. After the upgrade is successful, the telephone will reset and be available for use.

Note It can take 30 seconds to 2 minutes to update the IP telephone. If an error occurs, recheck file
names, locations etc. and try again.
.
7. Select IP-Telephony > IPT Data, field 09 to check the IP telephone version number to verify that all IP
telephones have been updated properly.

To check the IP telephone firmware version directly from an IPT20X0 telephone

1. Simultaneously press 369Hold buttons on the IPT20X0 Telephone.
2. At the SELECT = prompt, press 1 then press Hold.
3. At the Select function key prompt, press FB01, the IP telephone information will be displayed.

To check the IP telephone firmware version directly from an IPT2008 telephone

1. Simultaneously press 369Hold buttons on the IP Telephone.
2. Select: “Term Info”
3. The IP telephone information will be displayed

Note The Network eManager PC cannot be connected directly to the CIX processor network jack. All
connections must be through the network.

-10 Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

Index

A D

Index
account codes, 9-28 data backup, 14-1, 14-4
ACD Data Import / Export, 2-49
Dongle, 3-37 DID/DNIS Assignments, 2-49
advisory message default code table, 4-42 Network Calling Number Upload, 2-60
Alarm Control, 10-17 date adjust code, 4-7
attendant, 6-27 default feature access codes, 1-11
auto-programming to start-up, 1-1 destination
DR screening, 9-24
B restriction, 9-27
backup, 14-1, 14-4 restriction - DRL, 9-26
BIOU, 1-2 restriction overview, 9-6
BLF restriction/least cost routing, 9-6
attendant console, A-14 device table, 4-38
Digital Telephones, A-15 dial number plan, 4-2
network, A-13 Dial-up connection, 2-62
DID, 5-16
C digit manipulation, A-9
call control, 6-26 directory number, 6-26
call forward, 6-26 directory number sub-parameters, 6-29
activation, 6-43 DIT, 5-14
no answer timer, 4-12 door lock, 6-26
override, 4-9 DR guide page, 9-10
call pickup, 6-26, 6-41 DR Class of Service Setup, 9-11
caller ID, 5-11 DR Dialing Setup, 9-10
CIX DR Digit Table Setup, 9-10
processor NIC interface TCP/IP, 1-9 DSS - network, A-17
program for the first time, 1-11 DTMF version, 13-7
release level, 13-7
system requirements, 1-11 E
CIX Sysem Licenses, 3-26 emergency call destination assignment, 7-3
CO line, 1-3, 6-26 error log, 11-1
CO lines sub-parameters, 6-29 event trace control, 11-2
community name, 10-12 event trace side change, 13-11
component status/control, 11-4 external devices, 9-47
copy, 6-26
country code, 13-7 F
credit card calling, 9-10 FB00 parameters, 13-3
cross copy, 6-26~6-27 feature button pattern assignments
10 button table, 6-23
14 button table, 6-24

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 IN-I

 Index
H~P

20 button table, 6-23 start/stop/store trace date, 11-1

file information, 10-11 make busy control, 13-16
flexible access codes, 4-3 mapping, 9-37
FTP MAS Licenses, 3-29
external, 8-34 memory access operation, 11-4
user accounts, 10-11 multiple call group, 6-42, 6-44
music on hold, 4-34
H
holidays, 9-23 N
hunt group, 6-35 Network Calling Number Upload, 2-60
network directory number, A-8
I network DN table assignment, 9-38
I/O device, 4-36 Network eManager
initial setup, 1-1 Installation Procedures, 2-2
installed equipment ID, 13-7 System Requirements, 2-7
integration, A-2 network feature access code, A-9
intercept, 5-3 networking, A-8
IP call record and soft keys, A-3
configuration, 13-18 centralized attendant, A-12
Mobility Feature Administration, 8-31 centralized voice mail, A-12
Mobility Programming, 8-30, 8-32 multiple voice mail systems, A-3
Port Over Provisioning, 8-30 node ID, A-8
telephone update, B-4 numerical programming listing, 13-4
xIPU Update, B-3
IPT program update, 8-36 O
ISDN off-hook, 13-2
bearer capability, 6-52 one touch, 6-27
trunk trace, 13-11 one touch button, 6-27

L P
LCR PAD
Assignment, 9-16 group device types, 4-31
Dialing Setup, 9-14 park page, 6-26
Guide Page, 9-13 pickup group, 6-41
Route Plan Setup, 9-14 private route
screening, 9-24 choice definition, 9-35
time zones, 9-23 Processors, i-ix
License product ID, 13-7
Activate, 10-15 programming
Control, 10-14 numerical listing, 13-4
Information, 10-15 parameters, 13-2
Issue, 10-14 sub-parameters, 13-3
Licenses Programs
ACD Dongle, 3-20, 3-37 100 card slot assignment, 4-1
CIX System, 3-26 102 flexible access codes, 4-3, 9-14
Code Generation, 3-2 102 flexible numbering plan, 4-4
Display Screen, 3-50 103 class of service, 4-9, 9-11, 9-15
MAS, 3-10, 3-29 104 system timers, 4-12
System, MAS, ACD, 3-1 105 system data, 4-15, 9-11
106 day/night mode of week mapping, 4-26
M 107 PAD table assignment, 4-29
MAC address, 13-13 108 PAD group assignment, 4-31
maintenance, 11-1 109 music on hold, 4-34
error log, 11-1 110 password assignment, 4-33

IN-II Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Index
P~P

111 destination restriction level, 9-10, 9-27 327 SIP trunk service kind assign, 5-50
112 day/night mode calendar, 4-25 328 SIP trunk service assign, 5-55
113 day/night mode daily schedule, 4-27 329 SIP URI Assignment, 5-56
114 PAD conference table assignment, 4-32 400 emergency call destination assignment, 7-3
115 advisory messages, 4-42 404 attendant group assignment, 7-1
116 data initialize, 4-43 500/504 system call forward assign, 4-21
117 public dial plan digit analysis, 4-8, 9-10, 9-14 501 system speed dial assignment, 4-23
120 tenant data assignment, 4-44, 10-19 502 terminal paging group assignment, 6-39
121 automatic day light savings time change, 10-4 503 paging devices group assignment, 9-53
150 system IP data assignment, 8-6 506 verified account codes, 9-30
151 BIPU configuration, 8-10 507, 573 door phone assignment, 9-47
152 voice packet config table assign, 8-11 508 door lock control assignment, 9-50
161 LIPU configuration, 8-13 509 DR override by system speed dial, 9-11, 9-31

Index
200 station data, 5-46, 8-6, 8-17, 9-11, 9-15 510 COS override assignment, 9-11, 9-32
200, 201, 203 station data, 6-1 512 SMDR for system assignment, 9-43
202 ISDN BRI station, 6-48 513 SMDR for ILG assignment, 9-44
204 DKT parameters, 6-16 514 SMDR for OLG assignment, 9-45
205 DKT feature keys, 6-26 515 view BIOU control relay assignment, 9-52
206 phantom DN, 6-33 516 station speed dial, 6-46
208 timer, station, 6-31 517 multiple call group, 6-44
209 station hunting groups, 6-35 518 multiple calling members assignment, 6-45
210 group call pickup, 6-41 520 LCR local route plan assignment, 9-16
213 ADM feature keys, 6-26 520 LCR local route plan assignments, 9-14
214 DSS console assignment, 6-25 521 LCR route plan digit analysis assign, 9-14,
215 DSS feature keys, 6-26 9-17
216 emergency ringdown assignment, 6-32 522 LCR exception number route plan, 9-14, 9-18
217 ISDN station data, 6-52 523 LCR route plan schedule assign, 9-14, 9-21
218 station hunt group assignment, 6-37 524 route table to route def assign, 9-14, 9-19
219 network DSS notify data delete, 9-39 525 LCR route definition assignment, 9-14, 9-20
250 station IP data assignment, 8-17 526 modified digits table assignment, 9-14, 9-20
260 full IP station assignment, 8-21 527 LCR holiday table assignment, 9-15, 9-23
300, 301 trunk assignment, 5-7 528 LCR days of the week assignments, 9-15
302, 303 PRI and IP QSIG, 5-30 528 LCR public day of week mapping table, 9-22
304 incoming line group assignment, 5-2 529 LCR route plan time zone assign, 9-15, 9-23
304, 305 incoming line group assignment, 5-1 530 DR LCR screen table assign, 9-10, 9-14, 9-24
306 outgoing line group assignment, 9-11 531 DR screening table for OLG, 9-10, 9-25
306, 307 outgoing line group assignment, 5-5 532 DR table allow/deny definition, 9-10, 9-26
308 trunk timer, 5-12 533 DR level table assignment, 9-10, 9-26
309, 312 direct inward dialing, 5-16 534 DR level exception table assignment, 9-10
310 DIT assignment, 5-14 534 DRL exception table assignment, 9-27
311 DISA security codes, 5-22 540, 541 pilot DN assignment, 9-1
313 caller ID, 5-11 550 Enhanced 911 Emergency Call Group, 9-54
315 T1 trunk card, 5-24 570 account code digit length, 9-29
316 shared D channel, 5-39 571 exception numbers-forced account code, 9-30
317 ISDN BRI trunk, 5-26 576 door phone night ring over external page, 9-49
318 DID intercept assignment, 5-19 577 caller history, 9-46
319 intercept treatment, 5-23 579 system voice mail data, 9-3
320 B channel, 5-37 580 voice mail port data, 9-5
321 calling number identification, 5-41 650 behind centrex assignment, 9-10, 9-46
322 called number table, 5-42 651 private route plan analysis table assign, 9-34
323 CBC service, 5-35 653 private route choice table assignment, 9-35
324 CBC time zones, 5-37 654 private route definition table assignment, 9-35
325 strata net IP trunk assignment, 5-47 655 private digit modification table assign, 9-36
326 SIP trunk assignment, 5-49 656 node ID assignment, 9-33

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 IN-III

 Index
Q~T

657 network COS mapping table assignment, 9-37 T1 trunk, 1-15

658 network DRL mapping table, 9-38 Setup Wizards
658/659/660 network DRL mapping tables, 9-38 multiple DN assignment, 6-54
661 network DN table assignment, 9-38 PDN range, 6-54
670 remote node data assignment, 9-34 trunk DID/DNIS, 5-43
671 IP address conversion table, 9-40 VMID range, 6-55
672, 673 node ID detail information, 9-41 SmartMedia, 8-34
674 Remote Node IPU IP Address, 8-29 card, 10-5
801 network jack LAN device assignments, 4-39 format/unmount, 13-12
803 SMDR SMDI CTI port assignments, 4-36 restoring data, 13-5
804 BSIS RS-232 serial port setup, 4-41 SmartMedia directories, 10-7
900 CTX restart, 10-2 SMDR, 9-43
900 series programs, 13-5 software version, 13-7
900 system initialize, 13-5 speed dial, 4-23, 6-46
901 display version, 10-3, 13-6 Stand-Alone SES Systems, 2-70
902 set time and date, 10-4, 13-8 start/stop/store trace data, 11-1
903 event trace control, 11-3, 13-8 station
904 ISDN trace location, 11-3, 13-10 PDN, 1-3
905 all ISDN trunk trace, 13-11 PDN selective copy, 6-15
906 event trace side change, 11-4, 13-11 speed dial, 6-46
907 system admin log, 13-12 Strata Net
908 format/unmount smartmedia, 13-12 configuration, A-20
908 smart media, 10-5 IP node setup, A-23
909 MAC address, 10-13, 13-13 over IP, A-21
910 data backup, 13-14 private networking, A-8
911 program update, 13-15 programming overview, A-20
911 remote program update, 10-8 QSIG over IP, 9-40
912 make busy control, 13-16 system
913 license issue, 10-14 admin log, 13-12
914 license activate, 10-15 call forward, 4-21
915 regional selection, 10-3, 13-17 date, 4-4
916 IP configuration, 10-10, 13-18 initialize, 13-5
919/920 alarm control, 10-17~10-18 integration, A-2
921 traffic measurement, 10-19 speed dial, 4-23
922 specified traffic reports, 10-21 time, 4-4
IPT program update, 8-36
xIPU program update, 8-33 T
table views, 2-47
Q Centrex/PBX screening table view, 9-27
QSIG, 5-2, 5-5~5-6, 5-33, A-8 DID/DNIS, 5-25
DRL table view, 9-27
R PDN table view, 6-47
regional selection, 13-17 station speed dial table view, 6-47
Remote Update procedure, 14-4 system call forward table view, 4-23
Restore Feature, 14-3 system speed dial table view, 4-24
route define, 9-19 telephone button commands
route schedule, 9-21 programming sub-parameters, 13-2
telephone button overview, 13-1
S tenant data, 4-44, 10-19
service, 5-22 time adjust code, 4-7
setup time and date, 13-8
analog trunk, 1-14 tools and profile
ISDN PRI, 1-15~1-16 download, 12-1
station, 1-14 trace functions, 11-1

IN-IV Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10

 Index
U~X

trap IP setup, 10-22

traveling class mark, A-10
trunk timer, 5-12

U
Update
CIX SmartMedia card - xIPU, IP tel., B-3
CIX100, CIX200, CIX670, CIX1200, 14-7
external FTP server - xIPU, IP tel., B-6
FTP directory, B-8
local update, 14-5
program update, 13-15
Remote for R4, 10-8

Index
remote update, 10-8
Update from R3 to R5 (or later)
Local PC, 14-14
SD/SM Cards, 14-14

V
version code, 13-7
voice mail, 6-26, A-1
voice mail call monitor, 4-7

X
xIPU program update, 8-33

Strata CIX Programming Vol.1 06/10 IN-V

THIS IS THE LAST PAGE OF THE DOCUMENT.